Home

HIPS and SIPS User Guide

1. 0000 0c eee eee 204 Attribute Layer Properties 2020 eee 206 Bounding Polygon Properties 0055 213 Vertical Reference System 0 00 cece eee eee 215 Vertical Reference System Editor 215 Editing the Vertical Reference database 217 Deleting entries 00 00 ee 217 BASE Surface Commands 000 cece eee eee 218 OPC rappera eve eee a i sew ebeee ter ou meee 218 Delete 0 0 eee 218 Add to BASE SUNMGG sertce ag ie hau ak eo ee aed 218 Remove From BASE Surface 000000 219 Add Layer so asa eta hemes ea eee eee Ga teteks Rees ees 219 Recompute surface vad eecce oy eee eat ens doxe wed wees 221 Interpolate BASE Surface 0 0000 222 Finalize BASE SuMaC is c20300s28 e0eeeaseesoeeasaos 224 OT MUN a ie Scone AS Se ew Ns se Soleo ck Wicca ach aa e 226 Difference SurfaceS 00 cece eee 229 Compute Surface Statistics 0 0 000055 232 Export Histogram to Image 0 eee 234 Export Statistics to ASCII n anaana 0 020000 0 000 237 BASE Surface QC Report 0200 eee ee 238 Group multiple surfaces 0000 c eee eee 242 11 12 Surface Filtering naonnana 244 CUBE Processing sc iiuw ce ccuiiin thee dee een 247 OVENIEW 22052224296 cen beeen ede pee se keeles DARES SN 248 Generating CUBE Surfaces 0 000 cease 251 BASE Surfac
2. 394 TILING A FIELD SHEET Create Product Surfaces Product Surfaces Product Surfaces 356 resolution A Product Surface is a shoal biased surface that can be used for creating more cartographically correct contours for navigation aids for example Electronic Navigational Charts The Product Surface is created from a finalized BASE surface t is down sampled so that some of the finer surface details are no longer visible while the shoals are preserved This surface can be used to directly generate contours and selected soundings instead of generating contours or selected soundings from tiles Process A Product Surface is created through the process of 3D Double Buffering This process smooths the surface to reduce clutter and highlight significant shoals Double buffering is like rolling a ball over the surface at an interval determined by the surface s node resolution The radius of the ball is determined from the chart scale radius 1 100 of chart scale As the ball is rolled over the surface the surface is smoothed but the shoals are retained Radius 1 100 of chart scale Rolling ball Product surface BASE Surface Defocusing This optional process can also be applied to the generalization process Defocusing spreads each shoal depth over an area defined by the horizontal error The process uses an ellipsoid of rotation around each node with the horizontal error as the semi major axis Nod
3. C Auto Populate SORIND and RECDAT S5 Options No Attribute Translation Translation File File Name These attributes can be automatically populated SORIND information about the source of the sounding and RECDAT date the object was captured edited or deleted 1 Optional Select the Auto Populate SORIND and RECDAT check box to have information on these attributes automatically added to the soundings in the HOB file Note auto populating the SORIND and RECDAT attributes can increase save and export times as well as file size particularly with large high density data sets The other S 57 option is to map the BASE surface attributes to S 57 attributes via a translation file The translation file has a BSST file extension and is in XML format The No Attribute Translation option is set by default To continue without mapping any attributes 1 Click Finish CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 391 Create Product Surfaces Sounding Selection Translation file To use a translation file to map attributes 1 Select Translation File 2 Click Browse to select an existing BSST translation file or to specify a name for a new translation file 3 Click Edit to set the mapping for BASE surface attributes to S 57 attributes The Edit Translation File dialog box is displayed Edit Translation File aug 2 TR bsst Available Attributes Mapping Deep Acronym Densit NE Conversion Hypothesis
4. Tool Y Accept Key Pop up lt A gt Menu Tool Edit gt Status Flag gt Outstanding Pop up Outstanding Menu Edit gt Status Flag gt Examined Tool om Pop up Examined 340 Accept Change rejected soundings back to the accepted status 1 Select the rejected data that you want to return to accepted status 2 Select the Accept command The soundings are now marked as accepted Outstanding Flag a sounding as requiring further examination 1 Select the data that you want flag as Outstanding 2 Select the Outstanding command Examined Flag questionable soundings as having been examined and verified 1 Select the data that you want to flag as Examined 2 Select the Examined command Query View information on selected data 1 Select the data that you want to query 2 Select the Query command CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Edit gt Query Menu Tool Query lt Q gt Key Pop up CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Data in Subsets Subset Cleaning The data is displayed in the Selection tab Note When you select data in the 3D View all data in the highlighted area is selected not just the visible data 341 Process Data in Subsets Designate Soundings Designate Soundings Menu Edit gt Status Flag gt Designate Tool Ww g
5. CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Workflow for Processing Imagery Data Workflow for Processing Imagery Data There are differences in the workflow depending on the kind of data being processed in Mosaic Editor However the basic workflow is the same For multibeam and backscatter processing see GEOcoDER WORKFLOW FOR MULTIBEAM DATA ON PAGE 415 Multibeam data must be fully processed and merged before creating mosaics Side scan data must have digitized altitude before creating mosaics For side scan processing in Side Scan Editor see Sipe Scan EDITOR WORKFLOW ON PAGE 50 of the Editors Guide CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 413 Process Imagery Data Processing Engines Processing Engines Mosaic Editor has two processing engines Geocoder Engine and SIPS Engine Geocoder Engine Geocoder processes multibeam backscatter both beam averaged and the higher resolution time series returns as well as side scan sonar data The Geocoder engine has multibeam optimized routines and data handling such as automated gain corrections suitable for normalizing data from specific sonar types with varying acquisitions settings as well as automatic slope correction using inherent multibeam bathymetry Multibeam data must be converted to HIPS format processed with the bathymetric editors Sound Velocity Correction Apply Tide etc see Multibeam WorkFLow DIAGRAM ON PAGE 16 and Merged see
6. Merce on PAGE 167 before the imagery can be corrected in Mosaic Editor SIPS Engine The new Side Scan Editor workflow configures correction values that are retained and can be used to create mosaics from lines selected in the Display window without the need to create GeoBaRs However the option to create GeoBaRs and mosaics from them is still avaiable Corrections which originally were options when mosaics were created with the SIPS engine are now automatically applied based on settings in the Side Scan Editor Properties window 414 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Processing Engines Geocoder workflow for multibeam data Main steps to process backscatter imagery CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide convert data to HIPS edit navigation gyro heave load tide compute TPU etc Merge open Mosaic Editor create at least one GeoBaR using only default corrections create a Beam Pattern correction file using patch test data if available set options for processing e source data type e auto corrections e beam pattern corrections e despeckle strength create GeoBaRs applying desired corrections edit GeoBaRs to adjust the imagery on the fly generate Mosaics from selected edited GeoBaRs edit Mosaics adjust the display of the imagery and the contributing GeoBaRs Sediment Analysis analyze sea bottom sediment from files generated by the Geocoder digitize contacts in Side Scan Editor
7. Process Imagery Data Sediment Analysis View Sediment Analysis Overlay Use this feature to overlay certain sediment analysis parameter data on a selected GeoBaR Four data points are shown per patch per side Starting from nadir and going outward they are Grain size or phi roughness volume and impedance The data points are shown in 256 shades of blue green red and yellow respectively The data is scaled against absolute minimums and maximums for each parameter type rather than relative to the line s max min for each This makes comparisons between different lines data meaningful The data will be displayed for any patch that was analyzed prior to selecting the line meaning that if you change the data through further analysis while the line is selected the overlay will not be refreshed At this time this overlay feature is only available for one selected line GeoBaR at a time and does not work with multiple lines or Mosaics 1 Open Mosaic Editor 2 Set the View Sediment Analysis Overlay option in the Sediment Analysis options dialog box 3 Click the Analysis tab in the Control window 4 Select a line The overlay for the line is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 455 Process Imagery Data Sediment Analysis Since the overlay is created from the sedimentAnalysis xml file it can be displayed even when GeoBaRs are not loaded 456 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data C
8. Time The hour and minute of the current time stamp for the draft table e Apply Select Yes to apply the table during merge or No to not apply the table 3 Click Edit in the Errorfield A dialog box containing a table with up to 10 speed draft pairs is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Sensors Draft rm Speed m s 0 020 3 000 0 050 5 000 0 040 6 700 0 020 7 600 0 030 9 000 0 080 10 000 CEEE E E 11 000 Click inside the Speed cell and type a speed value in knots 4 5 Click inside the Draft cell and type a corresponding draft value 6 Continue entering as many speed draft pairs as needed 7 Click OK The speed draft table is saved in the HVF SVP A sound velocity profile SVP records the speed of sound at various depths in the water column HIPS enables you to apply SVP data in sound velocity corrections However this procedure is not available for all types of sonars because some sonar data logging systems compensate for sound velocity during data acquisition To ensure the SVP is accurately applied in HIPS the transducer X Y Z offset values must be entered 1 Click SVP 7 in the Sensors list box so the selection is highlighted and the SVP transducer data fields are visible If there is a second transducer then click SVP 2 and complete the same procedures as listed below 2 Type data as needed in the following fields e Date The year and Julian day
9. buttons 3 Type the numeric value by which to adjust the original value if needed e Inthis example adjust the original value by adding 3 5 4 Click Test to see the formula 5 If you want to erase the formula click Clear 6 Click Reset to remove the mapping of BASE surface attribute to S 57 attribute 7 Click OK to save the mapping settings and return to the HOB S 57 Options dialog box 8 Click Finish Selected soundings are saved to the HOB file as SOUNDG features The original BASE surface attributes e g Std_Dev are converted to the S 57 attributes to which they were mapped In the example above the Std_Dev value was 10 In the HOB file this is translated to a Sounding accuracy of 13 5 View the HOB file using the Open Background data command The values mapped to the SOUACC attribute are displayed in the Sounding accuracy column in the Selection tab when the soundings are selected and queried See also VIEW SOUNDINGS IN HOB FILE on PAGE 51 in the Reference Guide CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 393 Create Product Surfaces Colour Options for Soundings and Contours Colour Options for Soundings and Contours The Colour Table Editor lets you colour code soundings and contours for easier display and interpretation 1 Select a sounding or contour layer in the Layers tab 2 Select the Edit Colours command from the right click menu The Colour Table Editor dialog box is displayed Colour Table Edito
10. e Save Images in User Defined Directory This option saves the contact data in another directory Click Browse to select the folder where you want to save the data 6 Click Next Contacts Step 4 This dialog box contains options for exporting contact data to an ASCII or CARIS file 1 Select either the Export to CARIS Map or Export to ASCII check boxes Both can be selected at the same time 2 Type a file name and path to store the contact data after export or click Browse to select the file path both CARIS data and ASCII text files are typically stored in Hips CARIS_ Files 3 Type a layer number for the contact data in the Theme Number field 4 Type a symbol size for the contact data in the Symbol Size field 5 Click Next EXPORT ON PAGE 542 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 505 Export Data Contacts 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 4 of 5 506 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data GeoBaR to ASCII GeoBaR to ASCII Export GeoBaR attributes to an ASCII text file GeoBaR to ASCII Output Options CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 5 Output File D HIPS dataa Fundy47 GEB 39 Maintain PYDL Hierarchy Position Units Ground East North Precision Surface Attributes Intensity C Include Headers In Output a Delimiter Space Attribute Precision Original _1 ntensity Output file location If you are exp
11. CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Statistical Surface Cleaning Creating Tiles and Cleaning Data 12 Degree of polynomial From the drop down list select one of the available polynomials to match the expected complexity of the sea floor The equation for the selected degree will be displayed in the field below See POLYNOMIAL SURFACE TYPES ON PAGE 313 for polynomial descriptions 13 Set the Least Squares Parameters Maximum iterations Set the number of times the least squares computation of the polynomial will process the soundings This re weighting continues until there are no additional rejected soundings or the maximum number of iterations is reached e Full re weighted threshold Select either by Standard deviation The full re weighting of soundings for each iteration can be a multiple of the standard deviation of the residu als The Value field will show a multiple of the standard deviations of residuals in the tile The equivalent confidence values are dis played as a percentage Residual surface value The full re weighting of soundings for each iteration can be fixed as a distance from the surface The Value field will show in units as set by the default Horizontal Length units in Tools gt Options gt Display gt Units 14 Set other options e Use perpendicular When this option is set to True the residual is calculated as the perpendicular distance between the sounding and the nearest point on th
12. CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 191 Create BASE Surfaces Four types of BASE surfaces determine if they are valid or not The hypotheses can be replaced by alternative hypotheses if necessary Using a CUBE filtering tool soundings that fall outside specified parameters can be rejected and another CUBE Surface generated Thus CUBE is used in an iterative process to filter data to produce the best possible representation of the surveyed area For generation of CUBE surface and hypothesis editing see GENERATING CUBE Surraces ON PAGE 251 192 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces Create a BASE Surface Create a BASE Surface BASE Surfaces are created using a wizard You can select specific track lines to include in the BASE Surface or let the wizard select them for you automatically You can generate as many BASE Surfaces as necessary within a field sheet All track lines must be merged before a BASE Surface can be created To create a BASE Surface 1 Open afield sheet of the area for the BASE Surface e To create a BASE Surface for the entire field sheet area select the field sheet in the Layers tab in the Control window e To create a BASE Surface for a single track line select a track line within the field sheet and then select the field sheet layer in the data tree Process gt BASE 2 Select the New Base Surface command Surface gt New The number of steps in the wizard is determ
13. Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands 236 Image Export DPI Quality Set the resolution used to export the histogram The higher the resolution the better the quality of the image when zoomed in If the file will be used in the electronic form with the image being zoomed in tightly a higher resolution is recommended If the file will simply be printed a smaller resolution is adequate SVG format options Width Height The width and height of the histogram in the resulting file Image Export DPI Quality Set the resolution used to export the histogram The higher the resolution the better the quality of the image when zoomed in If the file will be used in the electronic form with the image being zoomed in tightly a higher resolution is recommended If the file will simply be printed a smaller resolution is adequate TIFF format options Image Resolution The resolution quality at which to export the image The higher the resolution the closer the image can be zoomed but the larger the file Width Height Set the width and height of the resulting image in pixels Pixels These fields are controlled by the resolution of the image As the DPI is increased or decreased so is the number of pixels Image Depth Set the number of values applied to each pixel in the image one value for each colour plus one for transparency if using 32 Bit If you would like a transpare
14. Directory D CARIS HIPS 61 FieldSheets Po Browse Existing Field Sheets E Ports sheet sheet sheet2 sheet10 sheet3 sheet32 x Field Sheet Name Scale 1 110000 Horizontal Resolution jo 02 m Depth Resolution 0 001 m EA 7 Type a name for the field sheet in the Name text box Names should be alphanumeric characters only and cannot contain any spaces 8 Define the scale of the field sheet The Horizontal Resolution field sets the minimum distance between two adjacent coordinate values in the field sheet The first time you create a field sheet this field will contain the default value of 0 020 the minimum allowable resolution for S 57 You can reset this field to default to a different value 9 Type a new value in the Horizontal Resolution field if needed The Depth Resolution sets the minimum distance between two adjacent depth values The Depth Resolution field contains a default value of 0 0010 default resolution used in CARIS maps for heights depths Type a new value in the Depth Resolution field if needed 10 Click Next The New Field Sheet Step 2 dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 175 Create Field Sheets Create a Field Sheet 176 New Field Sheet Step 2 of 3 21 x LLDG Zone DIN 180 W TO 174 Mexico Zone ON 174 wW TO 168 Netherlands Zone OON 168 W TO 162 New Zealand Zone DAN 162W TO 156 Peru Zone OSN 156 W
15. False 3 Select an attribute from the drop down Active Attribute list 4 Select a colour map from the Colour Map drop down list 5 Change how tiles are rendered to the Display Window by selecting the Display Level either e Maximum Draw all tiles e Automatic Draw tiles to fit the current extent of the Display window The Colour Fill Tiles check box determine how attribute values are drawn in the Display window Ifthe Colour Fill check box is set to True the tiles are drawn according to the selected colour map Ifthe check box is unchecked and set to False the tiles are drawn in outline only 6 Select a Transparency percentage to make features visible through the tiles The Show Tile Borders check box determines how the border lines dividing the tile areas are displayed Ifthe Show Tile Borders check box is checked the value is set to True and the lines are colour coded according to the colour selected in the Border colour field Ifthe Show Tile Borders check box is clear the value is set to False and the borders of the tiles are not displayed 7 Optional Select an alternative colour for the border lines from the colour picker in the Border colour field CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Data in Subsets Track Progress with Subset Tiles 8 Select the Display tile value check box to set the value to True so the appropriate cleaning status value O Incomplete 1
16. ON PAGE 255 S 44 Values Present only if selected surface is a CUBE surface Disambiguation Select the process used the create the CUBE surface form a drop down list Operation Keep Up To Date Set to True to automatically update the currently selected surface Automatic BASE Surface update must also be set in Tools gt Options gt General CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 205 Create BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces Attribute Layer Properties All of the properties for an attribute layer can be edited however some fields are only activated when others are set For example Sun Position and Vertical Exaggeration fields are greyed out unless Shading Enabled is set to True Properties Colour Map Rainbow C Fase 8 48 18 19 C Fate True vi True gg Fiker C Fase Min Val 0 00 Max Val E Display Draw Cells O Fase E Image Draw Image F True Transparency 0 B Shading Shading Enabled V True Colour Enabled F True Sun Position Az 45 0 Elev 45 0 Sun Azimah 45 0 Sun Elevation 45 0 Vertical Exaggeration 1 E Digits Draw Digits C Fase Engineering Digits Fase veering Precision 1 Lucida Sans Unicode 9 pt Minimum Display Scale 10 000 Suppression Suppression Type E Radius Radius Value 206 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces The properties of the Bounding Polygon layer are different
17. The face of the Load button shows the loading progress Loading can be cancelled by clicking the Cancel button When the data is loaded the button label is changed to Open 8 Click Open to display the data in the Subset Editor windows The image below shows WCI data displayed in the Subset Editor 3D view an ah 4 l 470 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Water Column Data WCI Data in Subset Editor Display options You can set the size of the displayed data points their transparency and colour them by attribute Display Fixed Sized Points Transparency o K Attribute Intensity Colour Map Seismic The default setting for the size of points is set in the HIPS Data layer where the size can be set from 1 smallest to 10 largest You can override this default setting for the WCI data To have stronger returns display as larger points and weaker returns as smaller points while other points in the subset are not resized 1 Select the Water Column layer in the Data tree 2 Clear the Fixed Sized Points check box If you want the WCI points to be displayed at a constant size 3 Select the Fixed Sized Points check box You can toggle this display option on and off while data is loaded Attributes of the WCI data can be displayed one layer at a time Each attribute except Bottom Detection has its own colour map You can change the assigned colour mapping The attri
18. There are no dialog box options for the LADS format CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 113 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 114 LAS LAS files can contain either elevation or hydrographic data Conversion step 6 for LAS data offers the option to invert the Z values from positive to negative and vice versa so that the Z axis is changed to match the HIPS positive down depth convention By default this option is turned off NOTE The LAS data format can store coordinates using the ground or geographic system If geographic coordinates are stored the data file should contain a Coordinate System record stating this fact If no Coordinate System record is found the converter will assume ground coordinates have been used If coordinates have been stored as geographic but no Coordinate System record is present in the file the data will be interpreted as with ground coordinates To resolve this select Geographic Lat Lon from the Projection list in the Navigation Coordinate Type dialog box Step 4 then select an appropriate zone such as World Geodetic System 1984 WG84 MarineSonics There are no specific options for the MarineSonics format Navitronics 1 Select one of the following data types to be converted e Multibeam Singlebeam e Multiple Transducer 2 Select the Convert Side Scan check box to convert side scan data Navitronics side scan data can be imported in 16 bit
19. lidar LADS conversion options 113 Shoals conversion options 122 122 Line Report 275 Load Delta Draft 172 Load Attitude Navigation Data 291 Load Delayed Heave 289 Load Tide 144 tide applied 145 load tide from multiple tide stations 144 load ZDF 144 Lock aspect ratio in profile graph 372 manual blending of GeoBaRs in edit 441 Manual cleaning in Swath Editor 328 map BASE surface attributes to S 57 391 MarineSonics data format conversion options for 114 masking contour lines 366 Merge process description 168 metadata surface export 481 Mosaic export to image 538 mosaic 437 add GeoBaR to 441 create 434 edit 438 lmage classification 431 interpolate surface 442 open early version 438 remove GeoBaR from 441 select for edit 438 unique filename 435 mosaic components edit 440 Mosaic Editor GrainSize table 451 open 416 sediment analysis 446 5ediment Analysis Graph 453 workflow diagram 413 workflow overview 412 Mosaic Editor conflict resolution 444 mosaic statistics 441 mtions sensors in HVF 32 Multibeam Filtering in XTF conversion 128 multibeam workflow 17 multiple data paths connect to 64 multi transducer Settings in HVF 30 N name mosaic 435 naming GeoBaRs 418 Navigation interpolation methods 282 navigation antenna data in vessel file 42 bezier interpolation 281 linear interpolation 281 load Appla
20. the deepest sounding on the Depth layer or highest number on the Density layer The Min Range and Max range values determine the upper and lower extents to which the colour file is applied The Minimum or the range is mapped to the first value in the colour file and the maximum to the last value CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 207 Create BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces Legend options The Min and Max range is taken from the data for the selected layer and can be adjusted For example if the minimum of the range is increased all data falling below that value will be mapped to the first colour defined in the colour file Similarly if the maximum in lowered all data falling above that maximum will be coloured with the last colour in the colour file You can add a raster legend to the display to identify which attribute values e g depths are represented by which colours 208 See also RASTER LEGEND ON PAGE 38 Property Legend Function Show Legend Set to True to display a legend to identify the range of values to which each colour is mapped Location Select the position of the legend e g Left of the display bottom of the display etc Labels These are options for descriptive text on the legend Display Title Set to True to display the name of the attribute layer and units e g Depth m Include Name Set to True to display the full path and
21. there will be a warning message in the Output window and regular heave data will be used instead If you have a SmoothedCoefficients file see FILTER AND SMOOTH ON pace 16 for a sensor you can apply this file during merge to smooth selected sensor data 6 Click the check box beside a sensor to select the appropriate data that is to be smoothed during Merge 7 Click Merge 170 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Merge Merge Process You can view the progress of the Merge process in the Output tab of the Worksheet window The Merge is now complete Other functions requiring geo referenced soundings can now be used such as the Subset Editor Surface Cleaning BASE Surface and others The settings in the dialog box are remembered by the application If a line is merged and then changes are made to the sensor data used by merge the track line is marked in the Project tab with the Outdated icon As well the Outdated field for that line is set to Yes in the Selection tab An Outdated track line must have Merge applied again CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 71 Merge Delta Draft Delta Draft Menu Process gt Load Delta Draft 172 The Load Delta Draft function lets you import your model for dynamic changes in draft and have these changes applied to the soundings during the Merge process Delta Draft represents a change in draft that is positive as draft increases and negative as draft decr
22. with the SIPS Engine 422 create layer of soundings 383 create mosaic 434 intensity options 437 overlapping GeoBaRs 436 resolution 436 set colours 437 create QTC tiles 402 create vessel file workflow 27 Critical soundings protective radius 304 critical soundings outdated layer 303 query 303 Critical Soundings Detection process 298 critical soundings detection 298 CSAR 188 CSST 385 CUBE create 251 hypothesis cleaning 266 hypothesis editing 259 nominate hypotheses 263 properties in Subset Editor 259 D data conversion 78 Data QC interpolation methods 282 data repository 59 decimate imagery converting Coda to HIPS 98 default ellipsoid 55 default options in GeoBaR creation Geocoder engine 419 defocusing 356 delete 437 GeoBaR 433 delete mosaic 437 delta draft loading 172 density creating surface cleaning tiles 315 depth list file 362 depth range files 362 409 tiling by 400 designate critical soundings 298 designate shoalest soundings 342 Designate soundings 342 Designated soundings 297 297 Despeckle in Mosaic Editor 428 Detailed Line Query 274 SBET loaded status 165 Difference Surfaces 229 digitize a profile 367 digitize profile line 368 disambiguation 248 Display SVP as backgorund 140 display colours set when creating mosaic 437 display options sunset tiles 346 Display properties attribute layer 210 disp
23. 1 Query a selection of soundings 2 Highlight certain soundings in the Selection tab 3 Select an Accept or Reject command You can also use the keyboard to set the flag A key for Accept Q for Query R for Reject and S for Reject Swath CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 331 Cleaning Swath Data Update Backscatter Update Backscatter Menu Tools gt Update Backscatter 332 This command updates the backscatter imagery for a line after swath cleaning is complete Backscatter data is referenced directly to the individual beams of bathymetry data After soundings have been rejected in Swath Editor Update Backscatter is applied to remove the intensity values for the rejected soundings from the backscatter image 1 Select a track line 2 Select the Update Backscatter command CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Cleaning Swath Data Flag Designated Soundings Flag Designated Soundings The Designated Sounding flag identifies the shallowest or shoalest sounding in a feature For example in a cluster of soundings surrounding an outcrop of rocks the shoalest sounding among that cluster is identified as Designated The purpose of the Designated Sounding flag is to ensure that the shoalest depths over significant seabed features are maintained in charts and other standard hydrographic products Soundings can be designated in both Swath Editor and Subset Editor For more inform
24. 1 Select the field sheet layer containing the BASE surface to be profiled 2 Select the Profile by Digitizing command The Profile Settings dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 367 Create Product Surfaces Profiles Profile Settings Height sources Height source specific settings 3 A g H11 2010 1 A Colour Density E Depth Name uncert3 Depth Hypothesis_Strength Q Std_Dev Uncertainty CO User_Nominated uncert3 Deep ma Vertical axis label Sample step size Fill type C Smooth _ Lock aspect ratio 1 In this dialog box you can set all the options for the profile or you can select one or more height sources generate the profile then re open this dialog box to adjust settings while viewing the effect in the Profile window 3 Select the height source check box for the layer s you want to profile You can select more than one layer as height sources for the profile Each source that you select will generate its own profile line in the graph Lines with the same values will overlap 4 Optional Set a Sample step size Default value is 5m 5 Set other options as desired See SETTING PROFILE OPTIONS ON PAGE 370 6 Click OK The Profile window opens and displays the message Empty profile line Digitize the profile line The cursor changes to digitizing mode 7 Click once on the surface to fix the anchor point
25. By default the first field sheet you open in a session is the active field sheet CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 179 Create Field Sheets Open and Close Field Sheets Process gt Set as Active Field Sheet Set Active Pop up Menu Hide a surface Turn Off Layers Pop up Delete field sheet Delete Pop up O lose all field sheets File gt Close Field Sheets Menu Close single field sheet up 5 Close Pop 180 To change the active field sheet 1 Select a field sheet in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Select the Set as Active Field Sheet command The icon for the active field sheet is highlighted green in the Layers tab As well the Active Field Sheet value in the Properties window will be set to True for the active field sheet Turn off field sheet Individual layers in a field sheet can be activated or turned off by clicking the check box next to the layer To make it easier to view data when there are many layers or when more than one field sheet is open you can turn off an entire field sheet with one command To remove a field sheet from the display without closing it 1 Highlight the field sheet in the Layers tab 2 Select Turn Off Field Sheet from the right click menu All the previously selected layers of the field sheet are un selected To display the field sheet or any of its layers again select the che
26. CUBE Hypothesis Tracking m Properties Select Surface A CRTR4 E CRTR4 1 Transparency 0 Ww g a A Fixed size hypotheses Show alternative hypotheses Show only selected alternatives Show only hypothesis with alternatives 5 Expand the Select Surface data tree and select a BASE Surface containing CUBE data 6 Click Load to view the CUBE surface 7 To return to the normal display in the 3D and 2D Views click Unload The display options for the hypotheses are listed at the bottom of the Subset Editor tab WIRE FRAME HYPOTHESES ON PAGE 261 FIXED S ze HYPOTHESES ON PAGE 262 NOMINATE ALTERNATIVE HYPOTHESES ON PAGE 263 SHOW ONLY SELECTED ALTERNATIVES ON PAGE 264 SHOW ONLY HYPOTHESES WITH ALTERNATIVES ON PAGE 264 8 View and edit the hypotheses See HYPOTHESES CLEANING ON PAGE 266 9 Update the surface See Uppatinc a CUBE SurFace ON PAGE 267 260 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide CUBE Processing Hypothesis Editing Hypotheses views Below is an example of an enlarged section of a CUBE surface loaded in the 3D View Hypotheses are represented as squares The squares have different dimensions to reflect the confidence level given to each hypothesis These confidence levels range from 0 0 the highest value to 5 0 the lowest value The size of a square is related to the numerical confidence level large squares represent nodes w
27. Default sets all classes to be imported CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Options for Specific Formats Hypack The Hypack format records bathymetry from single beam multibeam and multiple transducer sweep systems It also supports recording side scan data from Hysweep format HSX For dual frequency single beam data you must indicate if the data records in Hypack are recorded as primary secondary or secondary primary The primary frequency by default becomes the selected data for use in the field sheet When converting Side Scan data if the conversion wizard detects records containing 12 bit data they will be converted to 16 bit format Otherwise they are converted to 8 bit data 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 7 Hypack Bathymetry Single Frequency v Side Sco OO E C Apply static draft Device Numbers C Navigation C Gyro C Motion Sensor C Port Transducer Sound Velocity 1500 m s 1 Stbd Transducer __ C SOW Sensor _ HS2 in feet C H52 Survey Date Use the Bathymetry and or Side Scan drop down lists to select the type of data to be converted You must make a selection or the conversion process will not go forward Select a Bathymetry setting to convert data in Hypack raw format RAW and HSX and processed format HS2 from singlebeam multibeam and multiple transducers systems If you are con
28. Export Data Export Surface to BAG Export Surface to BAG o File gt Export gt Surface to BAG 482 Export a BASE Surface to a BAG Bathymetric Attributed Grid file You can save your export settings to a template file that can be loaded and applied when exporting to BAG again 1 Select the surface in the Layers tab 2 Select the Export Surface to BAG command The Export to BAG dialog box displays the fields for General and Metadata settings for the export EE Export to BAG HFA General Band Name Compression Output Type Output Folder Tile Width Tile Height Tie Prefix B Metadata E General Abstract Status obsolete E Responsible Party Name Position Organization Role author El Constraints Legal otherRestrictions Other Security undassified Notes Vertical Datum The vertical datum of the surface Ca 3 Enter the export settings or load a previously saved template file See Export SETTINGS ON PAGE 483 See Save AND LoAD TEMPLATES ON PAGE 484 4 Click OK to perform the export The surface is exported using the selected settings The Output tab shows the status of the export CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Export Surface to BAG Export Settings You can view the export settings fields in two ways In Category view the fields are listed under headings In Alphabetical view the fields are listed in A to Z order Toggle between these views using the button
29. For example Depth Standard Deviation and Mean layers are reported in the units CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands set for the data in Tools gt Options gt Display gt Units Density and Hypothesis Count are unitless 4 Enter a Bin size for the histogram The Min and Max Range values in the Properties for the selected attribute layer can help you set a useful bin size for the histogram For example if the range of values for the Std_Dev layer is 0 to 16 a bin size of 02 m will yield a more useful histogram than would 2m bin size 5 Select a colour for the content of the columns from the Histogram colour drop down list The default colour is white outlined in black 6 Click OK Statistics output The Compute Statistics dialog box displays the input data and the computed statistics as values and as a histogram e The nput section displays the settings that were used to calculate the statistics data set attribute layer and bin size The Statistics section provides the results of the analysis of the data in the selected attribute layer The histogram displays the distribution of the data The X axis is labelled with the source layer name and unit of measure The Y axis contains the count of the data points in each bin or column The histogram below displays the statistics generated for the standard deviation layer of a BASE surface CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 2
30. Pop up Menu Create Product Surfaces Tiling a field sheet Tiling methods There are three methods of tiling a field sheet tiling binning and QTC tiles If you need to examine the data for more detailed statistical information then the tiling option should be selected The process divides the field sheet into four sections tiles and continues sub dividing each section by four until the criteria for creating the tiles is reached The result is a network of tiles covering the data Tiles can be the same size or vary in size Binning splits the surface of a field sheet into squares or bins based on a user defined size Within each bin the shallowest or deepest sounding can be selected This option is less computationally intensive than tiling as there are no additional statistical criteria applied Sea floor classification is a procedure in which the amplitude and shape of the reflected acoustic signal is used to interpret the physical nature of the bottom Quester Tangent Corporation has developed a program called QTC View to perform this analysis The analysis in QTC View groups the return signals into classes which correspond broadly with physical properties of the sea floor The results are summarized in a text file seabed HIPS and SIPS generalizes these results by creating tiles based on the class values in the seabed files Create Tiles 1 Open a field sheet 2 Select the field sheet layer in the Laye
31. Project Boundary Minimum Latitude Minimum Longitude Coordinates of the geographic extents of the Maximum Latitude Project Maximum Longitude Data Extents Minimum Latitude Minimum Longitude Coordinates of the extents of the data in the Maximum Latitude Project Maximum Longitude Project Name of next open project To change the projection for a project use the Change Projection command on the View menu CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 69 Create a New Project View Vessel Properties View Vessel Properties View gt Properties Pop up Menu Properties 70 Vessel information for the currently open project can be viewed in the Vessel Properties dialog box 1 Select a Vessel folder from the Project tab in the Control window 2 Select the Properties command The Vessel Properties dialog box displays the location and creation date of the Vessel file This information is read only Vessel Properties General Project CMHHO910 Vessel FundyRover2 YCF File d CARISSHIPS 7O HDCS_Data VesselContig Creation Date Friday October 23 2009 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create a New Project Set Line Properties Set Line Properties Window gt Properties 1 Menu Tools Properties Pop up General Line Colour Ship track and towfish track lines have default display colours Ship track c
32. These files can then be opened in CAD applications or viewed in HIPS and SIPS as background data To export from HIPS to DXF 1 Open the field sheet containing the contours soundings or bounding polygon to be exported 2 Inthe Layers tab highlight the specific layer for example Contours or Depth 3 In the Display window select the the data to be exported 4 Select the Export to DSF command A Save As dialog box is displayed 5 Enter a file name and browse to the folder where you will save the exported file 6 Click Save The Output window will report the progress of the export and the number of objects exported The data is saved to the specified folder To export selected lines or selected critical soundings to DXF 1 In the Layers tab highlight the Ship Track Lines or Critical Soundings layer 2 In the Display window select the the lines or soundings to be exported 3 Select the Export to DXF command A Save As dialog box is displayed 4 Enter a file name and browse to the folder where you will save the exported file 5 Click Save The data is saved to the specified folder CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 487 Export Data Export Selection to DXF DXF files can be opened in HIPS and SIPS as background data The opened file is listed in the Layers tab as illustrated below a MIB HIPs Data Ship Track Lines 26 Critical Soundings Be Contacts KI Febi6 E CUBEFeb 2 IndexConto
33. This limits the interpolation to holes in the BASE Surface and prevents it from expanding the surface outward from the survey area A copy of the BASE Surface with these gaps filled is then created In the following example of a 3 x 3 Surface node area five nodes have pixel values shown in red This node does not a contain a pixel value This node contains a pixel value and can be used to interpolate a value for nodes without a pixel value This means if you select five or less as the value for the Number of Neighbours a pixel value is created for the node without a value from the neighbouring nodes CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process gt BASE Surface gt Interpolate Interpolate Popup Menu Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands To interpolate a surface 1 Select a BASE Surface layer in the Control window so it is highlighted 2 Select the Interpolate command The Interpolate Surface dialog box is displayed Interpolate Surface Source Surface mar26MOS E Destination Surface mar26MOS E_Interp Matrix size O 3x3 5x5 Number Of Neighbours 6 The Destination Surface field displays the file name of the copy that is created from the original BASE Surface The default name is the original Surface name with _Interp appended to it You can change the name if necessary 3 Optional Type a new name in the Destination Surface field The Matrix Size de
34. To resolve a conflict when you want to select a loaded GeoBaR and there is more than one GeoBaR loaded for the line you can select by the specific source type of the GeoBaR If more than one available GeoBaR is of the specified type then a new Resolve Conflict dialog box is displayed containing only the GeoBaRs that share the source type in conflict 1 Select either e Newest GeoBaR Finest Resolution or e Manual or e Source Type If you select Source Type as the method then 2 Select either Side Scan Beam Average or Time Series from drop down list If you are editing a mosaic and there are a number of GeoBaRs loaded any of which could have contributed to the mosaic the Resolve Conflict dialog will show the option to select the specific GeoBaR used to create the mosaic 1 Select Component from the Method list to select the GeoBaR which contributed to the mosaic CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 445 Process Imagery Data Sediment Analysis Sediment Analysis Use the Sediment Analysis tool in Mosaic Editor to determine sediment type by analyzing the angular responses of data processed in the Geocoder engine When a GeoBaR is created using the Geocoder engine a binary sediment analysis file is also created for the line Sediment analysis is performed over a certain number of pings controlled by the Patch Size in the Sediment Analysis Options dialog box See Set SEDIMENT ANALYSIS OPTIONS ON PAGE 446
35. aD 2 New Project Step 1 of 4 Add a new Project 58 In HIPS and SIPS survey data is organized into projects The default directory for project files is drive Program Files CARIS HIPS 8 1 Data Before any survey data can be processed a HIPS Vessel file HVF must exist This file defines the offset configurations and associated error estimates for each of the sensors which are necessary for creating final position and depth records for survey data If no HVF is available it must be defined before the new project can be created See Create A New HVF on Pace 27 To define a new project to organize your survey data in P V D L hierarchy 1 Ensure that an appropriate vessel file has been created for this project 2 Select the New Project command to open the New Project wizard New Project Step 1 PX Select a Project Vessel and Day Fs z Default o Ly Calibration 1 Bijan2003 Miquelon2007 3 aR plymount2004 TE Portsmouth2001 z SMyp1 Add Project Add Vessel EE nes mn eee Project folders in HIPS and SIPS are organized in a Project Vessel Day hierarchy within a HIPS data repository When creating a new project you can add new Vessel and Day folders to an existing project or create an entirely new project i 1 Select an existing data folder or 1 Right click in the default listing and select Connect to to browse to another folder loc
36. any open surface layer or TIN layer can be selected as the input model for computing GPS tide For details on sounding datum models and a sample info file see GPS Tipe FORMAT ON PAGE 156 and INFO File on PAGE 160 of the Reference Guide To compute GPS tide 1 Select a track line or group of track lines 2 Select the Compute GPS Tide command The Compute GPS Tide dialog box is displayed Compute GPS Tide Datum Model Info File Coordinate Reference System Options Smooth GPS Height C False Antenna Offset C False Dynamic Heave C False MRU Remote Heave _ False Dynamic Draft C False Water Line _ False Water line From Installation Parameters _ False Height Correction 0 Time offset 0 0 Datum Datum properties CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 149 Correct for Tide GPS Tide 150 When a surface is used as the datum model an elevation attribute must be set This can be selected from a drop down list in the Attribute field When parsable ASCII file is used as the datum model but is not recognized as a known format you must also open a info file that will control the parsing of the ASCII data As well a coordinate system must be selected The Info File and Coordinate Reference System fields are enabled so that you can enter this information 3 Inthe Type field select either Single Value or Datum Model as the type of datum to be applied 4 If Single Value is selected as
37. e Ground East North position displayed as Easting Northing to the precision defined for example 360425 000 4770355 000 e Geographic DMS position displayed as Latitude Longitude in degrees minutes seconds to the precision defined for example 43 04 23 03N 070 42 51 89W e Geographic Unformatted DMS displays the position without using hyphens or direction indicators for example 43 04 23 03 070 42 51 89 e Geographic Decimal Degrees position displayed as Latitude Longitude in decimal degrees to the precision set for example 43 073 070 714 e Geographic Degree Minutes position displayed as Latitude Longitude in degrees and minutes to the precision set for example 34 23 610N 119 52 585W Note that for positions in the northern hemisphere longitude West values are negative in the southern hemisphere the South 498 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data BASE Surface To ASCII latitude values are negative For example a position near Portsmouth NH USA is 43 04 23 03 070 42 51 89 A position near Sydney Australia is 33 51 00 84 151 11 43 7 4 Specify the precision for the display of position units by using the Precision up or down arrow button to set the number of digits to be displayed to the right of the decimal point Select the check boxes for the Surface Attributes values to be recorded in the ASCII file Click Up and Down to move the attributes into the order you wish them
38. rm 6 75 Position to Grid Cente gt Offset from gridline mm oo Orientation to grid Parallel ANNOTATIONS Property Description Position Select any combination of Top Bottom Right Left Attributes positions for the annotations relative to the grid lines 184 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Field Sheets Field Sheet Projection Grid ANNOTATIONS Property Description Digits Set the format of the digits used in the annotations The field at the top of the dialog box shows how digits are displayed By default the annotation is displayed in full Thousand Separator uses a comma to separate the digits to the right of the decimal point into groups of three e g 1 004 532 Left The number of digits to the left of the decimal point e g 4 digits displays 4 532 Right The number of digits to the right of the decimal point e g 3 digits displays 4532 123 Format Select a font for the digits and choose to have it positioned above or below the normal line of digits Position e Position to neatline placement of annotation relative to neatline either Inside or Outside the field sheet Offset from neatline distance of the annotation from the neatline in millimetres Position to Grid Choose Above Left Centre or Below Right Offset from grid line the distance between the annotation and the grid line in millimetres Orientation
39. the Position Units field in the previous dialog box 2 Select the units for position data 3 Click Next EXPORT ON PAGE 542 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 537 Export Data Mosaic To Image Mosaic To Image Please see SurFace To Imace on pace 501 for the description of this export process 538 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Sediment Analysis to ASCII Sediment Analysis to ASCII Export the results of Sediment Analysis done in Mosaic Editor You can select which parameters to export and the order they will be displayed as well the type of delimiter to be used in the ASCII file Results can be exported for one line or for multiple lines CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 4 Analysis Parameters C Line Name C Include Headers In Output C Patch J Delimiter C Side C Sediment Type E Space C Confidence O Comma C Confidence String C Analysis Time Tab Frequency Other Output One file Multiple files CJ To include a parameter in the ASCII output select its check box in the Analysis Parameters list You can select more than one parameter at a time Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order in which the data will be shown in the output file If you want to include the parameter names as column headers in your output file select the Include Headers in Output check box Select t
40. the SSP data if available is retrieved and inserted into the Sound Velocity Profile SVP at the location of the transducer depth replacing CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 137 Sound Velocity Correction Sound Velocity Correction Apply Delayed Heave Smoothed Sensors 138 the interpolated sound speed value at that depth Ray tracing then starts from that location To use available SSP data in sound velocity correction 8 Select the Use Surface Sound Speed if available check box in the dialog box C Use Surface Sound Speed if available _ Perform an additional recomputation of the steered beam angles based on a new surface sound speed that will be interpolated from the sound velocity profile for compatible systems only There are times however when the SSP data is not correct causing the beam forming electronics to erroneously compute beam angle data If you determine that this has happened you can enable the option to recompute beam angles The recorded SSP known to be incorrect along with the sound speed interpolated from SVP assumed to be correct will be used to compute new beam angle data Ray tracing will then proceed without insertion of the SSP into the SVP To use the available SSP data only to compute new beam angle data 9 Select the Perform an additional recomputation check box to re compute the steered beam angles based on a new surface sound speed that is interpolated from the sound velocit
41. to appear in the file All attributes checked in the list will be included in the ASCII output Optional Select Include Headers in Output to have the appropriate column headers included in the ASCII file Select either Space Comma or Tab from the list to use these characters to separate fields in the output file If you select Other type a character to use a delimiter Set the Attribute Precision value number of digits to the right of decimal point for the selected attributes The example below shows a comma delimited ASCII file for the Depth attribute of a BASE surface with the positions in decimal degrees and column headers turned on ffLat DD Long DD Depth Mean Shoal 43 073 070 714 5 989 5 99 5 895 43 073 070 714 6459 6 46 6 045 43 073 070 714 6 906 6 93 6 490 43 073 070 714 7 443 7 44 6 936 43 073 070 714 8 002 8 00 7 491 43 073 070 714 6 628 6 63 6 130 10 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Click Next 499 Export Data BASE Surface To ASCII Select Export Units This dialog box sets the unit type for recording data The fields that are active in this dialog are determined by the attributes selected in the previous dialog box CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 4 of 5 Select Units Vertical Length Metres Horizontal Length Metres Vertical Shit 0 Metres lt Back Canca Available units are e metres and kilometres e fathoms US and int
42. to convert sonar altitude from the auxiliary altitude field in the sonar record Bathymetry data associated with Klein 5000 V2 data contains quality values You can filter for these values using the Bathy Quality slider control 9 Set the slider to a value between 50 and 100 You can retain the rejected data in the conversion to HIPS The data will be marked as Rejected CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 10 To include the rejected data in the converted dataset select the Convert Rejected check box All sonar data is stored using 16 bits Seabeam 1 Make sure the Convert Side Scan option is checked to include side scan data with bathymetric data 2 Select the Shorten Line Names check box to modify the file name to a 12 character CARIS name YYDDD_HHMMDD Seafalcon Seafalcon allows the option of importing a full sounding dataset or a thinned dataset The thinning options are based on reducing the number of beams per profile that are imported All profiles are imported 1 Select the thinning option if needed The following two options are enabled if the thinning option is selected 2 Select the amount of data to be processed half the number of beams are imported one fourth the number of beams from each profile are imported 3 Select the sounding type to be imported into HIPS format e shoal average deep You can select the swaths per ping that you want
43. you may want to set the options on the Swath drop down to either Bathymetry 7004 7006 or Raw Detection 7027 Leaving the setting as All may cause a mismatch between observed depths and SonarError records 9 Indicate the source of S7K data by selecting an option from the drop down list The default value is All For example the options for Heading are Altitude 1016 Heading 1013 or Navigation 1015 In the case of dual head data stored in the Reson 7K format the data from transducer 1 is combined with that from 2 to form a single HIPS profile To convert the two sets of data separately 10 Select the Separate profiles for dual head data option By default hidden or non logged data exported from the PDS2000 is not converted 11 To include this data when converting Teledyne Reson PDS select the Convert hidden non logged data check box By default the depth field is not converted To convert the depth field values 12 Select the Convert depth field option This will populate Delta Draft file in the line directory 13 For information applying Delta Draft see DeLta DRAFT ON PAGE 172 14 Click Next CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Options for Specific Formats SAS The HIPS Converter for SAS Synthetic Aperture Sonar data filters out Quality 0 data considered bad data however it can be included in the conversion 1 Select the check box to convert Quality 0
44. 2s ccicageaei sen aeseese us seeeaaws 414 Geocoder Engine 5c cktede chub de eek e ean eh eam pees 414 SIPS EnGin wscc20sseee4e0ne eens Kee eG Rasen ad was 414 Geocoder workflow for multibeam data 415 Open Mosaic Editor ccacedes deed page tease eeeeades 416 Create GeoBars 12 2 cian cepts cueberssemereiaees 417 Naming GeoBaRs 000 ee 418 Create GeoBaR with the Geocoder Engine 419 Create GeoBaRs with the SIPS Engine 422 Beam Pattern Correction 002 eee eee ee 426 Create Beam Pattern fille 0000004 427 DOSPCCKIG is xed ses cee e Geeee eevee ree ceeeiae 428 Edit GeoBaRS 0cce ss 294 ME dee SEER ESR En ES ORS 429 Image Classification 000 0 c eee ee 431 Delete GeoBaR cnc scutes s eels aN re esee et sed tees 433 Create Mosaic from GeoBaRs 0002 eee eee 434 Delete Mosaic sc oo aes week ae ee eS INES ee Owes Se HO 437 Edit MOSAICS 2 2020 o64engetged ra rinnaka heme eee news 438 Edit Mosaic Components 00 e eee eee 440 Interpolate Mosaic 0 000 eee 442 Conflict Resolution o25 t2462552 ved sede iade eaves Se5S24 444 Ways to Resolve Conflict 000 0c eee ee 445 Sediment Analysis s25 2os2sce hae0d ceca ditanstedaa as 446 Set Sediment Analysis options 000005 446 Auto Analyze n 5 oe edie eect Seed oR ORS SSeS ech 447 Analyze selected patch 00002 ee eee 44
45. 3 Pixels are grouped according to class starting from the minimum to the maximum pixel value Image Classification Classification options Number of classes 6 Minimum Intensity 39 86 Minimum Intensity 27 92 Classification colour Unclassified v Min Max Start 39 863 39 86 39 725 39 039 38 902 38 49 38 353 37 667 37 529 36 294 36 157 34 098 33 961 27 922 The histogram is refreshed to show the pixels coloured according to the class designation When the dialog box is closed the intensity values in the mosaic will be displayed with these colour classifications To save the colours and their classes to a CRF colour range file for future use 12 Click Apply 13 In the Save As dialog box type a name for the file and click Save CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Edit GeoBaRs Delete GeoBaR To delete a GeoBaR 1 Right click on the GeoBaR layer in the Layers tab 2 Select Delete GeoBaR from the pop up menu This deletes the GeoBaR permanently from your disk CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 433 Process Imagery Data Create Mosaic from GeoBaRs Create Mosaic from GeoBaRs Tools gt Mosaic Editor gt Create Mosaic Menu Kd Tool 434 A mosaic can be created from two or more GeoBaRs As with other HIPS and SIPS surfaces a mosaic is created in a field sheet Mosaics of side scan data can also be created
46. 990 4770497 110 360 720 31 4 770 488 81 17 175 360729 630 4770497 230 360 791 99 4 770 488 81 16 388 360793 510 4770498 010 360 822 71 4 770 488 81 16 284 360826 270 4770498 630 360 802 23 4 770 488 81 16 161 360807 170 4770498 810 mem mam sm mna san ae se mane menmam smm samara sma lt il gt 41 4 gt P Output h Selection Profile F iN es es ss v 406 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Tile Display Query Tile Display Query Using the Tile Display Query dialog box you can create an SQL type query based on selected tile attributes and defined values Only those tiles that meet the search criteria are displayed in the Display window The query results can be saved in the Tiles Properties when the session is saved The Tile Query dialog box is opened from the Properties window when the tile layers are selected 1 Select the tile layer in the Layers tab 2 Open the Properties window for the Tiles layer as seen below Properties E Tiles Active attribute Z_Mean Colour map 10colours Display level Automatic Colour fill tiles True Transparency 0 Show tile borders True Border colour HH 100 100 100 Display tile value C False Tile Display Query Count lt 2500 AND MinRes gt 666 AND Rejected 0 p 3 Click the Browse button in the Tile Display Query field The Tile Display Query dialog box is opened Tile Display Query Attribute a Vale Nontoetts
47. ASCII Grid dialog box is displayed Export to ESRI ASCII Grid Decimal precision for elevation values B is Attribute to export Depth Output surface Use the Decimal Precision for elevation values field to define the number of decimal places to apply to the elevation values in the output files The maximum number of decimal places is12 3 Select the value for Decimal Precision for elevation values that will be applied to the output data 4 Select a surface Attribute to export e g Depth or Density from the drop down list 5 Click Browse in the Output surface field and define a name and destination for the exported surface 6 Click OK An ESRI ASCII Grid file is created ESRI ASCII and Binary grid formats can be opened in HIPS as Surfaces with the Open Background Data cmmand from the File menu CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Export Selection to DXF Export Selection to DXF Export contours soundings or bounding polygon 2 File gt Export gt Selection to DXF Export Lines or Critical Soundings File gt Export gt Selection to DXF Menu Export a selection of data to a DXF AutoCAD file Contours soundings lines and bounding polygons can be exported to DXF format Data is saved in two files The DXF file contains the exported data The DXF_RXL file contains the coordinate system unit type and unit scale of the data
48. Angle Weighting Add Survey Lines If you selected the Swath Angle Weighting option at Step 2 the Step 3 dialog box is displayed BASE Surface Wizard Step 3 of 3 Add survey lines Max footprint size 9 x9 pixels C Use selected lines _ Ignore lines with errors Include additional bathymetry Include status Accepted Examined Outstanding Additional Attributes Density Mean Standard Deviation Shoal Deep Maximum File Size 666 1 KB The Max Footprint Size defines the maximum area in the Surface to which a sounding is applied Use this value to prevent over expansion of the footprint due to large depth spikes or very shallow grazing angles 1 Click the up and down arrow buttons in the Max Footprint Size If one or more track lines were selected before the BASE Surface process was started the Use Selected Lines check box is enabled 2 Check Use Selected Lines if you want to create the BASE Surface only on the selected line or lines Use the Ignore Lines with errors option so that the surface creation is not interrupted if it encounters bad data The process will skip the part of the line containing bad data and continue creating the surface with the next line Once the surface is complete you can decide whether to remove the partial line 3 Check Ignore Lines with errors to have bad line data omitted from the surface 4 Check Include Additional Bathymetry to include water column bathymetery added to proj
49. Complete green 2 Partially Complete yellow 1 Incomplete or not processed red 0 To assign a cleaning status to a subset area 1 Select the appropriate status from the Subset Editor toolbar or from the Tools gt Subset Editor submenu The flagged tiles will be displayed with the colour appropriate to their status Only tiles totally encompassed by the subset bounding box are flagged with the selected status Tiles only partially covered by the bounding box are flagged as Partially Complete as in the example below Subset bounding box Tiles with Complete status Tiles with Partially Complete status Incomplete or gt not processed tiles CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 349 Process Data in Subsets Subsets and BASE Surfaces Subsets and BASE Surfaces BASE surfaces can be opened in Subset Editor and displayed in the 2D and 3D Views This enables you to determine the position of Designated soundings against an existing BASE Surface and whether Designated soundings have been correctly applied to a Finalized BASE Surface See Critica SouNnDINGS ON PAGE 297 As well you can apply surface filtering to a subset of any BASE surface in Subset Editor Open BASE surface in Subset Editor Open the BASE surface for your project Open Subset Editor and define a subset over the BASE surface on Load the subset 4 Select the Reference Surface layer in the Subset Editor tab The Subset
50. Data Sediment Analysis Menu Tool Tools gt Mosaic Editor gt Auto Analyze Sediment Data Lo Menu Tools gt Mosaic Editor gt Sediment Analysis Graph Tool 4 448 All sediment analysis patches available on the lines will be highlighted In the image below the sediment patches are in red one selected patch shows in port and starboard colours AUN Sy PS G 5 Select the Auto Analyze Sediment Data command A dialog box will appear confirming that the analysis is taking place The Status bar will show the progress of the analysis When the process is complete the outcome is reported in the Output window Results displayed on the Analysis tab Analyze selected patch 1 Select the layer named GeoBaRs 2 Set the Show All Sediment Analysis Patches option in the Properties window 3 Select the Analysis tab of the Mosaic Editor tab in the Control window 4 Select one or more lines displaying open GeoBaRs 5 Select a patch from the patches highlighted The port and starboard sides of the selected patch will be highlighted 6 Open the Sediment Analysis graph 7 Select Standard from the Display field drop down list 8 Click Analyze The graph window will draw the lines resulting from the analysis The Results section of the Analysis tab will display the sediment class and confidence level of the analysis CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery
51. Data Sediment Analysis Process Analysis Edt Display Standard Source Sediment Data Sediment Results l ss Port CLAYEY SAND Confidence very Good 0 3 Stbd GRAVEL Confidence Fair 0 9 Confidence level Parameters Side Port Stbd Frequency E Hz Grain Size 0 00 phi amp Pro Mor M pr Exte A Mosaic E The results are displayed as the type of sediment based on the values set in the Grain Size table See Grain SIZE TABLE ON pace 451 Also shown is the confidence level in the result the smaller the value the higher the confidence level Auto Analysis of sediment data can be done in either Standard or Advanced mode CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 449 Process Imagery Data Sediment Analysis 450 Advanced Mode The Advanced mode on the Analysis tab is an extension of the Standard mode and displays more parameters This analysis compares the grain size from the data to the values ona customizeable lookup table See Grain Size TABLE ON PAGE 451 The Advanced Mode is likely to be of more interest to users doing scientific research rather than a processing workflow 1 Highlight a sediment analysis patch 2 Select Advanced from the Display field 3 Select Sediment Data from the Source field on the Analysis tab 4 Click Analyze The sediment analysis results for that patch are displayed in the Results field The input parameters
52. Editor tab is refreshed to show the property options for the Reference Surface layer Data Sy HIPS Data gy 2D View gy 3D View V Reference Surface v amp CUBE Hypothesis IF Tracking Properties F Select Surface CRTR4 B CRTR4 1 Density Hypothesis_Count Hypothesis_Strength amp Mean Node_Std_Dev Std_Dev Colour by attribute Depth Display Surface Unea Transparency o 5 Select a BASE Surface layer from the Select Surface file tree lt 350 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Data in Subsets Subsets and BASE Surfaces Although the Depth attribute is used to display the surface you can colour the surface by another attribute by selecting that attribute from the Colour by Attribute drop down list 6 Display the BASE surface as points wire frame or a complete surface by selecting an option from the Display drop down list 7 Select a transparency level for the Surface using the up and down arrow buttons 8 Click Load The BASE Surface is displayed in the Views according to the above options 9 Optional Click Unload to remove the BASE Surface from the Views CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 351 Process Data in Subsets Subsets and BASE Surfaces Tools gt Subset Editor gt Surface Filter Menu oe Subset Editor toolbar Tool 352 Surface filter You can load any type of B
53. GSF to HOB Export GSF data to a Hydrographic Object Binary HOB file that stores feature objects and associated attribute data The HOB file can contain links to CARIS spatial objects GSF To HOB on PAGE 514 HIPS Tide to ASCII Export tide data from track lines to text format HIPS Tipe to ASCII on pace 516 492 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Formats Exported Format Description Refer to HIPS to ASCII Export HIPS data to a customized text listing of soundings that you can load into other software systems HIPS To ASCII on Pace 517 HIPS to CARIS map Export HIPS data to a CARIS map This option contains three modes of exporting data soundings track lines and swaths HIPS To CARIS Map on PAGE 523 HIPS to FAU Export HIPS data to FAU files HIPS To FAU on pace 527 HIPS to GSF Export processed HIPS data to GSF format A new GSF file is created for each trackline that is exported from HIPS Conversely when HIPS data is created from GSF data a copy of the original GSF file is maintained inside the HIPS directory structure The Export to GSF function updates these GSF files HIPS To GSF on Pace 528 HIPS to HOB Export HIPS data to HOB files that store feature objects and associated attribute data The HOB file can contain links to CARIS spatial objects This option contains three modes of exporting data
54. Line A line that is part of the main survey grid 5 Click OK The line is now flagged according to one of four categories 8 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 293 Data QC Reject Line Reject Line Edit gt Reject Line Menu 5 Edit gt Accept Line 294 Use the Reject Line command to remove an entire track line from data processing When a rejected line is merged the profiles are marked as rejected which prevents the soundings from being used in BASE surfacing surface cleaning and mosaicking However status flags on the individual soundings are maintained A rejected line is not processed in the tiling operations or exported to a CARIS map or ASCII file 1 Select a track line 2 Select the Reject Line command The rejected line is displayed in the Project tab in the Control window with a red X beside the file name To change status of a rejected line back to accepted 3 Select the Accept Line command The line is displayed in the Project tab of the Control window with a red exclamation point beside the file name This icon indicates the line has been flagged as outdated You must merge the soundings again before they are available for further processing see Merce on PAGE 167 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC View Rejected Soundings View Rejected Soundings Reason for Rejection View gt Rejected Flag Types Menu You can show or h
55. New Project Set Line Properties Ship Track Lines Merged and Not merged Towfish track lines Slant range corrected and Raw side scan only To change these identifying colours 3 Highlight the field and select a new colour from the drop down list Line colour can indicate State but as well lines can also be coloured by SV Profile or by Tide applied You can also have a different colour per line To change the determinant of colour for either kind of line 4 Select an option from the drop down list in the Colour by field State is the default setting e g Merged Not merged SV Profile colours the lines based on the sound velocity profile applied Ship track line only Tide colours them based on the tide zone file applied Ship track line only Multiple colours uses a set of 10 distinct colours to colour the lines This can be useful if data was logged as multiple files along the same runline If you select to colour by multiple colours you can also select which colour file to apply from the drop down list in the Colour files field Properties El General Symbolize lines C False Line Weight E Colour Slant range corrected Gi2ss 128 0 Raw side scan only 128 64 64 Colour by State Colour Files These settings are saved when you save your session and will be applied when the session is re opened 72 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create a New Project Rename Day and Line Fold
56. New Project Step 4 0 0 02 62 Opell Projec S acc acne a Son ye denen teeter Gena d Bow ee 64 Multiple Data Paths ccicccceeeecis peau d bagndeeeeede 64 Open specific data oc wired s dean seid edd ewep de beers 66 View Project Properties 00 0c eee eee 67 View Vessel Properties 00 0 eee eee eee 70 Set Line Properties 0 000 71 Rename Day and Line Folders 000 000s 73 Archive Project 24 224 44 peer SOs ei Geeee sees bee gee Bede 74 Convert Dalal ci cede vatduxneseciseces dv deakcnness 77 Converting Files to HIPS SIPS Format 78 Formats that can be converted to HIPS and SIPS 79 Select Data FOMMAl c css acdadascae radi eoeie edi seardeee 81 Select Files for Conversion 0 00002 eee eee 82 Import Opies i cu cieeeset Cheer see sae eeeedes 83 Select Project Vessel and Day 20000 ee eee 86 Set Navigation Coordinate System 0000 88 Select Filters kkehe tte abiee eae neSeateeltebaadeawene 90 Advanced Filtering o s se240e8ssesseuvasorigens 91 Enter Data Parameters 0000 eee eee 93 Convert Data si caccuevdieadeseeauneenguateadeeeedi es 94 Options for Specific Formats 000 cc eee eee 96 Atlas eroapen s aoe a ate eae ae ae aa ao ha wd 97 Chimscans 6e nh pees Met eee eek Wek eRReee neers 98 CMAX cc 26055 28a Pee hawk ba eee ewes eae eee weds 98 G da remera p
57. Offset The threshold for significant offset from current estimate to warrant an the creation of a new hypothesis The value must be between 0 1 and 10 0 e Capture Distance Scale Scale on predicted or estimated depth for how far out to accept data Value is a percentage of depth used to limit the radius of influence a sounding may have on the grid Value must be between 1 00 and 100 00 e Capture Distance Minimum The minimum value in metres on predicted or estimated depth for how far out to accept data This value is used in conjunction with Capture Distance Scale to limit the radius or influence of a sounding Value must be between 0 0 and 100 00 Horizontal Error Scalar The value used to scale the horizontal error of each sounding when used in the radius of influence computation Value must be between 0 0 and 10 00 e Density Strength Limit The strength value used to switch from the density disambiguation method to the locale version when using the density amp locale algorithm Value must be between 0 00 and 5 00 e Locale Strength Maximum The maximum strength value allowed as part of the mean in the locale algorithm Value must be between 0 00 and 5 00 257 CUBE Processing Generating CUBE Surfaces 258 Locale Search Radius The radius of the search when computing the trimmed mean The values are in pixels and must be greater than zero The original system default value is 1 Null Hypothesis Test Fla
58. Options for Specific Formats LADS LADS data is contained in two files that are copied into the HIPS survey line folder An ASCII CAF file that contains the bathymetry data and a binary CBF file that contains the waveform data The CAF file can contain data from more than one survey line or run When this is the case the converter splits the file into separate line folders for each run The caf and cbf extensions are retained in the HIPS Line folder There are four sounding classifications in the LADS format S Secondary sounding the best soundings P Primary sounding an unreliable result N No bottom found at depth potentially a useful depth result X No bottom detected no result When the data is converted each sounding is given a status flag according to its classification The following table lists the HIPS status flags applied to the LADS classifications LADS HIPS Sounding Definition Classification Flag S Accepted Good soundings until they are flagged as rejected during cleaning in HIPS P Rejected by A reject flag in HIPS that can be changed disabled beam to Accepted if necessary N Examined A special flag for an Accepted sounding The sounding can be filtered out when creating a BASE Surface or exporting It can also be flagged as Rejected during cleaning in HIPS X Rejected by Depth A type of Reject flag that can be changed Gate to Accepted if desired
59. Pattern Correction with the Geocoder engine selected removes sediment artefacts and multibeam sonar system artefacts from data Angular artefacts are removed from side scan data if the SIPS engine is selected For consistent results you should create your beam pattern file over as flat homogenous and featureless an area as possible preferably sand For best results it is reeommended that a patch test be done during a survey over an area known to have such properties The process to apply Beam Pattern Correction in Mosaic Editor consists of selecting the processing engine Geocoder or SIPS creating a GeoBaR from the patch line preferably with only the default corrections applied creating the Beam Pattern file setting the Beam Pattern options for the type of data you are correcting creating GeoBaRs and applying Beam Pattern Correction CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process gt Beam Pattern Correction gt Create a Menu Tool Process Imagery Data Beam Pattern Correction Create Beam Pattern file 1 Make sure the Ship Track Lines layer is active in the Layers tab 2 Load one or more GeoBaRs 3 In the Display window select a trackline and then superselect an area of the line by pressing the down arrow key on the keyboard while range selecting over a suitable area of the GeoBaR In order to create a robust beam pattern file a minimum number of pings should be selected usu
60. SIPS can also be located on a read only media such as a CD ROM except for Atlas SURF data which at this time does not support conversion from read only files Import Options Before selecting the data to be converted some file formats have other options that must be set The conversion process creates all new data files within the project structure However if line directories already exist within your project they are deleted and replaced with the new survey data Instead of overwriting all existing data you can choose to update only certain data For example you can opt to update only the navigation information on your processed survey lines or to add backscatter imagery data to a project without overwriting any of the rest of your processed data At present this option is available for these formats Hypack HSX 81X Teledyne Reson PDS Simrad gt XTF These options are presented in the Step 2 dialog box of the Conversion Wizard before the actual data files are selected 1 Select Create new survey lines to save new data to the project overwriting any existing data This is the default setting 2 Select Update existing survey lines to choose which kinds of data to replace in your existing project By default all the types are set to overwrite your existing data be overwritten Clear the check box es for the data you do not want overwritten If the lines don t exist no data is converted e Overwrit
61. Set the desired Threshold value e For standard deviation or uncertainty thresholds the value entered will show the confidence interval next to the field e Static values are entered in units set in Tools gt Options gt Display gt Units gt Vertical units e g metres 10 Select the Include data previously rejected check box to include rejected data when running the filter 11 Select the Reject soundings that do not fall on the surface check box to reject soundings that are offset from the surface 12 Select Filter Slice to filter only the soundings within the subset slice or 13 Select Filter Full Subset to filter all the soundings within the subset bounding box CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 353 Process Data in Subsets Subsets and BASE Surfaces 14 Click OK to apply the filter For description of applying surface filtering to an entire BASE surface see SURFACE FILTERING ON PAGE 244 354 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Create product surfaces from finalized BASE surfaces Product surfaces maintain the designated soundings from the finalized BASE Surface and can be used to create more cartographically correct contours Product surfaces can also be created from tile layers Use product surfaces for building contours sounding selections profiles and other data layers In this chapter PRODUCT SURFACES SOUNDING SELECTION COLOUR OPTIONS FOR SOUNDINGS AND CONTOURS
62. This will restore the status of the data to Accepted The additionalBathymetry parent layer has similar properties to those of a BASE surface extents identification creation date etc See View SuRFACE PROPERTIES ON PAGE 204 As with BASE surface parent layers there are few editable fields however for the additionalBathymetry layer there is the option to display any additional bathymetry data that has been rejected in an editor 1 Set Show Rejected Points to True to show rejected data 2 Set the option to False to hide rejected points The attribute child layers have the same properties options as do BASE surface attribute layers See ATTRIBUTE LAYER PROPERTIES ON PAGE 206 TPU can be applied to the additionalBathymetry layer This will add two child layers to the additionalBathymetry attributes DepthTPU and PositionTPU See Compute TPU on pace 156 If corrections such as tide SVP etc have been applied to project data during processing requiring that Merge be re applied the additional bathymetry is not updated To update the additional bathymetry 1 Right click on the additionalBathymetry layer 2 Select Regenerate from the pop up menu CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 473 Process Water Column Data Additional Bathymetry 474 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 19 Create Publications Use Plot Composer to publish HIPS and SIPS products to PDF or paper In this chapter PLOT GOMPO
63. To add another surface to the group 1 Right click on the surface to be added 2 Select Group from the pop up menu The pop up sub menu will list any created and available groups If a selected surface already belongs to a group that group is greyed out in the pop up menu to prevent a surface from being added to a group twice 3 Select the group you want to add the surface to The surface is added to the group under the Sources layer You can remove a surface from a group It will be returned to its place in the field sheet if the field sheet is open otherwise the surface is listed with other layers in the Layers tab To remove a surface from a group 1 Right click on the surface you want to remove from the group 2 Select Group from the pop up menu 3 Select None from the sub menu The surface is removed from the group and restored to a position in the Layers tab To disband the group and restore the component surfaces use the Ungroup command 1 Right click on the group layer 2 Select Ungroup from the pop up menu The group is removed from the layers tree CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 243 Create BASE Surfaces Surface Filtering Surface Filtering Menu Tools gt Apply Filters gt Surface Filter 244 Surface filtering uses a scaled standard deviation or uncertainty threshold to reject soundings that fall outside that threshold You can also filter sounding depth by a dire
64. Type enter a single datum height value in the Value field to apply a single distance from the ellipsoid to the antenna 5 If Datum Model is selected as Type use the drop down list in the Model field to select a currently open surface or to select lt Browse gt and open a model file The field will display the surface name or the filename of the model file If you have selected a surface as the datum select an appropriate attribute from the list in the Attribute field If you have selected a datum model file of an unknown format click Browse button in the nfo File field to select the appropriate info file This field is disabled if the selected file is a known format with an available info file which will be applied by default In the Coordinate Reference System field click the Browse button to open the Select Projection dialog box and set the relevant projection 6 Select the check boxes or type in values to apply the following options during the process Smooth GPS Height Set to True to apply smoothing to GPS height Dynamic Heave Set to True to apply dynamic heave either regular vessel heave or delayed heave if it exists MRU Remote Heave Set to True to apply remote heave resulting from vessel roll pitch on an offset mounted MRU Dynamic Draft Set to True to apply dynamic draft as a result of interpolating the draft table in the HIPS Vessel File HVF or as sto
65. User Guide Convert Data Options for Specific Formats EdgeTech Edgetech side scan data is imported in 16 bit format a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 6 EdgeTech System aaa MIDAS Channel JSF Channel All data Altitude from Discover 2 JSF Convert From Cable Out Depth from Sensor Bathy Quality 70 V Convert Rejected 1 Select a side scan system e Midas e 260 e JSF 2 If Midas is enabled select a sonar frequency channel e 100 KHz e 500 KHz 3 If JSF is enabled select a sonar frequency channel All data e Low Frequency e High Frequency 4 If altitude data is present in the JSF data select the data source e Sensor e Discover 2 5 Select either Layback or Cable Out from which to convert the JSF data e If you select Cable Out select the source for Depth either Sensor or Discover 2 Bathymetry data collected with the Edgetech 4600 system has a quality value associated with every bathymetry sample in each CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 99 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats ping This quality attribute is presented as a percentage value with a higher value representing a better quality sample Use the Bathy Quality slider to set the quality value below which soundings will be automatically rejected during conversion 6 Set a value between 50 and 100 using the slider Since each ping can contain thousands of sampl
66. Vessel File Create Vessel Shape Outline The Vessel Editor displays the outline of the vessel FundyRover2 hyvt Bile Edt Wew Tools Help E Deel tbe hale Select a time foe graphical sensce display EQ EIEN UOC mE Time stamps Reference point Date Time Tine Correction s X m Y m Z m Pitch deg Rell deg Navigation 2004 215 00 00 0 00 06 00 O21 0 20 0 00 0 68 Gyro 2 v 000 0 00 000 0 00 0 00 0 00 Heave oe Pach Rol TPU values SVP 1 Wateilne Height Negative values are used for these measurements from the origin crosspoint of the axes to port on the X axis from the origin aft towards the stern on the Y axis from the origin point up on the Z axis Negative values on the axes are displayed with a minus sign CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 37 Create Vessel File Sensor Configuration Sensor Configuration The active sensors listed in the Vessel Editor are determined by the sensor parameters you selected when creating the vessel file If you want to add data for a sensor not already included in the vessel file you can add a sensor to the list and enter its data You can also remove a sensor and its values from the vessel file CARIS HIPS and SIPS Vessel Editor Date Time Time Correction s X m m Z m Pitch deg Roll deg Yaw deg Navigation 1 gt 2002 114 11 47 0 5 15 23 0 340 1 1 0 800 0 100 Gyro gt 2 2012 15 13 14 0 2 15 23 0 il 0 8 0 1 H
67. Wizard Step 5 90 Navigation Set extents Manual Project fie 90 00 00 E 180 00 00 Project Area 90 00 00 Ww180 00 00 Depth Advanced Filtering Min 0 00 m Max 1000 00 m O 1 Select the Navigation check box to enable the navigation filter The extents of the filter can be defined either by setting them manually in this dialog box or by using the extents as defined in the project selected at Step 3 or 4 2 Select either Manual option or the Project File option 3 If you selected the Manual option enter the extent coordinates in the fields You can use the lt Tab gt key to move between fields and use the arrow keys to move between values in a field CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Select Filters The HIPS converter for reading Klein SDF data files has been enhanced to read the bathymetry data from the Klein data format 5000 V2 As a result of this enhancement the filtering capabilities in step 5 of the Conversion Wizard are now enabled for this conversion These settings are functional only for the format 5000 V2 data as no other formats processed by the SDF converter currently contain bathymetry Select the Depth check box to enable the depth filter Enter the minimum acceptable depth Enter a maximum acceptable depth NO a fs For advanced filtering for multibeam or multi transducer data select the Advanced Filtering check box and click Parameters to set advanced fi
68. a complete description of the Swath Editor interface and ways of viewing data display options and controls see SwaTH Epitor in the HIPS and SIPS Editors Guide 4 Select soundings to be cleaned When soundings are selected they are highlighted in yellow 5 Apply the Reject or Reject Swaths command o the sounding as appropriate Tools To assist with manual cleaning use Auto Cursor Mone ON PAGE 328 FIND SOUNDING ON PAGE 328 Query Data ON PAGE 331 Auto Cursor Mode Auto Cursor Mode can be used to speed up the interactive process This mode combines the selection and Accept Reject Query functions into a single procedure 1 Select the Auto Cursor command 2 Select a Reject Accept Query command 3 Press the mouse button and draw a bounding box over the data 4 Release the mouse button Find Sounding Use the Find function to search a survey line for a specific sounding s by beam and or profile number 1 Select a track line 2 Select the Find command The Find dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 7 Cleaning Swath Data Manual Cleaning Depth Profile and or Beam Profile Number Beam Number C Time Profile Time 00 00 00 000 Close To search by the swath or beam number select the Profile and or Beam option Type the swath or beam number in the Profile Number or Beam Number field To search for a swath that was recorded at a specific ti
69. ann Loan Data on PAGE 111 in the Editors Guide 3 Select the Load Subset command to the load the data into the Subset Editor windows The subset of your data is generated and displayed in the 2D and 3D windows in Subset Editor If data for any line has not been merged the depth information may not be accurate In this case the subset will be loaded but the Output window will warn you that the processed depths for a specified line are outdated and require Merge See MERGE ON PAGE 167 Reject Each sounding in the HIPS format carries several status flags that are turned on and off as needed Each sounding begins as an Accepted status If rejected during processing it can always be returned to the accepted status without loss of data Note When you select data in the 3D View all data in the highlighted area is selected not just the visible data 1 In either the 2D or 3D View select the data you want to reject so it is highlighted 2 Select the Reject command If you query the rejected soundings you will see that they now display the status flag Rejected Subset Hydrographer As well the soundings may or may not be displayed depending on whether the Show Rejected button is toggled to visible Note When you select data in the 3D View all data in the highlighted area is selected not just the visible data 339 Process Data in Subsets Subset Cleaning Menu Edit gt Status Flag gt Accept
70. be the first or last 12 characters in a GSF project name 2 Choose either the first 12 characters or the last 12 characters for the CARIS Source ID from the drop down list 3 Click Next to select the projection for the exported data CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 513 Export Data GSF to HOB GSF to HOB The Generic Sensor Format GSF to CARIS function loads soundings and track lines from one or more GSF files into a HOB file GSF data does not have to be converted to HIPS data prior to using this utility For information on converting GSF to CARIS map see GSF to CARIS Map on Pace 511 GSF Files to Export In this dialog box you can list the file path to the GSF file s you want to export 1 Click Select to choose the GSF files to be exported 2 Hold the lt Ctrl gt key while selecting to add more than one file to the list 3 To remove a file from the list highlight the file and click Remove 4 Click Next Export Soundings and Track lines CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 6 Export Soundings Attributes Basic vi Status i Feature Code SGSL v User Number 1 C Group By Beam Export Tracklines Feature Code SHIPTRACK v User Number 1 Include Offline Data 514 Data can be exported either in the form of soundings or track lines Soundings Export all soundings that fit within the boundaries of the work file subj
71. been applied CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 139 Sound Velocity Correction Query Applied SVC Profiles Query Applied SVC Profiles Query lines Process Log Colour by SV Profile Display profiles 140 You can confirm whether SVC has been applied and see which profile has been applied to which lines by querying the SVC status of lines in the Selection tab examining the logfile xml display the SVP files as background data colour coding line display by SV profile To query lines which have been sound velocity corrected 1 Select lines in the Display Selected lines will be listed automatically in the Selection tab 2 Scroll through the Selection tab to the SVP Corrected column A Yes value in the column indicates that the line has been SV corrected Select SoundVelocityCorrect in the leftmost column of the Process Log This will display profile information in the right column of the window See also Process Loe Winvow in the Reference Guide You can also determine which profiles have been applied to lines by turning on the Colour by SV Profile property To view the profiles that have been applied in SVC 1 Select the Ship Track LInes layer in the Layers tab 2 Open the Properties window 3 Set the Colour by SV Profile value to true by selecting the check box 4 Refresh the Display All the lines will display a colour for each cast as in the following example SVP files can be opened
72. but is not necessary for processing data for example background images and associated charts Edit Selection 1 Click Browse to open the Select Files dialog box 2 Click Add to open the standard Select Files dialog box and locate the additional files 3 Repeat until list of files is complete 4 Click OK Use Remove and Clear to adjust your selection CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 75 Create a New Project Archive Project 76 3 Click OK to archive the file selected to the set destination The ZIP file is created and contains these folders VesselConfig Project PreProcess Fieldsheets Background CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Use the Data Conversion wizard to convert various types of survey data into HDCS specific format In this chapter CONVERTING FILES To HIPS SIPS FORMAT 000000 78 FORMATS THAT CAN BE CONVERTED TO HIPS anp SIPS 79 OPTIONS FOR SPECIFIC FORMATS c0ccccscseeeeceesseeeeeseees 96 Convert Data Converting Files to HIPS SIPS Format Converting Files to HIPS SIPS Format 78 HIPS and SIPS files are created from survey data using the Conversion Wizard Survey data in ASCII format can also be converted using the Generic Data Parser See Generic Data Parser on PAGE 105 of the Tools guide Data that is converted to HIPS SIPS format may be in varying stages of completion depending on the data format options Survey data may or ma
73. carried over However the location of the raw files is referenced in the Observed Depths file If you select the Carry Over Raw Data Files check box your data will be converted and a copy of the raw files placed in the line folders 3 Select Carry Over Raw Data Files to copy raw data files to the line folders If a process uses raw data and the raw data has been carried over HIPS will use the files in the HDCS line folder If the raw data file is not carried over then HIPS will search the referenced location of the raw files If the data is not found you will be prompted to have HIPS search for it or to search for it yourself When converting Simrad or XTF data the converter scans the entire directory containing the files selected to be converted This scan checks for navigation or motion data with time overlaps This is done in order to synchronise the reference time stamps CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Select Files for Conversion properly in cases where single survey lines are split up into multiple pieces by the acquisition software This scanning can be time consuming particularly with large data sets However if this synchronizing is not done when a line has been split the data in the converted line segments may not overlap correctly To turn off this synchronizing function 4 Select the Search directories for files with temporal overlap check box 5 Click Next to select the specific files to imp
74. contour lines For smoother contour lines use a smoothed Product Surface as a source for contouring You can label contours with depth values adjust the size and colour of contours and mask the lines behind the contour label Create Contours 1 Open a project and a field sheet containing a BASE surface 2 Select the field sheet layer in the Layers tab 3 Select the New Contour Layer command The Contour Wizard Step 1 dialog box is displayed Contour Wizard Available Height Sources lt Field sheet layer MB Fundyos009 i MinDepth lt Tile layers MirnXCoord MinYCoord Average E CTR ps1 lt Product Surface amp Depth Generalized Uncertainty H CRTR4 1_Final 4 Finalized BASE Density Surface amp Depth Hypothesis_Count v 4 Expand the layer tree and select a tile Product Surface or BASE Surface attribute layer to be the height source for the contours 5 Click Next The Contour Wizard Step 2 dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 361 Create Product Surfaces Contours Contour Wizard Standard Contours Index Contours Contour by range 6 44 Range 6 44 to 91 22m 11 44 Min m Max m Interval rm 16 44 21 44 6 44 91 22 5 00 76 44 31 44 Add 36 44 41 44 Contour levels file Pe 56 44 61 44 66 44 71 44 7c AA At this step you enter the intervals for standard and index contours You can create contours at regular interva
75. converted from Invalid data set to Import Depths C Not Found 0 Water Surface 5 Found 1 Shallow 6 Invalid 2 Bottom 7 Unclassified 3 High Land 8 Land 4 Target 9 The Hawkeye data structure as exported from AHAB CSS Software needs to be maintained in order for processing to be successful in HIPS and SIPS There are two kinds of Hawkeye files with _HD bin and _TD bin extensions The two kinds of files have identical data structures but differ in contents The HD files store primarily hydrographic data but can contain topographic data as well The TD files store only topographic data Each data point in the files contains two attributes Depth and PointAltitude e The Depth attribute is water depth relative to chart datum The PointAltitude attribute is height relative to an ellipsoid Data in TD files is always be converted using the PointAltitude attribute but where HD files are concerned you can choose between the Depth and PointAltitude attributes 1 Select the appropriate source for the hydrographic data from the drop down list either Depth or PointAltitude Use the Invalid data set to option to apply a substitute depth of either 99m below chart datum or 99m above chart datum for data rejected by disabled beam This data will be marked as Rejected and display this depth value 2 Select 99m or 99 m as substitute depth 3 Select the depth classes to import to HIPS
76. converter reduces data to fewer than 2000 soundings in a profile as follows e If data contains more than 2000 and you select the Pre filtering and Data Thinning options these will be applied to the data e If data contains more than 2000 and you do not select Pre filtering and Data Thinning options data is automatically reduced by the value in Thinning Factor field using the last factor entered 106 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Options for Specific Formats GSF a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 6 Gst C Include Offline Data E Reject Offline Data Source Depth Type Nominal depth Data recorded during line turns is marked as Offline data in GSF This data can be included or excluded during conversion When included it can also be automatically rejected One purpose for including the Offline data would be to maintain the same swath profile numbers in HIPS format 1 Select the Include Offline Data box to convert data recorded during turns between track lines 2 Select the Reject Offline Data check box to automatically reject the Offline data 3 Select a source for depth data either True depth or Nominal depth Horizontal and depth uncertainty values in the GSF file are also included during conversion CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 107 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 108 Hawkeye a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 5 Hydrographic Data
77. determines how frequently the data is written to the HIPS RMS file 6 Select Vertical RMS to load vertical RMS data then select one of the following alternatives Downto load Down RMS data stored with Group 2 records or e Heave to load Heave RMS data stored with Group 111 records 7 Select Roll RMS Pitch RMS Gyro RMS to load roll error pitch error and gyro error values from the Applanix files to the track line 8 Type an output interval 9 The Apply to all partially covered line option will load the error data even if the data does not cover the entire line 10 Select the Allow gap between records check box to limit the interval allowed between consecutive data records in the file If an interval exceeds the amount specified in the Maximum field the data will not be loaded and the process will stop i i If the time stamp does not match the time stamps in the project you can select the Apply Time offset option and enter a time value in seconds 12 Click Load The Output tab displays a summary of the records loaded Total Position Error records applied 112 Total Down Error records applied 0 Total Heave Error records applied 215 Total Roll Error records applied 112 Total Pitch Error records applied 112 Total Gyro Error records applied 0 l CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide SBET files loaded Process gt Detailed Line Query Menu Compute TPU TPU Filtering Use th
78. distance from nadir 1 Select a method for grouping soundings from the drop down list CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 309 Data QC Quality Control Reports Soundings can be further organized by range The range values must correspond to grouping method selected above 2 Type the range in the Minimum and Maximum fields Ranges are incremented according to the value entered in the In steps of field For example for beam numbers 1 to 100 with an increment of 10 the beams are then displayed in the QC Report tab in 10 rows 3 Type a value to increment the ranges 4 Click Add to display the range in the Defined Ranges list 5 To remove a range select it in the Defined Ranges list and click Remove 6 To include rejected soundings select the Include Rejected check box 7 Click Finish to complete the wizard and close the dialog box or click Cancel to close the wizard without implementing changes Quality Control Statistics The quality control report is displayed in the QC Reports tab of the Worksheet window Worksheet Beam Number Count 1 21 12 935 21 41 13 333 41 61 12 626 61 81 13 318 i Output A Selection AQC Report These fields are Max 0 797 0 794 0 002 0 624 0 886 0 002 0 373 0 336 0 003 0 362 0 522 0 005 Min Mean StdDey Special Order Order1 99 018 98 297 99 731 99 992 Field Definition Beam Number Range grouping as defined in the third dialog box
79. e Ping Header Ship e Ping Header Sensor e Header Navigation Records If you select Raw Navigation Records the option to set Attitude data source is activated 2 Select either Attitude diagram or Raw Navigation datagram To convert bathymetry data 3 Click the Convert Bathymetry check box 4 Select a bathymetric data format from the Convert drop down list e Multibeam e Multi transducer Single beam from records Prim 0 or Prim 1 If there are two channels of data you can identify which channel contains the primary data CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Select gyro data field Set reject soundings flags Convert Data XTF Single beam from AUX 1 2 3 or 4 Note Benthos C3D data will be converted to two lines multibeam and single beam The singlebeam HIPS line with the addition of _SingleBeam to the line name will have the same set of navigation and attitude data as the multibeam line but the sounding depths will be single beam data from the XTF sensor AuxAltitude field The Gyro data field options in the pull down list are determined by the selection made in the Ship Navigation field See Snip NAVIGATION AND ATTITUDE ON PAGE 126 Ifthe Ship Navigation source is Raw Navigation Records and the Attitude source is Attitude Datagram e Select either Attitude Packets or CMG from Navigation Course Made Good from Navigation from the drop down list Ifthe Ship Navigation source is Raw Navigation Reco
80. file name Select the Position Units for data from the drop down list Ground East North position displayed as Easting Northing to the precision defined for example 360425 000 4770355 000 e Geographic DMS position displayed as Latitude Longitude in degrees minutes seconds to the precision defined for example 43 04 23 03N 070 42 51 89W e Geographic Unformatted DMS displays the position without using hyphens or direction indicators for example 43 04 23 03 070 42 51 89 e Geographic Decimal Degrees position displayed as Latitude Longitude in decimal degrees to the precision set for example 43 073 070 714 e Geographic Degree Minutes position displayed as Latitude Longitude in degrees and minutes to the precision set for example 34 23 610N 119 52 585W e Note that for positions in the northern hemisphere longitude West values are negative in the southern 535 Export Data Mosaic to ASCII hemisphere the South latitude values are negative For example a position near Portsmouth NH USA is 43 04 23 03 070 42 51 89 A position near Sydney Australia is 33 51 00 84 151 11 43 7 3 Specify the precision for the display of position values by using the Precision up or down arrow buttons to set the number of digits to be displayed to the right of the decimal point 4 Select the BASE Surface attribute values to be recorded in the ASCII file by selecting the attribute in the Available co
81. files QTC Files D Qterys 0002_18012148 seabed Menu File gt Open Field Sheets 404 lt Back Cancel Help 10 Click Select files to browse to the seabed file used to create the tiles The selected file is displayed in the QTC Files text area 11 Click Finish A progress bar displays the percentage of tiles created When the process is completed the tiles are drawn to the Display window and listed in the Layers tab Open and Close Tiles Tiles are opened when the field sheet with which they are associated is opened 1 Open a field sheet The field sheet file name is displayed in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Expand the field sheet file tree by clicking the Expand icon beside the field sheet so the tile file layer is visible 3 Select the check box beside the tile layer name to make the tile visible in the Display window Tile layers are closed when the field sheet they are associated with is closed Set Tile Display Properties Set the display properties for tiles CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Tiling a field sheet 1 Select a tile layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Select the Properties window command or right click the layer and select Properties from the pop up menu The Properties window displays the tile layer properties Properties E Tiles Active attribute MinDepth Colour map 10colours Dis
82. from those of the other attribute layers See Bounpina POLYGON PROPERTIES ON PAGE 213 BASE Surface Properties are organized into four groups GENERAL OPTIONS ON PAGE 207 LEGEND OPTIONS ON PAGE 208 FILTER OPTIONS ON PAGE 209 DISPLAY OPTIONS ON PAGE 210 General options General properties control the colour display for the attribute layer Use either a colour map file or a colour range file to display data values as colours in the display Colours can be reversed when using a colour map file See Cotour Mar Epitor on pace 39 for more information Property Function General Colour Type Select Colour Map or Colour Range Colour Map activates other fields Colour File Displays the active colour file based on the Colour Type selected above The default colour map is Rainbow If you chose Colour Range but no colour range files exist iN the directory the surface will automatically be coloured grey By default the first colour range file in the drop down list will be selected Reverse colours Select to apply colour mapping from maximum to minimum values instead of from minimum to maximum Min range The minimum value for the attribute layer to which the colour file is applied e g the shoalest data on the Depth layer or the minimum number on Density layer Max range The maximum value for the attribute layer to which a colour is applied e g
83. hoe deee ee eteeead s 284 Attitude OA i 202wos cee Cee ASe rater eheee eae nees 285 Query Calas 656 resit 2h cert dnwanare es Saaueked uae a T 285 Filter Attitude Data 2 000 eee 286 Attitude Filter 008ss20csse0 Leavee eb eee be edo eee wae 286 Delayed Heave 2 0 ce ee 289 Load Attitude Navigation Data 291 Glassify LINES 225 00cedenee edoae pem iie gamed aekt es 293 Reject Line na uaaunnannneenn annn nananana 294 View Rejected Soundings sssaaa aaaea 295 Critical Soundings e s assa asaan 297 Designate Critical Soundings from a Surface 298 Find and Designate Soundings in HIPS Editors 300 View Critical Soundings in HIPS Editors 301 View Critical Soundings in the Display window 302 13 14 15 Protect Critical Soundings s ssena aaaea 304 Restart Cleaning n a naaasar 305 Quality Control Reports ssassn aeaaea 307 QC Rep rt Step la airii rerne skue pane na a i 307 QC Report Step 2 vecdeser ser ea 308 QC R port Step 3 sos s05 ke ieeeredesebs ARSE EnEn a 309 Quality Control Statistics naana aeaaea 310 Statistical Surface Cleaning 005 311 PIOCGSS lt uirar na rE aE IE i a bovis Seeds aE fed aes 312 Polynomial Surface TypeS nnana anaana 313 Creating Tiles and Cleaning Data nananana naana 314 Tile Histogram 3s s 215 oe neeenas Keee tae cee gas Be eOeee
84. i oe PosThresh AND Rejected i Res_Mean Res_Sigma Operator Enter _ BO Query Count lt 2500 AND MinRes gt 668 AND Rejected 0 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 407 Create Product Surfaces Tile Display Query 4 Select an attribute from the list 5 Click one of the following operator buttons e lt less than e g to select attributes that have a value less than the entered amount e gt greater than lt less than or equal to e equals e gt greater than or equal to e not equal to 6 Type a value for the attribute in the Value field and click Enter The search criteria you selected in the dialog box are displayed in the Query section 7 To add other search criteria click either of these logic operators e AND This operator combines two queries together so the results of both are shown in the Display window e OR This operator searches and displays either one of two search criteria in the Display window For example to select only the tiles with a count more than 2500 soundings that also have a resolution of 500 the query string would be Count lt 2500 AND MinRes 500 8 Repeat Steps 3 through 6 to add as many search criteria as needed 9 Click OK The Display window is refreshed to show only the tiles that meet the criteria you entered The Query string is displayed in the Tile Display Query field in the Properties window If
85. in the wizard Count Total soundings in range Max Maximum distance of soundings above surface Min Maximum distance of soundings below surface Mean Mean difference of soundings to surface Std Dev Standard deviation of mean differences is presented at one sigma or 68 Confidence Interval categories Selected S 44 or S 57 Percentage of soundings that fall within the selected S 44 survey orders or S 57 CATZOC zones of confidence categories 310 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Statistical Surface Cleaning The surface cleaning function is used to perform area based statistical data cleaning on multibeam data in HIPS The process uses advanced tiling technology for subdividing the entire area into variable size and density cells It then applies polynomial regression statistics to compute the surface In this chapter PROCESS sicucansodasiacacasacadaxnxesoagutaxans A 312 POLYNOMIAL SURFACE TYPES seeen 313 CREATING TILES AND CLEANING DATA 00esesseeeeeeeees 314 QUERY DATAN TILES aisaatiasvasacadvaesiaeataccaiagaaddabasanaaaaaas 320 Tite HISTOGRAM sienna a 319 Statistical Surface Cleaning Process Process 312 In surface cleaning tiling is used to subdivide the area into manageable cells where each tile is considered separately during the polynomial regression and statistical threshold testing The tile split criteria is based either on the density o
86. line data omitted from the surface 4 Check Include Additional Bathymetry to include water column bathymetery added to project 5 Check either Accepted Examined or Outstanding to include data with these status flags in the CUBE surface 6 Select Shoal or Deep or both check boxes to include shallowest or deepest soundings data in the CUBE Surface 7 Click Next BASE Surface Step 4 CUBE BASE Surface Wizard Step 4 of 4 CUBE Parameters Disambiguation method Initialization Surface v Configuration fault Initialization surface Minimum difference Filter percentage Variance scalar Maximum File Size 49 9 MB 1 Select a disambiguation method from the drop down list 254 Density Locale Density and Locale Initialization Surface These methods are described in DISAMBIGUATION ON PAGE 248 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide CUBE Processing Generating CUBE Surfaces Default Configuration values will be applied unless you select otherwise To apply other configuration options click the Browse button to open the Advanced configuration settings See ADVANCED OPTIONS FOR CUBE suRFACE ON PAGE 255 If you selected nitialization as the method for disambiguation the Initialization Surface check box is automatically selected so you can set values for the filtering tests 2 Type the path and name of an existing BASE Surface or click Sel
87. new File name 3 Select a location for the file and click Save An ASCII text file is created in the specified location CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 237 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands Menu Process gt BASE Surface gt Surface QC Report Pop up QC Report Control window only Holiday Criteria 238 BASE Surface QC Report The BASE Surface Quality Control report lists significant data gaps within the surface It also analyzes how much of your data conforms to the confidence levels set by the S 44 standard for the four orders of survey 1 Select the BASE Surface parent layer in the Control window 2 Select the Surface QC Report command The BASE Surface QC Report dialog box is displayed BASE Surface OC Report Holiday Criteria Holiday search radius 2 Minimum number of nodes 6 C Create holiday layer IHO 5 44 Settings Error values From Greater of the two v Min Depth m Max Depth m Special Order 0 00 100 00 Order ta 0 00 100 00 j Order 1b 0 00 100 00 Order 2 100 00 5000 00 Output file hcad The top section of the dialog box sets the criteria for finding significant data gaps known as holidays A holiday is formed when enough gaps are clustered together within a specified radius You can create a layer that displays these holidays This layer does not display every ga
88. nodes each sounding is applied to is determined by the size of the beam footprint The beam footprint is CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces Four types of BASE surfaces calculated using depth sonar beam width and the grazing angle The sonar that is used with the appropriate beam width is defined in the BASE Surface wizard A list of multibeam systems and corresponding beam widths is listed in Hips System DeviceModels xml The following graph demonstrates range weighting using distance from a node in units of pixels multiples of the BASE Surface resolution 1 20 1 00 0 50 0 60 Weight 0 40 0 20 0 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 10 Range in Pixels Shoalest Depth True Position This BASE surface stores the shoalest depth within a given node in the depth layer It can also create a true position surface layer for which Horizontal and Vertical Uncertainty can be specified as optional output layers If true position data does not exist for the lines selected the surface creation will continue without these attributes If at a later time uncertainty data becomes available a surface recomputation can be invoked and the surface will be updated accordingly CUBE The Combined Uncertainty and Bathymetry Estimator CUBE generates a surface that contains multiple hypotheses representing potential depth variances on the seafloor Examining these hypotheses in Subset Editor you can
89. option to process each line and export a sounding for each line per bin Where line data overlaps this method can give multiple soundings per bin 7 Select an output location for the data Select One File to export all data to a single file or select Multiple Files to export data to separate files for each survey line CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 521 Export Data HIPS To ASCII e Ifyou select One File type a name and file path for the ASCII file or click Browse to select a location and name for the file e Ifyou select Multiple Files click Browse to select a folder to save the files The files are automatically named according to Project_Vessel_Date_SurveyLine 8 Click Next EXPORT ON PAGE 542 522 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data HIPS To CARIS Map HIPS To CARIS Map Export data to a CARIS map HIPS to CARIS Map Step 3 You can select which soundings are to be exported and how they will be stored in the CARIS map a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 7 iY Expoit Soundings Attributes Basic z Feature Code SGSL v User Number fi I Group By Beam Sounding Status IV Accepted M Examined I Outstanding I Rejected I Decimated J Designated Data Binning BinSize io m E By Alex Binning Method ShoslGisssd 7 Bailes Byline coro co The Export Soundings option exports all soundings subject to the sounding status and data b
90. organize the survey data according to this structure you can convert line data from an entire Project or multiple Vessel and Day folders contained in a common Project folder When entire project data has been converted a Project Vessel Day Line directory is created for the converted data If there is already a Project folder that is identical to the preprocess folder then the line data in the existing folder is over written with the new data You must organize your raw data files in a HIPS and SIPS Project Vessel Day structure to convert complete Project Vessel and or Day data files 1 Select a Conversion Wizard command The Conversion Wizard is displayed For more information on how to use the Conversion Wizard see CONVERTING FILEs To HIPS SIPS Format ON PAGE 78 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 23 Workflow in HIPS and SIPS Generic Data Parser Generic Data Parser Menu Import gt Generic Data Parser Tool S wE 24 HIPS can convert almost any single beam ASCII file through the Generic Data Parser The parser can also add or replace any sensor data in an existing project except swath and sweep bathymetry and side scan imagery For example if high precision positions were obtained from a source other than the original raw data files converted into HIPS this data could be loaded into an existing project to replace the original navigation data The new position data must have a tim
91. outline False Colour 200 200 200 X The Extents Coordinate System Projection and Scale fields are read only and cannot be modified You can modify the following properties 3 Set the Show outline check box to True to display a border around the field sheet area 4 Set the Show label check box to True to display the name of the field sheet in the Display window 5 Set Active Field Sheet to True to make one field sheet the active sheet when more than one field sheet is open 6 Select a border Colour from the colour picker or create a custom colour from the standard Windows Colour Palette CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 181 Create Field Sheets Field Sheet Projection Grid Field Sheet Projection Grid Menu Process gt Products gt Projection Grid 182 The Projection Grid feature lets you display a grid of ground projection coordinates within a field sheet The grid will cover the area of the field sheet only To display a grid over the full extent of the display use the Projected Grid option in the Tools gt Options gt Display dialog box See PROJECTED Grip on PAGE 108 in the Reference Guide The projection grid has grid line properties such as thickness shape and colour You can also annotate the grid with the coordinates of your field sheet data and set the look and positioning of these annotations These settings for the grid are saved with the field sh
92. product surface 356 Shoalest Depth True Position about 191 shoalest soundings flag 342 SHOALS format conversion options for 122 shortcut to project 66 Show Alternative Hypotheses 263 Show Rejected 330 330 339 Side Scan Editor open in Mosaic Editor 416 Simrad format conversion options for 122 single beam data restart cleaning 305 view rejected soundings 295 SIPS engine 414 slant range filter in water column data 469 slanted soundings 388 smooth profile line 371 Smooth data with attitude filter 286 SORIND 391 sound velocity correction nearest in distance option 134 nearest in time option 134 previous in time option 134 Sound Velocity Corrections parameters in HVF 33 sound velocity profile options 134 sounding radius table 386 sounding selection conflict resolution 385 Criteria 384 filter 390 new layer 383 Sounding Selection Template 385 soundings Designated 297 export to HOB 529 set radius for critical 304 set status in Subset Editor 339 Special order 159 Stacked view of WCI 462 Starting Level Tile Set 312 315 Status Flag LADS conversion to HIPS 113 Reject Line 294 Status Flags Navigation data 281 used in BASE surface 197 199 subset defined 338 Subset Editor accept data 340 designate shoal soundings 342 examined status flag 340 outstanding status flag 340 query 340 feference surface 350 reject d
93. projected longitude and latitude This dialog selects the appropriate coordinate system to reference the soundings All soundings will be transformed to this coordinate system as they are exported CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 5 of 6 Coordinate System Select UTM Zone Automatically Group kad Zone Hamburger Hafen Zone Iceland Zone Il Ireland Zone Ill Italy Zone IV Japan E Zone Malaysia Zone Yl Mexico Zone Yl Netherlands New Zealand GD49 lt jil AGZN Map Scale 1000 By default the Select UTM Zone Automatically option is selected To set the projection manually 1 Select a projection from the Group list 2 Select a Zone associated with the projection group 3 Click Next CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 541 Export Data Export Export At this step you execute the export of the data with the settings you have chosen If a large amount of data is being exported the dialog box will display the percentage of data exported and the status of the export process CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 5 of 5 Status 1 Click Back to review your settings 2 Click Export to export the data with the settings you ve selected 3 Click Cancel to call off the process A progress indicator shows the percentage of files converted to the selected format When the export is completed the Restart button is displayed to enable you to go back and export anoth
94. range values for the colour map 4 Click OK to save and apply settings The layer objects are displayed according to the colour map settings Reverse colours Select this option to reverse the order in which the colour map is applied see illustration below Colour Map 7 10colours y b a E E iy Colour Map 4 Reverse Colours t oe Pf a abet 10colours me V Reverse Colours F o p r T CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 395 Create Product Surfaces Tiling a field sheet Tiling a field sheet The tiling of a dataset allows for data points in this case geographically referenced soundings to be gathered into tiles depending on user defined statistical criteria Once the tiles have been created products such as contours and selected soundings can be created using the tiles as a height source Generally the tiling process splits a selected area into sections tiles and continues sub dividing until a network of squares cover the data Below is an example of a tiled field sheet in the Display window These tiles are all the same size A special type of tiling is used to track the progress of subset data cleaning See Track ProGress wiTH SuBSET TILES ON PAGE 343 and for performing statistical surface cleaning on sounding data see Statistica SURFACE CLEANING ON PAGE 311 396 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Tiling Binning QTC Tiles Process gt Products gt Tiles New gt Tiles
95. ratio value for the graph The settings for Vertical axis label Fill type Smooth and Lock aspect ratio will be remembered the next time the dialog box is opened 372 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Resize Profile window 3 o Process gt Products gt Profile gt Import Create Product Surfaces Profiles The size of the Profile window can be changed to provide a better view of the profile As the window is re sized the view is automatically scaled and the axes values updated dynamically The vertical axis represents the height source of the profile and can be assigned a name in the Profile Settings dialog box The horizontal axis represents the length of the line feature being used to generate the profile The unit of measure for the values on this axis are controlled by the Horizontal Length setting in Tools gt Options gt Display gt Units For information on re sizing see Display REPOSITION AND RESIZE Windows on PAGE 25 of the HIPS and SIPS Reference Import Profile Profiles saved in a field sheet in earlier versions of HIPS and SIPS may be listed in the Layers tree when the field sheet containing the surface is opened These profiles will be listed by name and can be viewed in the Profile window 1 Right click on the named layer and select Display from the pop up menu 2 Inthe Profile Settings dialog box select a height source and other options as desired 3 Click OK The pro
96. selected data and select Query from the pop up menu to view in the Selection tab To add selected data to the project as additional bathymetry 4 Right click on the selected data and select Add to Additional Bathymetry The data will now appear as additionalBathymetry layers in the Layers tab a MIR HIPS Data Ship Track Lines C 24 Critical Soundings OBE Contacts SMe additionalBathymetry Me Status lt Sample Number Source_Name Time Travel Time Across Track Beam Angle Bottom Detection Intensity Observed Depth Zy Project TE tayers MA Draw order dp Swath Editor As well the Output tab will report the number of WCI samples exported to the bathymetry layer CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Water Column Data WCI Data in Subset Editor WCI Data in Subset Editor In Subset Editor WCI data is loaded as a temporary 3D point cloud Data can be filtered by intensity as well as by a minimum slant range at nadir WCI data in Subset Editor can also be added the the Additional Bathymetry layer and processed in the standard bathymetry workflow To open water column data in Subset Editor 1 Define and load a subset of the data For information on loading a subset see Orpen Susset Epitor AND Loan Data ON PAGE 111 2 Inthe Control window select the Subset Editor tab 3 Inthe Data tree select the Wate
97. slider dialog that you can use to blend a GeoBar into the existing mosaic 2 Move the slider to see the effects of blending When you have a desired blend click Commit 3 To back out of the Blend function without saving click Cancel When a component GeoBaR is opened in Edit tab the Intensity Range fields display the minimum and maxiumum intensity values for the GeoBaR You can adjust these values for the selected GeoBaR as you would for a mosaic See Epit Mosaics ON PAGE 438 You can use Compute Statistics command to generate the statistics for a mosaic attribute layer and output them to an ASCII file or to image See Compute SurFace STATISTICS ON PAGE 232 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 441 Process Imagery Data Interpolate Mosaic Interpolate Mosaic Interpolate Pop up 442 The Interpolate Surface command eliminates small holes that appear in areas of sparse data for example in the outside edges of surveyed areas where there is little or no overlapping coverage This command examines each node in the mosaic surface to determine if it contains a pixel value If the node does not contain a value the neighbouring pixels are examined to determine if enough of them contain pixel values to justify interpolating a value for the hole This limits the interpolation to holes in the mosaic surface and prevents it from expanding the mosaic outward from the survey area A copy of the mosaic surf
98. soundings converted on a per swath basis The thinning factor uses a power of two reduction control 1 2 1 4 1 8 etc so that one of two one of four or one of eight soundings can optionally be converted per swath sector 3 Select the Data Thinning check box to implement the thinning option 4 Select a Thinning Factor value by clicking the up or down arrow buttons 5 Click Next to go to the Convert Side Scan Data dialog box Step 8 Convert Side Scan data If you do not want to convert side scan data click Next and go to CONVERT DATA ON PAGE 94 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 129 Convert Data XTF 130 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 8 TF Convert Side Scan Sonar Channels 12 O34 O14 O23 Navigation from Ping Header Ship Gyro data field Ping Header Sensor C Convert Hidden Data Apply Image Enhancement Note Contact records created in Triton ISIS are also imported into HIPS when associated XTF data is imported To convert side scan data 6 Click the Convert Side Scan check box 7 Select one of four Sonar Channels pairs by clicking the radio button 8 Select one of the following as the source for reading the Navigation data for the towfish e Raw Navigation Records e Position Data Records e Ping Header Ship e Ping Header Sensor Header Navigation Records 9 Select one of the following options from the drop down list as the source for
99. swath No Reson Winfrog ad single beam No XTF xtf multibeam single beam side Yes Reson scan sweep R2Sonic various side scan BA Beam Average TS Time Series CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Select Data Format Select Data Format To start the conversion process activate the HIPS Conversion Wizard 1 Select the Conversion Wizard command in the HIPS and SIPS main 2 File gt Import gt interface Conversion Wizard The first Conversion dialog box is displayed z S8 z The Step 1 dialog box lists the data acquisition systems for which data can be converted to HIPS and SIPS files This list is created dynamically from all format libraries with the name convert_ dll in the Hips Bin directory a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 1 Select Format Name Date Version Coda 10 08 2009 05 45 AM 7 0 0 0 EdgeTech 10 08 2009 05 45 AM 7 0 0 0 Eiva 10 08 2009 04 51 PM 7 0 0 1 Elac 10 08 2009 02 12 PM 7 0 0 0 Furuno 10 08 2009 05 44 AM 7 0 0 0 GeoAcoustics 10 08 2009 05 44 AM 7 0 0 0 GSF 10 08 2009 05 45 AM 7 0 0 0 Hawkeye 10 08 2009 05 39 AM 7 0 0 0 Hypack 10 08 2009 04 51 PM 7 0 0 0 Imagenex 10 08 2009 05 39 4M 7 0 0 0 LADS 10 08 2009 05 42 AM 7 0 0 0 LAS 10 08 2009 05 39 AM 7 0 0 0 MarineS onics 10 08 2009 05 42 AM 7 0 0 0 Navitronics 10 08 2009 05 39 AM 7 0 0 0 Omios 10 08 2009 05 42 AM 7 0 0 0 vi 1 Select the survey data type to be converted by clicking the
100. swath into sectors according to degree angles while the horizontal bin size divides the swath into horizontal sectors based on a specified across track distance Vessel motion and transducer mounting angles are considered when sector angle and horizontal bin locations are determined 3 Select the Sector Angle Interval option and choose a degree level to a maximum of 10 by clicking the up or down arrow buttons 4 Alternatively select the Horizontal Bin Size option choose an across track distance by clicking the up or down arrow buttons Soundings that survive Pre Filtering are sorted according to depth and those that are closest to the mean depth are selected as specified by the Thinning Factor you set Data Thinning is done on a per swath basis based on the set of soundings that are closest to the mean value computed The Thinning Factor reduces the number of soundings on a per swath basis using a powers of two reduction control Setting a factor of for example 4 will mean that the one fourth of the soundings that are closest to the calculated mean will be converted per swath sector 1 Select the Data Thinning check box to implement the thinning option 2 Select a Thinning Factor value by clicking the up or down arrow buttons Values between 2 and 256 may be set values between one half and 256 can be selected CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 105 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 3 Click Next This
101. the HOB files The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed 2 Select a directory to store the HOB data and click OK to close the dialog box The file path is displayed in the Output File field 3 Click Next EXPORT ON PAGE 542 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide HIPS To HTF Hydrographic Transfer Format Hydrographic Transfer Format Template Export Data HIPS To HTF The HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard converts field sheet layer data and soundings to a Hydrographic Transfer Format HTF file The HTF file is an ASCII file that can be opened in any text editor such as Notepad It consists of two sections a header section and a sounding data record The header contains general information about the survey e The sounding data record contains the depths and other relevant information The total number of fields generated in the sounding data record depends on the survey At the start of the sounding data record is a Field Population Key that gives each field a 1 bit to show that a field is included or a 0 bit to show if a field is not included For example 0000111110000000000 In the above Field Population Key fields 5 to 9 contain data hence the 1 bits while fields 1 to 4 and 10 to 20 contain no data hence the 0 bits Fields without data are not written to the HTF file when it is generated There are a total of 20 HTF fields in the sounding data record Two additional fields are added by the Export Wizar
102. the check boxes to activate the value fields so you can type in desired values Limit Select the check boxes to activate the value fields so you can type in desired values CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Create GeoBaR with the Geocoder Engine The Acrosstrack Distance option can also be set to exclude a fixed distance across Acrosstrack Distance track regardless of altitude Min Max Select the check boxes to activate the value fields so you can type in desired values 9 Click OK to return to the Create GeoBaR dialog box 10 Click Cancel to return to the Create GeoBaR dialog box discarding any changes that were made 11 Click Create The new GeoBaR will be displayed in the Display window and listed by name in the Layers tab For description of GeoBaR layer properties see PROPERTIES OF Mosaics AND GEoBaRs on pace 23 of the Editors reference CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 425 Process Imagery Data Beam Pattern Correction Beam Pattern Correction 426 Beam Pattern Correction is applied to remove acoustic artifacts from the imagery caused by imperfections in the sonar Beam pattern correction relies on a user generated beam pattern file to identify and remove this effect Once the beam pattern file is created it can be applied to the survey data to uniformly correct the selected data This also results in a more consistent appearance in imagery Applying Beam
103. to grid Parallel to the grid or at right angles to it 6 Click OK to create the grid A grid of coordinates is generated and displayed in the Display window A Projection Grid layer is added to the Layers tab 62530 2 6253010 j6252948 6252691 6252644 6252742 To change the settings of the projection grid 1 Select the Projection Grid layer in the Layers tab 2 Open the Properties window and select the Settings field CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 185 Create Field Sheets Field Sheet Projection Grid This will open the grid Properties dialog box where attributes other than the extents of the grid can be changed 186 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces The Bathymetry Associated with Statistical Error BASE Surface can be generated to view data for safety of navigation examination of the seafloor Three kinds of BASE surfaces can be created e Uncertainty e Swath angle or for a detailed Combined Uncertainty and Bathymetry Estimator CUBE In this chapter OVERVIEW Four Types OF BASE SURFACES Create A BASE SurFACE PROPERTIES OF BASE SurFACES VERTICAL REFERENCE SYSTEM BASE Surrace COMMANDS BASE Surrace QC REPORT SURFACE FILTERING Create BASE Surfaces Overview Overview A Bathymetry Associated with Statistical Error BASE Surface is a georeferenced image of a multi attributed weighted mean surface A BASE Surface can also contain a
104. to the data format being converted 2 Click Next CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 93 Convert Data Convert Data Convert Data The final step is to launch the conversion process The settings and parameters you have selected are displayed in the dialog box This information can be copied to a text file using the Copy command on the right click menu a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 8 Converter Options Summary Input Coord System WG84 WG84 Conveit Method CreateNew Enable Cany Over Raw Data Fles No Get Nav Filters from the Project File Yes Use Filter Cover No Use Min Max Depth No Pesfoim Advanced Mukibeam Filtering No Convert Bathy Type Dual frequency Convert Hidden Data No Filter by Status Yes Separate Profies Yes Filter Qualty 0 No Filter Qualty 1 Yes Filter Qualty 2 No v C O SS Y To convert the data using the settings 1 Click Convert Conversion progress A progress indicator bar along the bottom of the box is activated as the files are being processed As each line is converted the results of the conversion process are displayed in the dialog box 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 7 Converting Line 0121_20031027_raw all Ship Navigation Converted 50 Filtered 4 Depths Accepted 9866 Rejected by Depth Filter 0 Rejected by Disabled Beam 2 SSS Navigation Converted0 Filtered 0 SSS Profiles Converted 84 This information can also be cop
105. two soundings overlap the shoalest of the two will be selected 1 Set either Shoal Bias or Deep Bias as the method of resolving any conflicts during the selection process 2 Select one of the three criteria from the Selection Criteria drop down list If you select Radius or Overplot Removal the dialog box will display the options associated with those criteria Settings in the wizard can be saved to a Sounding Selection Template CSST file This file can be opened and reused 3 Select the Use template option to open or create a template file that contains sounding selection options 4 Select Load to open an existing template file or select Save to create a new template file from the options you are setting in the wizard 5 Click the Browse button to open a file or create a new file 6 Click Next Radius If you choose Radius as your selection criteria the following option fields are displayed Set tenet tT yet tT Sel ef Steet neg ot se sata meee eer Ce ee Selection Criteria A 3 3 Padus E v Shoal Bias Deep Bias i Options Radius Value is distance on the ground m i O mm at map scale 2 map scale 1 4 use Radius i O Use Radius Table File 3 das ee ee ee CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 385 Create Product Surfaces Sounding Selection The radius value you set either as a specific value or from a radius table file will either be applied as metres on t
106. uncertainty outside the error limit for the survey order or zone of confidence are rejected or accepted To calculate horizontal accuracy the limit for horizontal error m and if applicable the depth percentage for the selected survey order or zone of confidence are compared against a sounding s HzTPU Soundings with a horizontal uncertainty outside the limits are rejected or accepted Values entered in the TPU filter will be retained when the dialog box is closed However you can also save the settings in a HIPS Filter File hff for use on other data 8 Click Save As to save the settings to a filter file 9 Click Close Your filter can now be applied to your data using the Apply Filters command Apply Filter To apply the filtering values set in the Set Filters dialog box Enable the TPU filter by selecting the IHO check box in the 1 Select either the ISO 2 44 or S 57 CATZOC options The IHO frame of the TPU tab is refreshed to display the S 44 survey order options Special Order Orders 1a 1b 2 or the S 57 zones of confidence see above You can apply filtering to a selected depth range by entering the maximum and minimum soundings for that range Leave these fields empty to apply filtering to every sounding along the track line 2 Select the Depth Limit check box to apply the filters to a depth range CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 161 Compute TPU TPU Filtering Menu Tools gt Apply Filter
107. view across track 462 view along track 462 view stacked 462 WCI controls in Subset Editor 469 in Swath Editor 466 WCI playback 464 WCI see water column imagery 459 Windows shortcut to link to data 66 Winfrog format conversion options for 124 Wireframe Hypotheses 261 workflow data cleaning in Subset Editor 338 imagery processing 413 to create vessel file 27 workflow diagram 16 workflow multibeam 17 workflow side scan data 412 X XTF format conversion options for 126 ship navigation source 126 Z ZDF load 144 zerotide 146 Zone Definition File 147
108. visual representation of horizontal and vertical uncertainty An example of a BASE Surface image is shown below The BASE Surface is used for the following purposes asa background visual aid when cleaning data interactively or automatically to create a georeferenced TIFF that can be exported to other software such as real time navigation systems to export data as an XYZ text file so it can be imported as soundings in a CARIS map or used to build digital terrain models in other software asa Product Surface that can be used to build contours sounding selections profiles and other data layers This data can later be used to create an ENC or raster chart asa quality control feature for data By viewing the uncertainty values for nodes you can identify bad data and determine if an area needs to be re surveyed A BASE Surface file is saved within the CARIS Spatial ARchive CSAR framework This file contains the metadata for the surface 188 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces Four types of BASE surfaces Four types of BASE surfaces Four different surface types can be created e Uncertainty uses a weighting scheme based on depth uncertainty as specified by a selected S 44 survey order Swath angle uses a weighting scheme based on a beam s intersection angle with the seafloor Shoalest Depth True Position stores the shoalest depth within a given node in the depth layer The tru
109. window are retained in the session file Highlight the Critical Soundings layer in the Layers tab Open the Properties window Highlight a status field in the example below Designated is selected Set anew colour from the drop down list ar O N Refresh the Display These settings are saved when you save your session and will be applied when the session is re opened Properties E General Examined colour C160 160 164 Outstanding colour GE JerightGreen Designated colour 255 128 0 v Font Arial 8 pt To limit the type of critical soundings visible in the Display window for example to display only the Designated soundings 1 Highlight the Critical Soundings layer in the Layers tab 2 Open the Properties window 3 Remove the check mark from the check box for the status types you don t want to view leaving the desired status type active as in the illustration above To change the type face and font size of the soundings CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Designate Critical Soundings from a Surface 4 Highlight the Font field in the Properties window and click the browse button to select from the standard Font dialog box These settings are saved when you save your session Outdated layer If changes are made to the Critical Soundings layer the icon for that layer will indicate that the layer is outdated To update the Critical Soundings layer 1 Right click on the layer
110. with NULL beams check box so that the soundings associated with transducer 1 are padded to have 63 beams 8 Click Next Furuno 1 Make sure the Convert Side Scan option is checked to include side scan data with the bathymetric data CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 103 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats GeoAcoustics 1 In the Nav Source field select Any GPS String or GGK GGA or GGL 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 7 Nay Source Any GPS Sting OGGK OGGA OGLL C Convert Aux1 data as delta draft V Amplitude Filtering 110 A v V Range Filtering Om S ig to 400m S e gt Pre Filtering Threshold sigma 95 44 Bin size yp 0 a a Sector Angle ene 1 0m Fees je Data Thinning Thinning Factor 4 E 2 If you want to convert data from Aux1 as delta draft select the Convert Aux1 data as delta draft option Amplitude Filtering The Amplitude Filtering option filters soundings according to amplitude value For each ping port and starboard pings are handled separately the min max amplitude values are obtained and samples that fall below the selected percentage 0 50 are rejected 3 Select the Amplitude Filtering check box to implement this option 4 Click the up or down arrow buttons to select a percentage for rejecting soundings Range Filtering The Range Filtering option converts soundings within a specified slant range as determined by t
111. 0 e LIDAR Data In HIPS on PAGE 28 In this User Guide e Process ImacerY Data on PAGE 411 backscatter and sidescan imagery workflow e PROCESSING WorRKFLOW FOR Water CoLumn DaTA ON PAGE 461 Since some data does not require all processing steps and some data can require repetition of one or more steps to produce a 16 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Workflow in HIPS and SIPS Workflow diagram final product this general workflow can be adapted to specific situations and data types The order in which certain functions are performed is important however many of the functions can be automated with the Batch Processor see BATCH PROCESSING ON PAGE 95 Overview of workflow stages CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create a Vessel File Create or edit vessel information on sensor locations and uncertainties See Create a New HVF on PAGE 27 Create a new project Set up the Project Vessel Day data structure See Derine New PROJECT ON PAGE 58 Convert raw data Convert data into HIPS data format using automated process See Convert Data ON PAGE 77 Save session Save the current workspace data and current view See Session FILES ON PAGE 21 Optional Sound Velocity Correction SVC Load and edit sound velocity profiles and apply the correction See Sounp VeLociTy CORRECTION ON PAGE 136 Load tide Load tide data from one or more tide stations to correct for tide varian
112. 1 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands Menu Process gt BASE Surface gt Recompute Tool 2 222 1 Select a Surface name in the field sheet file tree so it is highlighted 2 Select the Recompute BASE Surface command Only the track lines used previously in the Surface are processed during rebuilding The Recompute operation checks to see if the surface makes use of HIPS data that is no longer present If data is missing a dialog box lists what is missing You then have the option of terminating the Recompute process or continuing without the missing data If you choose to continue the replacement surface will have the missing data lines removed from its list of contributing lines When recomputing a CUBE BASE Surface all CUBE Surface editing including nominations hypothesis and node rejections are considered no longer valid and will thus not be retained after recomputation of the BASE Surface Interpolate BASE Surface The Interpolate command eliminates small holes that appear in areas of sparse data This sometimes happens in the outermost beams along the outside edges of surveyed areas where there is little or no overlapping coverage This command examines each Surface node to determine if it contains a pixel value If the node does not contain a value the neighbouring pixels are examined to determine if enough of them contain pixel values to justify interpolating a value for the hole
113. 33 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands Compute Statistics Input Dataset D CARIS HIPS 70 Fieldsheets 444_Demo1 OctSisda csar Attribute layer Std_Dev Feature layer N A Attribute value bin size 0 1 m Statistics Mininum 0 m Maximum 15 79 m Mean 3 55 m rea NJA Std_dev 2 78 m Total count 8 993 400 5 10 15 20 Std_Dev m Image Export ASCII Export To save these statistics export them to image or ASCII formats When exporting to an image format only the histogram is exported When exporting to ASCII the Input Statistics and histogram data will all be exported See Export HISTOGRAM TO IMAGE ON PAGE 234 and Export STATISTICS TO ASCII on PAGE 237 for more information 7 Click OK to close the dialog box when finished Export Histogram to Image Use the Image Export option in the statistics results dialog box to export an image of the current histogram as PDF Portable Document Format PS PostScript SVG Scalable Vector Graphics TIFF Tagged Image File Format To export an image of the histogram 1 Click Image Export The Export dialog box is displayed 234 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands E General Options File Name No extension H11 2010 1_Std_Dey Output Directory D CARIS HIPS Fundy4 Output File Format TIFF Tagged Image File Format El TIFF Options Image Resolution DPI 300 Width Pixels 1416 Height Pixels 472 I
114. 415 Process Imagery Data Open Mosaic Editor Open Mosaic Editor Tools gt Mosaic Editor gt Open Menu Tool Side Scan Editor Tools gt Side Scan Editor gt Open Menu wll Tool 416 To open Mosaic Editor 1 Select the Open Mosaic Editor command The Mosaic Editor and Beam Pattern toolbars are displayed The Control Window now displays the three control tabs of Mosaic Editor The Mosaic Editor and Beam Pattern toolbars are also displayed For a description of the Mosaic Editor interface see Mosaic EDITOR in the Editors guide To see a waterfall display at the same time as your georeferenced imagery you can open Side Scan Editor as well as Mosaic Editor 1 Open Mosaic Editor 2 Select a single trackline and open Side Scan Editor The Side Scan Editor window will open displaying the waterfall view CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Create GeoBars Create GeoBars GeoBaRs are created using the options selected in the Process tab of the Mosaic Editor Different options are available depending on the processing engine selected You can create multiple GeoBaRs on a survey line to Correct multiple sources of data 1 e time series beam averaged and or side scan from the same file if applicable Have different resolutions per GeoBaR e Visually compare data The simplest way to create a GeoBaR is to use the default values di
115. 459 e CREATE PUBLICATIONS ON PAGE 475 e Export DATA ON PAGE 479 For processing of single beam data please see PROCESS SINGLE BEAM DATA ON PAGE 89 in the Editors Guide For processing of LIDAR data please see PRocess LIDAR Data on PAGE 27 of the Editors Guide Please be advised that some 64 bit versions of third party libraries remain unavailable at this time Therefore the following capabilities will not be available in the 64 bit version of HIPS and SIPS Navitronics format conversion Hawkeye waveform viewer If any of the above capabilities are required you will need to use the 32 bit version of HIPS and SIPS Table of Contents Workflow in HIPS and SIPS 0000 eens 15 Workflow diagram ic4s00014ecs ceeded eee eaae ead eee 16 Overview of workflow stageS 000 cece ee eee 17 HIPS Vessel FileS 0 0 2 0 00 cece eee eee 19 Working with Projects 0ds4estes sce4 ee eu4ogen eens 20 Session Files 2 wished ne Whee Shake ahaa en ba PRO aes 21 Convert Survey Data csicu us oekaki eee ved eteads oeeud es 23 Generic Data Parser 0 000 cece eee eee eens 24 Create Vessel File 0c c cece ee eee 25 Vessel Files srrscrsari skorne pinis cade thane P RREI R ea 26 Create a New HVF 0 cece eee 27 Open the Vessel Wizard 0 araea 27 Vessel Information n n anaana 28 Type of Survey annann aanne 28 Multibeam aaa 29 Multi Transduce
116. 6 the final sounding depth and geographical position needs to be calculated This is done in the Merge process Trackline data must be Merged before BASE surfaces can be created and before surface cleaning can be performed Merge takes into consideration pertinent vessel configuration offsets and the following values many of which are set in the HIPS Vessel file Navigation Gyro based on the settings in the HIPS Vessel file Dynamic draft based on the settings in the HIPS Vessel file Smoothed sensor data Waterline if not applied in the SVC process Motion data Heave Pitch and Roll if not applied in the SVC process Tide or GPS tide Delta draft Refraction coefficients Observed depths CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Tide Observed Depths Navigation Gyro Heave Pitch Rol CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Merge Merge Process N Depth to Transform chartdatum Depth Positions lt a 2 ua Across Track 00 E Nav tion T gt Along Track O to O Lat Long D interpolated a gt E w P 1 2 Z S Interpolated 0 Heave a O interpolated EO ah F gt Interpolated Roll The following operations take place when merging Recorded sensor information is compensated for constant time errors as noted in the vessel file For each time tagged depth record the position for the centre of the swath profile is calculated based on the interpolated po
117. 8 Advanced Mode 222 6skevsee ieee eee ee bescietans 450 Grain Size WAGs st 52522 es 6 owes heen Kardon eee e 451 Model Parameters 2200 cee eee eee 451 Sediment Analysis Graph 0 0000 c eee eee 453 View Sediment Patches 2000 eee ee 454 View Sediment Analysis Overlay 200005 455 Contacts naaa shana lic ac a aod a Wi hed RS eh ae aa dS 457 Process Water Column Data 20005 459 Water Column Data in HIPS 0 000 460 PIQGCS 23 22 0teus be vere eee deveenes os ened eeun ee 460 Processing Workflow for Water Column Data 461 Water Column Data in Swath Editor 462 Display water column data 0 00 e eee eee 463 Automatic scrolling 0 0 eee 464 Water Column Toolbar soseccaeseteeutigewsgetoaceas 465 WCI Controls in Swath Editor 2 0000 eee 466 Stacked VIEW sc sw cher ee hein ake way heey ee keds 466 Add WC Bathymetry to Project 00 000 468 19 20 WCI Data in Subset Editor 00002 469 Display options 26btidcaees ctaaiGeouss sanduead 471 Survey lINGS c53 4 sceda dye eheiw ab ew Se bieda ones 472 Additional Bathymetry 000 eee eee eee 473 Create Publications 0 00 0 eee ee eens 475 Plot Composer 22h ces ce Ge heSGh es betGeetegaeesdosess 476 Export Dalia sisccvteueers dota tee teow ane 479 Export to S 57 25 sock ckvenkewedta Sin
118. 9 52 585W Note that for positions in the northern hemisphere longitude West values are negative in the southern hemisphere the South latitude values are negative For example a position near Portsmouth NH USA is 43 04 23 03 070 42 51 89 A position near Sydney Australiais 33 51 00 84 151 11 43 7 6 Specify the precision for the display of position values by using the Precision up or down arrow buttons to set the number of digits to be displayed to the right of the decimal point 7 Select the BASE Surface attribute values to be recorded in the ASCII file by selecting the attribute in the Available column and clicking Add to move it to the Active column 8 To remove an attribute select the attribute from the Active column and click Remove to move it back to the Available column 9 Choose a Attribute Precision value number of digits to the right of decimal point for an attribute in the Active column by selecting an attribute and clicking the up or down arrow buttons 10 Select the Headers check box to print attribute names at the top of the attribute rows in the output file 11 Select either Space Comma or Tab from the list to use these characters to separate fields in the output file If you select Other type a character to use a delimiter Click Next Select Export Units This dialog box sets the unit type for recording data The fields that are active in this dialog are determined by the attributes selected in th
119. ASE surface to Subset Editor and apply filtering to the part of the surface within the subset slice or to the part of the surface defined within the full subset Surface Filter Subset Editor 20 30 DP surface a 5 1 Open a BASE surface 2 Open Subset Editor and define a subset over the BASE surface See Open SusgseT Epitor AND Loan DATA ON PAGE 111 3 Load the subset 4 Select the Reference Surface layer in the Subset Editor tab 5 Select the BASE Surface Depth layer from the Select Surface file tree in the Properties 6 Click Load When the surface is loaded the Surface Filter button on the Subset Editor toolbar is activated 7 Select the Surface Filter command The Surface Filter dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Data in Subsets Subsets and BASE Surfaces Surface Filter Select Layer SA Jan30 13 l CUBE29 Jan6 13 bf Fundy47 B SZ Jani6 13 Threshold Type Static Value Threshold value 2 00 m C Include data previously rejected by Surface Filter C Reject soundings that do not fall on the surface Filter Slice C Filter Full Subset Once you select the surface in Reference Surface it is selected in the Filter dialog box and cannot be changed 8 Select the Threshold Type from the drop down list e Standard Deviation e Uncertainty e Greater of the two e Lesser of the two e Static Value 9
120. Accepted 1 Select the data so it is highlighted 2 Select the Accept command The previously rejected data is now flagged as Accepted CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 277 Data QC Examine Navigation Data Examine Navigation Data Menu Tools gt Navigation Editor Tool 278 Navigation outliers can affect the final positions of soundings during the Merge process Therefore the navigation data should but is not required to be be examined and cleaned for outliers In Navigation Editor you can examine track lines to accept or reject and query data as necessary There are two methods for locating navigation outliers e Examine the track lines and time graphs that show the computed speed distance and course made good between navigation points Find speed and time jumps using the search functions in the Navigation Editor tab in the Control window See NavicaTion EDITOR TAB ON PAGE 46 To edit lines in Navigation Editor 1 Select a track line in the Display window 2 Select the Navigation Editor command Navigation Editor time graphs open in the HIPS and SIPS interface and display relevant speed distance and course made good data for the selected line CARIS HIPS and SIPS Navigation Editor it Tdi aa TO een A cree mas TNT TT adil Distance m CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Examine Navigation Data 3 Select data in either the Display window or th
121. Available Data Layers lt 2 Contours34 C26 Soundings427 Data Set Location Browse Navigational Purpose fi Overview z Data Set Name 1 Comments Cancel Help 4 Select a data layer to export from the list of available layers 5 Type the full path or click Browse to enter the full path to the data 6 Choose a Navigational Purpose layer from the drop down list of chart types Type a 5 character data set name for the file This name will be appended to the characters displayed to the right of the field 1C1 in this example Click OK CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Export Surface Metadata Export Surface Metadata Save the metadata from a CSAR surface to a 19115 19139 compliant metadata file Metadata can be viewed in the Properties tab for the selected surface See View SURFACE PROPERTIES ON PAGE 204 The metadata file is saved in XML format 1 Select the surface in the Layers tab File gt Export gt 2 Select File gt Export gt Surface Metadata command Surface Metadata Menu The Save As dialog box is displayed A default file name is displayed created from the name of the selected surface with the word metadata appended to it as in BASE421_metadata xml 3 Optional Type a name for the metadata file The default location for the exported file is CARIS gt HIPS gt version gt Session CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 481
122. BaRs Process Analysis Edit Active Mosaic None Intensity Range Min 42 52 dB Max eean Brightness Contrast visibility Options Intensity i Draw Order amp Pro MA Layers M pra Exte er i Mosaic E Editing The Intensity Range fields show the minimum and maximum intensity values for the selected GeoBaR 1 To adjust brightness move the sliders to the right or left to change the intensity of the image 2 To adjust contrast slide the Contrast slider to the right for more contrast and to the left for less contrast As you move the sliders new values are displayed in the Intensity Range fields Use Reset to restore the GeoBaR to the original intensities it had when it was created 3 Use the Visibility Options to turn on or off the various child layers of the GeoBaR 4 Manipulate the Draw Order of the GeoBaR using the Top Bottom Up and Down buttons This will change the layer at which the GeoBaR is drawn in the Display window This function can be important if you intend to make your final mosaic using the Overwrite method CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 430 Process Imagery Data Edit GeoBaRs Image Classification Image classification groups return signal intensities represented in the mosaic as pixel values into classes These classes are displayed in the mosaic using specific colours To determine the range of intensities 1 S
123. CARIS HIPS and SIPS 8 1 User Guide Trademarks CARIS CARIS software and the CARIS logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of CARIS All other registered trademarks or trademarks are property of their respective owners Data courtesy of the Shallow Survey Conference Common Data Set 2001 CCOM UNH Acknowledgements The development of HIPS and SIPS as a modern and powerful bathymetric and side scan sonar processing system was made possible through the cooperation of several organizations The Canadian Hydrographic Service CHS The Ocean Mapping Group of the University of New Brunswick The National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA University of New Hampshire Cover images from left to right Burrard Inlet Pockmarks image courtesy of Kalman Czotter Canadian Hydrographic Service Burns Harbour North Breakwater Indiana image courtesy of Alexander Unrein David Somers Ocean Surveys Inc Shipwreck of GB Church EM3002 data provided by University of New Brunswick Ocean Mapping Group CARIS CARIS bv Global Headquarters Mer van Oorschotstraat 13 115 Waggoners Lane Fredericton NB Canada E8B 2L4 Phone 1 506 458 8533 English French Spanish Fax 1 506 459 3849 Email info caris com Assistance support caris com Web site www caris com CARIS USA 415 N Alfred Street Alexandria VA United States 22314 Phone 1 708 299 9712 Fax 1 708 299 9715 Email carisusa caris c
124. CE GUIDE Contacts Step 3 1 Select the Export Image check box to export the contact s in TIFF image format 2 If you select Export Image select from the following image formats e Mosaic This option creates a georeferenced TIFF image from contact data e Speed Corrected This option calculates the distance between profile lines in the contact and corrects for vessel speed e Uncorrected This option does not correct for vessel speed and renders a one to one correspondence between the side scan image and the contact 3 To export the colour map that was selected in the Side Scan Editor select the Use Colour Map Specified in Contact File 4 To export the contact with a new colour map select the Use Other Colour Map option and select the map from the drop down list The selected colour map is displayed in the Preview field 5 Select the directory location for the contact You can select from two options CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Contacts a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 5 Export Images C Mosaic C Speed Corrected C Uncorrected Image colour map HotMetal z Preview Contact Repository Save images in the line directory Save images in user defined directory Save Images in the Line Directory This option saves the contact data to the line file in the HIPS SIPS Project Vessel Day directory structure that you selected in the second dialog box
125. CII Export command The Export Profile to ASCII dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 377 Create Product Surfaces Profiles Destination Coordinates 378 Export Profile to ASCII Destination Single file Multiple files Output folder Filename prefix L Coordinates Coordinate system WG84 Lad Units Degrees Minutes v W Precision Order Long Lat v Muhonen me ae amA n MaM PP emah If you have created a profile line on multiple layers you have the option of exporting the profile as one file or to one file for each layer To export to a single file 3 Select Single File and click Browse to select the destination folder 4 Type a name for the file When you export to multiple files the ASCII files will be named with a combination of the surface name and layer name You can add a prefix to the file name The format of the filename with this option enabled is Prefix SurfaceName LayerName txt 5 Select the Multiple Files output option 6 Click Browse to select the output folder 7 Optional Enter a Filename prefix to add to each file name By default the Geographic Lat Lon WGS84 coordinate system is set as the coordinate system for the output If you change the coordinate system here the new system will be set the next time the Export to ASCII command is used 8 Optional Click Browse to select another output co
126. Compute TPU Total Propagated Uncertainty Total Propagated Uncertainty 154 Total Propagated Uncertainty TPU is derived from a combination of all individual error sources The following errors among others contribute to TPU nav gyro heave pitch roll tide errors e latency error estimate e sensor offset error estimates individual sonar model characteristics TPU is essential for the following functions creating S 44 or S 57 compliant datasets see TPU FILTERING ON PAGE 159 calculating Bathymetry Associated with Statistical Error BASE Surfaces weighted by uncertainty see UNCERTAINTY WEIGHT ON PAGE 189 Error values are located in the vessel file for the survey and the DeviceModels xml file in HIPS System Other errors are directly entered in the Compute TPU dialog box The following sonar error models in the DeviceModels xml have been tested by the University of New Hampshire UNH Atlas Hydrosweep DS e Elac Nautik 1180 Seabeam 2112 Teledyne Reson SeaBat 8101 Teledyne Reson SeaBat 9001 Teledyne Reson SeaBat 9003 Teledyne Reson SeaBat 8125 Simrad EM300 Simrad EM1000 Simrad EM1002 Simrad EM3000 Simrad EM3000D Other sonars listed in the file may make assumptions that could produce less rigorous results than these error models supplied by UNH CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Compute TPU Total Propagated Uncertainty The Compute TPU function must be perf
127. Creating Tiles and Cleaning Data Creating Tiles and Cleaning Data Tools gt Surface Cleaning Menu Tool So New gt Surface Cleaning Popup 314 Data must be merged before surface cleaning can be performed 1 Select a field sheet 2 Select a Surface Cleaning command The Surface Cleaning dialog box is displayed B Surface Cleaning 92 81 a Elccning Cleaning True E Options Shallow threshold 3 0 sigma 99 74 Deep threshold 3 0 sigma 99 74 Minimum residual 1 Include previously rejected True E FieldSheet Select field sheet E Tiling Tile file name By density True Minumum soundings per tile 500 By size True Minumum tile size 3 Filtering Surface Parameters Cleaning Cleaning properties By default the dialog box fields are listed by category To view these fields in alphabetical order 3 Click on the Alphabetical button in the toolbar CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Statistical Surface Cleaning Creating Tiles and Cleaning Data 2 Z de Lo Categorized Alphabetical Quick Print Print Preview Cleaning 4 Set the Cleaning check box to True to enable the surface cleaning functions 5 Enter cleaning Options as needed in the following fields The sigma value is a multiple of the standard deviations of residuals in the tile The equivalent confidence values are displayed as a percentage e Shallow threshold The threshold above the polynomia
128. Depth Mean Shoal Std_Dev Bounding Polygon amp Hypothesis_Count Hypothesis_Strength Node_Std_ Dev Uncertainty User_Nominated C Interpolated V Jant ALLII Jain Attribute layers 000000 g 4 lt GROUP Sources BASE surface layers When a surface is added to an existing group the properties of the first of each type of attribute layer included in the group are applied to all other attribute layers of the same type For example if the Depth layer for the grouped surfaces has Filter values set the Depth layer for a surface added to the group will display data within the filter range regardless of its settings before it was added to the group CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create a group Group gt Create New Pop up Add surface to group Group gt group name Pop up Remove a surface from a group Group gt None Pop up Ungroup up 5 Group gt Create New Pop Create BASE Surfaces Group multiple surfaces To group multiple surfaces 1 Right click on a surface parent layer in the Layers tab 2 Select the Create New command from the Group item on the pop up menu The New Group dialog box is displayed 3 Type a name for the group layer in the Group Name field 4 Click OK The group is created in the Layers tree and the selected surface is added to the group
129. Designate Soundings in HIPS Editors To flag a shallow sounding as the shoalest 1 Open either Single Beam Swath or Subset Editor and load data 2 Select the shallowest sounding from a cluster of soundings around a shoal feature 3 Select the Designate command The sounding will be flagged as Designated in the Selection tab and highlighted in the editors by a special symbol as shown in the zoomed in view below CARIS HIPS 3D Subset Editor Ei The Find Designated command automatically selects the shallowest sounding in cluster of highlighted soundings This CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Menu Find Designated Edit gt Status Flag gt Ta Tool Data QC Designate Critical Soundings from a Surface feature reduces the time needed to designate shallowest soundings To automatically find and designate the shallowest sounding 1 Use the cursor to highlight soundings in Swath Single Beam or Subset Editor 2 Optional Use the Query command to view the soundings in the Selection tab 3 Select the Find Designated command View Critical Soundings in HIPS Editors To view critical soundings in an editor such as Swath Editor use the two part Display Filter button on the View tool bar This control will display data in Accepted Designated and other critical sounding states Use the right half of the button to set which data to display When the left half of the button is depressed the s
130. EIVA binary multibeam single beam No format or XTF Elac _ multibeam single beam side No scan Furuno ear multibeam single beam side No scan GeoAcoustics rdf Dual frequency side scan GeoSwath GeoSwath ssr ssi ssp simultaneous swath multibeam Yes Plus side scan GSF Generic Sensor gsf multibeam Yes all formats Format Hawkeye bin LIDAR No Hypack Asx multibeam single beam side Yes HSX 81X scan sweep HSX 7k HSX R2S HSX Imagenex 83p 83m multibeam side scan No LADS rr LIDAR No LAS a public binary las LIDAR No format for LIDAR data Marine Sonics MS Tiff files side scan No Navitronics raw multibeam single beam sweep No QMips a side scan No Teledyne Reson PDS pds s7k multibeam Yes s7k only BA TS SAS img swath No Scripps o swath side scan No SDF sdf side scan No Seaflacon multibeam No Seabeam rr multibeam No SEGY Sas side scan No SHOALS out hof tof LIDAR No CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 79 Convert Data Formats that can be converted to HIPS and SIPS 80 A Data types processed in Geocoder File Format File extensions HIPS and SIPS Support Simrad all out raw depth multibeam single beam side Yes BA TS for mb57 scan all data only Spawar dat swath No Swathplus Submetrix SXP files sxp multibeam side scan No SXT Sxi Teledyne tdy swath side scan No UNB swathed files merged
131. ES ON PAGE 320 Query TILE DISPLAY ON PAGE 321 Select and View Tile Data To see data about the tiles created for surface cleaning 1 Open surface cleaning tiles in the Display window 2 Select the tile layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 3 In the Display window select tiles to be queried The data for the selected tiles is automatically displayed in the Selection tab including among other attributes X and Y coordinates for the centre of the tile Z mean Z minimum and maximum Res mean and Res Sigma Count of the number of soundings within the tile area and the number of Rejected soundings within the tile area Tule level and tile size Query Soundings in Tiles To view data on the soundings in selected tiles 1 Open surface cleaning tiles in the Display window 2 Select the tile layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 3 In the Display window select tiles over the soundings to be queried 4 Select the Query Tile Soundings command The data for each sounding in the selected tiles is displayed in the Selection tab As well as the Project Vessel Day Line data for each sounding other attributes are also displayed such as X and Ycoordinates for the soundings Profile Beam and Status data Depth depth of sounding Surface Depth depth of polynomial surface at the location of the sounding CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Statistical Surface Cleaning Query data i
132. Filters command is used 7 Select the standard to apply either IHO S 44 or IHO S 57 CATZOC and complete data in the appropriate fields Depending on which you select the dialog box is refreshed to display the options associated with that standard M IHO S 44 Standard l Depth Limit IHO S 44 Minimum m C IHO 57 CATZOC Maximum m A gan b ono Special Order 0 250 0 008 2000 0 C Order1a 0 500 003 5 000 E C Order 1b 0500 om3 f S000 C Order 2 1 000 0023 20 000 10 000 User defined 0 250 0 008 2000 oa M IHO S 57 Standard T Depth Limit C IHO S 44 Minimum La m IHO S 57 CATZOC Maximum m Mee i a Honzoal Pig Moso 100 5000 C User defined 0 250 1 005 2000 Each survey order or zone of confidence contains the following fields a constant depth error i e the sum of all constant errors CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Depth error limit Horizontal error limit Compute TPU TPU Filtering b factor of the depth dependent error e m position limit for horizontal errors 9 percentage of depth used to calculate horizontal error S 44 only To calculate the error limits for depth accuracy the constant depth error a and the factor of the depth dependent error b are combined with depth d and the depth dependent error b d in the following formula Error limit for depth accuracy 7 b x d When the filter is run soundings with a vertical
133. G to ASCII Data from a Bathymetric Attributed Grid BAG file can be exported using the BASE Surface to ASCII options 1 Open the Export Wizard 2 Select BASE Surface to ASCII from the list in the Step 1 dialog box 3 Click Next 4 Select the BAG surface from the layer tree at Step 2 5 Click Next See BASE Surrace To ASCII on pace 498 To export metadata for the BAG surface 1 Open the BAG file as background data File gt Export gt 2 Select the BAG layer Surface Metadata 3 Select the Export Surface Metadata command The Save As dialog box will auto fill the File name field with the name of the BAG file with _metadata added to the file name You can type an alternate name 4 Click Save CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 497 Export Data BASE Surface To ASCII BASE Surface To ASCII Export BASE Surface attributes to an ASCII text file BASE Surface to ASCII Step 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 5 Output File Pasition Units v Precision Surface Attributes Fj Deep C Include Headers In Output Delimiter C Hypothesis_Count Tab C Hypothesis_Strength 1 44 Attribute Precision Depth 3 g Type the path and file name for the output file or Browse to the destination folder v No Type the file name and click Save w Select the Position Units for data from the drop down list
134. ILES AND CLEANING Data ON PAGE 314 SUBSET CLEANING ON PAGE 339 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Workflow SWATH CLEANING ON PAGE 324 e filters Protect CRITICAL SOUNDINGS ON PAGE 304 e ATTITUDE FILTER ON PAGE 286 e TPU FILTERING ON PAGE 159 SINGLE BEAM FILTERING ON PAGE 105 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 271 Data QC Tools for examining and editing data Tools for examining and editing data 272 There are a number of tools available to assist examining soundings and in tracking the progress of data cleaning For example you can examine information about one or more selected track lines Query DATA ON PAGE 273 set a flag to indicate the type of survey line CLassiFy Lines ON PAGE 293 reject an entire track line to remove it from processing REJECT LINE ON PAGE 294 show selected types of rejected soundings View REJECTED SOUNDINGS ON PAGE 295 preserve and highlight shallowest soundings CriticaL SOUNDINGS ON PAGE 297 easily view Designated Examined and Outstanding soundings when working with a large data set CRITICAL SOUNDINGS ON PAGE 297 reverse previous depth cleaning by re setting status flags from Rejected to Accepted RESTART CLEANING ON PAGE 305 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Query Data Query Data Line information such as project and date of survey and status o
135. Load Attitude Navigation Data Process gt Load Attitude Navigation Data Reference Week Load attitude and navigation data from Applanix POS MV or POSProc files to selected track lines Applanix POS MV files and Applanix POSProc files contain real time attitude navigation and RMS error values recorded during survey 1 Select one or more track lines 2 Select the Load Attitude Navigation command The Load Navigation Attitude Data dialog box is displayed Load Navigation Attitude Data File List Remove Reference Week Default Import Data C Navigation seconds Cl Gyro seconds C Pitch seconds C Roll seconds CGPS Height seconds Options C Load data for lines that are only partially covered Allow gap between data records max 0 0400 seconds _ Apply Time offset seconds _ Apply Time Buffer eel seconds 3 Click Add to select the files by browsing to their location e You can load either POS MV files OR load POSProc files but not both at the same time 4 To remove a file from the File List select the file and click Remove You can specify a specific calendar date to override the year and Julian date that forms part of the SBET file name This can also be used to accommodate a GPS week roll over event The rollover cannot span more than 7 days CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 291 Data QC Load Attitude Navigation Data Import Data Options Windo
136. N 146 TIDE ZONE FILE Sutrisna ia 146 GPS IDE zoana A 149 Correct for Tide Load Tide Load Tide Tidal observation data must be loaded for every track line before the Merge process can be executed Tide data is used to generate final depths relative to the tide datum by subtracting the tide from the sounding depth There are two options for tide loading load a tid file to apply tide observations from a single station For information on these files see Tipe FILES on PAGE 146 load a zdf file to apply tide observations from multiple tide stations to a tide zone For information on these files see Tipe ZONE FILES ON PAGE 146 To apply tide observation data to selected HIPS track lines 1 Select the track line s 2 E 2 Select the Load Tide command The Load Tide dialog box is displayed 8 Load Tide Tide File _Di HIPS dataa TidelH_11014CORF 2dF C Weighted averaging C Compute errors 3 Click Browse to choose a tide tid file single station data or a tide zone zdf file 4 Click Open The tide file name is displayed in the field 5 Optional To revise the contents either type of tide file click Edit to open the Tide Editor If you are loading a tide zone zdf file you have the option of applying weighted averaging from multiple tide stations Weighted Averaging gives priority to data from the closest tide station 6 Select the Weighte
137. PS and SIPS User Guide 145 Correct for Tide Tide Files Tide Files 146 When tide observations from a sing e station are applied to a track line or lines the time extent of the line s is used The illustration below shows tide values from a single station applied to three selected track lines based on the time each line was recorded 0 55 09 0 oie 04 1 z 13 49 5 203 01 bh a 4 gt Line Line 24 Line 57 Time gt Tide data from a single station is loaded from files with the extension tid These files can be created or edited in a text editor such as Notepad or with the Tide Editor HIPS supports a standard Canadian Hydrographic Service tide format called COWLIS as well as two NOS NOAA formats and the NHS file format HIPS also supports a basic format consisting of just the required date time and tide values Track lines in areas without water level changes such as rivers or lakes must also have a tide file In this case or if tidal data cannot be obtained a zero tide file where all tide time values are zero is used so merging can proceed All tide files including zerotide tid are located by default in Hips ver Tide For more detail see Tipe Fite Formats on PAGE 147 in the Reference Guide Tide Zone Files When tide observations from multiple tide stations are applied to a line or lines tide zones are used Where a survey line falls within two or more t
138. Partially Complete and 2 Complete is displayed in each tile Edit tiled subset data Once the tracking tiles are created you can examine and edit the data by opening Subset Editor and defining a subset See Open Susset Epitor ann Loan Data on Pace 111 You can clean data from the open subset see Susset CLEANING ON PAGE 339 You can track the progress of cleaning by the colours of the tiles or by selecting the tiles and viewing status in the Selection tab of the Worksheet window Tracking Layer Options The layer containing the tracking tiles has options which can be set in the Subset Editor tab of the Control window see Susset Epitor Tas on pace 115 1 Select the Tracking layer in the Subset Editor tab The tab is refreshed to display the tracking options Data ay HIPS Data ty 2D View ty 3D View Reference Surface CUBE Hypothesis Tracking Properties M Subset Snapping a B plymount2004 B track P Fundy69 l SubsetTiles20m Fundy 15m Tie overlap 10 H Apply Subset Tracking Automatically mark as complete Mark all Subset Tile layers Mark Subset Tile layer selected in the Layer Tree Mark only snap target CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 347 Process Data in Subsets Track Progress with Subset Tiles 348 Use the Subset Snapping check box so that the subset bounding box encloses entire tiles 2 Select the Subset Snapping check box 3 Sel
139. Process Analysis Edit Display Standard Source Analyze Results Results for selected Port GRAVEL a patch Confidence Fair 0 9 Stbd COARSE SAND GRAVELLY SAND Confidence Good 0 6 Parameters aq Side Port Stbd Frequency Hz Grain Size phi F Data is analysed with respect to the sediment angular response models in order to determine an average grain size This average grain size is then cross referenced to the customizable look up table in order to provide a textual response See Grain SIZE TABLE ON PAGE 451 The sediment analysis results are displayed on the Analysis tab They can also be seen in the Sediment Analysis Graph window that displays the average angular response for a given range of data See Sepiment Anacysis GRAPH ON PAGE 453 Sediment analysis results can also be exported to ASCII See Sepiment ANacysis TO ASCII on pace 539 Set Sediment Analysis options 1 Select the Analysis tab in Mosaic Editor 446 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Tools gt Mosaic Editor gt Sediment Analysis Options Menu Tool Process Imagery Data Sediment Analysis 2 Select the Sediment Analysis Options command The Sediment Analysis Options dialog box is displayed Sediment Analysis Options General Options Patch Size 2 amp pings File Creation Options O Never Do not create file Oonce Generate and keep file Always Regenerat
140. Projection Group from the list 2 Select a Zone associated with the Projection Group the Key field is filled when the Zone is selected Click Next 520 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data HIPS To ASCII HIPS to ASCII Step 6 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 6 of 7 Sounding Status Accepted Examined Outstanding C Rejected C Designated C Data Binning Bin Size Binning Method Output One file Multiple files Select an output file Each sounding in a cleaned HIPS data set are stored with bits that determine the status of that sounding You can choose to restrict the export process to soundings with specific status flags 1 To export soundings with a specific status flag select the appropriate Sounding Status check boxes 2 To apply a data thinning function select the Data Binning check box The Data Binning option divides the survey area into a grid and selects either the shoal or deep biased soundings from each cell for export The Bin Size option sets the size of the grid cells 3 Type the size for the grid cell in the Bin Size field The units used here can be changed in the Tools gt Options gt Display gt Units dialog box 4 Select either the Shoal Biased or Deep Biased options to export only the shoalest or deepest soundings respectively to the ASCII file 5 Select the By Area option to export one sounding per bin 6 Select the By Line
141. S Designated soundings that have been flagged in the Swath or Subset Editors as being the shoalest sounding in an area Outstanding soundings that have been flagged in the Subset Editor as needing further examination Examined soundings that have been flagged in the Subset Editor as having been examined and verified The Designated flag identifies the shallowest also called shoalest sounding on important features For example upright masts on a significant wreck would be flagged as Designated The purpose of the Designated flag is to ensure that the shallowest depths over significant seabed features are maintained for standard hydrographic products When these soundings are applied to a BASE Surface the Surface is regenerated so that the Designated sounding s depth value is applied to the nearest node see Finatize BASE Surrace ON PAGE 224 Identify Designated Designated Soundings can be identified in two ways Sounding automatically with the Critical Sounding Detection command see DESIGNATE CRITICAL SOUNDINGS FROM A SURFACE ON PAGE 298 manually as part of processing in Single Beam Swath and Subset Editors see Finp anp DesicnaTe Sounpines IN HIPS Epitors ON PAGE 300 Designated soundings can exported to ASCII CARIS GSF and HOB formats The location of designated soundings can be viewed in the Display window They can also be viewed in the HIPS editor in which they are design
142. S User Guide 67 Create a New Project View Project Properties The properties of each open project are listed below the General statistics Properties General E Portsmouth2001 Project Name B KE E Coordinate Reference System Name UTM 19N E Projection Vertical Unknown El Project Boundary E Data Extents SIPS Training Project Name Properties Function Project Name of first open project General Vessels Number of vessels in project Lines Number of lines in project Soundings Total number of soundings in the project Created By Name or initials of project creator 68 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create a New Project View Project Properties Properties Function Creation Date Date the project was created Comments Coordinate Reference System Name Identifies the coordinate reference system used in the project Click in the field to open the Select Projection dialog box Type Type of system e g ground Projection Type of projection e g UTM Units The units of measurement of the coordinate reference system Central Meridian The line of longitude used as Central Meridian in the Projection False Northing The value applied as an offset to all northings Vertical Identifies the vertical datum if known Click in the field to select a reference from the drop down list
143. SER usadane niena a A aR EE 476 Create Publications Plot Composer Plot Composer 476 HIPS and SIPS data can be formatted for printing to paper or to Portable Document Format PDF using CARIS Plot Composer Plot Composer is a plotting utility provided with various CARIS applications to produce paper products containing raster and vector geo spatial information Plot Composer can use data from other CARIS products such as Bathy DataBASE in formats such as GeoTIFF BSB JPEG 2000 S 57 Shapefiles AutoCAD as well as HIPS and SIPS data to produce paper products Some of Plot Composer s key functions are to Capture data views from HIPS and SIPS in the scale displayed Configure data and add raster and vector data formats supported by CARIS applications Display geo referenced in the CARIS supported formats Add geographic or projection grids borders and scale bars Configure data views to be north up or rotated Set coordinate system Add OLE objects images and text blocks Output to PostScript or TIFF file Open Plot Composer from the Start gt Programs gt CARIS gt Utilities folder which also contains the Plot Composer Users Guide The following is an example of a BASE surface and background data being formatted in Plot Composer CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Publications Plot Composer CARIS Plot Composer ca379028_SA 000 A wee otgroly cated roe inde ea remap be rt Banga tuner sro a
144. SIPS User Guide 231 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands Menu Pop up Process gt BASE Surface gt Compute Statistics Compute Statistics Layers window only Bin 232 Size Compute Surface Statistics The Compute Statistics command generates statistics on the nodes in an attribute layer of a surface such as a BASE surface mosaic or GeoBaR The statistics calculated are Minimum value in the attribute layer of the surface e Maximum value in the attribute layer Mean of the values in the layer Area Standard Deviation Std_dev Total count These statistics are reported together with a histogram depicting the distribution of the points nodes within the min max range of values To compute the statistics of an attribute layer 1 Select the parent layer of the attribute layer 2 Select the Compute Statistics command The Compute Statistics dialog box is displayed Compute Statistics Attribute layer std_Dev Feature layer Bin size 0 01 3 Select the Attribute layer for which you want to compute statistics for example the Depth or Std_Dev layer The Bin size field defines the range of each grouping of data that will be displayed as a column in the histogram Each bin or column will contain all the data within the range set by the bin size The unit of measure for the Bin size field is controlled by the type of data in the selected attribute layer
145. Sector Angle Interval option and choose a degree level to a maximum of 10 by clicking the up or down arrow buttons 2 As an alternate method Select the Horizontal Bin Size option choose an across track distance by clicking the up or down arrow buttons The thinning factor reduces the number of soundings converted on a per swath basis The thinning factor uses a power of two reduction control 1 2 1 4 1 8 etc so that one of two one of four CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Select Filters or one of eight soundings can optionally be converted per swath sector 3 Select the Data Thinning check box to implement the thinning option 4 Select a Thinning Factor value by clicking the up or down arrow buttons 5 Select Output thinned data to convert only non rejected data You have the option not to convert soundings which have been eliminated because of data thinning Although by doing so a mismatch is created between the converted HIPS data and the original data file Since multi transducer data is tied to the settings in the vessel file the full dataset is always converted 6 Click Next Enter Data Parameters Depending on the data acquisition format you selected in the Step 1 of the wizard one or more dialog boxes appropriate to the format are now displayed See Options For SPECIFIC FORMATS ON pace 96 for description of options for different raw data formats 1 Choose the settings appropriate
146. Sound Velocity Corrections Transducer 1 Transducer 2 C The transducer is mounted with a 180 Azimuth offset C The transducer is mounted with a Roll offset Roll Offset deg Positive when rotated port up C The transducer is mounted with a Pitch offset Pitch Offset C deg Positive when rotated bow up This dialog box records any transducer pole offsets Transducer head offsets must be taken into account when the SVP is applied to the data 1 Select the 180 degree Azimuth box if the transducer is reverse mounted If the transducer is mounted with a large roll offset for use under wharves or along banks then select the Roll Offset check box Type the amount of offset in degrees in the Roll Offset box 4 If the transducer is mounted with a large pitch offset such that it is pointed forward or backwards then select the Pitch Offset check box 5 Type the amount of offset in degrees in the Pitch Offset box 6 Repeat the above steps for the second transducer if there are two 7 poles Click Finish A new HIPS Vessel File is created You can now create an outline for the vessel see Create VESSEL SHAPE OUTLINE ON PAGE 35 34 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Create Vessel Shape Outline Create Vessel Shape Outline Edit gt Vessel Shape Menu Tool Use the Vessel Shape command to create a 3 D outline of the vessel by e
147. TE SYSTEM ON PAGE 53 The HVF is created in the HIPS Vessel Editor and saved to the folder HDCS_Data VesselConfig If you create other data directories the name of the VesselConfig folder must not be changed and it always has to be located inside the Raw Data directory on the same level as the project directories In previous versions of HIPS and SIPS a text file called the Vessel Configuration File VCF was used VCF files can still be opened in the Vessel Editor and edited but when the file is re saved it is converted to HVF format The HVF is divided into a number of distinct sections each describing one type of sensor The sections are time tagged and multiple entries can be defined for different time periods These entries can be edited in the Vessel Editor During the Merge process corrected sensor data is combined with the observed data to create a final position depth record CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Create a New HVF Create a New HVF File gt New Menu D Tool A vessel file is created in HIPS Vessel Editor a separate application launched from the HIPS and SIPS interface For a description of the Vessel Editor and its properties see VEsseL EDITOR INTERFACE ON PAGE 172 There are four main steps to creating and configuring a HIPS Vessel file in Vessel Editor Open the HIPS and SIPS Vessel wizard to enter the parameters for the vessel file
148. TED SOUNDINGS cccccsceseseeeeeeeeesesseeeeeeees CRITICAL SOUNDINGS sisiutiacissanataneusitadeasaiventeantvenietanas DESIGNATE CRITICAL SOUNDINGS FROM A SURFACE RESTART CLEANING ccccscsesesssoacsccsssssesecacasacasacaseeeasacan QUALITY CONTROL REPORTS cccccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees Data QC Data QC Workflow Workflow 270 Problems with sensor offsets auxiliary sensor data and so forth become readily apparent in the BASE Surface Relying on a surface to highlight problems in the auxiliary sensors can improve processing efficiency because you are no longer required to investigate the motion and navigation for each survey line In the HIPS multibeam workflow described here the auxiliary sensor data was not investigated prior to creating the surface So at this point you can use the BASE or CUBE surface to highlight problem areas that may exist Certain edits will require that data be Merged again For example if you reload tide edit navigation or edit gyro you will need to Merge the modified lines again If you edit heave pitch or roll you will need to re apply Sound Velocity Correction If you re apply SVC recompute TPU before Merging again If any project lines are re Merged the BASE surface will need to be re generated See RECOMPUTE SURFACE ON PAGE 221 After data QC the following processes can be applied to further clean data statistical surface cleaning see CREATING T
149. TO 150 Philippines Zone OSN 150 W TO 144 Qatar Zone O7N 144 w TO 138 Quebec 3TM NABI Zone D N 138 W TO 132 Quebec 3TM NA27 Zone O9N 132 W TO 126 U S State Plane 1927 TO 120 U S State Plane 1983 UPS Univer Polar Stereo 114 gt UTM WGS84 bd 2 nea oe Pea ea This dialog box lists projections available to display your field sheet data These are based on the coordinate systems and ellipsoid parameters as defined in the editable text file Hips System mapdef dat Zone 10N 126 11 Select a projection from the Group column The pre defined projections specific to that projection system are listed in the Zone column 12 Select a projection from the Zone column 13 Click Next The New Field Sheet Step 3 dialog box is displayed 14 Select either the Geographic or Ground coordinates option 15 Define the extent of the field sheet by one of three methods e use the current extent of the Display window or e use the mouse to create a box defining the extent or e enter the geographic or ground coordinates CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Use current display Draw a bounding box Enter coordinates Create Field Sheets Create a Field Sheet New Field Sheet Step 3 of 3 21x Field Sheet Extents Geographic C Ground 42 36 02 N 48 36 02 123 22 25 W 12 21 24 N 48 35 33 N 43 3f W 12322 25 i 24 SB 4 cae Tree ca tee 1 Zoom in on the area you want to include field s
150. Time Jump value 1 Ensure that the Control window is open and the Navigation Editor tab is displayed 2 Select the Automatic Query check box if you want to display selected position fixes in the Selection tab of the Worksheet window 3 Enter a value in the Time Jump box CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 279 Data QC Examine Navigation Data 4 Click the List Buffer up or down arrow keys to select the number of adjacent position fixes that are highlighted when a jump is found For example if you choose 5 the two position fixes to the right and left of the selected fix are also selected 5 Click Find 6 Select one of the Reject options Resect Data ON PAGE 277 or Accept Accept DATA ON PAGE 277 or Query See Query Data In EDITORS ON PAGE 274 7 Click Find again to move along the track line 280 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Rejecting Navigation Data Rejecting Navigation Data All data is marked as Accepted until flagged otherwise Data can be queried for position fixes and rejected Data can be rejected using either Reject With Interpolation Soundings associated with this navigation data are processed further since they have positions interpolated for them Reject Break Interpolation Soundings associated with this navigation data are flagged as rejected and cannot be processed These alternatives are illustrated below Reject with Reject Break Interpolation Interpola
151. Track Progress with Subset Tiles Tools gt New Subset Tiles New Subset Tiles Pop up Menu Subset Tiles are used to track the process of examining and cleaning areas within the survey project Each tile within a Subset Tile layer has one of three tracking settings Incomplete Partially Complete or Completed see TRAckiING CLEANING STATUS ON PAGE 349 The extent of the subset tile area can be determined in two ways the tiles cover the entire field sheet area or the tiles cover the area of the field sheet that contains a height source such as a BASE Surface Field sheet with BASE Surface Tiles cover BASE Surface Tiles cover entire field sheet The option to cover the entire field sheet area is useful if you are cleaning newly acquired data with Subset Editor while the area is being surveyed You would not have to create a new subset tile layer because of additional data in your project Subset tiles are produced in field sheets To create subset tiles for tracking 1 Select a field sheet in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Select the New Subset Tiles command The New Subset Tiles dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 343 Process Data in Subsets Track Progress with Subset Tiles New Subset Tiles Name SubsetTiles Control coverage by surface CUBESI1 pE Fundy477 Tile size 10 m The Control Coverage by Surface option c
152. W Sensor for speed over water records 8 If data is recorded from more than one sensor device click the sensor check box and enter a device number 9 Click Next to continue CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 111 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats Imagenex HIPS can convert dual head data stored in the Imagenex 83m format However in order to properly process the data the HIPS Vessel file must be set up as a dual head vessel As well if the number of beams normally expected for head 1 is more than 200 set the number larger for example to 1000 If you expect head 1 to generate no more than 200 beams set the beam number in the HVF to 200 Navigation data can be imported from an external NAV file with the same name as the Imaginex 83p file If the HIPS converter detects that a NAV file exists it will import navigation and GPS height data from the GPS strings in the NAV file In this case the stored navigation data in the 83p file is not converted You can choose read either the GGK or the GGA string or have either read by selecting the Any option These controls are only applied if there is an NAV file with the same name as the 83p file To read GPS height data from Imagenex files 1 Select the height string to be read GGA GGK or Any 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 6 Convert height from GPS strings aArwy OGGA OGGK 112 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data
153. YYY M Current month MM D Current date DD h Current hour hh based on 24 hour clock m Current minute mm AS Current second ss j Current Julian date jjj p Project name AV Vessel name d Data date e g 2007 244 Aol Line identifier e g 244 2327 Si Imagery type selected in the Source Data Type field SS side scan TS time series BA beam average e Processing engine selected SIPS Geocoder Ar Value and units from the Resolution field Note a decimal point is represented by underscore for example 4_5m is 4 5 Tags will automatically add strings of identifying information such as the date and time the GeoBaR is created For example this string Y M SD Sh sm s _ e i r will name the GeoBar as 2009 10 21 11 13 29 Geocoder TS 1 0m This example can be used repeatedly to provide a standardized series of names differentiated by timestamp GeoBaR names must not contain any spaces CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Create GeoBaR with the Geocoder Engine Create GeoBaR with the Geocoder Engine To create a GeoBaR 1 Open Mosaic Editor 2 Select a survey line or lines in the Display window Process Analysis Edit Processing Engine Geocoder Source Data Type Time Series General Options Auto Gain Correction Auto TYG Correction Anti Aliasing F Beam Pattern Correction Beam Pattern File _ AVG Correction Method Fl
154. _Count Hypothesis_Strength Mean a el No Conversion Available Std_Dev Uncertainty User_Nominated 1 Select a BASE surface attribute from the Available Attributes list 2 Select an appropriate S 57 attribute from the drop down list If no mapping is possible between the selected attribute and the chosen S 57 attribute acronym No conversion available is displayed If conversion can be applied the dialog box will display the available values that can be mapped HIPS attributes of Integer data type may be appropriate to map to S 57 attributes using a conversion formula A conversion formula is created by inserting values and appropriate mathematical operators into the Conversion area as in the example below 392 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Sounding Selection Edit Translation File Aug22new IR bsst Available Attributes Mapping Deep Acronym SOUACC Density i Depth Conversion Hypothesis_Count Hypothesis_Strength Mean lt value gt 3 5 Node_Std_ Dey Shoal Uncertainty User_Nominated lt value gt 10 Result 13 500000 To create a conversion formula for example to map Std_Dev to SOUACC sounding accuracy attribute 1 Click Value to use the value of the selected BASE surface attribute in the conversion formula e This places the lt value gt variable in the formula window 2 Insert mathematical operators using the X
155. __1x4 tif RTFM__1x5 tif The tiled sets of TIFF images are all saved to the folder selected in the Tile Set Output field 4 Click Browse and select the path to the Output Folder for the tile images 5 Set the Tile Dimensions to specify the size of each tile The units used here are those set for Horizontal Length in Tools gt Options gt Display gt Units 6 Type a prefix for the exported tile files 7 Click Next EXPORT ON PAGE 542 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 503 Export Data Contacts Contacts 504 Export contact data for your entire project to a CARIS map and or an ASCII text file The ASCII files are structured to be easily imported into a relational database You can also export contact snapshot images to TIFF files If you select ASCII you will have to browse to a folder location and type a file name This name is used as the first component name of four files that will be created to store the contact information filename_ContactLine txt contains information identifying the survey line and indexes to the other files filename_ContactSingle txt contains all the information for single point contacts filename_ContactMulti txt contains all information for line contacts filename_ContactMultiPoints txt contains all location information for multipoint contacts For information on the structure of exported contact files see Contact FILE FORMATS ON PAGE 139 OF THE HIPS anp SIPS REFEREN
156. a Extende Also created is a Generalized layer which displays the nodes that were affected during the product surface creation process Nodes that have been modified are given a status flag of 1 Nodes that retain their original values are given a status flag of 0 The status of the nodes is displayed in the tool tip as illustrated below which shows Generalized 1 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 359 Create Product Surfaces Create a Product Surface 360 allPorts alllines Depth m 17 50 allPorts alllines_Interp Depth m 17 50 allPorts AllPinterpp Generalized 1 In this example the filter in the Properties for the Generalization layer has been set to show only the nodes which have been modified by the Product Surface These are displayed as red dots in the example above When you create selected soundings from the Generalization layer you can use SQL type filters to omit nodes that have been modified See Enaste FILTER ON PAGE 390 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Contours Process gt Products gt Contours gt New Contour Layer Menu Layers tab New gt Contours Pop up Create Product Surfaces Contours Contours can be generated from a Product Surface a finalized BASE surface or a tile layer Contour smoothness is related to the amount of detail in your depth source A finely detailed depth source will result in rougher
157. a Subset Rejected by hydrographer Rejected by TPU Rejected by Surface Cleaning Rejected by Surface Filter Conversion C Rejected by depth filter C Rejected by disabled beam 2 Place a check mark beside the box with the type of rejected data you want to view e Rejected by Swath Single Beam Editor View soundings rejected in Swath or Single Beam Editors or by the Swath or Single Beam filters Rejected by Hydrographer View data rejected interactively in the Subset Editor by the hydrographer e Rejected by TPU View soundings rejected through the Total Propagated Uncertainty filtering process e Rejected by Surface Cleaning View soundings rejected through the Surface Cleaning process Rejected by Surface Filter View soundings rejected through surface filtering Rejected by Depth Filter View soundings rejected by the depth filter in the Conversion Wizard or the Generic Data Parser when it was converted to HIPS format e Rejected by Disabled Beam View soundings rejected due to a disabled beam status during conversion This occurs when the beam is disabled in the legacy vessel configuration or if the sonar system flagged the beam as a bad detection in the raw data file 3 Click OK The rejected data types you selected are displayed in the editors 296 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Critical Soundings Critical Soundings Three types of critical soundings can be flagged in HIP
158. a sounding if the across track distance on the starboard side is greater than the value entered in this field Beam Numbers Specify beams to be rejected Separate individual beams with a space and specify a range of beams with a hyphen For example entering 12 32 56 60 72 rejects beams 12 32 56 57 58 59 60 and 72 Angles from Nadir Port and Starboard Filter beams that are outside of the designated angles e g 60 degrees Angles are computed from the nadir using depths and across track distances roll corrected CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Tool gt Apply Filters gt 1 Screen To End of Line Selected Lines All Lines Menu t7 Tool Cleaning Swath Data Automatic Filtering Quality Flags If your system attaches quality codes to soundings and those codes are transferred to HIPS during conversion a sounding can be rejected according to its value Quality flags are currently supplied by Teledyne Reson Elac Hypack and GSF multibeam systems formats Missing neighbours are beams rejected during the conversion process into HIPS This occurs if the beam is disabled in the vessel configuration or if the sonar system flags the beam as a bad detect in the raw data file Port Starboard Beams are rejected if beams on each side of the swath are rejected Forward Aft Beams are rejected if the adjacent beams in the previous and next swath are rejected Any 2 of 4 Beams are rejected i
159. a viewed from the starboard side of the vessel This could also be referred to as a side view or vertical profile The along track image is made up of the beams which point to nadir for the selected profiles WCI can also be displayed in a stacked view to give an idea of what may be in the water column based on multiple profiles and beams In the across track view all the profiles represented in the Plan view are stacked one on top of another In the along track view the beams within a profile are stacked with the highest intensity beams showing through See Stackep VIEW ON PAGE 466 Bottom detections can be plotted on top of the water column image in the across track view This can be used to view how the existing bathymetry compares to that which is present in the water column data This display can be toggled on and off from the toolbar See Water CoLumn TooLBAR ON PAGE 465 Basic filtering is also present so the WCI data can be filtered based on intensity values All existing Swath Editor options and functionality where relevant have been connected within the WCI views to keep work flows consistent and familiar CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 462 Process Water Column Data Display water column data Display water column data To view WCI data in Swath Editor 1 Select a survey line in the Display Window 2 Tools gt Swath Editor 2 Select the Open Swath Editor command gt O
160. abby ee Rebels oes 124 Winfrog soe sie coo e emcee ay aerate ee ee ee Ae See eee Se 124 RiPotesteheeex tikes rinu ino Gee he a ii 126 Multibeam Filtering 200 00 eee eee eee 128 Step 8 Convert Side Scan data 2005 129 Step 9 Convert Layback 00 0c cee eee 131 Sound Velocity Correction 20 02200 133 Sound Velocity Processing 32220246 cahetgas deediaes 134 Profile selection method 0 0 eee ee eee 134 Sound Velocity Correction 00 cece eee eee 136 Query Applied SVC Profiles 020000000 0 140 Correct for Tides ascctencssutevs eee sacececncan 143 Load Tide 2 o22so cate teewarybeeke ep eheepacks sen bees 144 Load Tide status s4c423 02 s090the abides Seba eee tes 145 MOS PUGS a2 f i 5 pun ett y SEE eed Meee oe hehe i ee Ske 146 Tide Zone Files ies cco poet eee eet be Sada dS peded 146 Display tide zones 02 cece ee 147 Tide Editor te cre nananana aa 148 GPS Tide irete EN ote e E a a e a E eds 149 Compute TPU seisis aaia E E aAA 153 Total Propagated Uncertainty 0000 000s 154 Compute TPU ihsas esatera deena eee i pan ES t 156 TPU Filtering ossa rar seeees en eede es ha Ree SENSE Sees 159 Apply Fillefvsc2 ee ok shes tuotu renn ee re eke eee Sy 161 Load Error Data dee stages dseee edhauadeewess 163 MG Gist hecho Kea eee wae 167 Merge Process c lt i2crbeaw bee sexed sews esdeeneeend ed 168 Apply M Mg6 s2vec4s1a sk
161. ace with these gaps filled is then created In the following example in a 3 x 3 surface node area five nodes have pixel values shown in red This node does not contain a pixel value This node does contain a pixel value and can be used to interpolate a value for nodes without a pixel value This means if you select five or less as the value for the Number of Neighbours a pixel value is created for the node without a value from the neighbouring nodes 1 Right click on the mosaic in the Layers tab 2 Select the Interpolate command The Interpolate Surface dialog box is displayed Interpolate Surface Source Surface mar26MOS E Destination Surface mar26MOS E_Interp Matrix size O 3x3 5x5 Number Of Neighbours 6 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Interpolate Mosaic The Destination Surface field displays the file name of the copy that is created from the original Surface The default name is the original Surface name with _Interp appended to it You can change the name if necessary 3 Optional Type a new name in the Destination Surface field The Matrix Size determines the number of nodes closest to the node that can be used to interpolate a pixel value 4 Select either the 3 x 3 or the 5 x 5 option The Number of Neighbours field is a threshold level used to determine the minimum pixels in the matrix area that must be present to interpolate a new pixel value The mat
162. ace 219 Compute Statistics Mosaic attribute 441 Compute Surface Statistics 232 Compute TPU 154 configuration options set in Vessel Wizard 32 conflict resolution sounding selection 385 conflict resolution methods selecting GeoBaR 445 Conflict Resolution Mosaic Editor 444 Connect To 59 86 connect to 64 connect to data repository 59 contacts export 504 contour to field sheet 364 contour to HOB file 365 contours depth list file 362 labels 365 masking lines behind labels 366 overview 361 Control Coverage by Surface in new subset tiles 344 conversion Atlas 97 carry over raw data 84 CMAX 98 Coda 98 EdgeTech 99 EIVA 101 Elac 102 Furuno 103 GSF 107 Hawkeye 108 Hypack 109 lmagenex 112 LADS 113 LAS 114 layback 131 MarineSonics 114 Navitronics 114 Qmips 115 Reson PDS 116 SDF 120 Seabeam 121 Seafalcon 121 SEGY 121 SHOALS 122 Simrad 122 Spawar 124 SWATHPlus 124 tow cable 131 UNB Reson 124 Winfrog 124 XTF 126 Conversion Wizard 78 94 conversion ship navigation source in XTF 126 convert hidden or non logged Reson data 118 convert layback 131 Coordinate definitions for HVF 53 coordinate system in vessel file 53 set during export 541 create a product surface 358 create contours 361 create GeoBaR advanced options with Geocoder engine 420 with Geocoder Engine 419
163. ace Commands Finalize BASE Surface Surface name 1M_SubCube4 _Final Final uncertainty from Uncertainty T F Minimum uncertainty m V Apply designated soundings Depth Threshold Minimum depth m Maximum depth m Cancel Help The Surface name field shows the name that will be applied to the finalized surface This defaults to the name of the source BASE Surface with _Final appended to the end To change the name 1 Type a different name for the finalized surface The Final uncertainty from drop down list gives three options as the source of values for calculating the uncertainty of the finalized surface Uncertainty The vertical uncertainty values from the Uncertainty layer of the source surface Std Dev scaled to 95 CI The standard deviation values from the source surface scaled to 95 confidence interval Greater of the two The larger of the two above values Select a final uncertainty option from the drop down list This option is greyed out if the source surface does not contain uncertainty values for example if it is a swath angle surface Select the Minimum Uncertainty check box and type a depth value to represent the minimum vertical uncertainty value Select the Apply Designated Soundings check box to use this option When this option is selected designated soundings take prece dence over other soundings during the soundings selection proc ess If this option remain
164. age of surface cleaning is the testing of the residuals once the surface has been computed The relevant parameters are the rejection threshold scaling values in both the positive and negative directions above and below the surface and the minimum absolute residual of an outlier The latter parameter specifies that no point within this distance either above the surface or below are rejected This is an important parameter if the local standard deviation of a tile is small because the scaling values are multiplied by a small standard deviation and may reject points which are only slightly removed from the surface This parameter is location dependent and maybe used for example to prevent the rejection of rocks of a specific height The rejection threshold values are also location dependent and surface dependent CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Statistical Surface Cleaning Process Polynomial Surface Types The following table lists each of the polynomial surface types with the corresponding equation and a graphical example of each surface type Polynomial Surface Types Surface Equation Example iia f xy b0 Tilted Plane f xy b0 b1x b2y Curved Tilted Plane f xy b0 b1x b2x 4 b3xy Quadratic f xy b0 b1x b2x 4 b3xy b4x2 b5y2 Cubic f xy b0 b1x b2x4 b3xy b4x2 b5y2 b6x2y bTxy2 b8x3 b9y3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 313 Statistical Surface Cleaning
165. al position Landscape is a horizontal position Landscape is selected by default Margins Set the width of the area between the histogram and the edge of the file The default is 5mm Image Export DPI Quality Set the resolution used to export the histogram The higher the resolution the better the quality of the image when zoomed in If the file will be used in the electronic form with the image being zoomed in tightly a higher resolution is recommended If the file will simply be printed a smaller resolution is adequate CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 381 Create Product Surfaces Profiles 382 SVG format options Width Height The width and height of the histogram in the resulting file Image Export DPI Quality Set the resolution used to export the histogram The higher the resolution the better the quality of the image when zoomed in If the file will be used in the electronic form with the image being zoomed in tightly a higher resolution is recommended If the file will simply be printed a smaller resolution is adequate TIFF format options Image Resolution The resolution quality at which to export the image The higher the resolution the closer the image can be zoomed but the larger the file Width Height Set the width and height of the resulting image in pixels Pixels These fields are controlled by the resolution of the image As the DPI is in
166. alid and will not be retained after recomputation of the BASE Surface Select the Automatic BASE Surface Update check box in Tools gt Options gt General After edits are made this will automatically update the area of the CUBE surface contained within the subset bounding box See GeneraL for more information When using the Automatic BASE Surface Update option all CUBE BASE Surface editing including nominations hypothesis and node rejections could be retained if no soundings were rejected in the proximity of the nodes If soundings have been rejected after CUBE BASE Surface editing these editing adjustments will be lost CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 267 CUBE Processing Hypotheses Cleaning 268 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Use the BASE surface to highlight problems with sensor data that may exist and if necessary edit problem areas In this chapter WORKFLOW vases cateaceceiadedvesi shinacadsitadeans tata etdasasicdtens TOOLS FOR EXAMINING AND EDITING DATA ssssesseseeeeeees QUERY DATA sinnini raaa EEES REJECTING AND ACCEPTING DATA cccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees EXAMINE NAVIGATION DATA 2cccecceeeseseeeeeaeeaseeeeeeeas SHIFT NAVIGATION DATA ccccccccceccceceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees ATITUDE DATA saisnenic siasa DELAYED HEAVE sacisxniiiactdacanesc dsinndscacustasisaandaantsaaden LOAD ATTITUDE NAVIGATION DATA scccceeeeseeeeeeeaeees GIASSIFY EINES cisne a REJECT LINE aikaa an View REJEC
167. ally 250 so that sufficient data is included for statistical analysis The superselected area will be highlighted in blue at nadir of the GeoBaR as in the example below 4 Optional Query the superselected area to determine the number of pings in the superselection 5 Optional From the data in the Selection tab subtract the value of the End ping from the Start ping 6 Select the Geocoder or SIPS processing engine in the Process tab of Mosaic Editor 7 Select the Create Beam Pattern command The Create Beam Pattern command is only active in Mosaic Editor while part of a line is superselected The Save Beam Pattern Correction file dialog box is displayed 8 Name the file and click Save to save and load the file The created file will have the extension bp CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 427 Process Imagery Data Despeckle Despeckle Imagery may have isolated pixels with intensity levels that are inconsistent with neighbouring pixels It is possible to filter the isolated light and or dark pixels through the Despeckle process This will produce smoother more consistent imagery Despeckling imagery is a visual process consisting of adjusting the despeckle values and viewing the display until the desired results are obtained Despeckling uses a calculated value based on neighbouring intensity levels to replace the current pixel s intensity if it is outside the specified range To apply the Despeckle to
168. am numbering Surface sound speed Attitude data 102 During conversion XSE format beams are numbered according to the sounding s position along the swath in relation to the vessel 1 To number the converted beams along the swath from starboard to port select the Starboard to Port check box 2 To number the converted beams along the swath from port to starboard select the Port to Starboard check box If a single Sound Velocity value was used during the survey 3 Select the Manual option and type the sound velocity value If a Sound Velocity Profile was recorded and used by the logging system then the nterpolate option must be selected 4 Select nterpolate to read surface sound velocity values from a datagram You can select the source for attitude data The Navigation option will convert heave pitch and roll data from the CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Options for Specific Formats navigation records in the file and multibeam will convert it from multibeam records 5 Select either Navigation or Multibeam as the source of Attitude Data Convert Side Scan 6 To convert side scan data select the Convert Side Scan check box Survey mode ELAC XSE data can be recorded as 108 beams or 126 beams depending on the survey mode The Pad Transducer 1 with NULL beams writes 63 beams to Transducer 1 so that the same HIPS Vessel File HVF can be used for both survey modes 7 Click the Pad Transducer 1
169. and kilometres fathoms US and international feet US and international yards US and international miles US international and nautical 1 In the Vertical Length field select the units for depth and uncertainty values The Horizontal Length field is only active if you selected Ground in the Position Units field in the previous dialog box 2 Select the units for position data To apply a static vertical shift to data during export 3 Select the Vertical Shift check box and type the value for the shift in metres 4 The shift will be applied to the depth value also to the primary and secondary depths for single beam data 5 Click Next to set the coordinate system for the data CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 519 Export Data HIPS To ASCII Coordinate System All sounding data is stored in HIPS and SIPS as un projected longitude and latitude This dialog selects the appropriate coordinate system to reference the soundings All soundings will be transformed to this coordinate system as they are exported CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 5 of 6 Coordinate System Select UTM Zone Automatically Group Hamburger Hafen Iceland Ireland Italy Japan Malaysia Mexico Netherlands New Zealand GD49 lt m A Zone Zone Zone II Zone Ill Zone IV Zone Zone Vl Zone ll AGZN Map Scale 1000 1 Choose a coordinate system by selecting a
170. and select Regenerate from the pop up menu Query Soundings To view information on specific soundings select the soundings in the Display window and use the Query command See Query Data on PAGE 273 Information about the soundings will be displayed in the Selection tab of the Worksheet window Worksheet Examined Designated 21 667 Outstanding 23 507 Designated See also Susset CLEANING ON PAGE 339 and SWATH CLEANING ON pace 324 For more information on sounding status flags see STATUS FLAGS AND VALUES ON PAGE 138 in the Reference Guide CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 303 Data QC Designate Critical Soundings from a Surface 5 Tools gt Set Filters Y 3 5 Si 304 Protect Critical Soundings You can set a protective sphere around critical soundings to protect any other soundings within the sphere from being rejected when you apply automated filters The size of this protective area is determined by setting a radius You can also select which type of critical soundings the protection is applied to Data must be merged before critical sounding filtering is applied To prevent the neighbours of critical soundings from being rejected during automated filtering 1 Select the Set Filters command from the Tools menu The Set Filters dialog box is displayed Set Filters Load filter file Bose Critical TPU Swath Sweep Single Beam Attitu
171. appropriate name 2 Click Next CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 81 Convert Data Select Files for Conversion Select Files for Conversion In most converters this dialog box will appear so you can select the files to be converted Some formats have other import options to set before selecting data files See Import Options ON PAGE 83 a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 2 File selection type RawData v File Size Date 38L_071119_188100_O0ST_AH gsf 150 00KB 11 30 2007 Files Sow Md Hoe Ooo s Dh in T fia Ae 1 Select the appropriate File selection type from the drop down list The default is RawData 2 Click Select to choose the files you want to convert If you are converting multibeam data with the Hypack converter select HSX files not RAW files for conversion If you have selected Raw Data as the File selection type clicking Select will open the Select Files dialog box The default directory for Raw Data is Hips Preprocess If you select Project Vessel or Day as the File selection type Select will open the P V D tree structure so you can browse for the folder containing the files you want to convert 3 Optional To remove a file from the list select it and click Remove 4 Click Next 82 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create or Update survey lines Convert Data Select Files for Conversion Raw data being converted into HIPS and
172. ard deviation for the Z measured offset on the vessel Vessel Speed The standard deviation for the vessel speed measurements Loading Vertical changes during the survey because of fuel consumption etc Draft The standard deviation in the vessel draft measurements Delta Draft The standard deviation in the dynamic vessel draft measurements MRU Align StdDev Gyro This value is the uncertainty of the motion recording unit placement within the vessel fixed coordinate frame MRU Align StdDev Roll Pitch This value is the uncertainty of the motion recording unit placement within the vessel fixed coordinate frame Comments Any additional information CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Vessel Coordinate System Vessel Coordinate System Reference Point Coordinate definitions Vessel configuration is based on a three dimensional coordinate system which is used to record the location of sensors and other equipment as illustrated below Navigation Antenna Q i Heave Roll Pitch 4 Frame Tow point Reference Point RP RP L4 Transducer Sensor positions are described using X Y Z axis coordinates relative to a Reference Point RP The RP is a location from which all other positions are derived Imagine standing at the location of the Reference Position and describing how far and in what direction the sensor is away from you The location of the RP depends upon the type of sonar syste
173. as background to a project in order to see which profiles have been applied To view the SVP files 1 Select the Open Background Data command CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Sound Velocity Correction Query Applied SVC Profiles File gt Open Background Data 2 Menu Inthe Open dialog box browse to the location of the SVP file that was applied to the lines 3 Click Open The open file displays the various profile locations as in the example below Portsmouth2001_307 312 svp 2000 11 02 14 35 00 00 Portsmouth2001 307 312 svp 2000 11 02 28 39 00 Portsmouth2001 _307 312 svp 2000 6 17 52 00 00 Portsmouth2001 _307 312 svp Portsmouth2001_307 312 sv 2000 11 06 15 24 00 00 5000 11 06 19 31 00 00 ee Pa Portsmouth2001_ 34 2000 11 02 14 If the SVP values are not displayed make sure that the colour set for Tide SVP in Tools gt Options gt Display tab is not set to the same colour as your Display window background Edit gt Sound Velocity Profiles h Menu Tool CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 141 Sound Velocity Correction Query Applied SVC Profiles 142 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Correct for Tide Tidal data must be loaded for every track line to generate final depths Tide files can be edited or new files created using Tide Editor In this chapter OAD WIDE itevcccicwtedacssadgecusis sthdendesieutenisiarndieoctas atene 144 TOE PILE Soara aaa E E
174. at AVG Window Size w0 C Despeckle Strength 3 Strong Project Ttayers MA Draw order W Mosaic E 3 In the Process tab select Geocoder from the Processing Engine drop down list 4 Select the type of data being processed Side Scan Beam Average or Time Series 5 By default the General Options of Auto Gain Auto TVG and Anti Aliasing are selected It is recommended that these automatic correction options be left on 6 Optional Select the Beam Pattern Correction check box and select a Geocoder Beam Pattern Correction file bpt If no file is available it will need to be created See Beam PaTTERN CORRECTION ON PAGE 426 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 419 Process Imagery Data Create GeoBaR with the Geocoder Engine Menu Tools gt Mosaic Editor gt Create GeoBar Tool L 420 7 Optional Set the AVG Correction check box and select a method from the drop down list 8 Set the AVG window size using the arrow buttons 9 Optional Select the Despeckle check box and select a strength of adjustment to filter out pixels with intensity values inconsistent with their neighbours 10 Select the Create GeoBar command The Create GeoBaR dialog box is displayed Create GeoBaR Name CMHH2009Fundy1481327 Resolution 1 00 m Auto Colour Map GreyScale cma Create Advanced Help Cancel 11 Type a name for the GeoBar The
175. at was used for navigation data during data logging 1 Select one of the following options Geographic navigation data is recorded as latitude and longitude coordinates Ground navigation data is recorded as eastings and northings If you select Ground complete the following steps 2 Select an area from the Group list 3 Select a zone 4 Click Next 88 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Set Navigation Coordinate System Setting Geographic as Navigation Coordinate Type for Hypack data Hysweep format HSX does not store Geographic coordinates and GPS Height information If recorded this data is stored in RAW files When both the Geographic option and Multibeam options are set during conversion the converter will search for raw files in the same directory with the same line name to get this information 89 Convert Data Select Filters Select Filters During the conversion process some soundings can be automatically rejected due to disabled beams This is controlled by the beam status settings in the vessel configuration Also several multibeam formats pre flag some soundings as being failed detects These soundings are also automatically rejected during conversion This dialog box defines basic navigation and depth filters to automatically reject extremely large errors in the recorded navigation and depth data 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion
176. ata 339 set sounding status 339 subset tiles 343 subset tiles flagged 349 track cleaning status 349 tracking layer options 347 workflow 338 Subset tile properties 345 Subset tiles attribute status 345 subsets and BASE surfaces 350 CUBE Surfaces 259 designated soundings 350 reset rejected data 305 surface filtering 350 352 view rejected soundings 295 sun position 210 superselect area for beam pattern correction 427 surface cleaning histogram 319 overview 312 Uuse tiles 315 surface statistics compute 232 SVC query line 140 SVP display by colour 140 display location of profile 140 open file 140 pole offsets in the vessel file 47 swath angle weight 190 swath cleaning 325 Swath Editor accept data 330 across track WCI view 462 along track view WCI 462 auto cursor mode 328 query data 331 Refraction Editor 334 reject data 330 reject swaths 330 reset rejected data 305 view rejected soundings 295 view water column data 462 swath filters 325 swath transducer location in vessel file 41 Swath clean manually 328 SWATHPIlus format conversion options for 124 sweep transducer location in vessel file 48 symbology track line 71 synchronize reference time stamps 84 T Teledyne 124 template file for QC report 307 tide see also Tide Editor GPS tide 149 load tide 144 weighted average optio
177. ated See View Criticat SounpinGs In HIPS Epitors on PAGE 301 and View Critical SOUNDINGS IN THE DISPLAY WINDOW ON PAGE 302 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 297 Data QC Designate Critical Soundings from a Surface Designate Critical Soundings from a Surface Process gt BASE Surface gt Critical Sounding Detection Menu Right click on layer and select Critical Sounding Detection Pop up 298 The Critical Soundings Detection function automatically finds and designates shoal or deep soundings in a surface or surface attribute layer The process contours the selected surface between minimum and maximum depth at a step interval equal to half the resolution of the surface For instance if a surface has a min max depth of 5 40 metres with a resolution of 1 metre the process will contour from 5 40 meters at every 0 5m resulting in contours at 5 0 5 5 6 0 39 5 40 0 Any isolations closed contours which have no contours inside them are identified The direction within these isolations is known i e either shoaling or deepening Based on the direction within the isolation a shoal or deep is flagged on the HIPS data You can define these flags and possible attribute values as well in the Critical Soundings Detection dialog box To automatically designate shoal or deep soundings 1 Open a BASE Surface 2 Select the Critical Sounding Detection command The Critical Sounding dia
178. ation 1 To create a new project folder click Add Project CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Change or add data repository Add a new Vessel folder Add a new Day folder Create a New Project Define New Project The New Project Name dialog box is displayed 2 Type a name for the new project 3 Click OK A new Project folder is created and displayed in the dialog box in the Default folder The Default directory for projects is Hips ver Data To create a new project in another project repository 1 Right click in the data tree area of the New Project dialog box 2 Select Connect To from the pop up menu 3 Name the new project folder and use Browse to set the path to the new data directory 4 Click OK The Vessel folder contains the folders for each survey day of the project To add a Vessel folder to your project 5 Select a project folder so it is highlighted 6 Click Add Vessel The Available Vessels dialog box is displayed E Available Vessels ah AWB 440 att BasicMB at Celtic Voyager att CelticVoyager_EM3002D_TPE a Creed vat FundyRover at FundyRover2 a samplevessel 7 Select a vessel file from the list 8 Click OK The Vessel folder is created and added to the new Project folder The Day folder contains track line data For most formats the date is typically recorded with the raw data If not give the Day folder the date that the survey lines were recorded Day fold
179. ation The Data Type field displays the data type of the selected layer 5 Expand the Surface 2 list and select an attribute layer with the same data type as the layer selected for Surface 1 The Data Type field displays the data type of the second selected surface attribute 6 Click the Browse button to define the name and location for the new surface file which is saved in CSAR format 7 Click OK A new surface is generated with an attribute layer named Diff and a Bounding Polygon layer The resolution of the new surface will be the same as the resolution of the surface selected as Surface 1 230 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands MIR HIPS Data Ship Track Lines C 26 Critical Soundings OEE Contacts Z sample_sheet OZ Contours OE imTolerance M EB imSurface cH BBB genJ31 a OZA muti Difference Surface T Diff Op Bounding Polygon Project TElvayers TE Draw Order An example of a Difference Surface is shown below D The colours represent the range of discrepancies between the two compared surfaces The dark areas of this surface represent greater depth differences than the light areas If the contrast is not clear you can reverse the colours or change the colour map settings or set a colour range in the Properties window See CoLour Map Epitor on Pace 39 and Colour Rance EDITOR on pace 43 of the Tools guide CARIS HIPS and
180. ation see CRITICAL SOUNDINGS ON PAGE 297 1 Select the shoalest sounding from a cluster of soundings around a feature in Swath Editor 2 Edit gt Status Flag gt 2 Select the Designate Soundings command 5 Designate The sounding is flagged as Designated 3 2 S lt D gt CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 333 Cleaning Swath Data Correction for Refraction Artifacts Correction for Refraction Artifacts Menu Tools gt Swath Editor gt Refraction Editor 334 Since it is not possible to completely control the sound speed variations in water we apply sound velocity profiles to correct for this However refraction artifacts may still remain especially if incorrect or insufficient sound velocity profiles are applied either during acquisition or during post processing To correct for this you could choose to limit the usable swath angle and therefore survey more lines or you can use the Refraction Editor which simulates the effects of altering the SVP to derive a better refraction solution Since refraction errors are most pronounced in the outer parts of the survey line coverage they tend to create characteristically curved upward or downward refraction artifacts Apply the velocity correction at a user defined depth As you adjust the values you can observe the changes in the shape of the swath profiles When you arrive at the values which give you the desired corr
181. atitude interval between grid lines North East Set a longitude interval only available if Synchronize is not enabled Line Attributes Set a colour and line weight for the grid lines Colour Click on the Colour button and select a colour for the grid lines from the drop down list Weight Set the thickness of the lines Units are millimetres at display scale Type Select the type of grid solid lines or ticksand or crosses Full The grid will be formed of solid lines Ticks and If you enable Ticks you can set the following options Crosses e Length length of the markings in mm at display scale e Offset e Alignment If you enable Crosses you can set the following option e Length the dimensions of the crosses You can use both ticks and crosses in the same grid 4 Set Annotations options See ANNOTATIONS ON PAGE 184 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 183 Create Field Sheets Field Sheet Projection Grid Annotations This dialog box provides controls for annotating the projection grid with the coordinates of your field sheet data 5 Click the Annotations tab to set position and format of annotations for the grid Grid Properties Grid Lines Annotations V Top M Bottom MV Right IV Left Position Attributes 654 321 123 Digits Format Thousand a Separator Left 7 Superscript Normal Right 3 C Subscript Position Position to neatline Inside Offset from neatline
182. ay only the soundings that meet the conditions you set for the filter 1 2 Select the Enable Filter check box Use a combination of attributes operators and values to construct your filter Use the Backspace key to delete a character or Clear to remove the entire filter string For example to display only the soundings with a Depth less than 10 metres and a hypothesis count of 2 Double click on Depth in the list of available Attributes to place it in the filter field Click the lt button and type 10 Click the and button and double click on the Hypothesis_Count attribute Click the button and type 2 HIPS and SIPS will automatically adds the necessary spaces between the parameters in the filter string However if you choose to type the filter parameters into the filter field you must manually add those spaces 4 Click Next if a HOB file is your output or click Finish if you selected CARIS Map in Step 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Sounding Selection HOB S 57 Options When sounding selection output goes to a HOB file the process generates S 57 SOUNDG objects These can have certain attributes populated Use the options on this dialog box to automatically enter information into SORIND and RECDAT attribute fields and to map BASE surface attributes to specific S 57 attributes Sounding Selection Wizard Auto Populate SORIND and RECDAT S 57 options
183. ay window 2 Select the Load Error Data command The Load Error Data dialog box is displayed Load Error Data File List C CARISSHIPS 471SHDCS_Data Fundy2011 Fundyey Add Remove Reference Week Default Import Data Position AMS 1 0000 seconds Vertical RMS Down Heave C Roll RMS 0000 seconds C Gyro RMS seconds Options seconds C Apply to all partially covered line Allow gap between records Maximum 0 4000 seconds _ Apply Time offset ooo seconds CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 163 Compute TPU TPU Filtering Reference Week Import Data Options 164 3 Click Add to select files You can load either POS MV files OR load POSProc files but not both at the same time 4 To remove a file from the File List field select the file and click Remove Reference weeks start on Sunday at midnight and are time stamped in GPS seconds starting at 0 If the survey week runs from for example Wednesday to Tuesday the start day for the survey week can be set so Sunday is rolled over and data for the full survey week is applied 5 Optional To accommodate a GPS week rollover event click Select Day and select the start date from the calendar This will enter the Julian date Choose which error records in the Applanix files you want to import into the line by clicking on the appropriate check boxes Then enter an output interval in seconds This value
184. based on the type of data being surveyed See OPEN THE VESSEL WIZARD ON PAGE 27 Enter sensor position data using a 3D outline for the vessel See Create Vessel SHAPE OUTLINE ON PAGE 35 Enter additional information such as the ellipsoid used in the survey See DEFAULT ELLIPSOID ON PAGE 55 Enter and edit sensor configuration data See Sensor CONFIGURATION ON PAGE 38 Open the Vessel Wizard 1 Open Vessel Editor from the HIPS and SIPS interface In Vessel Editor 2 Select the New Vessel File command The Vessel Wizard Step 1 Vessel Information dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 27 Create Vessel File Create a New HVF Vessel Information CARIS HIPS and SIPS Vessel Wizard Step 1 Vessel Information Data directory New vessel name Default d CARISSHIPSS 0 HDCS w Date 2010 048 The HVF is saved to the VesselConfig folder in your data directory 1 Select the directory holding your data from the drop down list 2 Type a name to identify the vessel used in the survey The name must not include any spaces 3 Click the Calendar button to insert the year and day the survey began The Vessel Date must be before the start of your data collection 4 Click Next to open the next dialog box Type of Survey This dialog box prompts you to enter the sonar type used in the survey 28 CARIS HIPS an
185. being collected from an ROV Remote Operated Vehicle click the check box to enable the source options for measurement of vehicle depth The auxiliary and sensor depth fields are enabled 19 Click the appropriate check box to select a source for reading ROV depth data e Auxiliary e Sensor Depth 20 Type the number of the Auxiliary field from 1 to 6 if this option is selected Click Next to go to the step in the Conversion Wizard to Convert Data ON PAGE 94 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Sound Velocity Correction Sound Velocity Correction contributes to a more accurate soundings file by applying travel time and angle information into across track and depth values The process combines transducer orientation and positioning data from the HVF with Sound Velocity Profile data and applies a ray tracing algorithm In this chapter SOUND VELOCITY PROCESSING 0ccccccscseeeeeeseseeeaeeeees 134 SOUND VELOCITY CORRECTION cc0ccccceseeeeeeseeseeaeeeeees 136 Sound Velocity Correction Sound Velocity Processing Sound Velocity Processing HVF SVP file 134 Raw data formats such as XTF contain two way travel time and beam launch angle data The Sound Velocity Correction algorithm uses this data to calculate the length and path of the sound wave through the water column for each beam Sound velocity processing is not available for all types of multibeam and single beam sonar data Only those sonar for
186. below Areas with multiple z R hypotheses are shown s in a brighter colour than areas with only one hypothesis The Hypothesis Strength layer is a visual representation of the mathematical confidence of a chosen hypothesis Each node is given a value ranging from 0 0 high confidence to 5 0 low confidence Nodes with one hypothesis have a confidence value of 0 0 while nodes with multiple hypotheses will have confidence values greater than 0 0 A Hypothesis Strength layer is displayed below The brightly coloured areas represent nodes with more than one hypothesis More than one hypothesis or a low confidence value does not necessarily mean an error Uneven areas slopes for example show more than one hypothesis because of the changing terrain Nodes with multiple hypothesis should be examined in the Subset Editor See HYPOTHESES CLEANING ON PAGE 266 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 249 CUBE Processing Overview When you select the Initialization method of disambiguation two additional layers are created Guide_Depth Depths from the initialization surface Guide_Uncertainty Vertical uncertainty values from the initialization surface The User Nominated layer displays the nominated hypotheses that were chosen over the hypotheses selected by CUBE disambiguation see Nominate ALTERNATIVE HYPOTHESES ON PAGE 263 250 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide CUBE Processing Generating CUBE Surfa
187. below the Reference Point If the Waterline Height section of the vessel configuration is not defined here then HIPS uses a default of zero as the height of the waterline below the RP If you want waterline height to be applied during sound velocity correction there must be a value in the Waterline Height section of the HVF No interpolation of waterline height is done during Sound Velocity Correction 1 Click Waterline Height in the Sensors list box so the selection is highlighted and the waterline data fields are displayed 2 Type data as needed in the following fields Date The year and Julian day of the current waterline time stamp Time The hour and minute of the current waterline time stamp Waterline The distance from the RP positive when below the RP Apply Select Yes to apply the waterline data in the Merge process Comments A text field for your use CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Sensors For Simrad data the Waterline value must be set to the same value recorded as WLZ in the Simrad Installation Datagram This Waterline value will only be used during Sound Velocity Correction Set the Apply switch to No If it is set to Yes it will be applied twice once in SVC and again in Merge Total Propagated Uncertainty This section defines the values used in the calculation of Total Propagated Uncertainty TPU TPU is derived from a combination of estimates of the accuracy of
188. ber tenia eeieeGedweye ea ces 170 Delta Draft vexak ee Wee pukea Sh OEE NSE ee RES ENS S 172 10 Create Field Sheets 220002eeeeeeueues 173 Create a Field Sheet n n n nunnana aaa 174 Open and Close Field Sheets n nananana aaan 179 Set as active field sheet n n nananana annaa 179 Turn off field sheet 0 0000 cee eee eee eee 180 Set Field Sheet Properties 200 0000 181 Field Sheet Projection Grid 020000 000s 182 Annotations seinde pdr ieena Pa ee i 184 Create BASE Surfaces ansnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 187 OvervieW annuau aed ead Alka ea Ph eae ce hee be oe 188 Four types of BASE surfaces 2200 00 0 ee 189 Uncertainty Weight 0 002 eee 189 Swath Angle Weight 0 00 e eee eee ee 190 Range weighting 2 228cidsieneeenseebieenten 190 Shoalest Depth True Position 000005 191 CUBE dee Fi ut eva a D Hee eek eeu s EOR aR bee 191 Create a BASE Surface 0 0002 e eee eee 193 BASE Surface Step 1 icedsicwrs asad enteotocen ede 193 BASE Surface Step 2 000 c eee eee ee 195 BASE Surface Step 3 Swath Angle Weighting 197 BASE surface Step 3 Uncertainty Weighting 199 BASE surface Step 3 Shoalest Depth True Position 201 View BASE Surfaces 0 0000 cc eee eee eee 203 Properties of BASE Surfaces 0 000 e eee eee 204 View Surface Properties
189. bute layers to add to the Depth layer in your product surface 5 Type a name for the new product surface in the Output field The file is saved to the same field sheet directory as the BASE surface 6 Type the scale ratio that best suits the type of chart The scale of the Surface should match the scale of the product being created For example if you are creating a Product Surface CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Create a Product Surface that is going to be used for an ENC approach to a harbour then use the appropriate scale for an approach The scale determines the radius used for generalizing the contours of the Surface The Radius value changes as the Scale value is changed The Resolution value sets the node spacing of the generated Product Surface 7 Type a Resolution value if needed 8 Optional Select Surface Defocusing to implement this option The defocusing operation requires you to apply a horizontal error value This value must be derived from the errors values associated with the data 9 Type a Horizontal Error value 10 Select the Reapply Designated Soundings check box to make sure that designated soundings are applied to the surface 11 Click OK When the Product Surface is created it is listed in the Layers tab and shown in the Display window eS ssu on ha A E CTR ps1 Me D Generalized lt Uncertainty Ce Bounding Polygon M Contours roet Mayes Mp
190. butes Density Mean Standard Deviation Deep Median _ Horizontal TPU C Vertical TPU Maximum File Size 66 1 KB 1 Check Use Selected Lines if you want to create the BASE Surface only on the selected line or lines Use the Ignore Lines with errors option so that the surface creation is not interrupted if it encounters bad data The process will skip the part of the line containing bad data and continue creating the surface with the next line Once the surface is complete you can decide whether to remove the partial line 2 Check Ignore Lines with errors to have bad line data omitted from the surface 3 Check Include Additional Bathymetry to include water column bathymetery added to project 4 Select either Accepted Examined or Outstanding check boxes to include soundings with these status flags in the BASE Surface process CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 201 Create BASE Surfaces BASE surface Step 3 Shoalest Depth True Position Additional Attributes 5 Select one or many of the Additional Attributes to create a layer of the BASE Surface that displays that attribute Density creates an attribute layer that displays the density of soundings contributing to a node Mean creates an attribute layer that displays the mean of all soundings contributing to a node Standard Deviation creates an attribute layer that displays the standard deviation from the mean Deep creates an attribute layer that dis
191. butes include Intensity Depth gt Line gt Day e Vessel e Project To view the data of a particular attribute 4 Select the attribute from the drop down list 5 Select a colour map from Colour Map drop down list Two colour settings for Bottom Detection indicate whether a point is detected bottom or not You can change the colours of these flag settings also using the colour picker CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 471 472 Process Water Column Data WCI Data in Subset Editor Survey lines The Survey Lines field in the lower part of the Control window shows a data tree in the familiar P V D L layers Survey lines o MIR simradwer M as basicsimrad 3 M 2000 001 line 200 LIA line 201 CZA line 202 MIAA line 23 oe i gt j 7 Project m Layers MA raw Order N Subset Editor Use the check boxes beside each layer to turn on and off the WCI data associated with individual lines CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Water Column Data Additional Bathymetry Additional Bathymetry Restart Cleaning Show Rejected Compute TPU Regenerate In both Swath Editor and Subset Editor additional bathymetry data can be queried and edited As well critical soundings can be Designated and others flagged as Outstanding or Examined If you want to reverse the editing of additional bathymetry 1 Right click on the additional bathymetry layer and 2 Select Restart Cleaning from the pop up menu
192. ccepted any navigation data rejected without interpolation in Navigation Editor Rejected with Interpolation Attitude Reset to Accepted any attitude data that was rejected with interpolation in Attitude Editor Rejected break Interpolation Attitude Reset to Accepted any attitude data that was rejected without interpolation in Attitude Editor 4 Click OK The selected data is now flagged as accepted CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Quality Control Reports Quality Control Reports The Quality Control QC process in HIPS is typically used to statistically compare soundings recorded from check lines against selected attribute values from a BASE Surface in the same survey area Statistical variance between the check line soundings and the attribute values are shown in a table in QC Reports tab of the Worksheet window once the QC tool is run 1 Open data 2 Open a field sheet 3 Select a survey line in the Display or you can select a Project Vessel or Day folder in the Project tab 4 Select the Quality Control command QC Report Step 1 The QC Report Wizard Step 1 dialog box is displayed Process gt QC Report Menu OC Report Wizard Step 1 of 3 Select reference surface SYD47 1 SYD47 CUBE Density Depth Holidays Hypothesis_Count Hypothesis_Strength Use template file File name 1 Select a BASE Surface att
193. ce See Loan TIDE ON PAGE 144 Merge Combine vertical and horizontal information to produce geo referenced data If changes are later made to the navigation and or motion data during the QC process the Merge process is re applied Compute Total Propagated Uncertainty TPU Use uncertainty values entered in the HVF to compute the total propagated error of each individual sounding See Compute TPU on Pace 156 Define new field sheets Organize dataset into manageable areas with defined locations and map projection See CREATE A FIELD SHEET ON PAGE 174 Generate a Bathymetry Associated with Statistical Error BASE Surface Either a Swath Angle Uncertainty or CUBE surface from data contained in field sheet See Create A BASE SURFACE ON PAGE 193 Generate a Combined Uncertainty and Bathymetry Estimator CUBE Surface Use merged data to produce a CUBE surface Data QC Examine and edit sensor data such as navigation gyro heave if problems have been identified in the BASE CUBE surface Workflow in HIPS and SIPS Workflow diagram Filtering Use automated or manual tools to filter soundings using swath geometry and or according to IHO survey order accuracies Filter water column data for editing in Subset Editor Process Data in Subsets Using hypothesis editing validate the CUBE surface and edit geo referenced soundings Add bathymetry from edited water column data Finalize BASE Surface Update the va
194. centre of the compass the light is represented as directly above the image The height and direction from which the light is displayed is shown by the Sun Elevation and Sun Azimuth values Sun Azimuth An adjustment here is reflected in the Sun Position field Sun Elevation An adjustment here is reflected in the Sun Position field Vertical Exaggeration Increase the exaggeration value to heighten the vertical detail Digits Draw Digits Set to True to display data values Engineering Digits Set to True to display the digits of the data nodes with decimal places instead of superscripts and in regular un slanted text Engineering Precision Set the number of decimal places to include when values are displayed in engineering digits Default is 1 decimal place Digit Font Click the Browse button to select the font from the Fonts dialog box Minimum Display Scale Set the value of the smallest scale at which digits will be displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 211 Create BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces Property Function Suppression Filter out specific data based on the number of soundings in a selected area Fields are activated when Draw Digits is set to True Suppression Type Apply Overplot Removal to remove overlapping soundings Radius filter out soundings within a set radius or None Radius Size of the a
195. ces Generating CUBE Surfaces CUBE Surfaces are created using the BASE Surface wizard All track lines must be merged and TPU must be computed before a CUBE Surface can be created To create a CUBE Surface 1 Open a field sheet of the area for the Surface e To create a Surface for the entire field sheet area select the field sheet in the Layers tab in the Control window e To create a Surface for a single track line select a track line within the field sheet and then select the field sheet layer in the data tree gt Process gt BASE 2 Select the New Base Surface command Surface gt New The number of steps in the wizard is determined by the type of surface you are creating 3 ME BASE Surface Step 1 The BASE Surface Wizard Step 1 dialog box opens BASE Surface Wizard Step 1 of 3 Cancel Help 1 Type a Name for the BASE Surface 2 Type any necessary Comments in the text box and click Next BASE Surface Step 2 The BASE Surface Wizard Step 2 dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 251 CUBE Processing Generating CUBE Surfaces BASE Surface Wizard Step 2 of 3 Resolution Single 5 00 m minDepth maxDepth l Depth Filter 0 minDepth m maxDepthfm res m Multiple 4 Surface Type CUBE Vertical Datum Unk Cancel Help The Resolution value s sets the distance s between BASE Surface nodes You can use the same si
196. cessed source device Convert E EEE v Source ECHO_ID v If you select ECHO_ID as the source you can select 1 of 2 devices with one of 4 depth attributes for either device If you select CF_DEPTH you can select either device 1 or device 2 6 Select either ECHO_ID or CF_DEPTH from the Source drop down list 7 From the Primary P drop down list select the device and channel where the data is stored If you select a device that is not present or in which the selected depth channel is not available no depth data is converted If you select Dual Frequency you can convert data from both a primary P and a secondary S device with one of four channels for each device Convert Dual Frequency i Source P Dev 1 1 S Dev2 1 8 From the Primary P drop down list select the device and channel where the data is stored If you elect to convert primary data from a device that is not present or in which the selected depth channel is not available depths of 0 0 metres will be converted but all data will be rejected If you convert secondary data from a device that is not present or in which the selected depth channel is not available no secondary depth data will be converted CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 117 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 118 S7K data It is possible to have 7004 7006 and 7027 records stored in the same file In this case
197. check box to include side scan data in the conversion process Critical line name information can be fitted into 12 characters provided by the CARIS Source ID attribute for soundings in a CARIS map 4 Select the Shorten line names check box to modify the file name to a 12 character name YYDDD_HHMMDD 5 Select the higher frequency data as the primary soundings if data format is dual frequency CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 97 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 98 6 Select High Frequency or Low Frequency from the drop down list to convert Atlas ASD side scan data if available The Atlas SURF library cannot be converted from read only files Atlas files must be located on a read write media before they can be converted into HIPS Chirpscan3D There are no options for the Chirpscan3D format CMAX There are no options for the CMAX format Coda 1 Select a sonar channel 2 Click the Decimate Imagery check box to apply a decimation routine to the side scan data Decimation reduces side scan data to 1024 or fewer intensities per side for each swath 3 Click the Correct Imagery check box to increase contrast in the side scan imagery 4 Select the Cable Out is Horizontal Layback option to omit sensor depth during conversion If there is no sensor depth and the towpoint has a Z offset of zero the cable out value is treated as the horizontal layback value during processing CARIS HIPS and SIPS
198. check box to reject soundings that are offset from the surface Click OK Surface filtering can also be used in Subset Editor where you can apply filters to a subset of a BASE surface See SUBSETS AND BASE Surfaces ON PAGE 350 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 245 Create BASE Surfaces Surface Filtering 246 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Il CUBE Processing A Combined Uncertainty and Bathymetry Estimator CUBE surface uses multiple hypotheses to represent potential depth variances along the sea floor In this chapter OVERVIEW drosera eon Ea O E IE unas sesaees 248 GENERATING CUBE SURFACES c cccsceeceseeseeeeeeeees 251 HYPOTHESIS EDITING ao iesaczccacaiivossensicadacctsdsaadteupeeaasioas 259 CUBE Processing Overview Overview The CUBE process uses sounding propagation along with disambiguation to create and select hypotheses When soundings are propagated to a grid of estimation nodes Soundings with a low vertical uncertainty are given more influence than soundings with high vertical uncertainty Soundings with a low horizontal uncertainty are given more influence than soundings with a high horizontal uncertainty Soundings close to the node are given a greater weight than soundings further away from the node Generally as soundings are propagated to a node a hypothesis depth value is developed at that node If a sounding s value is not significantly different from the previ
199. ck box 4 Select the Show Only Selected Alternatives check box The 2D and 3D Views are refreshed to show only the nominated and established hypotheses The following image shows the 3 D View with only nominated and established hypotheses displayed Some hypotheses will not have alternatives To view only those hypotheses selected by CUBE that do have alternative hypotheses 5 Select the Show Only Hypotheses with Alternatives check box The Views are refreshed to show only the hypotheses for which there are alternative hypotheses as illustrated below CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide CUBE Processing Hypothesis Editing When you have finished nominating alternative hypotheses to replace the hypotheses selected by CUBE disambiguation the User Nominated layer will display these nominated hypotheses 2 Tools gt Subset Editor 6 Select the Save command to save your data gt Clear 7 To remove the nomination flag select the Clear command 2 2 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 265 CUBE Processing Hypotheses Cleaning Hypotheses Cleaning Reject Tools gt Subset Editor gt Reject Tools gt Subset Editor gt Accept Reject Node Menu Tools gt Subset Editor gt Reject Node Tool amp Accept Node Menu Tools gt Subset Editor gt Accept Tool 266 Like soundings in Swath and Subse
200. ck box beside the layer To hide a surface e g a BASE surface and its attribute layers while continuing to display the field sheet 1 Highlight the surface in the Layers tab 2 Select Turn Off Layers from the right click menu The selected surface and all its attribute layers are no longer visible in the Display window 1 Select the field sheet by name in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Select Delete from the right click menu The field sheet is permanently removed 1 Select the field sheet by name in the Layers tab 2 Select the Close Field Sheets command The field sheet outline is removed from the Display window and the file name is no longer displayed in the Layers tab 1 Select the field sheet by name in the Layers tab 2 Right click on the field sheet layer and select the Close command from the pop up menu The field sheet is no longer open in the interface CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Field Sheets Set Field Sheet Properties Set Field Sheet Properties Window gt Properties Menu eh Properties Pop up Tools To set the display properties of a field sheet 1 Select a field sheet layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 If the Properties window is not open select a Properties window command The Properties window for field sheets is displayed Properties Extents E Coordinate System El Projection E General E Display Show
201. contain the ellipsoid and datum used by the navigation system in the survey vessel regardless of whether projection coordinates or geographic coordinates are stored in the data The list of available ellipsoids is maintained in the datum dat file referenced by the uslXdatum environment variable By default this file is located in the System directory Set the ellipsoid for a new vessel file to be the same as the one used in the survey Tools gt Options 1 Select the Options command Menu General Colours Default ellipsoid for new vessels v ee er ee ainn eee The Options dialog is displayed 2 Select the Options General tab 3 Select an ellipsoid from the pull down menu 4 Click OK to close the dialog box The name of the ellipsoid is displayed in the Navigation section of the editor CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 55 Create Vessel File Default Ellipsoid 56 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create a New Project All project information in HIPS and SIPS is maintained in a project data base New projects are created with a wizard which generates a HIPS Project File hpf In this chapter DEFINE New PROJECT OPEN PROJECTS seceseeceeeeeeeeeeeees View PROJECT PROPERTIES Set LINE PROPERTIES RENAME DAY AND LINE FOLDERS ARCHIVE PROJECT cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees Create a New Project Define New Project Define New Project File gt New gt Project
202. controlled using the Column Settings dialog box opened from the right click menu See Column Settinas Changes made to the column selection and order are retained until you change them This detailed information can be saved to a text file 6 Optional Select Save As from the right click menu to save the line data to a text file You can also save a customized selection of the data using the Line REPORT ON PAGE 275 Query Data in Editors Use the Query function to examine data selected in any HIPS and SIPS interactive editor For example position data selected in Navigation Editor or pings selected in Side Scan Editor 1 Select the data so it is highlighted in one of the editor windows CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Edit gt Query Menu Q Tool Query lt Q gt Key Pop up Query Line Data Edit gt Query Line Query Line Pop up Menu Process gt Line Report Menu Data QC Query Data 2 Select a Query command The selected records are displayed in the Selection tab For example in Navigation Editor this data is displayed for each numbered record Time e d Time Lat DMS Lon DMS e Distance m d Distance m Speed m s d Speed m s CMG e d CMG e Status This data is read only However individual records can be rejected or accepted using the pop up menu in the Selection tab See Cotumn Settina
203. creased or decreased so is the number of pixels Image Depth Set the number of values applied to each pixel in the image one value for each colour plus one for transparency if using 32 Bit If you would like a transparency setting applied to the background colour the 32 Bit RGBA option must be selected Background Colour The colour displayed in the background of the histogram The default is black Background Alpha This option is only available when the Image Depth is set to 32 Bit RGBA Set the degree of transparency applied to the background colour The default setting is zero transparency Compression Compress the resulting image file during export to decrease the file size This option is only available when using the TIFF format There are various compression methods available each of which performs differently By default LZW is used 7 Click OK The image file is saved to the specified location CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Sounding Selection Sounding Selection Process gt Products gt Selected Soundings Pop up Menu New gt Selected Soundings Survey data contains so many soundings that they cannot all be displayed legibly on a chart or map HIPS enables users to make a meaningful selection of soundings to be displayed A selection of soundings is created as a sub layer of a field sheet The sounding selection is g
204. create a subset area within the tiled area See Susset Epitor INTERFACE in the HIPS and SIPS Editors Guide 4 Use the 3D View Controls to adjust the view of the data See SuBsET 3D View in the HIPS and SIPS Editors Guide 5 Clean subset data See SUBSET CLEANING ON PAGE 339 6 Classify data in subset area See TRackING CLEANING STATUS ON PAGE 349 7 Define another subset and repeat the process If you are processing a small amount of data using subset tiles to track progress can be omitted Steps 1 and 2 and Subset Editor can be directly opened into the track lines However if you are processing large areas of data the subset tiling method is a useful way to track changes For hypothesis editing a CUBE surface in Subset Editor see HYPOTHESIS EDITING ON PAGE 259 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Data in Subsets Subset Cleaning Subset Cleaning Menu Tools gt Subset Editor Tool Menu Tools gt Subset Editor gt Load Tool Y Menu Edit gt Status Flag gt Reject Tool x Reject Key Pop up lt R gt CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Soundings in the 2D and 3D Views can be interactively examined and their status flags can be modified To open Subset Editor 1 Select the Subset Editor command 2 Define the area in the Display window to be included in the subset See Open Susset Epitor
205. ct TOuse the bathymetry location data from the same swath to register the side scan imagery If not selected a flat seafloor assumption will be used This function is only applicable to systems which provide bathymetry and imagery information at the same time in the same swath Gyro From Select source from the drop down list Select the orientation source from the Gyro drop down list Automatic Course Made Good Ship Gyro or Towfish Gyro Smooth Gyro Select Smooth Gyro to apply gyro that has been smoothed in Attitude Editor Include Channel Select Port or Starboard or both TVG amp Gain TVG Select the boxes to apply to Port or Starboard or both Type values in dB 100 m in the fields Gain Select the boxes to apply to Port or Starboard or both Type values in dB 100 m in the fields Beam Pattern Click Browse to select the Beam Pattern file to apply e Check the boxes to apply to Port or Starboard or both Gain Normalization Enable and set the window size for the moving average filter Despeckle Set the Despeckle threshold value Override per line corrections Select this option to apply these correction settings to all lines in the mosaic Acrosstrack Altitude Ratio The Acrosstrack Altitude Ratio excludes data starting from nadir extending across track to a distance determined by the towfish altitude and the given ratio Min Max Select
206. ct the Include Rejected option to export rejected data Click Next HIPS to HTF Output options a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 4 of 6 E zix Output options Output File Browse Expotttoonetie C Export to multiple fes HTF File Version 2 02 Copyright Information Data Usage Restriction Classification of Data Processing Svstem Name amp V iz lt Back cot tee Enter the necessary header information You can directly enter the data or load it from an HTFT Hydrographic Transfer Format Template file If you are exporting soundings you can export all data toa single file or export data from each survey line to its own file This option is not available for field sheet products 1 Select an output location for the HTF file s e If you choose Export to One File type a name and file path for the HTF file or click Browse to select a location and name for the file e If you choose Export to Multiple Files click Browse to select a folder to save the HTF files The files are automatically named according to Project_Vessel_Date_SurveyLine 532 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data HIPS To HTF 2 To enter new information for example the number of depth sounders or tidal stations click in the Value field next to the appropriate HTF Header Field and type the data or 3 Optional Click Load to open data from an existing HTFT file into the Value fields 4 C
207. ct threshold amount for example 2 metres from the surface Soundings that fall outside the threshold are assigned a Rejected by Surface Filter flag and are no longer available for processing unless they are given an Accepted flag again This can greatly reduce the number of manual edits required to produce a clean sounding set 1 Select the Surface Filter command The Surface Filter dialog box is displayed Surface Filter Select Layer A Jan30 13 E CUBE29 GZ Jan6 13 BB Fundy47 6 3 6 Jani6 13 i E Fundy 47C2 Threshold Type Static Value v Threshold value 2 00 m C Include data previously rejected by Surface Filter C Reject soundings that do not fall on the surface 2 Select the BASE surface to be filtered from the Select Layer tree 3 Select the Threshold Type from the drop down list e Standard Deviation e Uncertainty e Greater of the two e Lesser of the two CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 7 Create BASE Surfaces Surface Filtering e Static Value Set the desired Threshold value e For standard deviation or uncertainty thresholds the value entered will show the confidence interval next to the field e Static values are entered in units set in Tools gt Options gt Display gt Units gt Vertical units e g metres Select the nclude data previously rejected check box to include rejected data when running the filter Select the Reject soundings
208. ctory structure The Export to GSF function updates these GSF files Output Folder CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 5 r Output Folder a I Maintain PYD Hierarchy l Ignore disabled beams cme eo 1 Click the Browse button to select a location for exported GSF files The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed The stored file will have the same name as the track line 2 To export entire projects and maintain the HIPS Project Vessel Day Line structure in the output click the Maintain PVD Hierarchy check box 3 Select the Ignore Disabled Beams option to exclude any soundings which have been rejected because of disabled beams from your export file 4 Click Next EXPORT ON PAGE 542 528 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide HIPS To HOB Export Data HIPS To HOB The Hydrographic Object Binary HOB file stores feature objects and associated attribute data The HOB file can contain links to CARIS spatial objects HIPS to HOB Step 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 7 Export Soundings Attributes Basic v Feature Code SGSL v User Number 1 C Group By Beam Sounding Status Accepted Examined Outstanding C Rejected C Designated C Data Binning Bin Size 10 By Area By Line Binning Method Shoal Biased The Export Soundings option exports all soundings subject to the sounding status and data binnin
209. d e g attribute name Use your keyboard and the condition buttons to create the equation for the new layer The example above shows the CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands equation to create a new depth layer with values increased by 3 metres 6 Click any of the operators to add it to the field Operator Function Displays parentheses Depth addition Depth 4 x multiplication Depth 4 subtraction Depth 4 division Depth 4 exponentiation Depth Depth 4 To add values 7 Click at the point in the equation where you want to enter a numerical value and type the number Use Backspace to remove parts of an equation or click Clear to remove everything from the conditions field 8 Click OK to compute the new layer The new layer is drawn in the Display window and is listed as a BASE Surface child layer in the Layers tab The properties of the new layer can be viewed in the Creation fields of the Properties window the Method field shows it is a computed layer and the Equation field shows the variables in the equation T E Creation v Recompute surface The Recompute function rebuilds a BASE Surface and regenerates the surface image If you have updated the BASE Surface since it was interpolated you can apply the Recompute command to rebuild the interpolated surface CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 22
210. d 182 properties viewing 181 setas active 179 turn off 180 field sheets overview 173 file formats exported 492 filter BASE surface attribute display 209 Filter Slice 353 filtering Benthos 128 by Special Order 159 QINSy 128 fun TPU filter 161 filtering S 44 159 filters attitude data 285 288 protect crtitical soundings 304 swath 325 Total Propagated Uncertainty 159 finalized surface 224 Find search for sounding 328 Find and Designate 342 find soundings 328 fixed size points WCl data 471 flag designated soundings 333 flag shoalest soundings 342 formatting tags for GeoBaR names 418 Full Blend use to resolve overlapping GeoBaRs 436 G Generalized layer 359 Generic Data Parser 24 GeoBaR 412 acronym explained 412 conflict resolution methods when selecting 445 create 417 define 412 delete 433 edit 429 export many 502 naming 418 remove from mosaic 441 using variables to name 418 GeoBak conflict 444 GeoBar layer Statistics 441 GeoBaR to Image see Surface to Image 510 GeoBaRs export multiple 495 Geocoder workflow for multibeam data 415 Geocoder engine 414 default options in GeoBaR creation 419 grain size 446 Grain Size table 451 graph sediment analysis 453 grid Pprojection grid in field sheet 182 grid lines iN projection grid 182 Group surfaces 242 GSF export to CARIS map 511 exp
211. d Averaging check box to apply this option see TIDE STATIONS AND WEIGHTED AVERAGE ON PAGE 148 If the selected tide file doesn t contain any averaging options this option is not available 144 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Correct for Tide Load Tide 7 Select the Compute Errors check box to have the Load process save computed errors to a tide error file for each line These tide error files will then be used in computing TPU If the selected tide file does not contain any error parameters this option is unavailable 8 Click Load The tide data is loaded into the selected track lines from the tide zone definition file Load Tide status To determine if tide has been loaded for a line or lines 1 Select the trackline s 2 Select the Selection tab The Selection tab will display line data for the selected line s in columns The Tide Loaded column shows Yes when tide has been loaded for the selected line s The GPS Tide column shows Yes when tide has been loaded for the selected line s The Tide Applied column can display one of four values None No tide has been applied Merge has never been run and no ProcessedDepths exist Observed The line has been Merged and choose to apply Observed tides from loaded TID file s GPS The line has been Merged and a GPS tide file has been applied Zoned The line has been Merged and a previously loaded ZDF file has been applied CARIS HI
212. d SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Create a New HVF CARIS HIPS and SIPS Vessel Wizard Step 2 Type of Survey Singlebeam Multibeam Multi transducer sweep Side scan sonar There are four sonar types e Singlebeam Multibeam e Multi transducer e Side Scan Sonar 1 Select a sonar type by clicking the appropriate check box 2 Click Next to go to the next step in the Vessel Wizard or if you selected Side Scan Sonar click Finish One or more dialog boxes will follow depending on the type of sonar selected in this dialog box If you selected Singlebeam go to Motion SENsors ON PAGE 32 If you selected Multibeam go to MuLTIBEAM ON PAGE 29 If you selected Multi transducer go to Mutti TRANSDUCER ON PAGE 30 Multibeam If you selected Multibeam in the Step 2 dialog box Step 3 will ask you for information on the sonar model and number of transducers CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 29 Create Vessel File Create a New HVF 30 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Vessel Wizard Step 3 Multibeam Number of Transducers 1 O2 Transducer 1 Transducer 2 Total Model Simrad EM300 1 Select the appropriate check box to indicate that one or two transducers were used in the survey 2 Enter the number of beams in each transducer 3 Select the sonar model from the drop down list 4 Click Next to continue to Motion SENSORS ON PAGE 32 Multi T
213. d area Shine Through The highest intensity pixel will be used Underlay The opposite of Overwrite The pixel is added only if no other point exists CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Create Mosaic from GeoBaRs 8 Select a method to process overlapping data from the drop down list You can set the display colours for the mosaic 9 Select a colour map from the drop down list The range of colours will be displayed in the Preview field below When a GeoBaR is created limits can be set on the intensity range In some cases it may be more useful to maintain the full intensity range in creating the GeoBaR then limiting this range in the final Mosaic 10 Optional Click Advanced to set intensity options Create Mosaic Adyanced Options Intensity Range Min dB Max dB 11 Set minimum or maximum values in dB for the Intensity Range This will exclude nodes that fall outside of the range defined by the min max values 12 Click OK to return to the Create Mosaic dialog box 13 Click Create The mosaic that is created will appear in the Layers tab with its colour coded child layers Intensity Original Intensity and Weights as for GeoBaRs plus a layer called Contributor Delete Mosaic To delete a Mosaic 1 Right click on the Mosaic layer in the Layers tab 2 Select Delete Mosaic from the pop up menu This will permanently delete the mosaic from your disk It does not delete the compon
214. d eagles banwapnees 480 Export Surface Metadata 0 000 c eee eee ee 481 Export Surface to BAG 2 eee eee 482 Export Settings i222 e086 ous Gag hee dee as eu eee des 483 Save and Load Templates 000005 484 Export Surface to ESRI ASCII Grid 2 0 486 Export Selection to DXF sa acesce cs ski dae saben eee eaves 487 Export Selection to Formatted ASCII 489 Export Selection to GML os i205 sees op anwar kobe axeetes 490 Formats EXPONCG cis iice ech heel Re ew hee ee ee eeees eed 492 Export Wizatd 24002s5o2GadsdendsSeVeeReewceseawe Y 494 Step 1 Select Format 00 002 e eee eee ee 494 Step 2 Select Files 0 2 00 c cece eee eee 495 BAG to ASGI 23 w2cdadcegecdenwaesd Oeasien ee 1auedne 497 BASE Surface To ASCII s2utsetiade hast eetadwiiads 498 BASE Surface to ASCII Step 3 2005 498 Select Export Units 2 i0ccc eee ecaeueeedauseeeenend 500 Surface To Image annann 6a0be oko bee sees Liawkoes 501 Attribute and Image Options 0 00 eee 501 Image Output Options c ess bei ce eae e ees 502 COMACIS e o245484040e reteset ehataheedeoaen ene ewe tee 504 Contacts Step S eusecatevaiGevest ere sbe Ghee sk aah 504 Contacts Step 4 0 202 e ee eee 505 Ge BaR tO ASC 63 neat Cert ortebeyee ia bieeseeweyads 507 GeoBaR to ASCII Output Options 507 Select Export Units 22 ga1e cc 8t4teu
215. d exports the values at those locations 14 Select a Point sampling option 15 Optional If exporting sampled points enter a value for the Interval between points The Interval setting defaults to the Sample step size setting of the profile graph but you can export sampled points at a different interval if desired CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 379 Create Product Surfaces Profiles The profile was created using attribute values from the selected source layer e g Depth You can define the precision for these values as well as the Z axis convention to use in the output 16 Select a Precision value to define the number of decimal places to include in attribute values 17 Select the Z axis convention to use in the exported values 18 Click OK to perform the export The data in the Profile window is exported to an ASCII file Header information includes The name of the profile line The coordinate projection of the data The unit of measure for the attribute values The Z axis convention of the data The unit of measure for distance values The start and end coordinates of the profile line The headings for the column order Export Profile to Image Use the Image Export command in the pop up menu of the Profile window to export an image of the current profile graph The profile image can be exported to PDF Portable Document Format PS PostScript SVG Scalable Vector Graphics TIFF Tagged Image F
216. d for beam and profile number Extra fields can be added if needed The HTF export automatically exports TPU depth and TPU position values if these are included in the track line The HTF file contains an ordered list of all possible fields and a description of each field Sometimes the same header information can be used for multiple HTF files The export wizard gives you the option of saving a header for use in another file Headers are saved as HTFT files Hydrographic Transfer Format Template The file is in XML format that can be viewed in a text editor or an XML compliant Internet browser Select Input Data When exporting HIPS to HTF the Input Options dialog box displays either a list of projects and associated field sheets or the Project Vessel Day Line data structure depending on which export option you select 1 Select the Field Sheet Product option and select a product layer associated with a field sheet or CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 531 Export Data HIPS To HTF 2 Select the BASE surface option and select one or more BASE surfaces or 3 Select the Raw Data option to export sounding data This will refresh the file tree to a Project Vessel Day Line directory structure 4 Open a project or session file tree and select a layer or trackline data If you select the Raw Data option the Include Rejected option is active This option includes rejected soundings in the export process 5 Optional Sele
217. d sounding styles from the drop down menu The Add Extended Attributes option adds useful additional information to each sounding The Aad Keys option gives each sounding a unique identifier or key This key provides a link back to the original sounding in the HIPS file and is required to open a specific sounding in the HIPS Swath Single Beam or Subset Editors 5 Select the Add Extended Attributes option if you want to include time stamp launch ID accuracy value and tidal reduction value with the soundings 6 Select the Add Keys option to give each sounding a unique identifier The key format is XXXPPPPPBBB where XXX is a random value PPPPP is the profile number and BBB is the beam number 7 Click Next Output to HOB file A HOB file contains S 57 feature objects Attributes to help identify the soundings are also included in the HOB file The wizard enables you map these attributes to corresponding S 57 attributes 1 Select the Output to Hob File option 2 Click Browse to select a directory and a name for the HOB file 3 Click Next CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 389 Create Product Surfaces Sounding Selection 390 Enable Filter Sounding Selection Wizard Enable Filter Attribute Type Density Int Depth Float Hypothesis_Count Int Hypothesis_Strenagth Float Mean Float Depth lt 10 AND Hypothesis_Count 2 BOG wm BS The Enable Filter option allows you to extract and displ
218. dard deviation within a swath sector or horizontal bin It then prevents any soundings that fall outside a multiple of the standard deviation from being converted If Statistical Filtering is used then the mean within the sector is re computed Ultimately the soundings are sorted by their residual from the mean and those closest to the mean are converted The actual number of soundings converted from within each sector is determined by the thinning factor if used 6 Select the Statistical Filtering check box to implement this option 7 Determine a Threshold multiples of the standard deviation value by clicking the up and down arrow buttons The equivalent confidence value is displayed as a percentage The filtering and thinning methods are executed within a sector angle interval or a horizontal bin size The sector angle option divides the swath into sectors according to degree angles while the horizontal bin size divides the swath into horizontal sectors based on a specified across track distance Vessel motion and transducer mounting angles are considered when sector angle and horizontal bin locations are determined 1 Select the Sector Angle Interval option and choose a degree level to a maximum of 10 by clicking the up or down arrow buttons 2 As an alternate method Select the Horizontal Bin Size option choose an across track distance by clicking the up or down arrow buttons The thinning factor reduces the number of
219. data 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 5 Convert Quality 0 Data Scripps There are no options specifically for the Scripps format CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 119 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 120 SDF 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 6 SDF Klein 3000 Frequency High Low Pressure Sensor 1000 PSI v Range 0 5 v C Convert Hidden C Convert SSGyro Cable out is horizontal layback Convert Aux Altitude Bathy Quality 70 V Convert Rejected 1 Select a Klein 3000 High or Low frequency Select a Pressure Sensor reading from the drop down list to set the depth of the towfish Select the Range of voltage for the pressure sensor either 0 5V or 1 5V Hidden data consists of repeated pings over the same area Select the Convert Hidden check box to include hidden data in conversion Select the Convert SSGyro check box to include side scan sonar gyro data Select the Cable Out is Horizontal Layback option to omit sensor depth during conversion When cable out is converted as horizontal layback sonar depth is set to 0 0 metres Select Convert Aux Depth to use the data in the auxiliary depth field This option will override the sonar depth converted into HIPS and SIPS from the depth field This option is disabled if the Cable Out is Horizontal Layback option is selected Select the Convert Aux Altitude check box
220. dd OModify Remove Method Auto Seam v CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Add a new component Modify Components Remove GeoBaR from mosaic Manual Blend Other functions Process Imagery Data Edit Mosaics The methods available to edit the components of a mosaic are the same as used to create the mosaic Auto Seam Full Blend Overwrite Shine Through and Underlay Also available is the blending method used to create the original mosaic This is listed as Default To add another GeoBaR to the mosaic 1 Select an open GeoBak that is not a ready part of the mosaic 2 Inthe Edit tab select the Add option 3 Select a method for processing overlap from the drop down list 4 Click Commit To modify the method by which a component GeoBaR contributes to the mosaic 1 Select a line that is part of the mosaic 1 Select Modify 2 Select the preferred method from the drop down list 3 Click Commit To remove a component from a mosaic 1 Select Remove 2 Select an option from the drop down list Remove Complete will re mosaic the portion of the mosaic covered by selected GeoBaR without any contributions from the selected GeoBaR Remove Explicit will keep any blended pixels but remove any pixels that are explicitly from the selected line 3 Click Commit to save the changes You can select a GeoBaR and perform a manual blending operation with it 1 Click Blend to open a
221. de 7 Enable Protective Radius Radius m Select the Critical tab Select the Enable Protective Radius check box Select which type s of soundings to apply the radius to Type the dimensions of the protective area in the Radius field This value is in the default units set in Tools gt Options gt Display gt Units a A OU N 6 Click Save or Save As to save your filter file so it can be applied with the Apply Filters command CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Restart Cleaning Restart Cleaning Edits made to sounding attitude and navigation data using the various data cleaning tools can be undone by using the Restart Cleaning function The Restart Cleaning function resets status flags for each selected track line from Rejected to Accepted You can set which editing process will be reversed by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the dialog box Warning All previous depth cleaning is lost once this command is implemented 1 Select the track line s gt Edit gt Restart 2 Select the Restart Cleaning command 2 Cleaning The Restart Cleaning dialog box is displayed 3 i Restart Cleaning A WARNING Previous depth cleaning will be lost Select the Reject flag types to change back to Accepted Swath Singlebeam Navigation C Rejected by swath singlebeam C Reject with interpolation Area Subset C Reject break interpolation C Rejected by
222. der If the value is positive the uncertainty values do not meet the requirements for the selected survey order Therefore if no nodes were considered for the survey order the residual mean would have to be above zero 241 Create BASE Surfaces Group multiple surfaces Group multiple surfaces Multiple BASE surfaces created in different field sheets can be grouped together so that the same display properties can be applied consistently to all the grouped surfaces See PROPERTIES oF BASE Surfaces ON PAGE 204 Grouped surfaces are listed together under a new Sources layer followed by their combined attribute layers as in the illustration below Control MIE HIPS Data v Ship Track Lines _ 26 Critical Soundings OEE Contacts M Jan30 13 3 MZ Fundy47 B Deep Depth Mean _ Shoal d Bounding Poly Fundy 8 ter Depth Interpolated CO Bounding Poly ME Jani aA Density Depth Mean Std_Dev d Bounding Pol Hypothesis _C Hypothesis _5 Node_Std_ De Uncertainty K LJ m K oBBo D O O OL K User_Nominat Oo m ZJ Project M Layers Y Project M Layers Control a MIB HIPs Data Ship Track Lines 26 Critical Soundings OBE Contacts St areasi lt 4 fe Sources lt 4 o4 Fundy47 B E Fundy47 B_Interp ZA Fundy 47C2 Deep Density
223. directly from a selection of track lines See Create Mosaics on PAGE 78 To create a mosaic from GeoBars in Mosaic Editor 1 Open or create a field sheet that encompasses the area you want to mosaic 2 Select the Ship Track Lines layer in the Layers tab 3 Select two or more track lines for which GeoBaRs have been created The Create Mosaic command and toolbar button are activated 4 Select a Create Mosaic command Mosaics are created using one GeoBaR per line When there is more than one GeoBaR loaded on a selected line the Resolve Conflict dialog box will appear so you can choose which GeoBaR you want to include in the mosaic Resolve Conflict 1 of 2 More than one GeoBaR could be used for this operation Please choose a method to resolve this conflict Line 117 2322 Method Finest Resolution I Apply to all Apply Skip Cancel Help There are three methods to resolve a conflict Newest GeoBaR Finest Resolution and Manual For more information on conflict resolution see ConFLict RESOLUTION ON PAGE 444 5 Select a method to resolve the conflict CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Name the mosaic Process Imagery Data Create Mosaic from GeoBaRs When any conflicts in selecting GeoBaRs are resolved the Create Mosaic dialog box is displayed Create Mosaic Name MOS eisley47 Resolution 1 0000 m Method 4uto Seam Colour Map Jelly cma Every mosaic shou
224. ds automatically you can create a template by setting options for all the fields manually and then saving the settings to an XML file This XML template file can then be loaded so that the fields populated from the settings in the template are applied to another export To save export settings as a template 1 Enter fields settings 2 Click Save to create a template of the export settings CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Export Surface to BAG 3 Inthe Save dialog box define a name and location for the template file and click Save To load a saved template 1 Select the surface in the Layers tab 2 Select the Export Surface to BAG command 3 Click Load select the desired template and click Open The fields are populated with the saved settings CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 485 Export Data Export Surface to ESRI ASCII Grid Export Surface to ESRI ASCII Grid File gt Export gt Surface to ESRI ASCII Grid Menu 486 Save a BASE surface layer to an ESRI ASCII grid This export creates three output files an asc file containing the grid data this can be opened as a background file in HIPS a prj file which contains coordinate system information and an asc aux xml file containing metadata These files can be viewed in a text editor 1 Select the BASE surface parent layer in the Layers tab 2 Select the Export to ESRI grid command The Export to ESRI
225. e Step 1 0 00222 251 BASE Surface Step 2 00 22 c eee eee 251 BASE Surface Step 3 CUBE 4 253 BASE Surface Step 4 CUBE 254 Advanced Options for CUBE surface 255 Hypothesis Editing 00002 eee eee ee 259 Hypotheses views 0 aana 261 Wire frame Hypotheses 22220005 261 Fixed Size Hypotheses 2000 eee eee 262 Nominate Alternative Hypotheses 263 Hypotheses Cleaning cece eee eee eee ee 266 Updating a CUBE Surface 000 eae 267 Data QG icbckeavhdctcnecnte eng ken aeninnwewse 269 WOMKIOW 9 2 oe vee ce ORE ae Rees bevel awes weeds 270 Tools for examining and editing data 272 Q ery Dalel lt cascs 8S bub tian tad Cb CIES a eh t oad 273 View Line Data ci2 ted te biadee ves ee Pena eae yaawas 273 Detailed Line Query 0 0000 e eee eee eee 274 Query Data in Eqnors 2 cy2xg ceetu dv eens heeRes EER Ss 274 Line Report sc ctigusckeoies teak Gieeedastaxcaeenaa 275 Rejecting and Accepting Data 277 Examine Navigation Data 0 e eee eee 278 Speed JUMP sce cunt e el eeeRed hee beh e ee saw Ee Ree 279 Time JUMP 225 2ds cave iesceeaeseerensew eae een aes 279 Rejecting Navigation Data 2 02e2 0 eee 281 Line Interpolation 002 eee 281 Shift Navigation Data oe de
226. e if needed 5 Type a User Number for the towfish so it is distinguished from other vessels in the same CARIS map 6 Select the Exclude Rejected Record s check box to not include this data 7 Select the Export Swaths check box to export a set of lines that represents the swaths along the survey 8 Type a User Number for the swath so it is distinguished from other swaths in the same CARIS map 9 Click Next CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 525 Export Data HIPS To CARIS Map HIPS to CARIS Map Options 1 Click Browse to select a CARIS map for data export or type the name of anew map CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 5 of 7 xi m CARIS Map Options cansMap os CARIS Source ID Project Name 7 Fest 12 Characters Last 12 Characters J Clip to CARIS Map The map file path and name are displayed in the CARIS Map field The Source ID is a 12 character alphanumeric attribute in CARIS maps The ID can be the first or last 12 characters in a project name or line name 2 Select either Project Name or Line Name to use as a Source ID 3 Choose either the first 12 characters or the last 12 characters for the Source ID The Clip to CARIS Map option cuts the HIPS data at the boundaries of an existing CARIS map If this option is not selected the geographic extent of the map are extended to accommodate the HIPS data 4 Select the Clip to CARIS Map check box to implement this o
227. e time and CPU resources 2 Select from the four options in the Attributes drop down list 3 Select a new Feature Code for the soundings if needed The Group by Beam Number option layers soundings according to a beam number in the CARIS file Soundings belonging to a beam are assigned to the same user number in the map User numbers in CARIS file are similar to layering This option is used when exporting soundings from checklines into a separate checkline map so that a Quality Control Report can be generated If you do not select this option then a single user number will be used to hold all the exported soundings 4 Select the Group by Beam Number check box to layer soundings according to beam numbers in the CARIS map The User Number option is available only if you do not select the Group by Beam Number option 5 Optional Type a User Number to which all soundings are to be assigned The Sounding Status option enables you to export only soundings with a specific status flag 6 To export soundings with a specific status flag select any of the Sounding Status check boxes The Data Binning option divides the survey area into a grid for sounding selection The Bin Size sets the size of the grid cells 7 To apply a data binning function on export select the Data Binning check box 8 Type the size for the grid cell in the Bin Size field and select either Metres or Feet 9 Select either Shoal Biased or Deep Biased to
228. e 120 SEAFALCON ON PAGE 121 SHOALS on pace 122 SPAWAR ON PAGE 124 TELEDYNE ON PAGE 124 WINFROG ON PAGE 124 Please be advised that some 64 bit versions of third party libraries remain unavailable at this time Therefore the following capabilities will not be available in the 64 bit version of HIPS and SIPS e Navitronics format conversion e Hawkeye waveform viewer If any of the above capabilities are required you will need to use the 32 bit version of HIPS and SIPS 96 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Options for Specific Formats Atlas The ASCII versions of Hydrosweep DS files are now supported 1 Type the year of the survey into the Survey Year field You cannot enter a year prior to 1970 The default value shown is obtained from the HIPS Day directory into which data is converted 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 6 Atlas Hydrosweep DS Data Survey Year 2000 SURF Data Convert Multi Beam Convert Side Scan C Shorten line names C For dual beam data higher frequency sounding is primary sounding ASD Data Side Scan HighFrequency w 2 From the pull down menu select one of the following SURF data types to convert multibeam single beam low frequency single beam medium frequency single beam high frequency dual frequency low medium dual frequency low high dual frequency medium high 3 Click the Convert Side Scan
229. e Bathymetry When checked on this option will cause the SlantRange ObservedDepths and ProcessedDepths data files to be replaced by the converter e Overwrite Navigation When checked on this option will cause the Navigation and SSSNavigation data files to be replaced by the converter CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 83 Convert Data Select Files for Conversion Carry Over Raw Data Files Search for Files with Temporal Overlap 84 a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 2 How would you like to import the data Create new survey lines Update existing survey lines C Overwrite Bathymetry C Overwrite Navigation C Overwrite Motion Overwrite Sidescan Overwrite Backscatter Carry over raw data files Search directories for files with temporal overlap Overwrite Motion When checked on this options will cause the Gyro Heave Pitch Roll DeltaDraft CableOut SensorHeight data files to be replaced by the converter e Overwrite Sidescan When checked on this option will cause the SideScan and SSSProcessedSideScan data files to be replaced by the converter e Overwrite Backscatter When checked on this option will cause all imagery related data files to be replaced by the converter i e all data files needed for GeoCoder processing The conversion process for some data formats can copy the original data files to the processed folders This process is optional By default raw data files are not
230. e Detailed Line Query function to confirm which files have been loaded 1 Select a line or lines in the Display window 2 Select the Detailed Line Query command This opens the Detailed Line Query window displaying the records for the selected line s in columns 3 Scroll through the table to the SBET RMS File column The Load Error Data process generates a HIPS RMS file If this RMS file exists the name of the SBET file used to generate it will be displayed in this column If no RMS file exists the text Not Loaded is displayed Only newly loaded SBET RMS data stores the file name Data loaded previously will only show a blank field See also DETAILED LINE QUERY ON PAGE 274 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 165 Compute TPU TPU Filtering 166 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide The Merge process converts along track across track depths into latitude longitude and depth by combining the ship navigation with the horizontal and vertical offsets from the HIPS vessel file This geographically references the sounding position and depth In this chapter MERGE PROCESS sdeceledeicesanidiciesanscicedeanicnilsseadeucttans 168 APPLY MERGE visci cnstusecnaccednstiatetetsasaictstinesecdeadsade dens 170 DE TAD RAPT sicicctrandctccitoansseceusashaesetnausiccetenakcamiens 172 Merge Merge Process Merge Process 168 Once Sound Velocity Correction has been applied see Sounp VeLociTy CORRECTION ON PAGE 13
231. e by Depth Tolerance This method makes use of two criteria a tolerance value as well as the minimum tile size The tolerance value entered here will determine the variation of depths allowed in a single tile For example if a value of 2 is entered as the tolerance value the tiles will be subdivided until all the depths contained in a single tile are within 2m of each other The second criterion to be met is the Minimum Tile Size If the first criterion is not met for certain tiles the tiles will only be subdivided until they meet the Minimum Tile Size Illustrated below is a tile set created with a depth tolerance of 2m and a minimum tile size of 1 28m Tile By Depth Range Uses range criteria as well as the minimum tile size Based on the user defined interval the tiles will be subdivided until no tile crosses the specified depth interval The subdivision will only take place between the specified starting and ending depths However if the depth range criterion cannot be met before the tiles met the minimum tile size the subdivision of the tiles will stop CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 399 Create Product Surfaces Tiling a field sheet This method allows for greater sampling at an interval change Tiling by Depth Range can be applied by selecting a Depth Range file or by entering a Range Interval Starting Depth and Ending Depth In the example below a depth interval is set to 5m 7 Select a tiling option If yo
232. e data on different drives or network locations The project plus the shortcut to the other data is displayed in the Project dialog box The data folders must contain a Vessel Configuration File 1 Create a Windows shortcut in any P V D L directory 2 Copy the shortcut to the project where you want to place the shortcut Remember that the shortcut must be copied to the appropriate folder A Project folder shortcut must be copied to a HDCS data folder a Vessel folder shortcut must be copied to a Project folder etc 3 Open the data using the Open Project command CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create a New Project View Project Properties View Project Properties Window gt Properties Properties Pop up Menu Essential information for open projects can be viewed in the Properties window 1 Select the HIPS Data layer in the Layers tab of Control window 2 Open the Properties window The Properties for all open projects are displayed as in the examples below Properties El General Portsmouth2001 SIPS_Training The General section at the top shows the total number of open projects vessels lines and soundings These fields are read only The properties of each open project are listed below these general statistics With the exception of the field for the Name of the Coordinate Reference System and for the Vertical Reference System project properties are read only CARIS HIPS and SIP
233. e file every time View Sediment Parameter Overlay 3 Set the number of pings in the Patch Size over which the sediment analysis will be performed By default a sediment analysis file is created every time a new GeoBaR is created for that line This new sediment analysis file will overwrite any previous file for the line However you can change this option so that a sediment analysis file is never created or so that the file is only generated once per line 4 Set the File Creation Option by selecting Never Once or Always Use the View Sediment Parameter Overlay option to overlay certain sediment analysis parameter data on a selected GeoBaR 5 Set View Sediment Parameter Overlay to display representations of the sediment analysis data See View Sepiment ANALYSIS OVERLAY ON PAGE 455 for more information Auto Analyze The Auto Analyze function will analyze sediment data for entire lines for which GeoBaRs have been created This automated process can replace the labour intensive process of analyzing each patch individually 1 Select the layer named GeoBaRs 2 Inthe Properties window set the Show All Sediment Analysis Patches to True and set Auto Adjust Histogram to False See also GeoBAR LAYERS ON PAGE 24 3 Activate the Analysis tab of the Mosaic Editor tab in the Control window 4 Select one or more lines displaying open GeoBaRs CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 447 Process Imagery
234. e length of the tow cable to the towfish 15 If you selected Cable Out enter a number in the Multiplier box to correct for integer value recording if necessary CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 131 Convert Data XTF GPS Height 132 If you have stored sensor depth data in an auxiliary field you use it to calculate sensor depth Sensor depth in this case is equal to the value in the field minus the sensor height 16 Select the Calculate Sensor Depth check box 17 Type the number of the auxiliary containing the total measured depth The total measured depth and the digitized height of the towfish are used to compute the depth of the towfish below the waterline The towfish depth can then be combined with the tow cable length data and the vessel s tow point configuration to compute the position of the towfish The GPS Height field indicates the source of the GPS ellipsoid height data The source options will vary depending on the Ship Navigation option selected in Step 7 of the Conversion Wizard If ship navigation is being read from the Raw Navigation Records then the GPS height is set to Raw Navigation Records and cannot be changed If Ship Navigation set to Position Data Records the GPS height control shows only RTK Packets and the user cannot change it For all other Ship Navigation selections the options available for the source of GPS ellipsoid height data are the RTK Packet and the Ocean Tide field 18 If data is
235. e polynomial surface The default calculation for the residual uses the depth difference between the sounding and the polynomial surface at the location of the sounding e Use tile buffer When this is set to True an extra area around the tile is included in the surface computation e Tile buffer size a percentage of the tile size that describes the width of the buffer around the tile 15 Click OK The tiles are displayed in the Display window and the tile surface is listed by the file name that was assigned in Step 4 in the Layers tab under its parent field sheet layer The properties of the tiles can be viewed in the Properties window CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 317 Statistical Surface Cleaning Creating Tiles and Cleaning Data E Tiles 318 Active attribute Colour map Display level Colour fill tiles Transparency Show tile borders Border colour Display tile value 7 Dni b a 2_Mean 10colours Automatic Iv 0 Iv E 100 100 100 xi True True False aw at x Properties of the displayed tiles CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Statistical Surface Cleaning Tile Histogram Tile Histogram The Tile Histogram dialog box displays the distribution of residuals within a tile If the histogram resembles a bell curve then the selected polynomial is well suited for the area However if the histogram has many peaks or a wide centre then the polynomial surface is not suited to
236. e position of this depth is also stored on the BASE Surface Combined Uncertainty and Bathymetry Estimator CUBE surface uses multiple hypotheses to represent potential depth variances along the seafloor see CUBE PROCESSING ON PAGE 247 Uncertainty Weight The weight that a sounding contributes to a node is inversely proportional to the predicted depth uncertainty of the sounding The sounding s depth uncertainty is scaled as a function of the sounding s distance from the node The propagation of the depth uncertainty to the node takes into account the sounding s distance from the node AND the sounding s horizontal uncertainty Thus both depth uncertainty and horizontal uncertainty play a role in determining the weight a sounding contributes to a node The sounding s area of influence is a radius that determines the number of nodes to which the sounding can be applied This radius is determined by the depth uncertainty of the selected IHO S 44 survey order see formula below Depth Uncertainty ha b x d Once the depth uncertainty is propagated beyond the S 44 survey order requirement that has been selected for depth accuracy then it has reached its area of influence limit All distance computations are based on the ground coordinate system defined for the BASE Surface they are not simplified to cell distances All of the nodes within a sounding s area of influence are located rigorously No simpli
237. e previous dialog box CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data GeoBaR to ASCII CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 4 of 5 Select Units Vertical Length Metres V Vertical Shit 0 pe Pe Available units are e metres and kilometres e fathoms US and international e feet US and international e yards US and international e miles US international and nautical 1 In the Vertical Length field select the units for depth and uncertainty values The Horizontal Length field is only active if you selected Ground in the Position Units field in the previous dialog box 2 Select the units for position data 3 Click Next EXPORT ON PAGE 542 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 509 Export Data GeoBaR to Image GeoBakR to Image Please see SurFAce To Imace on pace 501 for the description of this export process 510 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data GSF to CARIS Map GSF to CARIS Map The Generic Sensor Format GSF to CARIS function loads soundings and track lines from one or more GSF files into a CARIS map GSF data does not have to be converted to HIPS data prior to using this utility For exporting to HOB see GSF to HOB on PAGE 514 Select GSF Files CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 2 of 6 GSF Options Size Date In this dialog box you can list the file path to the GSF file s you want to export 1 Click Select to choos
238. e stamp and be in ASCII format The Generic Data Parser is a separate program launched from the main HIPS and SIPS interface 1 Select the Generic Data Parser command The Generic Data Parser is displayed For more information see Generic Data Parser in the Tools guide CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File The HIPS Vessel file HVF defines the offset configurations and associated error estimates for each of the sensors which are necessary for creating final position and depth records for survey data The HIPS and SIPS workflow begins with creating an HVF and if necessary editing the sensor configuration data In this chapter VESSEL FILES cccccccssseecececeeeesceeeeecensseeeeeceaeseseeeeeaees GREATEA NEW AVE iscsaiueciciaracseiiddonanated iatoaashedosstaeedd CREATE VESSEL SHAPE OUTLINE ccccscceeeeeeeeseseseeeeeeeees SENSOR CONFIGURATION ccccccccececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees SENSOR Seia eo r a a ai VESSEL COORDINATE SYSTEM ccscecececeeeeseeeesseeeeeeeeeeees Create Vessel File Vessel Files Vessel Files 26 The Vessel file HVF in HIPS and SIPS describes the location and calibration of sensor equipment installed on the survey vessel Written in Extensible Mark up Language XML it defines the offsets and any associated error estimates for each of the sensors For a description of the coordinate system upon which the vessel configuration is based see VesseL COORDINA
239. e the GSF files to be exported 2 Hold the lt Ctrl gt key while selecting to add more than one file to the list 3 To remove a file from the list highlight the file and click Remove 4 Click Next Export Soundings and Track lines Data can be exported either in the form of soundings or track lines CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 511 Export Data GSF to CARIS Map CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 6 Export Soundings Attributes Basic Status v Feature Code SGSL User Number 1 C Group By Beam Export Tracklines Feature Code SHIPTRACK User Number 1 Include Offline Data Soundings Export all soundings that fit within the boundaries of the work file subject to the HIPS Sounding Status and Data Thinning settings Track Lines Export a line that connects the centre of each swath for each survey line thus showing the track of the vessel along each survey line It is not necessary to export soundings to use this option 1 Select either Export Soundings or Export track lines or both 2 If you selected Export Soundings complete any or all of the following fields Attributes Select Basic or Advanced from the drop down list The Basic Attributes option creates mandatory CARIS feature attributes for the map file such as feature code user number and source ID The Advanced Attributes option creates additional CARIS feature attributes for s
240. e time graphs by pressing and holding the mouse button while dragging the cursor across the data The selected data is highlighted 4 Release the mouse button when finished 5 You can now select a Reject option See Resect Data ON PAGE 277 or Accept see Accept Data ON PAGE 277 or Query the selected data see Query Data IN EDITORS ON PAGE 274 You can also use the Spike Detection options in the Navigation editor tab SPEED JUMP ON PAGE 279 TIME JUMP ON PAGE 279 Speed Jump The Speed Jump option searches the track line for changes in vessel speed that are same as or greater than the Speed Jump value 1 Select the Automatic Query check box if you want to display the selected position fixes in the Selection tab of the Worksheet window 2 Enter a value in the Speed Jump check box 3 Click the List Buffer up or down arrow keys to select the number of adjacent position fixes that are highlighted when a jump is found For example if you choose 5 the two position fixes to the right and left of the selected fix are also selected 4 Click Find 5 Select Accept Accept Data ON PAGE 277 one of the Reject options Reject Data ON PAGE 277 or Query See Query Data In EDITORS ON PAGE 274 6 Click Find again to move along the track line Time Jump The Time Jump option searches the track line for changes in time in seconds that are the same as or greater than the
241. e to save information to a new or existing HTFT file 11 Click Next HIPS to HTF Attributes Options gCARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 6 of 7 2 x Attribute Options HTF Attribute Surface Attribute a REJECTED SOUNDING LINE NAME FIX NUMBER UTC DATE OoOO UTC TIME DEPTH POSITIONING SENSOR DEPTH SENSOR TPE POSITION TPE DEPTH sima m m If you are exporting a BASE surface you must map at least one BASE surface attributes to a HTF attribute 1 Click in a surface attribute field to access a drop down box listing all the attributes available in the data file 2 Select an attribute from the list 3 Click Clear to remove all values from the Surface Attributes fields 4 Click Next EXPORT ON PAGE 542 534 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Mosaic to ASCII Export Data Mosaic to ASCII Export Mosaic attributes to an ASCII text file Mosaic to ASCII Output Options CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 5 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Output File _AHIPSdata Fundy47 SM47pIl txt Position Units Ground East North 0 Precision Surface Attributes en Contributor intensity OOO C Original_Intensity C Weights Lue Down Attribute Precision Intensity C Include Headers In Output Delimiter Space l Type a path and name for the output file or click Browse to select a folder and then type the
242. e to select the file 4 Click Next 386 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Sounding Selection Overplot Removal If you choose the Overplot Removal option from the Selection Criteria list the dialog box is refreshed to show the following options LTT et Perea et tee free Selection Criteria Overplot Removal Shoal Bias Deep Bias Options map scale 1 10000 ee ee ee ee ea Sounding size 1 45 Sounding Rounding rule 4HOT iv a O a a Ren aa a a SAN 1 AMR adinda h Ah nni nam h a a dn monty mat aih thm amd Bn mei J Overplotting occurs when soundings overlap or are so close together that they are plotted on top of each other Two soundings with depths of 11 and 22 might look like 1212 if they were overplotted Overplot Removal places a buffer zone around each sounding then suppresses either the deepest or shoalest soundings which overlap these buffer zones 5 Type the map scale for the selected soundings default is 1 10000 6 Type the size of the soundings that you want them to appear in the Display window in the Sounding Size field 7 Select a Sounding Rounding Rule from the drop down list Click Next CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 387 Create Product Surfaces Sounding Selection Output Selection Use this dialog box to set the output format options for the selected soundings Sounding Selection Wizard Output Output to CARIS
243. e values are not applied twice Dynamic Draft The squat and lift of a vessel changes as the speed changes For some vessels if the squat lift is not accounted for significant errors are introduced into the soundings In this section you can specify up to 10 speed draft value pairs During merge the difference between the instantaneous draft and the static draft is computed and the final depth compensated Draft is measured in metres feet and speed is measured in knots All draft values entered should be relative to the same reference but what that reference is is not important The first Speed Draft pair must correspond to a state where no draft correction is necessary The delta draft values relative to the initial draft are computed and used to correct observed soundings The following formula is used to correct soundings for dynamic draft Depth observed depth waterline delta draft Delta draft is computed from the present vessel speed as derived from the navigation system You can also create your own dynamic draft model and load Delta Draft information directly which will override the Dynamic Draft table in the HVF See Detta Drart on pace 172 1 Click Dynamic Draft in the sensors list box so the selection is highlighted and the dynamic draft data fields are displayed 2 Type data as needed in the following fields Date The year and Julian day of the current time stamp for the draft table
244. ea oan teat Sees ese cedekea ed onde 98 Edge Tech is otacadvee seta ws ten eteeete eee gel ce fe 99 EIVA voskevc ds bt be eeud be e a e eee ee eee ads 101 IAG e tere ace A Se a een Ase ea Ss 102 FUMING 22625 c0uas 66 aaea eaaa iaa ia e e ARa bad 103 GeoACcouUSt CS n a naana e 104 GSP si netdisep chases ipae p a S 107 Hawkeye i c2dh ke ches ceee se OSS eR Eo ar ECARE Eu 108 HypacK ie aec i seseasra rrini anaki ea n ee 109 INAQGENGN t2cn6ichdeew ede panei hee a E awes 112 LADS sss ktiere ee weGeeed Sexcaatited ba ahawes aes 113 LAS i 2 efiRGh toh eos Leesa ea eek eRe eee DAES Oe 114 Marne SOniCSsc skaiesicace age nesadeSSaGeankeeeees 114 NOVIONICS i 406522 2vtdates tease ie eset peed ees 114 OMIS ees eaa satetesae amok E eh aee aces 115 Teledyne Reson PDS 0 0c cece eee eee 116 PDS da cs anentu Set ed 1tdt a i ika AS Ae oe EES 116 SAS eoio me toea aeaa week ee oak cons aia EO A adi 119 ScrippS o oo oeann anae 119 SDP 2s Reseda teeters ede a E ees 120 Seabeam s dere eke BO MIE eS RESP OE ETa Oe EKEN a 121 SSddlCON ss is ckacemn eo eek eu uE ERRE NEE 121 DEGY 242vheecsok Goer had dese ce Ea cena dehses 121 SHOALS o c 5 ccSoe bake eet ark eads keep Saehantaees 122 Simrad nsei senseo Eee Met caves wey eee ees EEEE E 122 SpaWwa cS acca usa iwee tas Ok Roe Sete eee es 124 SWATHPIUS siccat ot 2avesGend rid n ae huria ond 124 Teledyne cir 5 cad ba pecan Mee Be hee toe Boog ates x 124 UNB o sateeueae os bude ieee
245. each individual sensor estimates such as e nav gyro heave pitch roll tide errors e latency error estimate sensor offset error estimates These uncertainty estimates are combined with individual sonar model characteristics in the DeviceModels xml file to calculate horizontal and vertical uncertainty values for every sounding along a track line when TPU is applied Sensor accuracy values for various sonar types can be viewed on the TPU Computation Resource page of the CARIS web site www caris com tpu Sensor accuracy values for TPU must be entered as 1 sigma 1 Expand the TPU section of the HVF by clicking the icon 2 Type data as needed in the Offsets section e MRU to Transducer The physical offset in three dimensions from the motion recording unit to transducer 1 on the vessel e MRU to Transducer2 The physical offset in three dimensions from the motion recording unit to transducer 2 on the vessel e Navigation To Transducer The physical offset in three dimensions from the navigation antenna to transducer 1 on the vessel e Navigation To Transducer2 The physical offset in three dimensions from the navigation antenna to transducer 2 on the vessel e Transducer Roll The mounting roll offset for transducer 1 The offset is positive when rotating the transducer away from starboard starboard down CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 51 Create Vessel File Sensors 52 Transducer Roll 2 The mounting roll offset for
246. eases The data which is loaded from a ASCII text file overrides the Dynamic Draft information in the vessel file The Delta Draft value is interpolated between timestamps in Merge and added to the Observed Depth to obtain the Final Depth The input format for the Delta Draft text file is similar to the COWLIS tide format Each record is in the following format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS SSS 1 234 The Delta Draft function can also be used to load recorded depth versus time data for an underwater platform on which the multibeam sonar is mounted such as a ROV Remote Operated Vehicle or AUV Autonomous Underwater Vehicle or a towed vehicle 1 Select the track line s 2 Select the Load Delta Draft command The Load Delta Draft dialog box is displayed Load Delta Draft Delta Draft Select delta draft file Gama 3 Type the path of the file or click Select to locate the file 4 To make changes to the file click Edit The file is opened in the default text editor such as Notepad Make any changes and save the file 5 Click Load The delta draft is loaded into the line folder CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Field Sheets Field sheets in HIPS and SIPS are used to organize data products created from cleaned and processed bathymetry and side scan data In this chapter CREATE A FIELD SHEET OPEN AND CLOSE FIELD SHEETS Set FIELD SHEET PROPERTIES FIELD SHEET PROJECTION GRID Create Field Sheets Cr
247. eate a Field Sheet Create a Field Sheet er rw r TA E General Symbolize lines False Line Weight Ready Menu Process gt New Field Sheet 174 IE HIPS Data YILA Ship Track Lines v 26 Critical Soundings VE VON 19 9 0 Field sheets have a role in almost every process in HIPS and SIPS They are essential for the creation of BASE surfaces The image below illustrates a newly created field sheet over an area of track lines lxi 2 of 8 selected 1 3708 260 238 mi A field sheet consists of a data directory with a field sheet definition file and a CARIS file for storing vector products The definition file contains information about the geographic boundary of the field sheet and the coordinate system to be used for the data products Field sheets are used to create BASE surfaces Create A BASE SurFAce ON PAGE 193 create a layer of contours from a BASE surface or a layer of tiles ConTouRs ON PAGE 361 create a layer of tiled soundings generate a profile from a BASE surface create a mosaic from side scan data select soundings from a layer of tiles SouNDING SELECTION ON PAGE 383 To define an area for a new field sheet 6 Select the new New Field Sheet command The New Field Sheet Step 1 dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Field Sheets Create a Field Sheet New Field Sheet Step 1 of 3 Bee 71 xi
248. eave Pitch N Rol E Active Table of values related to the highlighted sensor Draft 4 sensors Tow Point A i TPU values SVP 1 Waterline Height In general if sensor offsets or calibration values have already been applied to logged data during data acquisition then do not enter the same offsets and calibration parameters in the Vessel Editor Also if compensation for heave pitch and roll has already been made to the recorded sounding data during data acquisition for example as in Simrad data then it must not be applied again Active sensors To add or remove sensors from the list of active sensors 1 Select the Active Sensors command 5 Edit gt Active Sensors The Active Sensors dialog box is displayed 2 Re 38 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Sensor Configuration Select the sensors to be active Select sensors to be active Sensors C Waterline Height C SVP 1 C TPU values C Tow Point C Draft Roll Pitch Heave Gyro a B T If a box is checked the sensor is included in the vessel file and displayed in the Editor table 2 Make sure a sensor box is checked to enable the sensor or cleared to remove the sensor 3 Click OK The list is refreshed to show the selected active sensors Time Stamp A vessel s configuration changes over time Different draft settings may be used in a survey or the position o
249. ecimation J Hoeod sudja i Data Source Heading Auto w Heave Auto Roll Auto v Pitch Auto Y GPS Height EM Height Nay timestamps System i E4400 E4600 Options Sidescan Port Stbd Time shifting Select Primary v 1 a N A wa aan 0 00 example if you select 10 as the Decimation Factor then one out every tenth attitude record is converted 5 Select the Attitude Data Decimation check box to implement this option 6 Select a Decimation Factor to set the ratio for down sampling attitude data Motion data heading heave roll and pitch is automatically read from the active motion reference unit However you can select another motion reference unit to read the data Gyro data can also be read from the headings datagram 7 For Heading select the Auto option to read gyro data from the active motion reference unit or select an inactive unit by selecting MRU1 MRU2 options Select the H Diagrams option to read gyro from the headings datagram 8 For Heave Roll and Pitch select the Auto option to read data from the active motion reference unit or select an inactive unit by selecting AutoMRU1 MRU2 options 9 For GPS Height select a source from either the EM Height datagrams or the GPS String in the navigation datagrams Navigation time stamps can be selected from either the logging system or from a source specified by Simrad Installation datagram the GPS string in t
250. ect 5 Select either Accepted Examined or Outstanding check boxes to include soundings with these status flags in the BASE Surface process CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 197 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Step 3 Swath Angle Weighting Additional Attributes 6 Select one or all Additional Attributes to create an attribute layer of the BASE Surface that displays that attribute Density create an attribute layer that displays the density of soundings contributing to a node Mean create an attribute layer that displays the mean of all soundings contributing to a node e Standard Deviation create an attribute layer that displays the standard deviation from the mean e Shoal create an attribute layer that displays the shoalest soundings contributing to a node e Deep create an attribute layer that displays the deepest soundings 7 Click Finish The Swath Angle BASE Surface is created 198 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE surface Step 3 Uncertainty Weighting BASE surface Step 3 Uncertainty Weighting Add Survey Lines Additional Attributes If you selected the Uncertainty option the Step 3 dialog box is displayed BASE Surface Wizard Step 3 of 3 Add survey lines IHO S 44 Order Special Order v C Use selected lines _ Ignore lines with errors Include additional bathymetry Include status Accepted Examined Outstanding Additional Attribute
251. ect and browse to the BASE Surface If you have selected a disambiguation method based on density or locale the nitialization Surface tests can be used as an optional filtering method Initialization Surface filtering uses the depth and vertical uncertainty values in an existing BASE Surface the Initialization Surface to exclude potential outliers from the new surface There are three filtering tests Minimum Difference is a set distance from an existing BASE Surface node For example if the Minimum Distance is set at 10 metres all soundings that are not within 10 metres of the node are excluded when a new Surface is generated Filter Percentage is a percentage of depth at a node For example if the depth at a node is 20 metres and the percentage value is 0 25 all soundings that are more than 5 metres from the node 20x0 25 are excluded from the new Surface Variance Scaleris a multiplier of vertical uncertainty at a node For example if the scaler is set to three and depth uncertainty for a node is one metre then soundings more than three metres 1x3 from the node are excluded from the processing of the new BASE Surface The shoalest values from the three tests are then used as the threshold to filter outlier soundings 3 Optional Changes the default values set for the filtering tests 4 Click Finish A CUBE Surface is shown in the Display window and the layers associated with the Surface are listed in the Cont
252. ect the tile tracking layer 4 Click Apply You can also set an amount by which the subset snapping will overlap tiles as you move from completed to unprocessed tiles This helps ensure coverage of all of the data that lies within tiles along the edges of the subset 5 Select a percentage in the Tile Overlap field 6 Click Apply 7 Inthe Subset Tracking options select the Automatically mark as complete check box to flag the data as examined and cleaned This can be changed later see TRACKING CLEANING STATUS ON PAGE 349 When the Automatically mark as complete check box is selected two other options are made active 8 Select the Mark all Subset Tile layers option to flag the tiles in ALL tile layers as completed or select Mark only snap target to select tiles only in the selected tile layer as completed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Data in Subsets Tracking Cleaning Status Tracking Cleaning Status Once you have examined and cleaned a subset the subset area can be assigned one of three classifications e Complete All data in the selected area is clean and ready for further processing or export e Partially Complete Not all the data within the area has been viewed and verified as clean in Subset Editor Reset Data has not been verified or cleaned The area is colour coded in the Subset Tile according to the selected cleaning status classification and the settings in the Properties tab
253. ect to the HIPS Sounding Status and Data Thinning settings CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data GSF to HOB Track Lines Export a line that connects the centre of each swath for each survey line thus showing the track of the vessel along each survey line It is not necessary to export soundings to use this option 1 Select either Export Soundings or Export track lines or both 2 If you selected Export Soundings complete any or all of the following fields Attributes Select Basic or Advanced from the drop down list The Basic Attributes option creates mandatory CARIS feature attributes for the map file such as feature code user number and source ID The Advanced Attributes option creates additional CARIS feature attributes for soundings such as time stamps launch identifier and tidal correction e Status Select soundings flagged as Selected Accepted or Accepted and Rejected Feature Code Select a feature code for the soundings from the drop down list e User Number Type a number value for layering data in the CARIS map or HOB file e Group By Beam Load soundings into user numbers according to sonar beam number For example all soundings from beam 37 are loaded to user number 37 in the CARIS map file or HOB file 3 If you selected Export Tracklines complete any or all of the following fields e Feature Code Select a feature code for the track lines object from the drop down list e User N
254. ection you can save these coefficients Later during the Merge process you can apply these Refraction Editor coefficients To open the Refraction Editor 1 Select a track line 2 Open Swath Editor then select the Refraction Editor command The Refraction Editor tab is displayed next to the Swath Editor tab in the Control window CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Cleaning Swath Data Correction for Refraction Artifacts Profile Coefficients Profile 1 Depth 56 HH Hm Velocity conection 71 H H H ms 7 Preview IV Apply Roll Add Replace Delete Savi Beset pr Tua or Ext de Swath oS Refraction 3 Set the values for depth and velocity correction until the desired effect is observed 4 Click Add to add the new entry to the list of coefficients 5 Click Reset before clicking Add to set the values to their original setting 6 To change an existing coefficient select it adjust the settings and click Replace to update it 7 To remove an entry from the list select it and click Delete 8 Click Save to save your entries As you change the values in the Refraction Editor tab you will be able to see the effects of these changes in the Swath Editor display 9 Select the Preview check box to view the effects of your changes If the Preview option is selected you can also enable the Apply Roll option When you first open the Refraction Editor this control is set to be t
255. ed in Step 6 and the selected attributes in Step 7 Depth Depth at the node Density The number of soundings contributing to a node Standard Deviation The number of standard deviations that the node is from the mean Uncertainty The depth uncertainty assigned to each node Mean The mean depth calculated from all soundings contributing to a node Shoal The shoalest sounding contributing to a node Deep The deepest sounding contributing to a node CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide To view or hide layers select or clear the check boxes beside the layer 203 Create BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces Window gt Properties Menu Tools Properties Pop up 204 Use the Properties window to view information about a BASE Surface or to set the display options for its attribute layers View Surface Properties 1 Select a BASE Surface layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Select the Properties window command or right click the layer and select Properties from the pop up window The Properties window displays the BASE Surface information The image below shows the properties of a CUBE surface parent layer Properties General Vertical Coordinate System Creation Data Start Date Data End Date Comments Platform Name CUBE Configuration E S 44 Values Disambiguation B Filter Sources Operation Keep Up T
256. ee bie cee Be atin eae ed eetes 377 Export Profile to ASCII 4492 0is0ssdyineudet ied 377 Export Profile to Image 000 ee eeee 380 Sounding Selection co1g ciadaetgentesenthigawstedadad 383 Select Height Source 0 000 cee eee 383 Selection Criteria 2 0 0 ee 384 Radis foes pvev nie ks ewes bees bee LSE Rae ENa 385 Overplot Removal sc ccsivn iow eiteeee wes esa een 387 Output Selection 2 0 acen cee sows sere eee ner selee oe ee 388 Output to CARIS map as icdiseeta eed eeekaees wes 388 Output to HOB file yes eave he ee ek eS eu ee E 389 Enable Filter sas si2c2s Gan dad a meee e eA Se eae Sees 390 HOB S 57 OPIONS 4 emcee ee na naa ea a aa 391 Colour Options for Soundings and Contours 394 Tiling a field SNG e t c cscc1c5sa8eeceecdeee eevee eides 396 THMMGIMMGINOOS cnn s sad ceod bee Renee Beate hae hee 397 Create WSSs42icetceebetardas Benea e S45 E hs 397 Greate BING sess ccidexbigecueag den EEE RIRES ENUEI ee 401 Create QTC TileS 2 annann 402 Open and Close Tiles cvv ox aves chee be twed oawe eyes 404 Set Tile Display Properties 200 404 View Tile Attributes 0 000 eee eee 406 Tile Display Query n annann aaan 407 Depth Range Files 00000 e eee eee 409 1 18 Process Imagery Data 000eeeeeeeeee 411 Ove Woss 8008s d ceed EE ee he eee ea eae ed 412 Workflow for Processing Imagery Data 413 Processing Engines
257. eet 1 Select a field sheet in the Layers tab 2 Select the Projection Grid command The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed Grid Properties f Grid Lines Annotations Corners Lower Left Upper Right North 5579230 24 55796221 6 East a 8273 43 41 8868 69 Spacing Line Attributes l Synchronize North Bo a Colour East e0 Weight fo m Type E Ticks and Crosses Full T Ticks Lenath fi 0 Alignment r Itside Offset mm j 00 Crosse Length fi 00 IA AAAA Cancel Apply Help 3 Set the options for positioning and style of grid lines as described in the table below CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Field Sheets Field Sheet Projection Grid Grid Lines Prop GRID LINES Property Description Corners The lower left and upper right corners of the rectangular field sheet determine the corners of the grid Lower Left The latitude North and longitude East coordinates of the lower left corner of the field sheet Upper Right The latitude North and longitude East coordinates of the upper right corner of the field sheet Spacing The spacing of the grid lines is calculated by adding the spacing values to the 0 0 position until the grid fills the area defined by the corners Synchronize To space the grid lines the same interval apart enable Synchronize North Set the l
258. elect the Intensity layer of the mosaic in the Layers tab 2 In General field of the Properties window view the Min Max Ranges for the layer e You can also move the cursor across the mosaic in the Display window As you move the cursor screen tips show the inensity values in dB To apply Image Classification 3 Select the Mosaic layer 4 Select the Classify command to open the Image Classification dialog Classify par Popup The Image Classification dialog box is displayed Image Classification Classification options Number of classes Minimum Intensity Minimum Intensity Classification colour Unclassified v E v Min Max Start End 5 Use the Number of classes drop down list to set the total classes in the mosaic CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 431 Process Imagery Data Edit GeoBaRs 432 6 Seta range of values for a class by typing values for Minimum intensity and Maximum Intensity in their respective fields 7 Optional Select a colour for a class by selecting a class from the Classification colour drop down list and the colour picker 8 This colour will be displayed beside the class name 9 Optional Select another colour from the colour picker or create a custom colour from the standard Windows colour palette 10 Repeat Steps 4 to 7 as needed 11 Click Classify A colour table is generated according to the number of classes you selected in Step
259. elected data type is displayed When the button is not active all data is displayed x 4 Display Filter button Click to choose a filter Rejected Accepted Designated Click to toggle visibility For example to toggle between displaying all the data open ina HIPS editor and displaying only Designated soundings 1 Open data in an Editor 2 Click the arrow part of the Display Filter button and select the Designated check box from the drop down list 3 Depress the Display Filter button to make the Designated data visible 4 Click the button again to see all data CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 301 Data QC Designate Critical Soundings from a Surface Properties 302 View Critical Soundings in the Display window Critical soundings that have status flags set during subset and swath cleaning are contained in a HIPS Data layer in the Layers tab To view these critical soundings in the Display window 1 Select the Critical Soundings layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Refresh the display The Designated Outstanding and Examined soundings will be displayed Each type has a default display colour based on status These colours by status are set in the Display tab of the Tools gt Options dialog box See Status on Pace 115 in the Reference guide You can over ride these default colours using the Properties for the Critical Soundings layer Settings changed in the Properties
260. election 369 profile line digitize 368 profile settings 367 profiles overview 367 Project create new 58 project archive 74 open 64 project Connect To 59 86 projection grid field sheet 182 projects convert raw data 78 rename folders 73 session files 21 Properties project 67 properties BASE Surface 204 field sheets 181 tiles 404 tiles display options 346 track lines 71 protect critical soundings 304 protective radius use in surface cleaning 316 Q QC report 307 template file 307 Qmips format conversion options for 115 QPS 128 QTC tiles 397 quality report for BASE surface 238 Query Critical soundings 303 Query command 285 query data 273 Query data in editors 274 Query Line 275 query SVC 140 query tiles see View tile attributes 406 R Radius sounding selection 385 385 range weight 190 raster legend properties 208 RECDAT 391 Recompute BASE surface 221 Reference Point Set in vessel file 35 Reference Point for sensor equipment 53 Reference Surface properties Subset Editor 350 refraction artifacts 334 Refraction Editor 334 regenerate critical soundings layer 303 reject hypothesis 266 Reject Line 294 rejected soundings view 295 rejecting hypotheses 266 remove a GeoBaR from a mosaic 441 remove profile 377 remove rejected soundings from backscatter 332 rename folders 73 residual in surface cleaning 321 resoluti
261. enerated from a tile or BASE Surface attribute layer The selection mechanism is shoal or deep biased and allows control over the final density of the selected sounding layer The sounding layer can be written to a CARIS file or to a Hydrographic Object Binary HOB file This process does not physically remove the soundings from the HIPS file It merely determines which soundings are displayed You can colour code the selected soundings according to depth if necessary See CoLour OPTIONS FOR SOUNDINGS AND CONTOURS ON PAGE 394 To create a layer of selected soundings 1 Open the field sheet containing the tile layer or BASE surface 2 Select the Selected Soundings command The Sounding Selection Wizard is displayed Select Height Source Sounding Selection Wizard Available Height Sources a MarS5 MarSyd5 Density 2 Hypothesis_Count Mean Node_Std_Dev StdDev Uncertainty UserNominated E gal Min True MinDepth Min lt Coord v CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 383 Create Product Surfaces Sounding Selection The Selected Soundings function uses tile layers including bin layers and BASE Surface attribute layers as data sources From the chosen layer one value from each tile bin or attribute layer node is used to represent all of the soundings from that cell In the case of a bin layer there is only one value present so it is used In the case of a tile layer each tile contai
262. ent GeoBaRs CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 437 Process Imagery Data Edit Mosaics Edit Mosaics 438 Mosaics can be edited for brightness contrast and visibility As well component GeoBaRs can be added modified or removed While you may have more than one mosaic open in the display only one mosaic can be edited at a time Mosaics created as field sheet layers in HIPS and SIPS prior to version 7 0 can be opened in Mosaic Editor for comparison purposes but they cannot be edited To edit a mosaic 1 Open Mosaic Editor 2 Right click on a mosaic layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 3 Select Edit Mosaic from the pop up menu The functions on the Edit tab are displayed The top line of the Edit tab displays the name of the mosaic being edited Process Analysis Edit Active Mosaic 114PR Intensity Range Min 41 99 dB Max 12 27 dB Brightness J Contrast Visibility Options Intensity On OFF pro Mayers M pra Exte Ad Mosaic E 1 To adjust brightness move the sliders to the right or left to change the intensity of the image 2 To adjust contrast move the Contrast slider to the right for more contrast and to the left for less contrast As you move the sliders the new values are displayed in the Intensity Range fields CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Edit Mosaics 3 Use Reset to restore the values of the Original I
263. er file 542 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Index Symbols tid 146 zdf 147 A across track display of water column data 462 acrosstrack altitude ratio 424 Active Field Sheet 180 active field sheet 179 active sensors in Vessel Editor 38 add a GeoBaR to mosaic 441 add layer to BASE surface 219 Add Session see Open session 21 Add to BASE surface 218 along track display of water column data 462 altitude 424 Analyze selected patch in sediment analysis 448 annotations in Projection gird 184 Annotations tab 184 Apply Roll in Refraction Editor 335 Apply TPU filter 161 Apply True Heave 138 archive project 74 ASCII export BASE surface to 498 export data to 517 export GeoBaR to 507 export HIPS tide 516 export mosaic to 535 export profile to 377 export sediment analysis 539 export surface statistics to 237 Atlas format conversion options for 97 attitude data load Applanix files 291 reset rejected data 305 view rejected soundings 295 Attitude filter 286 attribute layer sun position 210 transparency 210 attributes in Subset tiles 345 Auto Analyze sediment 447 auto cursor mode 328 Auto Populate SORIND and RECDAT 391 AutoCAD export to 487 automatic depth filtering 327 automatic filtering in Swath Editor 325 Automatically mark as complete option for tracking in subsets 348 Auto Seam use to resolve overlapping GeoBaRs 436 Available V
264. ernational e feet US and international e yards US and international e miles US international and nautical 1 In the Vertical Length field select units for depth and uncertainty values The Horizontal Length field is only active if you selected Ground in the Position Units field in the previous dialog box 2 Select the units for position data To apply a static vertical shift to data during export 3 Select the Vertical Shift check box and type the value for the shift in metres 4 The shift will be applied to any layer of the surface containing vertical data 5 Click Next to continue setting export parameters Export ON PAGE 542 If you are exporting attribute data from a BASE Surface created prior to HIPS and SIPS 6 1 this dialog box is not displayed because the default measurement unit is metres 500 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Surface To Image Surface To Image Export a BASE Surface a mosaic or one or more GeoBaRs to an image file Attribute and Image Options CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 5 m Attribute Options Active Attribute Intensity X V Display Raster Legend V Expand cover to fit the raster legend m Image Options m Image Format J SBit C 24Bit V Compress TIFF r Georeference Format Z TRW TIFF coct tte Attribute Options If the selected attribute layer has a legend associated with it you can include this lege
265. ers Rename Day and Line Folders Edit gt Rename Rename Pop up Menu You can rename existing Day and Line folders after raw data has been converted to HIPS SIPS format 1 Select a Day folder or Line folder in the Control window or select a track line in the Display window 2 Select the Rename command Rename Name 11 7 2324 The Rename dialog box is opened with the selected file or folder name displayed 3 Enter a new name in the box 4 Click OK The changed file name is displayed in the Control window CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 73 Create a New Project Archive Project Archive Project A project and its related data can be saved to a compressed format ZIP using the New Archive command To archive a project Fila Naw etrchive 1 Select the New Archive command Menu The archive Properties dialog box is displayed Properties E General Archive Name Project B Fieldsheets Fieldsheet Directory D CARIS HIPS 8 0 Data Fieldsheets Fundy201 1 Edit Selection E Auxiliary Files Edit Selection E Additional Files A Edit Selection Select the additional Files to archive When you click in any of these property fields a Browse button is activated Use Browse to locate files 74 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create a New Project Archive Project 2 Set paths and select files as follows Field name General Archi
266. ers are shown in Julian Day format for example April 24 2009 is shown as 2009 114 To add a Day folder to a Vessel folder 9 Select the Vessel folder CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 59 Create a New Project Define New Project Add to an existing project Delete empty folders 60 10 Click Add Day The Calendar is displayed at the current year month day E lt Apr 2008 Je Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat MENTI EDEDED CII IG G02 13 44 4s Us Jz Gs Js J ED ea 10 11 Select a different year or month if needed by clicking the arrow buttons at the top of the dialog box 12 Select a new day if needed by double clicking on the date 13 Click Add Day again to create the Day folder with the selected dates 14 Click Next to go to Step 2 You can add new Vessel and Day folders to an existing project instead of creating a new project 1 Select the existing project from the list in the dialog box 2 Add vessel and day folders as needed If you select an existing HIPS Project File HPF and add new vessel or day the Finish button is displayed at this point The original project parameters will be applied set when the HPF was first created You can also delete an empty Day or Vessel folder by clicking Delete Delete is disabled if a Vessel or Day folder already has data converted into it New Project Step 2 Use the New Project Step 2 dialog box to describe the project 1 Type comments or identif
267. ers in the Command field This system command will then be applied to the new GML file when it is created Click Save The Advanced Options dialog box is displayed Advanced Options Feature Mapping Rule File Apply Shifts Depth 0 Height 0 metres Convert Units Depth Ground Height Positional Accuracy There are no default GML mapping files in HIPS If you want to use a mapping file you must create it before using the Feature Mapping option To map the selected HIPS features to GML 6 Click the check box to enable the Feature Mapping option 7 From the Rule File drop down list select a file to use for mapping features CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Export Selection to GML Apply features To apply a custom shift to the depths or height 8 Click the check box to enable the Apply Shifts option 9 Enter values in Depth and Height fields Convert Units To convert Depth Ground Height or Positional Accuracy units to another unit of measure 10 Click the Convert Units check box to enable the option 11 Select a new unit of measure from the drop down list for each type you want to change 12 Click OK CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 491 Export Data Formats Exported Formats Exported Export Formats The HIPS Export Wizard is a separate application launched from the HIPS and SIPS interface TheExport Wizard converts HIPS data products soundi
268. ers tab It can now be viewed edited and exported as any other profile 374 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process gt Products gt Profile gt Edit Menu Create Product Surfaces Profiles Edit the Profile line Profile lines are saved with the field sheet in the Profile layers Edits which can be done on a profile line include add remove or move points to change the path of the line move the entire line to see the profile on a different part of the surface rotate the entire line around a selected point To edit a profile 1 Select the child Profiles layer in the Layers tab 2 Select the profile line you want to edit in the Display window 3 Select the Edit profile command The profile line is placed in edit mode Square vertex markers show the points which digitized the line If you hover your cursor over the line the cursor will change shape to indicate the edit function that you can perform When the cursor is over a point it looks like this In the image below the cursor shape indicates it is ready to edit the line for example to drag the entire profile line to another position in the Display The black lines are the previous positions of the profile line When the Display is refreshed these lines will disappear CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 375 Create Product Surfaces Profiles Line Editing Options Edit Function Cursor Procedure changes to Add a poin
269. es you can reduce the volume of data that s converted by turning off the Convert rejected option 7 Optional Clear the Convert rejected check box If you leave this check box selected all data will be converted However data which does not meet the quality value will be converted with Rejected status 100 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Options for Specific Formats EIVA At Step 5 you have the option of using the generic multibeam filtering functions built into the HIPS Conversion Wizard See ADVANCED FILTERING ON PAGE 91 Step 6 offers further conversion options specific to EIVA data a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 6 C Convert ROY depth C Pad with NULL beams C Swap transducers 1 2 data C Separate dual head data Data Source Gyro Bathy Binary v Navigation Motion Atlas ASD Data Side Scan High Frequency w 1 Select the Convert ROV depth option to store the EIVA sub packets as HIPS delta draft values 2 Select the Pad with NULL beams option to replace missing data with NULL rejected beams in the case of dual head data where the data from head 1 is missing This results in the beam numbers for transducer 2 data remaining consistent with fully populated profiles 3 Select Swap transducers 1 2 data to exchange data between heads in dual head set up 4 Select the Separate dual head data option to specify that soundings from the dual
270. es 319 Query data in tiles cutebvadsee tee bebe eads 320 Select and View Tile Data 00005 320 Query Soundings in Tiles 0 0000000 320 Query Tile Display o s lt ic cecewh see ties need bank bee 321 Cleaning Swath Data 0 cee eee eee 323 Swath Cleaning gov db eer ote we eehe bok ee Bee en 324 Automatic Filtering 00 325 Apply PINGS coos Poa See ewe dt Levee hea sen a a 327 Manual Cleaning 0 0 cece eee eee 328 WOGIS Gis ite aa Get esse Se VS Rew Ole oan eeEe eee ae G 328 Auto Cursor Mode 2122 0yes anaana eoree es wee yes 328 Find Sounding cnc cee dua seeeeheeea deeeeeeadae 328 Rejecting Data 2c cep tetetecedene sededesieesdaentas 330 Reject Swaths 22 css eens vise wd veatieeeews ee eee 330 Query Dalds tesog sipo prena head REESE OER BREE RIS 331 Update Backscatter 202000 2c eee eee 332 Flag Designated Soundings 2200 e eee 333 Correction for Refraction Artifacts 0000 334 Process Data in Subsets 20 020eeeeee 337 Data Cleaning Workflow 0 00 cee eee ee 338 Subset Cleaning ci0ccssckeiceeed vem epnge dewey deeeues 339 AGG J conte cagets cap ete omnes s Oho esata uaia 339 ACCEPI shee narsa tinsi neud op KEE ERE ESE RE 340 OUISIANGING uy see cree Sie e se Re hoe eers es See Oe pees 340 Examined sx isecdeine sage sees pie weed okiuwd oe 340 UCI 2 2 640 cce ue 5 VUES a a lee bee bauee ee 340 Designa
271. es 473 Process Water Column Data Water Column Data in HIPS Water Column Data in HIPS 460 Water column data can be integrated into existing bathymetry workflows Water column image WCI data can be displayed in both Swath Editor and Subset Editor and its bathymetry data added to a project In Swath Editor water column data is displayed as a curtain image In Subset Editor it is displayed in 3D Currently water column imagery data from Teledyne Reson 7K s7k and Simrad all wed sonars is supported in HIPS and SIPS WATER CoLumMn Data IN SWATH EDITOR ON PAGE 462 WCI Data IN SuBset EDITOR ON PAGE 469 Projects Projects containing water column data are organized in the same Project Vessel Day Line hierarchy as other sonar projects When data is converted to HIPS there is the option of copying the original data files to the Processed folders By default raw data files are not carried over When opening water column data HIPS will look for WCI data in the line directory If the data is not found there HIPS looks in the location of the raw data files as recorded during conversion If the raw data no longer exists in its original location you will be prompted to have HIPS search for it or to search for it yourself CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Water Column Data Processing Workflow for Water Column Data Processing Workflow for Water Column Data Working with Additional Bathymetry Layers O
272. es iovewteasen B24 508 GeoBaR to Image cece ee a ee eee eee eee 510 GSF to CARIS Map 24s20 cakes ewiGee bd dese eee ees wes 511 Select GSF Files 2 pewisees reed dbet eek emda R eee t 511 Export Soundings and Track lines 005 511 CARIS Map Options ccs s2 ov dcuwieedeemededioes 513 GSF to HOB scx sovkshe eter segues ves hided baghaeGaves 514 GSF Files to EXPO o20tiueldexe ous eeiw eee sawed eet 514 Export Soundings and Track lines 0 5 514 GSF to HOB Step 4 nananana Goseiveatet so oesaged 515 HIPS Tide to ASCII n on nannaa 516 HIPS Tide to ASCII Step 3 0005 516 HIPS TOASC I csr arans ace Ged ariris ean ence ae EEs 517 HIPS to ASCII Step 3 ooon 0 cece cece eee ee eens 517 Select Export Unis 0250 2caigeacigetchstedtouen oad 519 Coordinate System 0 00 eee 520 HIPS to ASCII Step 6 s s42ivdsaseetadssaveseeiais 521 HIPS To CARIS Mapis icc ios 2s ee kes tase eee eheew ent 523 HIPS to CARIS Map Step 3 020 00s 523 HIPS to CARIS Map Step 4 2000 525 HIPS to CARIS Map Options 2000 526 FIPS io FAU sce tawss sa Shae owed bee bk ee RAREST 527 FIPS GSP 4243 sseeveuciacat ace tee eg eae e weds cas 528 DUO Folder ic ieee eee deae kate wide a AE E E 528 HIPS To HOB tenccektouaceeweh Gia Bae ee eee Hae 529 HIPS te HOB Step 3 inderne bet eeu devas EN a 529 HIPS to HOB Step 4 nananana anaana 530 HIPS TOHIR ve
273. es the specialized user to define the backscatter curve for their own purposes by manipulating parameter values for port and starboard data or applying a Biot model 1 Highlight a sediment analysis patch 2 Select Model Parameters from the Source field on the Analysis tab The Parameters list box is activated CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 451 Process Imagery Data Sediment Analysis Process Analysis Edt Display Advanced 7 Source Aene T Analyze Results Port Muddy Sand Confidence Good 0 6 Stbd Very Fine Sand Confidence Very Good 0 3 gt Parameters Side Port Stbd Frequency 240000 00 Velocity 1 05 Density 1 26 Loss 0 02 Roughness 0 01 Gamma 3 25 volume 0 00 GrainSize 3 59 Porosity 0 40 Tortuosity 1 25 Permeability 1 00 _ 240000 10000 300000 Update V Auto update m Model Options Use Biot model Graph Options You can modify values in the list using the slider below it 3 Select a parameter e g porosity from the list 4 Use the slider below the list to adjust the value of that parameter The values for the parameter automatically update as you move the slider The range of possible values varies with the parameter selected Alternatively you can manually update each parameter as you adjust the value 5 Click Update to set the new value in the list 452 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Tools gt Mo
274. es within the ellipse are adjusted up to the surface of the ellipse In the following image the webbed surface overlaying the BASE Surface represents the Product Surface area after defocusing CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Product Surfaces has taken place The shoals are preserved but without the sharply defined detail of the original BASE surface CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 357 Create Product Surfaces Create a Product Surface Create a Product Surface Process gt BASE Surface gt Product Surface Menu Product Surface Pop up 358 1 To create a Product Surface from a finalized BASE surface Open the BASE surface 2 Select the BASE Surface layer in the Layers tab 3 Select the New Product Surface command The Generalize Surface dialog box is displayed Generalize Surface Source surface D CARISSHIPS 8 0 Data Fieldsheets Portsmouth2001 Sep Attributes Available Selected a Hypothesis_Count Hypothesis_Strength Mean Node_Std_ Dey Shoal Std_Dev User_Nominated Output surface Name Surface generalization Scale 1 6000 Radius 60 00000 Resolution 3 00000 Surface defocusing Horizontal error 5 00000 m Reapply designated soundings The path and filename of the selected BASE surface is displayed at the top of the dialog box 4 Optional Select one or more attri
275. eseeeseeeeeeeeee WorRKFLOW FOR PROCESSING IMAGERY DATA PROCESSING ENGINES GEOCODER WORKFLOW FOR MULTIBEAM DATA Open Mosaic EDITOR CREATE GEOBARS 000000008s BEAM PATTERN CORRECTION Epit GEOBARS 0000eeeeeee Create Mosaic FROM GEOBARS EDIT MOSA Sianio INTERPOLATE Mosaic SEDIMENT ANALYSIS CONTACT Soarian dabii Process Imagery Data Overview Overview 412 Multibeam backscatter and side scan sonar data can be processed for the purpose of creating mosaics But as well as being end products mosaics can be used as tools to more efficiently process imagery data Imagery data processed in Mosaic Editor is stored as Georeferenced Backscatter Rasters or GeoBaRs GeoBaRs are the basis for all mosaics created in HIPS and SIPS A GeoBaR is essentially a mosaic of imagery data for a survey line which can be edited in georeferenced space Once imagery has been corrected a full mosaic can be compiled from the data Sediment analysis can be performed on data processed with the Geocoder engine Most users will be able to perform all their imagery processing directly in Mosaic Editor However if you need to edit altitude data for side scan data or e will be digitizing and editing contacts or prefer to use a waterfall display for editing or intend to apply advanced TVG controls then these functions must be performed in Side Scan Editor This is described in the Sipe Scan Eprtor section of the Editors Guide
276. essels 59 azimuth of sun postion 210 B BAG templates 484 BAG Bathymetric Attributed Grid export data to 482 BASE Surface export to ASCII 498 export to image 501 BASE surface add legend 208 add survey data 218 attribute display properties 210 close 218 combine surfaces 226 compute statistics 232 create 193 create holiday layer 238 custom layer 219 delete 218 difference surface 229 filter display 209 finalized surface 224 group surfaces 242 holiday layer 238 Interpolate 222 open 218 open in Subset Editor 350 properties 204 quality control 307 quality report 238 fange weight 190 recompute 221 femove survey lines 219 swath angle weight 190 uncertainy weight 189 view 203 Beam Pattern Correction in Mosaic Editor 426 Benthos C3D data 128 binning new bin layer 401 overview 397 bounding box to create field sheet 177 C CARIS map export HIPS data to 523 output soundings to 388 CARIS Spatial ARchive CSAR 188 Carry Over Raw Data Files 84 carry over raw data files 84 CATZOC 159 check Load Tide status 145 classify lines 293 close field sheet 180 CMAX format conversion options for 98 Coda format conversion options for 98 Colour by SV Profile 140 Colour Table Editor 394 compare BASE surfaces 229 components of mosaic edit 440 Compute GPS Tide 149 options 150 Compute layer in BASE surf
277. ession File gt Open Session Menu Workflow in HIPS and SIPS Session Files Session files record the list of data layers open at the time the session was saved The Session file also records the layer properties drawing order the on and off state of layers and the last geographic extent of the data Session files enable you to re opening all data that was being processed the last time the project was open The data types that are recorded in the session file include lines field sheets e background data e last geographic view extent of the Display window All session files have an hsf file extension and are stored by default in Hips Session The previous format of the session file ses can be opened and automatically upgraded to the new session file format To save a session 1 Select the Save Session command or select the Save Session As command if the session has not been saved before or if you want to save an existing session under a new name e Ifthis is an already saved file the program re saves the existing hsf file e If this is a new file then the Save As dialog box is displayed Select a folder where you want to save the hsf file and type a name in the File Name text box If a project contains a large number of track lines you can make data processing more manageable and reduce the time it takes to load data into the application by selecting specific track lines for a sessio
278. et tae V Amplitude Filtering 10 Statistical Filtering Threshold 2 sigma 95 44 Sector m lal Horizontal Angle 20 j O Bin size 10m Data Thinning Thinning Factor Benthos C3D data can be filtered so that only the best quality data is imported into HIPS You can apply the filter to port starboard beam angles A i 1 Type a range of beam angles to select the cleanest data from the port and starboard beams All other options are applied to QPS data only The Range Filtering option converts soundings within a specified distance in metres Soundings outside of this range are not converted 2 Select the Range Filtering check box to implement this option 3 Click the up or down arrow buttons to select a minimum and maximum distance The Amplitude Filtering option filters soundings according to amplitude value For each ping port and starboard pings are handled separately the min max amplitude values are obtained and samples that fall below the selected percentage 0 50 are rejected 4 Select the Amplitude Filtering check box to implement this option CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data XTF 5 Click the up or down arrow buttons to select a percentage value for rejecting soundings The Statistical Filtering option controls which soundings in each swath are considered for conversion This option calculates the mean depth and stan
279. etting from the drop down list 4 Right click on the Bounding Polygon layer and select Rebuild from the pop up menu The bounding polygon will be rebuilt The image below shows the difference between the polygon drawn at the default level and rebuilt at a Fine level 214 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces Vertical Reference System Vertical Reference System File gt Vertical Reference System Editor Menu A vertical reference system is a 3D coordinate reference system in which position is defined by latitude longitude height or depth and a linear unit of measure for example feet or metres When the Z values in a vertical reference system represent depths the Z axis direction is positive down This is consistent with the HIPS and SIPS depth convention In HIPS and SIPS the identification of the vertical reference system information used for a project can be added to a BASE surface during its creation Alternatively it can be added to the Vertical Coordinate System field in the Properties of an existing BASE surface A database of defined vertical reference systems in available in HIPS and SIPS through the Vertical System Editor This information is drawn from the European Petroleum Survey Group EPSG database of reference systems which can be found at http www epsg registry org Vertical Reference System Editor The existing datum ellipsoid and reference system ent
280. export only the shoalest or deepest soundings from each cell respectively to the CARIS file Soundings can be selected for export from the total survey area or by processing each track line in sequence 10 Select either the By Area or By Line options 11 Click Next CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data HIPS To CARIS Map HIPS to CARIS Map Step 4 This dialog box sets the track line and swath export options a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 4 of 7 2 x T Export Track Lines ShipFeatueCode SHIPTRACK Ship User Number fi Towlish Featue Code FISHTRACK Towdish User Number M Exclude Rejected Record s T Export Swaths Feature Code TRACK_LINE 7 User Number fi The Export Track Lines option connects a line along the centre of each swath thus showing the track of the vessel along each survey line It is not necessary to import soundings to use this option The Export Swaths command connects a set of lines one per swath along the outermost port and starboard beams thus showing the coverage of each ping It is not necessary to import soundings to use this option 1 Select the Export Track Lines check box to export a line representing the track of the vessel along the survey area 2 Type a new feature code for the vessel if needed 3 Type a User Number for the vessel so it is distinguished from other vessels in the same CARIS map 4 Select anew Towfish Feature Cod
281. exported files General Abstract Type a brief description of the data being exported CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 483 Export Data Export Surface to BAG 484 Field Function Status Optional Identify the status of the data at the time of export Select from the drop down menu completed historicalArchive obsolete onGoing planned required underDevelopment Vertical Datum Values above the vertical datum are positive Responsible identifying information Party Name Identify person responsible for the data Position Position title for the responsible person Organization Organization of the responsible person Role User role s assigned to the responsible party with regard to this data Constraints Legal Specify whether the file is legally restricted from being copied altered or referenced without permission from the responsible party Set the constraint from the drop down list If you select otherRestrictions enter details in the Other field Other Type details of legal constraints on the data Security Identify restrictions on access to the exported data by setting its security classification level from the drop down list Notes Additional information about security constraints Save and Load Templates Some field values are entered automatically when the dialog box is displayed To automatically populate a fiel
282. f corrections such as SVC and Merge can be viewed in the Selection tab and the Detailed Line Query window This line profile information is displayed in columns The columns which are displayed and the order in which they are displayed is controlled by a pop up menu See Cotumn SETTINGS on PAGE 20 of the Reference guide for details on adjusting the columns displayed Similar information for data in HIPS editors can be viewed when selected and queried using the Query or Query Line command Queried data can be saved to a text file from the display or a line report can be generated using the Process gt Line Report command View Line DATA ON PAGE 273 Query LINE DATA ON PAGE 275 Query Data IN EDITORS ON PAGE 274 LINE REPORT ON PAGE 275 View Line Data To view data profiles for one or more track lines selected in the Display window 1 Select a track line in the Display window or in the Project tab of the Control window 2 Open the Selection tab in the Worksheet window The Selection tab automatically displays the data profile for each selected line As well as Project Vessel Day and Line identification the profile data displayed can include this information e Min Time MaxTime e TotalTime Merged Outdated Speed Line e Line Class Heading e Length Reject e SR e GPS Tide Tide Loaded Raw Range SVP Corrected Corrected TPU Nav Del Dft Tide Applied Loc
283. f nodes to which a sounding is applied is determined by the vertical uncertainty limit in the selected S 44 survey order When a sounding s vertical uncertainty increases beyond the requirement for the survey order then it cannot contribute to the node BASE Surface Wizard Step 3 of 4 Add survey lines IHO S 44 Order Special Order__ 4 C Use selected lines _ Ignore lines with errors C Include additional bathymetry Include status Accepted Examined Outstanding Additional Attributes Shoal Deep 1 Select an HO S 44 Order from the drop down list The a constant depth error and b factor of depth dependent errors fields are automatically filled when a survey order is selected These values are read from HIPS System THO_Standards xml If one or more track lines were selected before the BASE Surface process was started the Use selected lines check box is enabled 2 Clear this check box if you want to apply the BASE Surface to the entire field sheet area CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 253 CUBE Processing Generating CUBE Surfaces Use the Ignore Lines with errors option so that the surface creation is not interrupted if it encounters bad data The process will skip the part of the line containing bad data and continue creating the surface with the next line Once the surface is complete you can decide whether to remove the partial line 3 Check Ignore Lines with errors to have bad
284. f nodes within 3995 45 10 Residual mean 0 473 S 44 Order 2 Range 100 000 to 5000 000 No depths within the specified range The first section contains information about the report file and the data holiday options set in the dialog box The data and time that the QC report file was created The BASE Surface on which the QC report is based The holiday search radius The minimum number of nodes required to omit a node without data from being included in a holiday Ifa holiday layer was created or not The source of error values the layer The second section contains information on the number of nodes containing data CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands The total number of nodes processed in the surface The total number of nodes that contains data Percentage of the surface that contains data Number of data holidays located The third section contains information about each S 44 survey order CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide The depth range for the survey order set in the dialog box The number of nodes within that depth range with uncertainty values that were considered for the survey order The number of nodes that fall within the depth error limits for that survey order The residual mean is derived from the computed and reported uncertainty If the value is negative the uncertainty values meet the requirements for the selected survey or
285. f soundings within the tile or the tile size or both The Surface Cleaning function automatically creates a Starting Level Tile set even if you do not select the tiling option The Starting Level Tile Set is created by taking the largest dimension of the field sheet and dividing the area by 3 For each tile a polynomial solution is computed using iterative least squares re weighted regression The objective of the regression is to generate a surface defined by a set of polynomial terms which closely matches most of the real depths However since the number of terms defining the polynomial surface are less than the number of points considered then the points do not fit the surface exactly Using the residual values of each point as a goodness measure outliers can be detected by testing for high residual values The process is iterative within each tile and for each new iteration the soundings are re weighted inversely proportional to their previous residual You can fix the re weighting scheme to apply full weight to all soundings within a defined limit from the surface This re weighting limit can be based on a fixed distance or a multiple of the standard deviation of the residuals within the tile You can also define the maximum number of iterations The buffer around each tile determines how much extra data is used to compute the tile polynomial surface This helps eliminate edge effects during statistical testing The second st
286. f the transducers on a boom may change or a different ellipsoid may be used A time stamp is used to keep track of these changes The time stamp records the time from which a configuration is valid and is recorded with each entry to the HVF Below is an example of time stamps showing changes in vessel configuration new nav new nav antenna new draft new ellipsoid antenna position error datum position 1999 127 1999 263 2000 149 2000 170 14 10 1 09 23 0 17 10 3 10 0 0 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 39 Create Vessel File Sensor Configuration 40 NOTE Time in HIPS is based on the recorded reference time No distinction is made for UTC Time Correction In the HVF most sensors have a Time Correction field that contains the time difference between the sensor clock and the reference clock Sensors are time tagged and all clocks are compared to the reference clock so sensor readings can be synchronized The Time Correction field is specified in seconds and is positive if ahead of the reference clock Time Correction Recorded Tim Reference Tim CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Sensors Create Vessel File Sensors Different sensors can require specific edits applied to the parameter data The following sections explain the individual sensor data fields Transducer The swath sonar also known as multibeam typically has beams that are formed in a fan shape radiating from the centre of the transducer 1 Cl
287. f the project contains both bathymetric and side scan data you can open either the vessel or the towfish navigation or open both Your choice is saved in the registry and the session file for future use 3 Select either Open ship track lines or Open towfish track lines or both options to open the appropriate track lines in the Display window 4 Click Open The track lines associated with the project are opened in the Display window The Project Vessel Day Line file tree is displayed in the Control window When you open a project created in a version of HIPS and SIPS prior to 8 0 the project will automatically be updated use the new hips database file Multiple Data Paths The default repository for HIPS data is drive Program Files CARIS HIPS 8 1 Data or drive Program Data CARIS HIPS 8 1 Data The projects stored here are shown in the Connect To dialog box under Default CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create a New Project Open Projects You are not limited to a single repository for project data You can add other locations to the project tree in both the New Project and Open Project dialog boxes To add a new project location 1 Select Connect To from the right click menu in the Projects listing The Connect To dialog box is displayed Connect To e C C Folder fia Cancel 2 Browse to the location of project folders that are on a different path from your Default repository 3 Type a name f
288. f two of the four neighbouring beams are rejected During filtering only accepted soundings are examined Soundings rejected after one filter pass are not considered in the next Apply Filters The last step is applying the automatic depth filter to the swath data 1 Select an Apply Filter command to apply the criteria set by the Set Filters dialog box You have four options for applying the filters Filter 1 Screen Apply the filters only to the swaths that are currently visible in the Plan View of Swath Editor To End of Line Apply the filters to the track line currently open in Swath Editor from the first swath currently visible in the Plan view to the end of the line Selected Lines Apply the filters to all of the currently selected track lines This function does not require that Swath Editor be open All Lines Apply the filters to all track lines currently open in the Display window This function does not require that Swath Editor be open CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 327 Cleaning Swath Data Manual Cleaning Manual Cleaning Tools gt Swath Editor gt Open Menu Tool k Menu Auto Cursor Edit gt Status Flag gt Tool ca Tool Find Pop up 328 1 Select the Ship Track Lines layer in the Layers tab 2 Select a track line 3 Select an Open Swath Editor command The Swath Editor opens with all views displayed For
289. ference point for a sweep system can be anywhere on the X Y plane but must be on the water surface 1 Click Sweep in the Sensors list box so the selection is highlighted and the data fields are visible Time Correction SLi Transducer Status TPUStatus 2009 103 00 00 0 000 Navigation Gyro wpHeave to ma Dua PSS nu P P eee 2 Type data as needed in the following fields e Date The year and Julian day of the current sweep time stamp Time The hour and minute of the current sweep time stamp e Time Correction The time correction value e Transducers Number of beams mounted on the boom 3 Click the Edit button in the Transducer Status field to view a table for entering data for individual beams on the boom 48 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Sensors ame a a 4 Type values in the fields and click OK 5 Click Edit in the TPU Status field to enter TPU values for each beam on the boom and to edit values entered in the new vessel wizard TPE Settings for Sweep N avigation to Boom MR U to Boom 11 00 ac i 00 11 00 5 00 Ja 00 11 00 5 00 4 00 11 00 5 00 4 00 111 00 15 00 14 00 6 Type values as needed and click OK Towed Sensors If a towed sensor such as a side scan sonar is used on a survey then HIPS and SIPS can compute the sensor s position as from the ship s position by calculating the horizontal layback and a d
290. fied weight matrix scheme is used CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 189 Create BASE Surfaces Four types of BASE surfaces 190 Swath Angle Weight The weight a sounding contributes to the Surface also varies with the sounding s grazing angle with the seabed This weighting value is important in areas with adjacent or overlapping track lines The swath angle weight ensures that higher weight is given to beams from the inner part of a swath than to outer beams from adjacent track lines In the following graph beams with a grazing angle between 90 and 75 degrees are given a weight of 1 0 The weight decreases linearly to 0 01 as the angle with the sea floor decreases to 15 degrees 1 200 1 000 l 0 800 5 0 600 0 400 0 200 0 000 SPREE HSH HES Grazing Angle This is the default swath angle weight scheme as defined by the file Hips System GrazingAngleWeights txt The default file can be customized to another weighting scheme Range weighting All BASE Surfaces use range weighting to determine how a sounding is applied to a node Range weighting is based on distance soundings close to a node are given greater weight than soundings further away The calculated node positions are determined by the corner coordinates of the field sheet The range weight is inversely proportional to distance from the node soundings closer to a node are given a greater weight than soundings further away The number of
291. file will be seen in the Profile window To import a profile in ASCII format 1 Select the field sheet layer containing the surface to which you want to import the profile 2 Select the Import Profile command The Import Profile Layer dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 373 Create Product Surfaces Profiles Import Profile Layer Filename C CARIS HIPS 71 Session 70nov23p5 Profile Layer Name Profile 47 Feature Code PROFILE Theme Number 1 File Yew Profle nanek naa MT Pe Profile name Pp Ox Y Field sheet NOv14 ET Height source 14novCUBE m Step size mj 5 Coordinate System UTM 30N v lju a Latitude Longitude Skip 0 Lines From Top Click Browse to select the ASCII file containing the profile to import Type a Profile Layer Name The default name is Profile1 Type a Theme Number The default is 1 oOo oa A Ww Select the View Type X Y or Latitude Longitude This value should be the same as the type set when the profile was exported to the ASCII file The File View field shows the contents of the ASCII file which you can scroll through To skip extraneous content in the file you can set where the data begins 7 Seta value for the number of lines from the top that should be disregarded when the file is imported 8 Click OK The imported profile will be listed as named under the field sheet in the Lay
292. fixed boom system However for a decoupled boom only a Gyro misalignment value is needed The Squat and Heave percentage values are transducer responses to overall heave and squat For fixed boom transducers this should be 100 and less than 100 for decoupled boom transducers 8 Type a degree offset in the Roll and Gyro fields 9 Type a percentage value in the Squat and Heave fields 10 Click Next to open the dialog box for CONFIGURATION OPTIONS ON PAGE 32 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 31 Create Vessel File Create a New HVF Motion Sensors This dialog box determines which attitude sensors are displayed in the HVF CARIS HIPS and SIPS Vessel Wizard Step 4 Motion Sensor Select the recorded vessel motion data Heave Apply in post processing Roll C Apply in post processing Pitch C Apply in post processing 1 Create entries for any or all of the following sensors by clicking the appropriate box e heave e pitch e roll The Apply in Post Processing option means that the data is applied during the Merge process or during Sound Velocity Correction 2 Click any of the check boxes if you want to apply the attitude sensor data in post processing 3 Click Next to open the dialog box for CONFIGURATION OPTIONS ON PAGE 32 Configuration Options The Configuration Options dialog box is displayed 32 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Create a New HVF CARIS HIPS a
293. for the results are shown in the Parameters fields These values are read only Process Analysis Edt Display advanced Source Sediment Data Analyze m Results Port MUDDY SAND Confidence Good 0 6 Stbd VERY FINE SAND Confidence very Good 0 3 Edit Parameters Side Port Stbd Parameter Frequency 240000 00 Velocity 1 05 Density 1 26 Loss 0 02 Roughness 0 01 Gamma 3 25 volume 0 00 GrainSize 3 59 Porosity 0 40 Tortuosity 1 25 Permeability 1 00 H 0 10000 300000 Update y Auto update m Model Options I Use Biot model Graph Options CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Sediment Analysis Grain Size table The classes of sediment which is displayed by the sediment analysis are based on values in the Grain Size table This table can be customized while in Advanced mode only 1 Select the Analysis tab 2 Select Advanced 3 Click Edit to open the Grain Size table E Grain Size Table Grain Size Class Coarse Sand Gravelly Sand Medium Sand Gravelly Muddy Sand Medium Sand Fine Sand Silty Sand m Muddy Sand Yery Fine Sand Clayey Sand Coarse Silt Grain size values and their descriptions can be edited using the Modify button New classes can be added using the Insert button and removed from the table using Delete Use Reset to restore the default values Model Parameters The Model Parameters mode enabl
294. for your profile line 8 Click to add a series of points to define the line The profile line is automatically drawn between the points The Profile window dynamically displays the profile as you add more points to the digitized line 9 To remove points before the line is completed right click and select Remove Last from the pop up menu Repeat as needed Points can 368 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide ct c Gol Ez oo a o a a a Menu Process gt Products gt Profile gt Superselection Create Product Surfaces Profiles also be removed from a completed line in Edit mode See Line EDITING OPTIONS ON PAGE 376 10 Click the Enter key to complete the line or right click on the line and select End line from the pop up menu The Profile is displayed in the Profile window The example below shows the profiles on different height sources generated by the same digitized line The dots in the graph represent the digitized points of the line Leg See 150 200 Distance m Create Profile by Superselection You can create a profile that follows a superselected line such as a track line The line must fall within the bounds of a field sheet To create a profile for superselected track line 1 Open the field sheet layer containing the BASE surface to be profiled Select the ShipTrack Lines layer in the Layers tab Select a track line Select the Profile by Superselection co
295. format or converted to an 8 bit format 3 Select either the Preserve 16 bit option or Convert to 8 bit option If the Convert to 8 bit option is selected the Scale and Shift options are enabled The Scale option averages the data and the Shift option selects a initial bit value between 0 and 8 and includes the next seven bit values for export For example if you typed 8 as your initial value then bits 8 to 15 are exported CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 4 Select the Scale option if you want to average the data into 8 bit format or select Shift and type the value for the first bit 5 Click Next Qmips 1 Choose a pair of sonar channels by clicking one of two options 1 2 or 3 4 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 115 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 116 Teledyne Reson PDS The final step of the conversion process for Teledyne Reson data provides options for filtering soundings and for identifying the devices containing the data you want to convert 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 7 C Filter soundings by status Reject soundings using quality flags Jo 1 2 3 PDS data 57K data Navigation device vi Navigation Heading device Y Heading Motion device 1 v Motion Convert CM v Swath Source Convert depth field P S C Separate profiles for dual head data 7K C Convert hidden n
296. formed on the Surface layer An interpolated BASE Surface cannot be updated with the Automatic BASE Surface Update setting in the Options dialog box Finalize BASE Surface A finalized BASE Surface is a finished version of the surface that is ready for export or for further processing for example to create a Product Surface Most importantly finalizing a surface ensures that designated soundings are included in the final surface to be carried through to bathymetric products These three operations can be applied when finalizing a BASE Surface Minimum uncertainty Vertical uncertainty can fall to almost zero if a node contains too many soundings This function applies a user defined vertical uncertainty to each node to compensate for this situation Designated soundings If the data set contains designated soundings the Surface is regenerated and the designated soundings depth values are applied to the nearest nodes See CRITICAL SOUNDINGS ON PAGE 297 Depth thresholds A Finalized BASE Surface can be modified to represent a range of depths levels in the field sheet When the Finalized Surface is generated only these depths are displayed To create a finalized BASE Surface 1 Select a BASE Surface layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Select the Finalize BASE Surface command The Finalize BASE Surface dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surf
297. g data CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 1 Select Format Name Date Version BAG To ASCII 02 02 201012 24PM 7 0 2 0 BASE Surface To ASCII 02 02 201012 29PM 7 0 2 0 BASE Surface To BAG 02 02 201012 24PM 7 0 2 0 BASE Surface Tolmage 02 02 201012 29PM 7 0 2 0 Contact 02 02 201012 29PM 7 0 2 0 GeoBaR To ASCII 02 02 201012 23PM 7 0 2 0 GeoBaR To Image 02 02 2010 12 23 PM 7 0 2 0 GSF to CARIS Map 02702 2010 12 28 PM_ 7 0 2 0 GSF to HOB 02202 2010 12 27 PM 7 0 2 0 HIPS Tide to ASCII 02202 2010 12 24 PM 7 0 2 0 HIPS to ASCII 02 02 201012 25PM 7 0 2 0 HIPS to CARIS Map 02 02 201012 27 PM 7 0 2 0 HIPS to FAU 02202 2010 12 24 PM 7 0 2 0 v 1 Select an export format 2 Click Next to select data to export 494 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Export Wizard Step 2 Select Files Depending on the format being exported this dialog box will display either available field sheet layers or a project tree For example when exporting a BASE surface available layers are displayed when exporting HIPS data the Project Vessel Day Line tree for all available project files is displayed If you are exporting line data for example HIPS to ASCII or HIPS to HOB you can select specific track lines before you activate the Export Wizard You can also adjust this selection in the Step 2 dialog box Export a surface If you select a BASE Surface a mosaic a GeoBaR or multiple GeoBaRs to export the Select Layer t
298. g settings 1 a A U N Select the Export Soundings check box to export soundings to a CARIS map ATTRIBUTES FEATURE CODE USER NUMBER To export soundings with a specific status flag select any of the Sounding Status check boxes The Data Binning option divides the survey area into a grid for sounding selection The Bin Size sets the size of the grid cells 6 To apply data binning select the Data Binning check box 7 Type the size for the grid cell in the Bin Size field and select either CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Metres or Feet 529 Export Data HIPS To HOB 530 8 Select either Shoal or Deep Biased to export only the shoalest or deepest soundings respectively to the CARIS file Soundings can be selected for export from the total survey area or by processing each track line in sequence 9 Select either the By Area or By Line options The Export Track Lines option connects a line along the centre of each swath thus showing the track of the vessel along each survey line It is not necessary to export soundings to use this option The Export Swaths command connects a set of lines one per swath along outermost port and starboard beams thus showing the coverage of each ping It is not necessary to export soundings to use this option 10 Select the Export Track Lines and Export Swaths options 11 Click Next HIPS to HOB Step 4 1 Click the Browse button to select a location for
299. g used to control the application of the NULL hypothesis test Value must be either True or False Default value is False Minimum Number of Neighbours During the Null Hypothesis test this controls the minimum number of neighbours that a node must have in order to be considered for the Standard Deviating Ratio test If the node has less the specified number it is automatically marked as Null Values must be between 2 and 8 Standard Deviation Ratio During the Null Hypothesis test this represents the cut off limit for the standard devotion ratio including the node in question to the standard deviation of the qualified neighbouring nodes If the computed ratio exceeds the specified value the node is marked as Null Values must be between 0 0 and 10 0 Neighbour Strength Maximum The maximum strength value that is allowed to be considered as part of the standard deviation computations in the NULL hypothesis test Value must be between 0 00 and 5 00 Click OK to save and apply settings CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide CUBE Processing Hypothesis Editing Hypothesis Editing Tools gt Subset Editor Menu Tool Tools gt Subset Editor Pop up CUBE surfaces can be displayed in the Subset Editor for examination and editing using an iterative process to choose which of multiple hypotheses of depth values are the best ones to represent the sea floor When a CUBE surface is created soundings a
300. he Compute TPU dialog box 1 Select a track line in the Display window so it is highlighted 2 Select the Compute TPU command The Compute TPU dialog box is displayed Compute TPU Survey specific parameters Tide values Measured m Zoning 9 Sound Speed values Measured mjs Surface 0 F Sweep specific parameters Uncertainty Source Peak to Peak Heave m Vessel Settings Max Roll deg Ov Error Data Max Pitch 0 deg 3 Inthe Tide Values fields enter the vertical uncertainty values due to tide These will be applied to all lines being processed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Compute TPU Total Propagated Uncertainty The Measured offset is the error value for the tide station It is equivalent to the standard deviation of the TideGauge measurements The Zoning offset is the vertical uncertainty value in range calculation for a tide zone file HIPS does not model the TPU for the tide zone Instead a single user defined single value may be used here 157 Compute TPU Total Propagated Uncertainty 4 Enter error offsets for Sound Speed Values e The Measured offset value is used in computing range error to compensate for inaccuracies in SVP measurements e The Surface offset value is used to account for errors in surface sound speed measurements that alter the beam angle This parameter is only applicable to systems that require accurate surface sound speed measu
301. he ground or as the number of millimetres between soundings at map scale Once you have set how the radius value will be applied you can either set the same interval value to be applied to each radius or have varying values applied from a radius table file For example if you selected Shoal bias and set a single defined radius of 5 then only the shoalest sounding within each 5m radius on the ground or within 5mm at map scale will be displayed Sounding Radius Table A radius table sets the minimum radius between soundings for various depth ranges Each depth range will have its own radius value The sounding radius table is a text file containing three columns minimum depth of the range maximum depth of the range radius value for the depth range For example using the example radius table below 8m soundings would be a minimum of 1mm apart at map scale while 80m soundings be 10mm apart Min depth Max depth Radius value for range 0 0 10 0 1 2 0 10 0 20 0 2 0 20 0 50 0 5 0 50 0 500 0 10 0 1 Set the Radius Value e Select distance on the ground m or Select mm at map scale and type a scale value in the Map Scale 1 field default is 1 10000 2 To set a standard minimum distance between soundings select the Use single defined radius and enter the interval 3 To use a radius table to set the minimum distance between soundings select the Use radius table file option and click Brows
302. he navigation datagram or the logging system 10 Choose System to select the logging system or choose Automatic to select the timestamp specified by the Installation datagram CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 123 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats EA400 EA600 Options Time shifting 124 An EA400 600 dataset is composed of two parts and side scan amplitude data is stored in the raw component However since the file format does not explicitly state which channel contains the side scan data you need to know beforehand where the port side and starboard side data are stored 11 If you are converting single beam data from the dual frequency EA400 600 system select Primary to use the primary sounding as the selected sounding in the HIPS file or select Secondary to use the secondary sounding as the selected sounding 12 Use the S idescan drop down list to select the number of the channel which contains the side scan data 13 Use the Port Stbd drop by list to select the number of the port and of the starboard channels If you select N A for a channel no side scan data will be converted for that channel The Time shifting option lets you add a constant number of seconds to each piece of data retrieved from the simrad all file This time shift value can be positive or negative and it s set to zero by default 14 Enter the value to be added as a constant Spawar There are no options specifically for the Spawar fo
303. he right As you select each property field a brief description of the field is displayed below the properties In the example illustrated above the content of the Scope field show Topographic mapping and geodetic surveying as the areas of applicability for the selected datum The first property field contains the EPSG code number that identifies the selected datum ellipsoid or reference system 216 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces Vertical Reference System Editing the Vertical Reference database You can add your own entries to the database provided the names of the entries do not duplicate existing names User defined entries can be deleted but original entries cannot To add an item 1 Select the icon for the category of data that you want to add For example to add an ellipsoid click the Ellipsoids icon 2 Right click anywhere in the ellipsoids listing and select New from the pop up menu A New entry is added to the list 3 Click on the new entry and type the name for your entry over writing New In order for your new entry to be saved to the database it must have values defined for the properties If you do not define the properties the new item will be removed from the list when the editor is closed 4 Type appropriate information in the properties fields in the list on the right 5 Click OK to save your changes to the database and close the dialog box Deleting ent
304. he same as the setting in the Roll section of the Vessel file HVF This control allows you to quickly observe the effects of applying or not applying dynamic roll to the sounding data If there is no roll data or if the appropriate Roll section cannot be found in the HVF or if the survey line has already been sound velocity corrected toggling the Apply Roll switch will have no effect 10 Select the Apply Roll check box to see the effects of roll on the data CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 335 Cleaning Swath Data Correction for Refraction Artifacts Interpolation Querying 336 The velocity correction and depth are recorded with the current swath profile number While paging through the track line during cleaning new swath correction depth values can be recorded When you add the first Refraction Coefficient the correction starts at that profile and goes to the end of the line with that same correction If you add a second Refraction Coefficient after the first the correction applied between the two profiles is interpolated This is done so that there is no jump in the profile when the correction at the second Refraction Coefficient is applied to the data This interpolation is linear That is if the selected profile is between two refraction entries the depth and delta velocity are both interpolated from these entries Querying the data in Swath Editor will always give the results from the display so if you cha
305. he tile set These attributes such as maximum depth average depth etc add to the value of the tile set as they can later be selected as the height source for the tile display or used to produce contours and selected soundings 11 Choose other tile attributes by selecting an attribute in the Available list and clicking Add to move it to the Active list You can move the attribute from Active list by clicking Remove 12 Click Finish to complete the tiling process A progress indicator on the status bar shows how much of the tiling process has been completed Once the tiling is completed it is shown in the Display window and the tile layer is listed in the Control window Create Bins 1 Select the field sheet 2 Select the field sheet layer in the Layers tab 3 Select the Tiles command The Tiling Wizard Step 1 dialog box is displayed 4 Select the Binning option 5 Click Next The Tiling Wizard Step 2 dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 401 Create Product Surfaces Tiling a field sheet Tiling Wizard Step 2 21x r Binning Options Bin Size fT m Process gt Products gt Tiles New gt Tiles Pop up Menu 402 lt Back Cancel Help 6 Type a size for the bin tiles 7 Click Next The Tiling Wizard Step 3 dialog box is displayed The Available Attributes section is dimmed 8 Type a name for the file 9 Select a minimum or maxim
306. he type of delimiter you want to use to space the data in your output file If you select Other type the character you want to use If you are exporting the sediment analysis data from more than one line you can export the data to a single file or to a file for each line 5 6 7 8 Select One file or Multiple files Click Browse and select the destination folder for the output file s Type the name of the file if output is going to a single file Click Next EXPORT ON PAGE 542 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 539 Export Data SIPS To UNISIPS SIPS To UNISIPS Export SIPS data to a Unified Sonar Imaging Processing System UNISIPS format SIPS TO UNISIPS Step 3 Select the location to store the output data CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 4 UNISIPS Options Output Directory Sensor Name 1 Click Browse to select a location for the UNISIPS files The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed 2 Select a directory to store the UNISIPS data and click OK to close the dialog box The UNISIPS file will have the same name as the track line with an u file extension 3 Type a Sensor Name in the field up to 10 characters The file path is displayed in the Output File field 4 Click Next EXPORT ON PAGE 542 540 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Coordinate System Coordinate System All sounding data is stored in HIPS and SIPS as un
307. head transducer data are not combined into a single HIPS profile Soundings from transducer head 2 will be identified via status bits encoding so no changes to your vessel files are needed Since EIVA allows data logging from multiple devices the Data Source option enables you to select the source for heading attitude and navigation data The data for each device is tagged with a number from 0 to 4 that represents one of up to five devices collecting each type of data If you select a number for which no device exists no data is converted 5 Select a device number from the list for Gyro Navigation and or Motion data to convert the data from that device CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 101 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats You can convert the XML portion of your Atlas ASD data instead of the Binary the traditional source of bathymetry data in the EIVA converter The XML portion if it exists is contained within the EIVA sidescan datagrams 6 Select the source for bathymetry data from the Bathy drop down list The default selection is Binary 7 Select High Frequency or Low Frequency to convert Atlas ASD data Elac a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Elac Beam Numbering Starboard to Port Pott to Starboard Surface sound speed Manual m s Interpolate Attitude Data Navigation Multibeam Convert Side Scan C Pad transducer 1 with NULL beams Be
308. heet so that it fills the Display window 2 Click the Current Display Extent button 1 Click the Bounding Box button OR The cursor in the Display window is shown as a cross hair Press and hold the mouse button and drag the cursor across the area where you want to create the field sheet A rectangular box is drawn across the area where the cursor was dragged Ifyou want to move the bounding box position the cursor inside the box so it becomes a four headed arrow Press and hold the mouse button and then drag the box to a new location Ifyou want to resize the bounding box position the cursor on any of the box handles so the cursor becomes a two headed arrow Press and hold the mouse button and drag the handle to resize the box OR 1 Enter the northeast and southwest extents by clicking in one of the appropriate fields and typing the information or by using the arrow keys to toggle the values into the entry fields After the area for the field sheet has been defined 16 Click Finish to create the field sheet The new field sheet is outlined in the Display window CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 77 Create Field Sheets Create a Field Sheet The new field sheet data and files are located by default in Hips Fieldsheets ProjectName FieldSheetName 178 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Field Sheets Open and Close Field Sheets Open and Close Field Sheets Open a field sheet i
309. hydrographer C Rejected by TPU Attitude C Rejected by Surface Cleaning Reject with interpolation C Rejected by Surface Filter C Reject break interpolation Conversion C Rejected by depth filter C Rejected by disabled beam T 3 Select any of the following check boxes to select a rejected data criteria Rejected by Swath Editor Single Beam Editor Reset to Accepted any sounding data that was rejected in Swath or Single Beam Editor or by the Swath or Single Beam filters CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 305 Data QC Restart Cleaning 306 Rejected by Hydrographer Reset to Accepted any sounding data that was interactively rejected in Subset Editor Rejected by TPU Reset to Accepted the data that was rejected during Total Propagation Uncertainty TPU filtering Rejected by Surface Cleaning Reset to Accepted the data that was rejected during Surface Cleaning Rejected by Surface Filter Reset to Accepted data that was rejected during CUBE filtering Rejected by depth filter Reset to Accepted data that was rejected by the depth filter during conversion Rejected by disabled beam Reset to Accepted data that was rejected due to the disabled beam flag during conversion Rejected with interpolation Navigation Reset to Accepted any navigation data rejected with interpolation in Navigation Editor Rejected break Interpolation Navigation Reset to A
310. ick Transducer1 in the Sensors list box so the selection is highlighted and the swath data fields are displayed 2 Type data as needed in the following fields e Date The year and Julian day of current swath time stamp Time The hour and minute of the current swath time stamp e Time Correction The time correction value The X Y Z fields set the location of the transducer from the Reference Point 0 e X The athwart ship distance of the transducer positive to starboard e Y The along ship distance of the transducer positive to the bow Z The vertical distance of the transducer positive into the water The Pitch Roll and Yaw fields refer to misalignment of the transducer during mounting from the vessel coordinate system e Pitch The offset is positive when rotating the transducer towards the bow bow up Roll The offset is positive when rotating the transducer away from starboard starboard down e Yaw Indicates the horizontal rotational offset and is positive for a clockwise rotation Manufacturer The maker of the transducer Model The particular make of transducer The model information is necessary for the calculation of Total Propagated Uncertainty Serial Number The serial number of the transducer CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 41 Create Vessel File Sensors 42 Since the Simrad data read into HIPS is already corrected the Transducer values in the HVF must be set as follow
311. ide rejected data in Attitude Navigation Single Beam Swath and Subset Editor Soundings that were rejected in the Subset Editor can also be viewed in Swath Editor Use the two part Display Filter button on the View tool bar to display rejected data in an Editor This control will also display data in Accepted Designated and other critical sounding states Use the right half of the button to set which data to display When the left half of the button is depressed the selected data type is displayed When the button is not active all data is displayed Display Filter button Click to choose a filter Rejected Accepted Designated Click to toggle visibility For example to toggle between displaying all the data open ina HIPS editor and displaying only rejected data 1 Open data in an Editor 2 Click the arrow part of the Display Filter button and select the Rejected check box from the drop down list 3 Depress the Display Filter button to make the Rejected data visible 4 Click the button again to see all data You can also control which type of rejected soundings are displayed in the Single Beam Swath and Subset Editors To display specific types of rejected data 1 Select the View Rejected Flag Types command The Rejected Flag Types dialog box opens CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 295 Data QC View Rejected Soundings Rejected Flag Types Swath Singlebeam Rejected by swath 7 singlebeam Are
312. ide zones the tide data to be loaded for each part of a line is determined by the zone in which that part of the line falls as illustrated below Note that the tide zones do not overlap each other CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide File gt Open Background Data Menu Correct for Tide Tide Files A Tide station Survey lines A Tide station Tide station The tide data file must span the entire time frame of the track line The time zone of the tidal observation data must match the time zone of the survey data to which it will be applied The output from the Load Tide function see Loan Tide on PAGE 144 attaches a binary HIPS tide time series to each track line The tide zone option assigns tide observations to track lines from multiple tide stations based on the time period in defined geographic zones Each tide zone is defined by a closed polygon with tide time and range corrections for a primary station plus up to three backup secondary tide stations Tide zone should not overlap each other HIPS uses a Zone Definition File with the extension zdf for defining tide zone data This is an ASCII file and can be prepared with any text editor For complete description of the ZDF format see TipE Zone DEFINITION FILES ON PAGE 153 in the Reference Guide Display tide zones Tide zones and station locations can be displayed as background data 1 Select the Open Background Da
313. ied to a text file 94 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Convert Data The converted files are saved in the directory you selected in Step 2 of the conversion process see SELECT FILES FOR CONVERSION ON PAGE 82 2 Click Close to close the wizard Optional to return to the initial step of the conversion process click Restart CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 95 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats Options for Specific Formats In some cases HIPS Conversion Wizard provides import options specific to the format being converted The number of options depends on the data acquisition format that was selected in Step 1 of the Conversion Wizard These are the current formats which can be converted ATLAS ON PAGE 97 CMAX on PAGE 98 EDGETECH ON PAGE 99 ELAC ON PAGE 102 GeEOACOUSTICS ON PAGE 104 HAWKEYE ON PAGE 108 IMAGENEX ON PAGE 112 LAS on pace 114 NAVITRONICS ON PAGE 114 TELEDYNE RESON PDS on pace 116 SCRIPPS ON PAGE 119 SEABEAM ON PAGE 121 SEGY on pace 121 SIMRAD ON PAGE 122 SWATHPLus on PAGE 124 UNB on PAGE 124 XTF ON PAGE 126 CHIRPSCANSD ON PAGE 98 CODA ON PAGE 98 EIVA on PAGE 101 FURUNO ON PAGE 103 GSF on pace 107 HYPACK ON PAGE 109 LADS on Pace 113 MaRINESONICS ON PAGE 114 Qmips ON PAGE 115 SAS on pace 119 SDF on pac
314. ile Format To export an image of the profile graph 1 With the profile displayed right click the Profile window and select choose Image Export from the pop up menu The Export dialog box is displayed 380 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide El General Options Create Product Surfaces Profiles File Name No extension Output Directory Output File Format El PDF Options Paper Size Width mm Height mm Left Right Margins mm 5 Top Bottom Margins mm 5 Data Orientation Image Export DPI Quality 300 DPI PDF Portable Document Format Custom 592 260 Landscape Use the Export dialog box to define the settings for exporting the image The example above displays the options for export to TIFF format 2 Type a File Name for the image file 3 Click within the Output Directory field to enable the Browse button 4 Click Browse and select a location for the exported file 5 Select the Output File Format from the drop down list Once you select a format specific options for that format are displayed in the lower section of the dialog box 6 Optional Enter or select a value for the options as needed Export options PDF and PostScript options Paper size Set the page size of the exported file Width Height Set the width and height of the histogram in the resulting file Data Orientation Set the orientation of the histogram in the resulting file Portrait is a vertic
315. ile that records the list of track lines used to create the tiles CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 315 Statistical Surface Cleaning Creating Tiles and Cleaning Data Filtering Surface Parameters 316 E Surface Cleaning osl i dae LO Cleaning FieldSheet Tiling E Filtering Use protective radius True E Options Use designated soundings True Use examined soundings True Use outstanding soundings True Radius 0 00 E Surface Parameters Degree of polynomial 1 tilted plane E Least Squares Parameters Maxium iterations 3 Full re weight threshold Standard Deviation Value 1 0 sigma 68 26 E Other Use perpendicular C False Use tile buffer size True Tile buffer size 10 Use designated soundings Filter with protective radius around designated soundings You can set a protective sphere around critical soundings to protect any other soundings within the sphere from being rejected when you apply automated filters See Critica SOUNDINGS ON PAGE 297 The size of this protective area is determined by setting a radius You can also select which type of critical soundings the protection is applied to 9 Set Use Protective Radius to True 10 Set to True the type s of soundings to apply the radius to 11 Type the dimensions of the protective area in the Radius field This value is in units set as default Horizontal Length in Tools gt Options gt Display gt Units Set advanced parameters as needed
316. ined by the type of surface you are creating 3 e oO Ee BASE Surface Step 1 The BASE Surface Wizard Step 1 dialog box opens BASE Surface Wizard Step 1 of 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 193 Create BASE Surfaces Create a BASE Surface 1 Type a Name for the BASE Surface 2 Type any necessary Comments in the text box and click Next to display the BASE Surface Wizard Step 2 dialog box 194 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces Create a BASE Surface BASE Surface Step 2 BASE Surface Wizard Step 2 of 3 Resolution Single 5 00 m minD epth maxDepth Click to C Depth Filter site epth range and resolution minDepth m maxDepth m resim Multiple a fields Surface Type CUBE v Vertical Datum Unknown The Resolution value s sets the distance s between BASE Surface nodes You can use the same single resolution value for the entire surface or use different resolutions for each range of depths 1 Select Single and enter a resolution value or select the Multiple option and enter a range of values If you select the Single option you can determine the range of depths to include in the BASE surface by using the Depth Filter option 2 Select Depth Filter and enter a range of depths If you select the Multiple option the depth ranges and related resolution values can be saved as a template to appl
317. inning settings 1 Select the Export Soundings check box if you want to export soundings to a CARIS map See the next dialog box for the Export Tracklines and Export Swaths options There are four methods for exporting sounding attributes to a CARIS map Basic The basic sounding attributes in the CARIS map These include user number feature code and source ID This information is adequate to generate products such as sounding plots contour plots and DTMs Extended Basic attributes plus time stamps launch identifier first four letters of the vessel name and tidal correction Extended with Key The extended attributes set plus the profile number and beam number as the CARIS Key The profile number and the beam number in addition to the other attributes allow each sounding to be identified uniquely with respect to the original data set CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 523 Export Data HIPS To CARIS Map 524 Extended with Unique Key The extended attributes set plus every object is given a unique key This additional information allows more flexibility for visualizing and manipulating CARIS files For example if time stamps are associated with each sounding you can limit the display of soundings based on a time range However each extra attribute adds to the storage requirements More disk space is required to store the work file and any HIPS program that processes the file must do more work and use mor
318. interpolation so that soundings with the same time stamp as the rejected data are not also flagged as rejected 5 Clear the Reject with Interpolation check box if you want soundings associated with the rejected sensor data to also be rejected There are two filtering options Moving Average and Fast Fourier The Moving Average calculates a mean for each data point by calculating an average sensor value over a window of data using the Box Size parameter The window is defined as a number of data points or seconds centred on a point The average value for all of the values in the window is calculated and will be given to the central point Fast Fourier applies a common wave smoothing algorithm to a data point The Fast Fourier transformation performs a low pass filter on the selected sensor You select a Box Size in either points or seconds This value is converted into seconds and then inverted to become the cut off frequency 6 Select either the Moving Average or Fast Fourier filtering option CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 287 Data QC Attitude data Menu Tools gt Apply Filters gt 1 Screen To End of Line Selected Lines Tool t ZY 288 7 Select the Box Size parameter by clicking the up or down arrow buttons When using the Moving Average the Box Size determines the size of the window for averaging the data point When using the Fast Fourier the Box Size determines the cut off frequency tha
319. irection to the sensor 1 Click Towed in the Sensors list box so the selection is highlighted and the Towed data fields are displayed 2 Type data as needed in the following fields CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 49 Create Vessel File Sensors 50 e Date The year and Julian day of the current towed sensor time stamp Time The hour and minute of the current towed sensor time stamp Time Correction The time correction value e Layback Error The error in the computed or recorded horizontal layback This can be used for example to compensate the recorded layback data or tow cable length for the distance between the origin of the measurements and the defined tow point location in the tow cable length This value is subtracted from the computed horizontal layback e xX Offset of the tow point from the vessel s reference position e YY Offset of the tow point from the vessel s reference position e Z Height of the tow point negative upwards in relation to the datum that is referenced to the sensor depth in most cases this is the waterline height Manufacturer The maker of the towed sensor Model The make of the towed sensor Serial Number The serial number of the towed sensor Waterline Height The purpose of this section of the vessel file is to define long period changes in the vessel s draft due to fuel burn or other loading changes Specifically you can enter the height of the waterline
320. is highlighted 2 Select the Accept command The soundings are now flagged as accepted Reject Swaths In some instances it may be necessary to reject all soundings in one or more swaths This can be done with the Reject Swaths command without having to select all of the data in the swaths 1 Select some sounding in the swath you want to reject 2 Select the Reject Swaths command All soundings in the swath whether individually selected or not now have the Rejected by Swath Editor status flag turned on The sounding will not be displayed unless the Show Rejected function is turned on see View REJECTED SOUNDINGS ON PAGE 295 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Query Data Edit gt Query Menu Os Tool Query Key Pop up lt Q gt Cleaning Swath Data Query Data Select soundings to view status and other information 1 Select the data in one of the Swath Editor windows 2 Select a Query command The following data fields for the selected soundings are displayed in the Selection tab time of the swath profile d time from the previous profile profile number beam number across track distance e along track distance e depth e d depth from the previous profile d depth from the previous beam amplitude phase detect e quality value status flag e horizontal error value vertical error value You can reject queried soundings selected in the Selection tab
321. ith the high confidence values while smaller squares represent nodes with low confidence values The thickness of the square represents the vertical uncertainty assigned a node to a 95 confidence interval The thicker the square the greater the vertical uncertainty More than one hypothesis or a low confidence value does not necessarily mean an error Uneven areas slopes for example show more than one hypothesis because of the changing terrain Wire frame Hypotheses Hypothesis squares can also be displayed without a fill so that they are transparent except for the outlines of the squares 1 Select the Wireframe Hypotheses check box The 3 D View is refreshed to display the squares without fill as illustrated below CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 261 CUBE Processing Hypothesis Editing Fixed Size Hypotheses The Fixed Size Hypotheses option flattens the hypotheses squares and redraws them to a standard size This option is useful if you want to examine the dataset for holes or to see the exact position of a square in the subset 1 Select the Fixed Size Hypotheses check box The 3 D View is refreshed to display the squares as flattened and in a standard size 262 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Show alternative hypotheses Menu Tools gt Subset Editor gt Nominate Tool e CUBE Processing Hypothesis Editing Nominate Alternative Hypotheses Some nodes have alternative hypothese
322. k box is cleared the lines are colour coded according to the colour map and attribute values CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 405 Create Product Surfaces Tiling a field sheet Ifthe Show tile borders check box is set to True you can choose a single colour using the Border colour map for the tile border lines 5 Set the Show tile borders check box to True to display a border line colour 6 Select a colour for the tiles borders from the Border colour map 7 Set the Display Tile Value check box to True to display the values for the active attribute for example MinDepth will display sounding View Tile Attributes You can view information on currently selected tiles in the Selection tab of the Worksheet window 1 Open tiles are open in the Display window 2 Select the tile layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 3 Select the tiles to be viewed The selected tiles are highlighted in the Display 4 Select the Selection tab The tile data for the selected tiles is displayed in the Selection tab Worksheet x MinDepth MinXCoord Min Coord Tile Level 360 740 79 4 770 488 81 16 788 360747 010 4770491 110 360 751 03 4 770 488 81 16 742 360756 730 4770491 410 360 730 55 4 770 488 81 16 966 360734 510 4770491 730 360 771 51 4 770 488 81 16 672 360777 830 4770492 910 360 761 27 4 770 488 81 16 695 360764 110 4770493 070 360 812 47 4 770 488 81 16 195 360820 710 4770495 770 360 761 75 4 770 488 81 16 471 360790
323. k line or group of track lines 2 Select the Sound Velocity Correction command The Sound Velocity Correction dialog box is displayed Sound Velocity Correction C Load new SYP file Profile selection method Previous in time Use Surface Sound Speed if available _ Perform an additional recomputation of the steered beam angles based on a new surface sound speed that will be interpolated from the sound velocity profile for compatible systems only Options C Apply Delayed Heave Select smoothed sensors to be applied C Heave C Roll _ Pitch C Delta Draft Process Cancel CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Sound Velocity Correction Sound Velocity Correction SVC will use either the sound velocity profile from your converted data or the last SVP applied to the data You can choose to load another profile and you can edit a profile to use To use a new profile 3 Select the Load new SVP file check box and click Select to choose an SVP file The Browse for SVP file dialog box is displayed 4 Select the file you want or type the file path in the File Name text box The default directory is Hips Svp 5 Click Open The file name and path is displayed in the text box If you want to edit the data click Edit to open the SVP Editor See Enit SVP Data on PAGE 140 Profile selection method When there is more than one sound velocity profile for the data HIPS can use one of fo
324. ked Computed Examined Loaded e The information is read only and cannot be modified 3 Optional Select Save As from the right click menu to save the line data to a text file CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 273 Data QC Query Data Menu Process gt Detailed Line Query 274 See Cotumn Settinas on pace 20 of the Reference guide for details on selecting and adjusting the columns displayed Detailed Line Query In addition to the line data displayed in the Selection tab a Detailed Line Query can display an additional 30 columns of line data in the Detailed Line Query window To view this detailed line information 1 Selecta line or lines in the Display window 2 Select the Detailed Line Query command The Detailed Line Query window opens If you are processing a large number of lines a progress bar will display in the left side of the Status bar You can cancel loading of the selected lines into the Line Query window 3 Select Cancel on the Processing dialog box To query another line or lines 4 Select the lines 5 Select the Detailed Line Query command again The display in the Query window will be refreshed to show your new selection As with the Selection tab the Detailed Line Query window will display the line information in a table These read only records can be sorted by column by clicking on a column header Which data is visible and in what order it is displayed is
325. kflow in HIPS and SIPS Working with Projects Working with Projects 20 Every project in HIPS and SIPS is organized in a Project Vessel Day Line folder hierarchy New projects are created with a wizard which generates a HIPS Project File hips Existing projects saved as hpf files are converted to hips when you first open them in HIPS and SIPS A project can be created with new Project Vessel Day folders or new Vessel Day folders can be added to an existing project Day and Line folders can be renamed or taken out of the active project or deleted outright See Derine New ProJect oN PAGE 58 Projects can also be archived See ARCHIVE PROJECT ON PAGE 74 All projects must contain a vessel file See Create a New HVF on pace 27 If your raw data files are set up in a Project Vessel Day Line structure and a HIPS Vessel File already exists for that data you can use the Conversion wizard to create the HIPS directory structure See Convertine Fites To HIPS SIPS Format on Pace 78 and Rename Day AND Line FoLpers ON pace 73 for more information You can be connected to more than one project repository at one time using the commands from the right click menu in either the New Project or Open Project dialog box See MuttipLe DATA PATHS ON PAGE 64 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Session Files Save a session File gt Save Session Save Session As Menu Open a s
326. l surface The value is selected by clicking the up and down arrow buttons beside shallow threshold field e Deep threshold The threshold below the polynomial surface The value is selected by clicking the up and down arrow buttons beside deep threshold field e Minimum residual A sounding that fails the threshold test will not be rejected if the absolute value of the residual is less than the minimum Include preciously rejected Include any data previously rejected by Surface Cleaning in this computation Field sheet The Field sheet field displays the name of the selected field sheet Tiling Choose the method to create tiles either By Density of tiles or By Size of tiles 6 Set By Density to True Each tile is continuously sub divided until one of the sub tiles has less than the minimum number of soundings Type a Minimum soundings per tile value for the minimum number of soundings that will be covered by a tile 7 Set By Size True This will continuously sub divide each tile until the sub tiles reach the minimum size This size cannot be larger than the Starting Level Tile Set The Starting Level Tile Set is created by taking the largest dimension of the field sheet and dividing the area by 3 Set the Minimum size of tile in default measurement units 8 Type aname for the tile file Surface Cleaning cannot be applied unless a tile file is set All tile files are assigned an mts extension Also created is a mmi f
327. lay tide zones 147 double buffering 356 DpTPU 156 DXF export to 487 dynamic draft data in vessel file 46 E EdgeTech format conversion options for 99 Edit GeoBaR 429 mosaic components 440 Edit mosaic 438 Edit profile line 375 edit sensor configuration 38 editing data 272 EIVA 101 Elac 102 ellipsoid in vessel file 55 elves 476 engineer soundings 388 examining and editing data 272 Expor5t to S 57 480 Export BAG metadata 497 BAG to ASCII 497 BASE surface to ASCII 498 formats exported 492 GeoBaR to ASCII 507 GeoBaR to Image see Surface to Image 510 HIPS data to ASCII 517 HIPS tide to ASCII 516 HIPS to CARIS map 523 mosaic to ASCII 535 multiple GeoBaRs 502 sedimewnt analysis to ASCII 539 select data 495 select format 494 soundings to HOB 529 surface to image 501 to DXF 487 Urface to BAG 482 export contacts 504 multiple GeoBaRs 495 Export a surface select 495 Export contacts or line data select 496 Export GSF to CARIS map 511 Export HIPS to FAU 527 to GSF 528 to HOB 529 to HTF 531 Export Histogram to Image 234 export profile 377 export SIPS to UNISIPS 540 Export surface metadata 481 Export to DXF contours soundings or bounding polygon 487 lines or Critical Soundings 487 Export Wizard open 494 F field sheet active 180 contour to 364 create 174 open 179 projection gri
328. ld be given a unique filename A new mosaic created with the same name as an existing one will overwrite the older mosaic Names must not contain any spaces A convenient way to standardize naming at the same time as ensuring unique file names is to use formatting tags combined with text Formatting Tag Adds this to the mosaic name SY Current year YYYY M Current month MM D Current date DD h Current hour hh based on 24 hour clock m Current minute mm AS Current second ss j Current Julian date jjj Ar Value and units from the Resolution field Note a decimal point is represented by underscore for example 4_5m is 4 5 metres Using tags will automatically add strings of identifying information such as the date and time the mosaic was created For example this string Fundy_sY SM S SD Sh Sm _ r will name the mosaic CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 435 Process Imagery Data Create Mosaic from GeoBaRs Image Resolution Overlapping data 436 Fundy_2010 04 24 14 13 _ 1 0m The above example tag string could be used repeatedly to provide a standardized series of names that would be differentiated by timestamp 6 Type a name for the mosaic If one or more of the GeoBaRs to be included in the mosaic have a lower resolution than what you set for the mosaic the mosaic you create may have empty cells To avoid this choose one of these op
329. lect the Remove Labels command Masking Lines Behind Contour Labels Concealing the part of the contour line behind a label can make a map area easier to read ST lt f We Te PPR 6 Contours with labels Contours lines masked behind labels To mask the area behind contour labels 1 Make sure all previous work is saved 2 Select the Contour Masking command The parts of the contour lines that intersect the labels are now hidden This masking process can be reversed with the Unmask contours command CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Profiles Process gt Products gt Profile gt By Digitizing Menu up 5 New gt Profile Pop Create Product Surfaces Profiles Use the Profile command to draw a cross sectional view of a height source such as a BASE Surface attribute layer Profile graphs are created from a line digitized on a surface either manually drawn or along a superselected trackline A profile is graphed in a dockable window and can be viewed in real time as the profile is digitized or edited Profile lines can be edited and exported as an image or to an ASCII file Profiles are saved as field sheet layers Digitize a Profile Creating a profile by digitizing a line involves these basic steps e select the field sheet containing the surface select layers to profile Optional set options for the graph display digitize the line across the surface To create a profile
330. lick Clear to remove data from all fields if needed 5 Click Next HIPS to HTF Output options page 2 a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 4 of 5 Output options I Include survey line name I Include beam and profile information Positioning Systems Depth Sounders Tidal Stations 1 Select the Include Survey Line Name check box to include this information in the HTF file 2 Select the Include Beam and Profile Information check box to include the beam and profile numbers in the HTF file If you entered values in the depth sounder positioning system and tidal station fields in the previous dialog box then the respective fields in these tabs are enabled If you did not enter values click Back to fill in these fields The Positioning Systems tab is for entering navigation systems information 3 Type the name and model and or any additional information of the system in the Name field 4 Type the system used on the survey GPS DGPS etc The Depth Sounders tab is for entering sonar information 5 Type the name and model of the sonar system used on the survey 6 Type the mode of sonar multibeam single beam multi transducer CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 533 Export Data HIPS To HTF The Tidal Stations tab is for entering tide information 7 Type the name of a tidal station 8 Type the location 9 Type the method used to acquire data predicted observed etc 10 Click Sav
331. lidated CUBE Surface after data has been edited and ensure designated soundings are carried through to bathymetric products Optional Create Product Surface Produce a generalized product surface from the BASE Surface and add Contours Use automated functions with either the BASE Surface or product surface to output contours Contours can also be generated manually from tiles Sounding Selection Use a height source for selection of a representative sounding set Plot Composer publish HIPS and SIPS data and product surfaces Export Data Soundings and surfaces can be exported to various formats for data transfer e g S 57 Optional Process Imagery Data backscatter or sidescan data can be processed in mosaics using Mosaic Editor CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Workflow in HIPS and SIPS HIPS Vessel Files HIPS Vessel Files All HIPS and SIPS projects must contain a HIPS Vessel File HVF The HVF describes the installation and calibration of equipment installed on the survey vessel The information in the HVF is used in multiple processes including merging mosaicking and calculating sounding uncertainty The HVF can be created or modified through the HIPS Vessel Editor The Vessel Editor is a separate application that is launched from the HIPS interface See Create a New HVF on PAGE 27 A vessel file must exist prior to creating a new project in HIPS and SIPS CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 19 Wor
332. ll values to the swath data during survey Therefore the HVF must be set up with the Apply switches for Heave Pitch and Roll set to No so these values are not applied twice Pitch Pitch refers to the rotational motion of the vessel around the X port starboard axis Although the pitch sensor has its own section in the Vessel Editor it is usually part of the same sensor package as roll and heave in most survey configurations 1 Click Pitch in the Sensors list box so the selection is highlighted and the data fields are displayed Type data as needed in the following fields e Date The year and Julian day of the current pitch time stamp CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Sensors Time The hour and minute of the current pitch time stamp Time Correction The time correction value Error The applied instantaneous values for the pitch sensor are computed by subtracting the appropriate errors from the recorded values Applied Pitch Recorded Pitch Pitch Error Apply Select Yes to apply the pitch data in the merge process Manufacturer The maker of the sensor equipment Model The particular make of sensor equipment Serial Number The serial number of the sensor equipment The location of the pitch sensor is indicated in the Vessel Editor by a coloured dot Note Simrad systems apply dynamic Heave Pitch and Roll values to the swath data during survey Therefore the HVF must be set u
333. ll in most survey configurations CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 43 Create Vessel File Sensors 44 1 Click Heave in the Sensors list box so the selection is highlighted and the data fields are displayed 2 Type data as needed in the following fields e Date The year and Julian day of the current heave sensor time stamp Time The hour and minute of the current heave sensor time stamp Time Correction The time correction value The X Y Z fields set the location of the heave sensor from the Reference Position 0 The X Y Z location of the heave sensor must be defined ONLY when you intend to apply heave data during Merge AND when remote heave compensation is necessary X The athwart ship distance of the sensor positive to starboard e Y The along ship distance of the sensor positive to the bow e Z The vertical distance of the sensor positive into the water Error The applied instantaneous values for the heave sensor are computed by subtracting the appropriate errors from the recorded values Applied Heave Recorded Heav Heave Error e Apply Select Yes to apply heave data in the merge process Manufacturer The maker of the sensor equipment e Model The particular make of sensor equipment e Serial Number The serial number of the sensor equipment The location of the heave sensor is shown in the Vessel Editor by a coloured dot Note Simrad systems apply dynamic Heave Pitch and Ro
334. log box is displayed Critical Sounding Detection S141 a El Input Source SwWFundy4 7 Attribute Depth E Output Shoal Designated Deep None E Advanced Options Shoal Attributes TYPE B Deep Attributes Shoal Attributes Set attributes of Shoal Soundings First define the Input to the process CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Designate Critical Soundings from a Surface 3 Click in the Source field to select a surface by name from the list of surfaces currently open in HIPS If you select a surface in the Layers tab before opening the Critical Soundings Detection dialog box that surface will be displayed by default 4 Click in the Attributes field to select a surface attribute layer such as Depth from the drop down list Next define the Output 5 Click in the Shoal field to select Designated Outstanding or Examined from the drop down list This will determine which soundings are flagged 6 Optional Click in the Deep field and do the same At least one Output Type needs to be set to run the process Advanced Options are available to set additional user defined attributes for the detected critical soundings Any attributes set here are applied to the detected soundings when the process is run 7 Click in the Shoal Attributes field to open the Shoal Attribute Configuration dialog box Attributes in this list and their values are defined in the Catalogue Editor and contained in the catalogue f
335. ls or you can load a file listing specific depths at which to create the contours v The dialog box displays the Range of depth values derived from the contour source BASE Surface bin or tile You can contour over this entire range or limit contouring to a specific range of values The depth intervals you set are saved in the project field sheet directory as ContourLayerName_DepthList txt 1 Optional Type the Minimum depth level for the contour interval 2 Optional Type the Maximum depth level for the contour interval 3 Type an nterval value to set the distance between contour lines 4 Click Add The contour depths are listed As you change the nterval value the number of contour depths will vary accordingly 5 If you are satisfied with the values click Next Contour levels file Contour levels files or depth list files are text files that set a range of depths for tiling and contouring data where values are negative when representing heights above the datum and positive when representing depths below the datum 362 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Contours These files are automatically generated during the contouring process You can use a contour levels file to set the values for contours 6 Click the browse button and select a contour levels file 7 Click Load The contour depths are listed You can edit these values using the com
336. ltering options Advanced Filtering Currently advanced filtering is only available for these multibeam and multi transducer formats GeoAcoustics Klein SDF EIVA and Hypack If filtering is not available for the type of data you are converting these options will be greyed out CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Filtering options C Angle filter Port Stbd 30 175 30 475 C Range Filtering Om A C Amplitude Filtering 10 C Statistical Filtering Threshold a sigma 95 44 e Ange BO SS O Base Lo C Data Thinning Thinning Factor 2 Output thinned data Certain data can be filtered so that only the best quality data is imported to HIPS The filter is applied to port and starboard beam angles CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 91 Convert Data Select Filters 92 1 Select Angle filter Port Stbd and type a range of beam angles The Range Filtering option converts soundings within a specified distance in metres Soundings outside of this range are not converted 2 Select the Range Filtering check box to implement this option 3 Click the up or down arrow buttons to select a minimum and maximum distance The Amplitude Filtering option filters soundings according to amplitude value For each ping port and starboard pings are handled separately the min max amplitude values are obtained and samples that fall below the selected percentage 0 50 are rejected 4 Selec
337. lumn and clicking Add to move it to the Active column 5 To remove an attribute select the attribute from the Active column and click Remove to move it back to the Available column 6 Choose a Attribute Precision value number of digits to the right of decimal point for an attribute in the Active column by selecting an attribute and clicking the up or down arrow buttons 7 Select the Headers check box to print attribute names at the top of the attribute rows in the output file 8 Select either Soace Comma or Tab from the list to use these characters to separate fields in the output file If you select Other type a character to use a delimiter 9 Click Next Select Export Units This dialog box sets the unit type for recording data The fields that are active in this dialog are determined by the attributes selected in the previous dialog box CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 4 of 5 Select Units Vertical Length Metres Horizontal Length Metres Vertical Shit 0 lt Back Cancel Help Available units are metres and kilometres 536 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Mosaic to ASCII e fathoms US and international e feet US and international e yards US and international e miles US international and nautical 1 In the Vertical Length field select the units for depth and uncertainty values The Horizontal Length field is only active if you selected Ground in
338. m used in the survey Its location is usually at the centre of the ship s gravity This position is used as the centre of the ship s rotation when applying the pitch heave roll parameters and must be applied as accurately as possible The axes are defined as follows The Y axis is oriented along the vessel s fore aft axis positive forward The X axis is oriented along the vessel s port starboard axis perpendicular to the Y axis positive to the starboard e The Z axis is perpendicular to the X Y plane and positive into the water This is illustrated in the following image CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 53 Create Vessel File Vessel Coordinate System Delta Z E Dela Y Deta X The location of the vessel s coordinate system within the local fixed coordinate system is determined by the navigation system and tide The orientation of the coordinate system is defined by the vessel s gyro and attitude sensors pitch and roll Gyro pitch and roll observations are defined as follows A positive gyro observation is defined as the clockwise rotation of the vessel from 0 and 360 degrees within the navigation coordinate system A positive pitch is observed when the bow of the vessel is down bow down A positive roll is observed when the starboard side of the vessel is up starboard up 54 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Default Ellipsoid Default Ellipsoid The HVF must
339. mage Depth 32 Bit RGBA Background Colour _ 255 255 255 Background Alpha 0 Compression L2w Use the Export dialog box to define the settings for exporting the image Click on each row to activate the options for that field The example above displays the options for export to TIFF format By default the File Name field is populated with a name combining the names of the surface and the attribute layer that was computed lt surfacename gt _ lt layername gt You can change this file name 2 Optional Type a File Name for the image file 3 Click within the Output Directory field to enable the Browse button 4 Click Browse and select a location for the exported file 5 Select the Output File Format from the drop down list Once you select a format specific options for that format are displayed in the lower section of the dialog box 6 Optional Enter or select a value for the options as needed Export options PDF and PostScript options Paper size Set the page size of the exported file Width Height Set the width and height of the histogram in the resulting file Data Orientation Set the orientation of the histogram in the resulting file Portrait is a vertical position Landscape is a horizontal position Landscape is selected by default Margins Set the width of the area between the histogram and the edge of the file The default is 5mm CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 235
340. mands on the pop up menu 8 Right click in the depth values list and select a command e Insert manually add a specific depth value It will be added to the list in order e Delete deletes the selected value You can select multiple values e Save saves the values as a contour levels text file e Clear removes all the values from the list Clicking Clear will do this also Index Contours Index contours visually emphasize certain contour levels for example every 5th contour These index contours are optional To create index contours 1 Select the Index Contours tab Contour Wizard ees Standard Contours Index Contours Enable Contour by range 6 44 Range 6 44 to 91 22m 11 44 Min m Max mn Interval m er B44 91 22 5 00 26 44 31 44 Add 36 44 41 44 Contour levels file H Load 56 44 61 44 66 44 au 71 44 7c AA 2 Select the Enable check box This activates depth list fields identical to those in the Standard Contours tab Follow the same process as for standard contours however enter a larger interval value Load v For example to index every 5th contour where contours are every 5m set the interval for indexing to 25m CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 363 Create Product Surfaces Contours 3 Click Next The Contour Wizard Step 3 dialog box is displayed You can save the contours as a field sheet layer or save the con
341. map Layer Name SydSel5 Theme Number 1000 Sounding Type Slanted bi Add Extended Attributes Add Keys Output to hob file File name D HIPS DATAA HOB DSEL The soundings can be exported to two formats CARIS map or HOB file The CARIS map file is opened as a layer in your currently open project The HOB file is stored in the same directory as the field sheet The default directory is Hips Fieldsheets ProjectName Output TO CARIS map ON PAGE 388 Output TO HOB FILE ON PAGE 389 Output to CARIS map To display selected soundings in HIPS 1 Select the Output to CARIS Map command 2 Type aname for the layer in the Layer Name field The Theme Number is used to organize information in the CARIS file It is important to maintain each layer on a separate theme therefore be sure to change it from the default number each time you create a new sounding selection 3 Type a number in the Theme Number field Soundings can be displayed in two formats 388 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Sounding Selection Slanted This format displays the digits of the sounding in a slanted font with any value less than 1 in subscript Engineer Soundings This format displays the digits of the sounding in 18 18 2 f F regular text with values to the right of a decimal point where appropriate Slanted Engineer 4 Select either Engineer or Slante
342. mats that provide raw travel time and angle from the transducer are currently supported in HIPS This includes multibeam bathymetry from XTF Hypack XSE and Simrad EM formats For all other multibeam sonar formats it is assumed that sound velocity corrections were applied during data acquisition For effective sound velocity correction the Sound Velocity section of the HIPS Vessel file must be set up to define the transducer offsets These offsets are used in Sound Velocity Correction together with the Sound Velocity profile data See SVP on pace 47 for these sensor configurations A sound velocity profile contains data on the acoustic velocity of the water column in a text file divided into sections defined by time stamps This data can be viewed and modified in the SVP Editor The process of Sound Velocity Correction cannot be reversed Once it is applied data cannot be restored to its pre SVC state Profile selection method When there is more than one sound velocity profile the program can use one of four options for selecting an SVP at the time of each swath Previous in Time Select the profile with a time stamp prior and nearest to the time of the swath Nearest in Time Select the profile with a time stamp nearest to the time of the swath This can either be prior to or after the time Nearest in Distance Select the profile with a position nearest the position of the swath This requires that position
343. me select the Time option Click inside the Profile Time box and type the time in the relevant fields hour minutes seconds decimal fractions of a second using the 24 hour clock Click Find The selected beam or swath is highlighted in the Plan Rear and Side Views 8 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Click Query to display the data in the Selection tab 329 Cleaning Swath Data Rejecting Data Rejecting Data Menu Edit gt Status Flag gt Reject x Reject Key Pop up Tool lt R gt Menu Edit gt Status Flag gt Accept Tool Y Accept Key Pop up lt A gt Menu Edit gt Status Flag gt Reject Swaths Tool x A Key lt S gt 330 A sounding rejected within Swath Editor has the Reject by Swath Editor flag turned on This flag is displayed in the Status field of the Selection tab when the sounding is queried To reject a sounding 1 Select the data you want to reject 2 Select a Reject command The Reject by Swath Editor status flag is now on and the sounding may or may not be displayed depending whether the Show Rejected function is turned on See View ResectTeD SounpinGs ON PAGE 295 for description A rejected sounding can always be returned to the Accept status without loss of data To revert rejected soundings back to Accept 1 Select the rejected data so it
344. mmand a A OU PY Inthe Profile Settings dialog box select the height source check box for the layer s you want to profile You can select more than one height source for the profile Each layer that you select will have its own profile line in the graph Lines with the same values will overlap 6 Optional Set a Sample step size Default value is 5m CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 369 Create Product Surfaces Profiles Profile colour Graph labels Sample step size 370 7 Set other options as desired You can also generate the profile and then re open this dialog box to adjust settings 8 Click OK The Profile is displayed in the Profile window Setting Profile Options Profile options are set in the Profile Settings dialog box You can set options here before you create your line or use this dialog box to adjust or edit the settings for an existing profile To open the Profile Settings dialog box 1 Select the Profile layer in the Layers tab 2 Select the profile line in the Display window 3 Right click in the Profile window and select Settings from the pop up menu The Profile settings box is displayed Ifyou are setting options for a new profile set the options and click OK and draw the line If you are changing or setting options to an already digitized profile click Apply to dynamically see the effect of the option in the Profile window Use the Colour field to assign a different col
345. moothed for localized variability EXPORT ON PAGE 542 516 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide HIPS To ASCII Export Data HIPS To ASCII The HIPS to ASCII function creates a customized text listing of soundings that you can load into other software systems HIPS to ASCII Step 3 This dialog box lists the attributes that can be exported to the ASCII file and the delimiters used to separate data in the file CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 7 Sounding Attributes C Index C Include Headers In Output C Northing g Delimiter C Easting F Latitude CARIS DMS Space _ Longitude CARIS DMS O Comma C Latitude DMS C Longitude DMS OTab Latitude DM Other C Clip to CARIS Map The attributes that are available to export will vary with the type of data being exported for example if single beam data is being exported Primary Depth and Secondary Depth are listed with other attributes in the Available list 1 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Select the sounding attributes to be included in the ASCII file To add an attribute select the attribute in the Available list and click Add to move it to the Active list To remove an attribute select the attribute in the Active list and click Remove to move it to the Available list To change the order that attributes are exported select the attribute in the Active list and click the u
346. n Tight In the Navigation Editor the interpolation method is set in the Interpolation method section of the Navigation Editor tab 1 Select the Navigation Editor tab in the Control window 2 Select either Linear or Bezier Curve by selecting the appropriate check box 3 If the Bezier Curve option is enabled select either a Loose Medium or Tight format from the drop down menu CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Rejecting Navigation Data To set an interpolation option for one or more survey lines without opening the Navigation Editor 1 Select a line Tools gt Set 2 Select the Set Interpolation command from the Tools menu Interpolation Menu The Set Interpolation dialog box is displayed Set Interpolation Options Linear BezierCurve v OK Cancel Help 3 Select an interpolation option Linear or Bezier Curve 4 Click OK CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 283 Data QC Shift Navigation Data Shift Navigation Data Menu Tools gt Shift Navigation 284 Use this to apply a shift in latitude and longitude to an entire survey Latitude and longitude can be shifted independently to a maximum of 1 minute 0 016667 in decimal degrees and 1800 metres After data is shifted this way Merge must be applied To shift survey data to a new position 1 Select one or more lines 2 Select the Shift Navigation command The Shift Navigation dialog box is dis
347. n 148 Tide stations 148 Tide Zone files 146 tile by depth range interval 399 Tile Display Query 407 Tile Overlap Subset tiles 348 Tiled image output example 503 tiles binning 397 close 404 create QTC 402 display options 405 display properties 404 new tile layer 397 open 404 view attributes 406 tiles display options 346 tiles QTC 397 tiling 399 by density 315 by size in surface cleaning 315 in Surface Cleaning 315 primary sounding 401 same size for all tiles 398 tile by depth range file 400 tile by depth tolerance 399 tiling a field sheet 396 Tiling Wizard 397 Time Correction 40 time stamp 39 time stamp overlap 84 title of raster legend 208 Total Propagated Uncertainty 154 tow cable convert 131 towed sensors location data in vessel file 49 TPE see TPU 154 TPU 159 apply filter 161 compute 154 filter 159 TPU Total Propagated Uncertainty vessel file values 51 TPU status field in sensor configuration 49 track lines Classify lines 293 colour 71 opening a single line 66 properties 71 symbology 71 tracking cleaning in subsets 349 tracking layer options Subset Editor 347 Transducer Status in vessel file 48 TrueHeave 289 apply in SVC 138 U UNB 124 UNB Reson format conversion options for 124 Underlay use to resolve overlapping GeoBaRs 436 UNISIPS export data to 540 units for expo
348. n a project or session NOTE Opening a session file automatically opens all field sheets that were open when the session file was last saved 2 File gt Open Field 1 Select the Open Field Sheets command Sheets The Open Field Sheets dialog box is displayed 2 Select a field sheet from the list of available field sheets 3 Click Open The field sheet outline is displayed in the Display window Any layers that have been created within the field sheet are listed in the file tree in the Layers tab of the Control window and are visible in the Display window DA HIPS Data A Ship Track Lines 26 Critical Soundings He Contacts Active field A AprS amp sheet APr509 APr256 E sheet 26 347 a layers ff SUrFCLean Yon19 7 _ _ _ _Field sheet za Fundy21 J M ZA tiletest2 A GeoBaRs Project M Layers M rw Order Extended Query You can toggle the display of the layers on and off using the check box next to a layer You may have to Refresh the display to view the data Set as active field sheet You can have field sheets with different coordinate systems open in the same session But only one field sheet can control the coordinate system used in the Display window The Set as Active Field Sheet command identifies the field sheet that controls the coordinate system in the Display window
349. n and off In the across track it will indicates the current swath bathymetry and in the along track the centre beam bathymetry If activated when Stacked View is enabled the bottom detections are also stacked Head 1 data and Head 2 data are used when there is data from both heads of a dual head multibeam configuration You can toggle between the heads to determine which data should be plotted on top Head1 port data or Head 2 starboard data The Select button enables you to select water column data in the across track or along track windows for example to add data to the Additional Bathymetry layer CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 465 Process Water Column Data WCI Controls in Swath Editor WCI Controls in Swath Editor When there is water column data open in Swath Editor the Control window tab will include a WCI tab containing options for displaying water column data General 3D View WC Colour Colour map IH_COLOU Reverse Min Max intensities dB B4 0 Enable Stacked View ZJ Project RA hayer m Draw Order d Swath Editor Use the Colour controls set the colour of the data displayed in the Across track and Along track windows 7 Select a colour from the Colour map field 8 Click Reverse to change the current colours to their inverse Water column data can be filtered by intensity values so that only data within the set range is displayed To filter the data 9 Use the
350. n feet rather than metres 4 Select HS2 in feet check box The HS2 format does not store day and year values with the timestamp it does store a time value When the data is converted to HIPS by default the Day folder is used for reading the date If you want to include another date value 5 Select the Use HS2 Survey Date check box to enable the Day and Year fields 6 Type the year and day in the fields The value in the Sound Velocity field is used to compute the original travel time data from the recorded depths Since this is used in performing sound velocity correction it is important that the Sound Velocity value is correctly specified 7 Enter the Sound Velocity value for single beam data Single or Dual Frequency e multiple transducer sweep data The Device Numbers fields are used if sensor data was recorded from more than one device To import data from a specific sensor type the number for that device If no number is entered CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Options for Specific Formats then a sensor data is imported In the case of the Port and Starboard Transducers the first device found will be used The following sensors are affected by the device number setting Navigation for positional records Gyro for heading records Motion Sensor for roll pitch and or heave settings Port transducer for port multibeam records Stbd transducer for starboard multibeam records SO
351. n file 1 Select the track lines you want to save in the session file 2 Choose the Save Session As command and select the Save Selected Lines Only check box 3 Type a name for the session file and click Save The Session file is saved Open one or more saved sessions 1 Select the Open Session command The Open Session File dialog box is displayed 2 Select a session file 3 Click Open CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 21 22 Workflow in HIPS and SIPS Session Files The data layers contained in the Session file are opened and listed in the Layers tab in the Control window Close a session 1 Select the Close Session command 5 File gt Close Session If you have made changes to the session since the last save you are prompted to save the current changes 2 Click OK CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Workflow in HIPS and SIPS Convert Survey Data Convert Survey Data Import gt Conversion Wizard Menu Tool E HIPS and SIPS files are created from survey data using the Conversion Wizard The Conversion Wizard is a separate application that is launched from the HIPS and SIPS interface Survey data converted to HIPS and SIPS format is in varying stages of completion depending on the data format options Data may or may not have been corrected for factors like heave pitch roll or sound velocity All HIPS SIPS data is organized in a Project Vessel Day Line directory structure If you
352. n tiles Residual percentage difference between the sounding and the polynomial surface Shallow Threshold depth of rejection threshold above the polynomial surface Deep Threshold depth of rejection threshold below the surface Query Tile Display You can also use the Tile Display Query function to create an SQL type query that will display only those tiles with selected attributes For more information see Tite DisPLAY QUERY ON PAGE 407 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 321 Statistical Surface Cleaning Query data in tiles 322 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Cleaning Swath Data Data cleaning in Swath Editor consists of interactively selecting and rejecting soundings and using proven and efficient filtering functions to automatically detect and reject outliers You can also flag Designated Soundings For descriptions of the Swath Editor interface and controls see SwaTH Epitor ON PAGE 143 in the Editors guide In this chapter SWATH CLEANING cececcecccececcceeceeeeeeeeeeeueeeaeaes AUTOMATIC FILTERING cccccecessseeeeeeeaneeseeeees MANUAL CLEANING 0sseseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees UPDATE BACKSCATTER siisiniiccdcntsanticcedeadeaiaaonaes FLAG DESIGNATED SOUNDINGS 0s0eeeceeeeeeeees CORRECTION FOR REFRACTION ARTIFACTS Cleaning Swath Data Swath Cleaning Swath Cleaning 324 During data conversion the original data file is separated into a number
353. name must not include any spaces See Namina GEoBaRs on Pace 418 12 Type a resolution value With the Geocoder engine you have the option of selecting Auto to have an optimal resolution set automatically based on the beam footprint 13 Optional Select a colour map for the new GeoBaR The colour map will be displayed in the Preview field The default map is GreyScale 14 Optional Click Advanced for other options Geocoder Advanced Options Side Both Angle From Nadir Min 9 000 Max 87 00 Intensity Range Min 100 0 dB Max 0 000 de C Smooth Gyro In the Geocoder Advanced Options dialog box CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Create GeoBaR with the Geocoder Engine 15 Select Port Starboard or Both sides on which to create a GeoBaR 16 Set minimum and maximum values for the range of the Angle from Nadir Default range is from minimum of 0 to maximum of 87 degrees 17 Set minimum and maximum values in dB for the Intensity Range for example a minimum of 100 and maximum of 0 Intensity values are expressed as negative numbers 18 Select Smooth Gyro to apply gyro that has been smoothed in Attitude Editor In some cases it may be more useful to maintain the full intensity range when creating the GeoBaR and limiting this range only in the final Mosaic 19 Click OK to return to the Create GeoBaR dialog box 20 Click Cancel to return to the Create GeoBaR dial
354. name of the attribute layer e g C CARIS HIPS 71 Fieldsheets Project Fieldsheet name BASEsurfacename csar Depth m Label Colour Set the colour of the labels on the legend The default colour is black Interval Set an interval between the values displayed on the legend scale CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces Filter options Use filter controls to limit the display of data to that which falls between the minimum and maximum values The image below illustrates filtering to display a range of shoalest depths Property Filter Function Filter Set to True to display only the surface data with values between the Filter minimum and maximum values as set in the fields below Min val Set a minimum value below which data will not be displayed Max Val Set a maximum value above which data will not be displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 209 Create BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces Display options 210 Display properties include controls for display of images and digits The Draw Cells property will display a grid representing the nodes of the surface layer With large data sets you may need to zoom in to see this grid as in the illustration below Image properties control whether or not the selected attribute layer is displayed and options such as transparency and shading Shading effect
355. ncy setting applied to the background colour the 32 Bit RGBA option must be selected Background Colour The colour displayed in the background of the histogram The default is black Background Alpha This option is only available when the Image Depth is set to 32 Bit RGBA Set the degree of transparency applied to the background colour The default setting is zero transparency Compression Compress the resulting image file during export to decrease the file size This option is only available when using the TIFF format There are various compression methods available each of which performs differently By default LZW is used 7 Click OK The image file is saved to the specified location CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands Export Statistics to ASCII Use the ASCII Export option in the Compute Statistics results dialog box to export all of the statistical information to an ASCII text file This file will include Information about the computed surface The resulting statistics The centre value of each bin and the count of data points within the bin To export to an ASCII file 1 Click ASCII Export A standard Save As dialog box is displayed By default the File Name field is populated with a name combining the names of the surface and the attribute layer that was computed lt surfacename gt _ lt layername gt 2 Optional Enter a
356. nd SIPS User Guide Process gt BASE Surface gt Combine Menu New gt Combine Surfaces Control window only Pop up 1 2 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands Select the field sheet that contains the BASE Surfaces you want to combine Select the Combine command to display the Combine BASE Surfaces dialog box Combine Surfaces 5 6 7 Select Surfaces Surface Resolution rm FEB Fundy477 5 000000 FEE CUBES11 3 000000 Output Surface Folder HIPS 8 0 Data Fieldsheets Ports Name Resolution 5 m Select the BASE Surfaces from the file tree by two methods you may have to click the expand icon to view all the available Surfaces e Press lt Ctrl gt and select individual surfaces with the mouse e Press lt Shift gt and select a range of surfaces by clicking the first and last surface in the range All surfaces between the first and last surface are selected The Output Folder field is read only and displays the directory path of the selected field sheet The combined BASE Surface is saved to this folder Type a name for the combined Surface Type a resolution for the combined Surface Click OK A new BASE Surface that combines the selected Surfaces is generated The new combined surface is listed in the Layers tab CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 227 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands allPorts Ad PortsBASEcomb Ont
357. nd SIPS Vessel Wizard Step 5 Configuration Options C Define parameters for sound velocity corrections C Create a Dynamic Draft table of speed vs draft values Apply in post processing C Define vessel waterline height variations Use this dialog box to enable any or all of three options the SVP Sound Velocity Profile pole parameters dynamic draft values waterline height variation 1 To include sound velocity corrections click the Define Parameters for Sound Velocity Corrections check box 2 To apply dynamic draft values to vessel speeds click the Apply Dynamic Draft check box A draft versus speed table is created in the Vessel Editor You can enter values in this table once the vessel file is created 3 If you want to apply long period variations in the waterline height in processing data click the Define Vessel Waterline Height Variation check box 4 Click the appropriate Apply in Post Processing check boxes as needed 5 If you selected the Define Parameters for Sound Velocity Corrections check box click Next or click Finish if you did not select this option Sound Velocity Corrections The Sound Velocity Corrections dialog box is displayed only if you selected the Define parameters for sound velocity corrections check box in the Configuration Options dialog box CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 33 Create Vessel File Create a New HVF CARIS HIPS and SIPS Vessel Wizard Step 6
358. nd in the exported image The legend will be overlaid on the surface in the position and with labels as set in the Properties for the selected attribute layer 1 From the Active Attribute field select the layer to display as a geo referenced image 2 Select Display Raster Legend to include the raster legend for the selected attribute layer in the exported image Select Expand cover to fit the raster legend to expand the area of the image so that the legend does not overlay the surface Image Options Image format options can help reduce file sizes 3 Select a colour format for the image e 24 Bit 16 million colours e 8 Bit 256 colours 4 Select Compress TIFFto decrease the file size of the TIFF during export CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 501 Export Data Surface To Image Georeference Format Selecting the TFW TIFF check box will generate two ASCII files in addition to the TIFF image One with file extension CSPRPOJ contains Coordinate system information for the image The other with extension TFW contains the ground coordinates These can be read using a text file reader 5 Select TFW TIFF as to produce additional files 6 Click Next Image Output Options You can export a BASE surface layer a single GeoBaR layer or a Mosaic layer to a TIFF image file or to a tiled set of images or to both formats at the same time More than one GeoBaR can be exported at a time in which case the TIFF files are sa
359. ne in the profile graph Smoothing is applied reduce the number of peaks in the graph if it has a high number of sample points The number of sample points is based on the Sample step size setting There are three types of smoothing to choose from Average This method will create the graph using the average elevation values within each sample distance Shoal This method will create the graph using the shoalest values within each sample distance High Low This method will create two lines in the graph one for the minimum values in each sample distance and one for the maximum values in each sample distance Below is an example of a profile with and without shoal smoothing applied CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 371 Create Product Surfaces Profiles With Shoal Smoothing Profile Example 1 000 1 500 Distance m Without Smoothing Profile Profile Example 1 000 1 500 Distance m 9 Click the check box to enable the Smooth option 10 Select a smoothing type from the drop down list Optionally you could apply smoothing to the digitized line See EDIT THE PROFILE LINE ON PAGE 375 Lock aspect ratio Use Lock aspect ratio option to maintain the ratio of the width of the profile graph to its height if the Profile window is re sized 11 Click the check box to enable the Lock aspect ratio option The current ratio of the graph will be displayed in the aspect ratio field 12 Optional Enter a new
360. ng the Geocoder engine 422 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Create GeoBaR with the Geocoder Engine 7 Optional Select a colour map for the new GeoBaR The colour map will be displayed in the Preview field The default map is GreyScale The imagery corrections that are applied in the creation of GeoBaRs with the SIPS engine are those which are set in the Properties tab in Side Scan Editor To modify these settings 8 Click Advanced to set or change correction options Advanced Options General Options C Extrapolate Cluse Bathymetry to Register Imagery Gyro From Automatic C Smooth Gyro Include Channel Both iv TVG amp Gain Port Starboard _ Tve 20 20 dB 100m C Gain 1 i dB Beam Pattern LJ C Port C Starboard Clava 30 Window Size C Despeckle ii o C Override per line corrections Acrosstrack Altitude Ratio Min 9 00 C Max Jeimit 9 00 m Limit Acrosstrack Distance Min 00 m CJMax 0 00 Im CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 423 Process Imagery Data Create GeoBaR with the Geocoder Engine 424 SIPS Engine Advanced Options settings General Options Extrapolate Select Extrapolate to extend the heading and or navigation data at each end of the line toa maximum specified by the selected value Use Bathymetry to Register Imagery Sele
361. nge the display with the Preview option of the Refraction Editor turned on the query will return the results of the change The Observed Depth data across track along track and depth does not change The effects of the Refraction Editor can be turned on or off during Calibration As well the effects on the final merged depths can be modified any time by editing the coefficients and re merging or the effects can be removed by re merging and choosing not to apply the coefficients CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Data in Subsets Create subsets to efficiently visualize and clean data from multiple track lines at the same time and use subset tiles to track the progress of processing In this chapter Data CLEANING WoRKFLOW SUBSET CLEANING 000000eee DESIGNATE SOUNDINGS TRACK PROGRESS WITH SUBSET TILES SusBseTts AND BASE SurraAces Process Data in Subsets Data Cleaning Workflow Data Cleaning Workflow 338 A subset is a user defined rectangular area that contains some of the soundings of a survey project Dividing the area of the survey into subsets makes the cleaning of a large data set more manageable The following workflow is a suggested method for cleaning data with Subset Editor 1 Open afield sheet with a BASE surface See CREATE A FIELD SHEET ON PAGE 174 2 Create Subset Tiles in the field sheet area See TRACK PROGRESS WITH SUBSET TILES ON PAGE 343 3 Open Subset Editor and
362. ngle resolution value for the entire surface or use different resolutions for each range of depths 1 Select Single and enter a resolution value or select the Multiple option and enter a range of values If you select the Single option you can determine the range of depths to include in the BASE surface by using the Depth Filter option 2 Select Depth Filter and enter a range of depths If you select the Multiple option the depth ranges and related resolution values can be saved as a template to apply when creating other new BASE surfaces 3 Enter the series of depth ranges and the desired resolution in metres and click Save to save the settings as a template OR 4 Click Load to use a saved file Values are entered in the following format minimum depth maximum depth resolution all in metres For example 0 0 10 0 5 0 which associates depths between zero and 10 metres with a resolution of 5 metres 5 Select CUBE from the Surface Type list 6 Select the Vertical Datum if known from the list 252 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide CUBE Processing Generating CUBE Surfaces 7 Click Next The content of the next dialog box is determined by the choice of surface type made in step 5 BASE Surrace Step 3 CUBE on pace 253 BASE Surface Step 3 CUBE The S 44 survey order is used to determine the area of influence that a sounding can apply to the nodes A sounding s area of influence the number o
363. ngs BASE Surfaces mosaics etc to the following formats e ASCII text file CARIS map Bathymetric Attributed Grid BAG gt FAU Generic Sensor Format GSF files Hydrographic Object Binary HOB file Hydrographic Transfer Format HTF files TIFF image Unified Sonar Imaging Processing System UNISIPS format See the table below to view export options Format Description Refer to BAG to ASCII Export data in Bathymetric Attributed Grid format to ASCII format BAG To ASCII on PAGE 497 BASE Surface to ASCII Export BASE Surface position and attribute data to a text file BASE Surrace To ASCII on PAGE 498 BASE Surface to Image Export BASE Surface attribute data as a georeferenced image for further processing in a CARIS product or other application SURFACE To IMAGE ON PAGE 501 format files Contacts Export contacts to a CARIS map an ASCII file CONTACTS ON PAGE 504 and or a TIFF image GeoBaR to ASCII Export one or more open GeoBaRs to ASCII GeEOBaR To ASCII on pace 507 GeoBaR to Image Export one or more open GeoBaRs to Image files SURFACE To IMAGE ON PAGE 501 GSF to CARIS map Export soundings and track lines from one or more Generic Sensor Format GSF files to a CARIS map The GSF data does not have to be converted to HIPS format prior to using this utility GSF To CARIS Map on pace 511
364. nix files 291 reject break interpolation 281 reject with interpolation 281 reset rejected data 305 set interpolation 283 speed jumps 279 time jumps 279 view rejected soundings 295 navigation time overlap 84 Navitronics data format conversion options for 114 new data respository 64 new project create 58 nominate hypotheses 263 O offsets for sensors set reference point 35 Open Attitude Editor 285 BASE surface 218 BASE surface in Subset Editor 350 Export Wizard 494 field sheet 179 Mosaic Editor 416 Plot Composer 476 project 64 Refraction Editor 334 session 21 Vessel Editor 27 open legacy mosaic 438 Open project with shortcut 66 Options sediment analysis 447 original intensity 417 Outdated line 171 294 output soundings to CARIS map 388 overlap time stamp 84 overlapping GeoBaRs in mosiac 436 Overplot Removal sounding selection 385 387 Overwrite use to resolve overlapping GeoBaRs 436 P Patch Size set in sediemtn analysis 447 patch test for beam pattern correction 426 PDS2000 data 118 PFree Heave 289 pitch data in vessel file 44 playback WCI 464 Plot Composer 476 476 primary sounding start point for tiling 401 product surface 356 product surface create 358 profile edit line 375 export 377 import 373 line colour 370 options 370 remove 377 resize window 373 Profile by Digitizing 367 Profile by Supers
365. ns a number of attributes and a primary sounding The primary sounding is the value that is used in the Selected Soundings operation 3 Select a BASE Surface attribute layer or tile layer You can view all layers by clicking the icon to expand the file tree 4 Click Next Selection Criteria The settings in this dialog box determine the density of the selected soundings in the layer Sounding Selection Wizard Selection Criteria All Shoal Bias Deep Bias Options Use Template Load IC Selection is based on two main options a sounding criteria method e g radius or overplot removal a conflict resolution method shoal bias or deep bias Selection criteria You can apply one of three methods for sounding selection All selects soundings from node values from the BASE Surface attribute layer the primary sounding from every tile 384 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Conflict resolution Template Create Product Surfaces Sounding Selection e the sounding stored in every bin Radius selects only the shoal or deep soundings within a set distance Overplot Removal selects only certain soundings in a dense data set so that they can be plotted within the field sheet without overlapping You can set whether the shoalest soundings or the deepest soundings will be included when conflicts are encountered during selection For example if you select Shoal bias and
366. nsitat paeertacons eles nar eera e 531 Select Input Data 0 0 2 ee 531 HIPS to HTF Output options 0000 532 HIPS to HTF Output options page 2 533 HIPS to HTF Attributes Options 534 Mosaic to ASOll s 0203 220040 nade tax babaeee seek dee 535 Mosaic to ASCII Output Options 535 select Export UniiS ces ieececee aves bee swubawen nes 536 Mosaic To Image lt 2 sssacededeas eee ened ee en ne aka ees 538 Sediment Analysis to ASCII 00 0002 e eee eee 539 SIPS To UNISIPS 2 aescelaeceds tad dines 06 he gee eae 540 SIPS TO UNISIPS Step 3 52 2e08saseseudeuvaas 540 Coordinate System 0 000 tee 541 EXPO wt ocascegestas 2 e a e a ea eA 542 Workflow in HIPS and SIPS The workflow described here uses multibeam data and CUBE to illustrate a way of processing data in HIPS and SIPS This workflow will take you through the steps from raw data to the creation of a contoured product surface and the publishing or export of cleaned data In this chapter WORKFLOW DIAGRAM HIPS VesseL FiLes WORKING WITH PROJECTS SESSION FILES 0000ccceeeees Workflow in HIPS and SIPS Workflow diagram Workflow diagram Multibeam workflow with CUBE OVERVIEW OF WORKFLOW STAGES ON PAGE 17 Other workflows in the HIPS and SIPS Editors guide e SIDE Scan EDITOR WORKFLOW ON PAGE 50 e SINGLE Beam WorKFLOW ON PAGE 9
367. ntensity layer Removes the effects of the adjustments made with the sliders 4 Use the Visibility Options to turn on or off the various child layers of the mosaic Select the layer Intensity Original Intensity or Weights from the drop down list and click On Off CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 439 Process Imagery Data Edit Mosaics Edit Mosaic Components GeoBaRs can be added to and removed from an existing mosaic and the way in which the component GeoBaRs contribute to a mosaic can modified To edit a GeoBaR that is a component of a mosaic 1 Open the field sheet containing the mosaic 2 Right click on the mosaic layer in the Layers tab and select Edit Mosaic from the pop up menu This will activate the Edit tab of Mosaic Editor The top line of the tab will display the name of the active selected mosaic 3 With the Edit tab activated select the Ship Track Lines layer in the Layers tab 4 Inthe Display window select a line that is part of the mosaic Since mosaics are created from one GeoBaR per line selecting a line automatically selects the component GeoBar whether or not that GeoBaR has been opened The Edit tab is updated to display Composition options for the selected component AS Process Analysis Edit Active Mosaic EM3 Intensity Range Min 42 83 dB Max 1 09 dB Brightness J Contrast J visibility Options Intensity v On OFF Composition Options A
368. ntering measurements to define the length width and height of the vessel as well as the position of the reference point in the vessel You can also use the Vessel Shape command to revise an existing vessel outline 1 Open the vessel file if it is not already open 2 Select the Vessel Shape command The Plan View Shape dialog box is used for entering width and length of the vessel CARIS HIPS and SIPS Vessel Editor Plan View Shape Measurement Units are in Metres m Enter a width for the vessel port to starboard Enter a length for the vessel stern to the base of the bow Enter a length for the vessel stern to the tip of the bow Click Next The Plan View PR dialog box is displayed It is used to set the position of the Reference Point RP gt A U N CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 35 Create Vessel File Create Vessel Shape Outline CARIS HIPS and SIPS Vessel Editor Plan View RP Measurement Units are in Metres m 1 Type the distance from the stern to RP 2 Type the distance from the starboard side to the RP 3 Click Next The Profile View Shape dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS Vessel Editor Profile View Shape Measurement Units are in Metres m To set the height measurements for the vessel 1 Type the height of the vessel 2 Type the height of the vessel RP from the keel 3 Click Finish 36 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create
369. o Date Unknown 8 4 2004 9 24 51 AM 8 4 2004 12 01 12 PM Type comments here Reson_8125_2004 Default Density amp Locale CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces Most of this information is read only however the following fields can be edited Editable fields Properties Function General Vertical Coordinate System Select the appropriate vertical datum for the surface data from a drop down list Coverage This field cannot be edited but the coverage value can be updated using the Update Coverage command on the pop up menu Creation Data Start Date Date can be modified using the drop down calendar Data End Date Date can be modified using the drop down calendar Comments This field is populated with the contents of the Comments field from Step 1 of the BASE Surface creation This may be the mandatory lt abstract gt element for 19115 metadata or other information about the surface entered during creation This content can be edited Platform Name Displays the vessel name CUBE Configuration Displays the configuration selected in the last step of creating a CUBE surface If a configuration other than Default was selected or created in the Advanced Options dialog box click on the Browse button to see the values applied in that configuration See also ADVANCED OpTIONS FoR CUBE SURFACE
370. o Export dialog box will display the open files of that type below the associated field sheet CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 2 of 5 Select vat to Export 1 Expand the file tree and select the layer you want to export You can export multiple GeoBaRs to ASCII or to Image 2 Hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while selecting the GeoBaRs to export specific GeoBaRs 3 To export all the listed GeoBaRs hold down the lt Shift gt key and select the first and last in the list CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 495 Export Data Export Wizard Export contacts or line For these file formats the dialog box displays the existing data projects organized in a Project Vessel Day Line structure CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 2 of 7 Select Track Lines 2 8 Default LF Calibration af EM3002D a EM710 elie Fundy201 1 i B a FundyRovelll E MB20081 em2000 0011 135 20081105 040039 A em2000 0076 103 20081 107 034908 em2000 0079 102 20081107 051938 em2000 0080 102 20081107 052005 em2000 0082 101 20081107 064750 em2000 0084 100 20081107 081843 a Hawkeyel 1 Expand the file tree to select the trackl ines to export If you have selected lines to export before opening the Export Wizard they will be selected here To add lines to this selection 2 Hold down the lt Ctrl gt key and select additional lines 496 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data BAG to ASCII BA
371. o select a cutoff value If the dataset contains land data you can select the topographic format TOF options to convert this data too 2 Select either the First Pulse check box to convert the return from the top of the vegetation canopy or the Second Pulse check box to convert the return from the ground Scanning Hydrographic Operational Airborne LIDAR Survey Simrad 1 If you are using the EM3000 sonar select the channel used for the primary position 2 Select Manual Override to read from the navigation system data that is marked inactive by Simrad 3 Click the Convert Side Scan Backscatter box if you want to convert this data You can fit critical line information into the 12 characters provided by the CARIS Source ID attribute for soundings 4 Select the Shorten line names check box to modify the file name to a 12 character CARIS name YYDDD_HHMMDD Large attitude data files can result if there is a straight one to one import into HIPS The Attitude Data Decimation option down samples the data so that a smaller attitude dataset is converted The Decimation Factor determines the ratio of attitude data For CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data Source Cad ae Lae Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 7 Simrad EM3000 Position System 1 2 3 Manual Override C Convert Side Scan Backscatter C Shorten line names C Attitude data d
372. of distinct files each storing a different type of information All are related by time One of these files is the Observed Depths file This file contains measured single beam sweep or swath soundings as reported by the data acquisition system The Swath Editor displays the contents of the file for sweep and swath systems in the Display window in graphic form so you can perform cleaning and filtering operations on the data Each soundings begins with Accepted status If rejected for any reason during processing it can be restored to Accepted status without loss of data Sounding outliers can be rejected by applying automatic swath filters see AUTOMATIC FILTERING ON PAGE 325 or interactively using manual cleaning tools see MANUAL CLEANING ON PAGE 328 For information on the Swath Editor interface see Swath EDITOR in the HIPS and SIPS Editors Guide CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Cleaning Swath Data Automatic Filtering Automatic Filtering 3 S Tools gt Set Filters 5 g 2 M CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide When dealing with high volume bathymetric datasets it is advantageous to be able to reject outliers automatically Using Swath filters can be an effective way to reduce the time it takes to clean large volumes of data There are three basic types of swath filters Spike detection The minimum and maximum depth filters and the beam to beam slope filters Swath red
373. of the current SVP pole time stamp Time The hour and minute of the current SVP pole time stamp 3 Select Yes if there are dual transducers or No if there is only a single transducer The following three fields are for entering the pole s X Y Z coordinates All coordinates are measured from the Reference Point 4 Type the transducer s X Y Z offsets in the following fields CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 47 Create Vessel File Sensors e X The athwart ship distance of the transducer positive to starboard e Y The along ship distance of the transducer positive to the bow Z The vertical distance of the transducer positive into the water Note The Reference Point for Simrad data is the centre of rotation It should be possible to retrieve offset values from the Simrad Installation Datagram The next three fields refer to the alignment of the transducer The values you entered in the wizard when creating the HVF are displayed in these fields The fields are only to be used for large transducer mounting offsets e Pitch Pitch offsets of the transducer Roll Roll offsets of the transducer e Yaw Rotation of the transducer either 0 or 180 degrees See also Sounp VELocity CORRECTIONS ON PAGE 33 To apply SVP in processing see Sounn VELocITy CORRECTION ON PAGE 133 Sweep Sweep systems typically contain multiple vertical beam transducers mounted on a boom and pointed straight down The re
374. og box discarding any changes that were made 21 Click Create The new GeoBar is displayed and listed in the Layers tab For description of GeoBaR layer properties see PROPERTIES OF Mosaics AND GeoBaRs on pace 23 of the Editors reference CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 421 Process Imagery Data Create GeoBaR with the Geocoder Engine Create GeoBaRs with the SIPS Engine Corrections which originally were options when mosaics were created with the SIPS engine are now automatically applied based on settings in the Side Scan Editor Properties window 1 Select a line or lines in the Display window 2 On the Mosaic Editor Process tab select SIPS from the Processing Engine drop down list Process Analysis Edit Processing Engine SIPS Source Data Type Side Scan Project M ayers TE Draw order Ad Mosaic Editor 3 Select the type of data being processed Side Scan or Beam Average 2 Tools gt Mosaic Editor 4 Select the Create GeoBar command oO gt Create GeoBar 5 In the Create GeoBar dialog box type a name for the GeoBar 5 ii GeoBaRs must have unique names If you try to create a F GeoBaR with the same name as an existing GeoBaR you will be warned that the new GeoBaR will overwrite the older one See Naminc GeoBaRs on pace 418 for more information 6 Type a resolution value or accept the default value The Auto function is only available when usi
375. oid as selected here Manufacturer The maker of the navigation equipment Model The particular make of navigation equipment e Serial Number The serial number of the navigation equipment CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Sensors Gyro The gyro sensor refers to any device providing a heading orientation of the vessel 1 Click Gyro in the Sensors list box so the selection is highlighted and the gyro data fields are displayed 2 Type data as needed in the following fields e Date The year and Julian day of the current gyro sensor time stamp e Time The hour and minute of the gyro sensor time stamp Time Correction The time correction value The Gyro Error is measured in degrees and is the difference between the recorded sensor value and the applied heading of the vessel Applied Heading Recorded value Gyro Error 3 Click an Edit button in the Error column to open the Gyro Error Table Error 4 Type new values in the Gyro and Error fields and click OK to close the dialog box 5 Type data as needed in the following fields e Manufacturer The maker of the sensor equipment Model The particular make of sensor equipment e Serial Number The serial number of the sensor equipment Heave The heave sensor records the vertical motion of the vessel Although the heave sensor has its own section in the Vessel Editor it is usually part of the same sensor package as Pitch and Ro
376. ol 1 Select the Despeckle check box When using the Geocoder engine the value calculated from the strength of neighbouring intensities 2 Select a value from Weak to Very Strong from the Strength drop down list When using the SIPS engine the despeckle value is derived from applying a mean filter or a median filter with a specific threshold calculated from a matrix of neighbouring pixels The default values are to apply a Mean Filter with a 3x3 matrix cross and a threshold of 100 To change the default options 1 Click Change 2 Select the Median Filter from the Method drop down list 3 Use the up and down arrows to select a Threshold for defining an acceptable range in which the pixel value will not be replaced For example if the mean value is 50 and the threshold is 20 then the acceptable range is 40 to 60 Thus a pixel value of 38 would be replaced by the mean value of 50 as it is outside the range but a pixel value of 42 would not be replaced 4 Select a pattern of neighbouring pixels from the Matrix Size drop down list be used in calculating the mean median 5 Click Set to return to the Process tab 428 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Edit GeoBaRs Tools gt Mosaic Editor gt Load Single GeoBaR Menu A Tool Tools gt Mosaic Editor gt Load all GeoBaRs Menu a Tool Process Imagery Data Edit GeoBaRs Editing GeoBaRs includes adjusting brightness con
377. older and click OK CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Remove folder Convert Data Select Project Vessel and Day The new Vessel folder is displayed in the selected project directory To add a Day folder to the project 1 Click the Vessel folder to expand it and click Add Day The Calendar dialog box is displayed 2 Select a year month day from the calendar and click OK A Day folder with the selected date is stored in the Vessel folder 3 To remove an empty Day or Vessel folder from the wizard highlight the folder and click Delete To add a Project to the root directory 1 Click Add Project to open the New Project wizard and follow the steps in the wizard When you have finished creating a new project for your data you will be returned to the Conversion wizard to continue the conversion process CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 87 Convert Data Set Navigation Coordinate System Set Navigation Coordinate System The next step is to define the type of coordinates that were used to record the navigation data in the raw data files a CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 4 Navigation Coordinate Type O Geographic Ground Projection Group Argentina Australia Austria Bahrain Belgium Bintulu Zone Zone Zone Il Zone Ill Zone lV Zone Terne Sil Britain Brunei Projection Key CHS Charts Canada E AGZN VI Cer Hee _ To indicate the type of coordinate system th
378. olours separate lines which have been Merged from those that have not Towfish line colours identify lines that have been slant range corrected and those which are raw side scan data only These default colours are set in the Display tab of the Tools gt Options dialog box See Display winnow on PAGE 100 of the Reference guide You can change the display colours and symbology for the lines in a session and save to a session file To change the colour and symbology of ship and towfish track lines 1 Select the Ship Track Lines or Towfish Track Lines layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Open the Properties window Shown below are the properties of the Ship Track Lines layer Properties E General Symbolize lines _ False Line Weight E Colour Merged Ho 200 0 Not merged Wo 0 200 Colour by State These General properties apply to both ship track and towfish track lines 1 Set the Symbolize Lines field to True to display the lines according to the symbolization specifications of a selected feature code Select a feature code from the Symbols drop down list The default symbolization is TRACK_LINE 2 Type a Line Weight value to set the size of a selected line in the Display A line weight can only be set if Symbolize lines is set to False Ship track lines and Towfish track lines have colour properties based on these different states CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 71 Create a
379. om PO Box 47 5473 ZG Heeswijk NETHERLANDS Phone 31 0 413 296 010 Fax 31 0 413 296 012 Email sales caris nl Assistance support caris nl CARIS Asia Pacific Level 3 Shell House 172 North Terrace Adelaide SA 5000 Australia Phone 61 0 8 8231 9474 Email info caris com Copyright c 2013 CARIS All rights reserved The material in this manual is for information purposes only and is subject to change without notice CARIS assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual CARIS hereby grants licensees of CARIS software the right to reprint this document for internal use August 2013 Preface This guide describes the workflow for processing data using the multibeam to CUBE surface flow WorKFLOw IN HIPS anp SIPS on PAGE 15 e CREATE VESSEL FILE ON PAGE 25 e CREATE A New PROJECT ON PAGE 57 e Convert DATA ON PAGE 77 Sounn VELocITY CORRECTION ON PAGE 133 e CORRECT FOR TIDE ON PAGE 143 e Compute TPU on PAGE 153 e MERGE ON PAGE 167 e CREATE FIELD SHEETS ON PAGE 173 e CreATE BASE SurFAces ON PAGE 187 e CUBE PROCESSING ON PAGE 247 e Data QC on PAGE 269 STATISTICAL SURFACE CLEANING ON PAGE 311 e CLEANING SWATH DATA ON PAGE 323 e Process DATA IN SUBSETS ON PAGE 337 e CREATE PRODUCT SURFACES ON PAGE 355 e Process IMAGERY DATA ON PAGE 411 e Process Water CoLumn Data ON PAGE
380. on set in new mosaic 436 Reson data convert hidden or non logged 118 Reson PDS format conversion options for 116 restart cleaning 305 reverse colours 395 roll data in vessel file 45 S S 44 quality control 307 TPU filtering 159 S 44 filtering 159 S 57 export to 480 S7K data convert 118 save asession 21 SBET loaded 165 SDF format conversion options for 120 Seabeam format conversion options for 103 121 Seafalcon format conversion options for 121 search by beam or profile 328 search by depth profile or beam number 328 Search directories for files with temporal overlap 85 Search for files with temporal overlap 84 search for sounding 328 sediment analysis 446 auto analyze 447 export to ASCII 539 graph 453 set patch size 448 Sediment analysis options 447 sediment analysis overlay view in Mosaic Editor 455 select contacts or line data to export 496 Select files to export 495 Select Format to export 494 select surface to export 495 selected soundings 383 display 388 output 388 Selection tab view tile attributes 406 sensor configuration 38 sensor data in vessel file 38 session files 21 Set Interpolation 283 set line classification 293 set vessel measurements 35 settings bottom detection colour 471 settings to create profile 367 Shine through use to resolve overlapping GeoBaRs 436 Ship Navigation data source in conversion 126 shoal biased
381. on logged data 1 Select the Filter soundings by status option to filter using the status bits in the data file 2 To Reject soundings using quality flags select the quality bits for the soundings you want to reject during conversion If you select all four check boxes all soundings will be rejected PDS data By default it is multibeam data which is read and converted You can also convert single beam or dual frequency data by identifying the devices containing the data 3 Inthe PDS data drop down lists select the number for your Navigation Heading and or Motion device so that data will be converted from that specific device Devices are numbered 1 to 5 4 Select the type of data being converted Multibeam Singlebeam Dual Frequency from the Convert drop down list If converting singlebeam or dual frequency data you will need to specify which echo sounding device was used If you care converting singlebeam data you can choose from the ECHO_ID raw data or CF_DEPTH processed data attributes from the CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Singlebeam Dual Frequency Convert Data Options for Specific Formats Source drop down list If converting dual frequency data the only source available is ECHO_ID 5 From the Convert drop down select the kind of data to convert Multibeam Singlebeam or Dual Frequency If you select Singlebeam you can convert records from either a ECHO_ID raw data source or CF_DEPTH pro
382. ons 4 Select the filter parameters used to flag data see below You can define and apply more than one filter test The filters are applied in sequence Any data rejected by one filter is not considered in the next filter test 5 Click Close or click Clear to remove data from the fields 6 Click Save As to save the settings to a filter file The following filters are available Minimum Depth Reject any soundings that are shallower than the depth specified e g 10 m Maximum Depth Reject any soundings that are deeper than the depth specified e g 50 m Across track angle Beam to beam slopes across track For each beam on the same swath calculate the slopes in degrees to the prior and post beams and if both slopes exceed the defined value and are of opposite sign then reject the beam The Include Rejected option includes previously rejected soundings when recalculating the slopes during multiple runs of the filter Across track distance X Nadir Depth Any soundings with an across track distance from the centre beam greater than the nadir depth times this number e g 3 0 are rejected For example in 30 metres of water with a setting of 3 0 all soundings with an across track distance greater than 90 0 metres are rejected Across track distance Port Filter a sounding if the across track distance on the port side is greater than the value entered in this field Across track distance Starboard Filter
383. onstrains the new subset tile area to the selected BASE Surface When this check box is cleared the subset tiles will cover the entire field sheet area To tile the entire field sheet 3 Clear the Control Coverage by Surface check box 4 Type the tile size 5 Click OK A Subset Tile layer is created and displayed within the extent of the field sheet area To tile the area of a specific BASE surface 1 Select the Control Coverage by Surface check box to apply the subset tiles to a BASE Surface 2 From the list select the BASE surface to be used as the template for subset tiles 3 Type the tile size 4 Click OK The Subset Tile layer name is added to the Layers tab The names are automatically generated beginning with SubsetTiles1 You can show or hide the layer with the check box beside the Subset Tile file name in the Layers tab 344 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Data in Subsets Track Progress with Subset Tiles Subset tile properties You can set display properties for tiles in the Properties window For example you can set colours to display the progress of subset cleaning or make the tile layer transparent so the features below it are more visible The Active Attribute field lists all attributes included in the tiles When you select an attribute such as cleaning status tiles are displayed according to the values of those attributes For example if Cleaning_Status is selected as the active att
384. ontacts Contacts Contacts are representations of object and feature on the sea floor such as wrecks or other shoal features that are visible in the sonar data In Side Scan Editor you can georeference contacts and attach attributes attached to them using the Add Point or Add Line Contacts tools Contacts are placed directly in the waterfall view A contact record is created for each contact stored in the contact file for the survey line A contact record includes sufficient information to be subsequently exported to a CARIS map or to a database application Contact are described in Contacts on PAGE 81 in the Side Scan Editor section of the Editors Guide CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 457 Process Imagery Data Contacts 458 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Water Column Data Water column data can be viewed selected and queried in Subset and Swath Editor the data can also be imported into Additional Bathymetry The display of water column data can be manipulated in the editors and bathymetry derived from water column imagery can be added to an existing project In this chapter WATER COLUMN DATA IN HIPS seseeeeseseeeeeeeees 460 WATER COLUMN DATA IN SWATH EDITOR 0seeeeeeeeeeees 462 WCI CONTROLS IN SWATH EDITOR saec 466 App WC BaTHYMETRY TO PROJECT 468 WCI DATA IN SUBSET EDITOR 00cceceeseeseseseeeeeeeees 469 ADDITIONAL BATHYMETRY ccc0ccsseeeceseeeeeeseeceeseeeesan
385. or the current project In the image below an attribute called Type has been selected If this Type were to represent as an example the type of process which designated the sounding then the Value that would be set would be either say 0 if detected automatically or 1 from manual processing Shoal Attribute Configuration Define all the attributes that will be associated with the new Features TYPE v o0 Remove All None CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 299 Data QC Designate Critical Soundings from a Surface Edit gt Status Flag gt Designate Menu Tool lt D gt Key Find Designated Soundings 300 The attributes defined will be listed in the Shoal Attributes field in the previous dialog box when you click OK When the Detection process is run the attributes and their set values will be saved with the detected soundings 8 Click in the Name field and select an attribute from the drop down list 9 Click in the Value field to set a value To clear an added attribute row click Remove Remove All will clear all the entries from this dialog box and from the Advanced Options fields Reset will reset this list to the entries listed when the Shoal Attributes Configuration dialog box was opened 10 Click OK to return to the previous dialog box 11 Optional Repeat the process to set additional attributes for Deep 12 Click OK to run the detection process Find and
386. or the new location 4 Click OK The new project location is listed in project tree in the Open Project dialog box E Open Project Projects Contents o Default al a IE 444 Demol am at Calibration plymount2004 HIPSTrainin IEMI Septe OQTC series1 TE Portsmouth2001 fF Shortcut to HIPS Dat wail wit J Sidescan MPERA lt New location September ShoalsLidar Single_Beam I HIPSTraining IE IEMI September na T a wa wh V Open ship track lines Open towfish track lines Cancel CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 65 Create a New Project Open Projects Combining project data using Windows shortcuts 66 Open specific data You can also open the data for a specific vessel if the project contains more than one or for a specific survey day or for an individual track line As you expand each folder the contents are displayed in the Contents pane of the Open Projects dialog box 1 Choose the Open Project command 2 In the Open Project dialog box expand the folder tree by clicking the icon so that the Vessel and Day folders are visible 3 Select a vessel folder name so it is highlighted and click Open or Expand the Vessel folder to see the Day folders 4 Select a Day folder and click Open or 5 Expand the Day folder to see the Line folders 6 Select a Line folder and click Open You can use a Windows shortcut to link to HDCS Project Vessel Day Lin
387. ordinate system 9 Select an option from the Units drop down list CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Profiles 10 Select a Precision value to define the number of decimal places to apply to the exported coordinate values 11 Use the Order drop down list to specify the order of the coordinate columns in the output file e g Long Lat or Lat Long Output type Distances Precision 3 v Coordinates Point sampling Control points Sampled points Interval between points 20 00000 m Attributes A Precision 3 2 axis convention in output O Up is positive Down is positive Output type The ASCII file will contain the depth values at specific points along the profile and the locations of those points Depending on the Output type selected the locations may be reported as distances from the start of the profile in metres feet etc or as geographic coordinates 12 Select an Output type option If exporting locations as Distances you can also define the number of decimal places to apply to the distance values 13 Select a Precision value for the Distances field You have the option of exporting depths at all control points in the profile or at a sampling of points The Control points option exports depth values at the points that were digitized to create the profile line The Sampled points option selects points at a specified interval an
388. ormed after Sound Velocity correction Whether it is applied before or after Merge will depend on the workflow you are following When you compute TPU it will always be done on the Observed depths therefore tide and draft offsets will not affect the values CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 155 Compute TPU Total Propagated Uncertainty Menu Tool Process gt Compute TPU 4 156 Compute TPU The Compute TPU Total Propagated Uncertainty command applies Horizontal TPU HzTPU and Depth TPU DpTPU values to each sounding in the observed depths DpTPU is the uncertainty associated with the depth value of a sounding It is a random error and is scaled to 95 1 96 sigma HzTPU The uncertainty associated with the position of a sounding It is a random error and is scaled to 95 1 96 sigma The HzTPU and DpTPU values are stored line by line with indexing to profiles and beams You can view the specific error values for individual soundings by querying the soundings in Swath Single Beam or Subset Editor The HzTPU and DpTPU values are displayed in the Selection tab Static errors such as those related to sensor position that are used to compute the TPU are read directly from the project s vessel file and from the DeviceModels xml file These errors are directly entered in the TPU computation Dynamic errors due to tide and sound velocity values which can change from time to time are entered via t
389. ort CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 85 Convert Data Select Project Vessel and Day Select Project Vessel and Day Add Vessel or Day 86 Use the Step 3 dialog box to select the Project Vessel and Day into which your converted data will be saved 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 3 Select a Project Vessel and Day i Default I Calibration IE MIIE September Sat BasicMB H a FundypRover2 ey plymount2004 EB IE Portsmouth2001 BE 4 HAA QTC series1 E ShoalsLidar FE Sidescan TE Single_Beam l i Click the Expand icon to expand the Project file tree so that a Day folder is visible Click the Day folder so it is highlighted 3 Click Next To select an existing project that is not listed in the current file tree 1 2 3 4 Right click in the data tree area of the dialog box Select Connect To from the pop up menu Name the new project folder and use Browse to set the path to the new data directory Click OK To create a new project 1 Click Add Project and follow the steps to Define New PROJECT ON PAGE 58 You can also use this dialog box to add Vessel or Day folders to an existing project or to delete empty folders 1 To add a vessel to the selected project make sure the project directory is highlighted and click Add Vessel The Available Vessels dialog box is displayed 2 Select a vessel f
390. ort to HOB 514 GSF Generic Sensor Format 511 514 conversion options for 107 export HIPS data to 528 gyro sensor data in vessel file 43 H Hawkeye converter options 108 heave sensor data in vessel file 43 height source used in profile 368 HIPS tide export to ASCII 516 HOB Hydrographic Object Binary files export GSF to 514 export to 529 HOB file contour to 365 holiday data gaps identify in BASE surface 238 holiday layer create in surface 238 holiday search radius 238 240 HTF Hydrographic Transfer Format export layer data to 531 HVF create new vessel file 27 edit sensor configuration 38 location 26 sections 26 HVF HIPS Vessel File 26 HVF location 28 Hypack format conversion options for 109 hypothesis editing 259 HzTPU 156 image classification 431 Image Export of BASEsurface statistics 234 of profile 380 image export surface to 501 Imagenex conversion options for 112 imagery processing workflow 413 Import Profile 373 Index Contours 363 initialization in CUBE surface creation 248 Intensity 417 intensity options creating mosaic 437 Interpolate mosaic 442 Interpolate surface of mosaic 442 interpolation in Refraction Editor 336 set for navigation data 283 interpolation methods Navigation Editor 282 L label contours 365 LADS format conversion options for 113 LAS data format conversion options for 114 layback convert 131
391. orting one GeoBaR 1 Type the path and file name for the output or click Browse to go to the destination folder 2 Type the file name and click Save If you are exporting multiple GeoBaRs 3 Click Browse to select the folder where the exported files will be saved The ASCII files in the output folder will have the same names as the GeoBaR they were created from 4 Select Maintain PVDL Hierarchy to save each ASCII file within its Project Vessel Day Line structure in the folder you designate The files will have the same names as the GeoBaR they were created from Position units 5 Select the Position Units for data from the drop down list Ground East North position displayed as Easting Northing to the precision defined for example 360425 000 4770355 000 e Geographic DMS position displayed as Latitude Longitude in degrees minutes seconds to the precision defined for example 43 04 23 03N 070 42 51 89W CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 507 Export Data GeoBaR to ASCII 508 e Geographic Unformatted DMS displays the position without using hyphens or direction indicators for example 43 04 23 03 070 42 51 89 e Geographic Decimal Degrees position displayed as Latitude Longitude in decimal degrees to the precision set for example 43 073 070 714 e Geographic Degree Minutes position displayed as Latitude Longitude in degrees and minutes to the precision set for example 34 23 610N 11
392. ose a method to resolve this conflict of conflicts Line em2000 0084 100 20081107 081843 Method f current ass E conflict GeoBaR back51 v number name The title bar of the Resolve Conflict dialog box shows you the number of the current conflict and the number of conflicts there are for the line The line is identified and options to resolve the conflict are listed in the Method field These options vary with the task you are performing If there is more than one conflict on a line you can use the Apply to all option to apply the same method of resolution to all conflicts The dialog box also has three buttons Apply Skip and Cancel All these buttons close the dialog box Apply uses the current settings to resolve this conflict Skip will not resolve this conflict but will allow you to continue with any other conflicts Cancel will stop the process regardless of how many conflicts are remaining 444 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Selecting a GeoBaR Selecting Component GeoBaRs Process Imagery Data Conflict Resolution Ways to Resolve Conflict To resolve a conflict when loading a single GeoBaR 1 Select either e Newest GeoBaR the most recently created or e Finest Resolution e g in a group of GeoBaRs with resolution ranging from 1m to 10 metres the GeoBaR with resolution of 1m will be selected or e Manual select the GeoBaR by name from a drop down list of the conflicted GeoBaRs
393. oundings such as time stamps launch identifier and tidal correction e Status Select soundings flagged as Selected Accepted or Accepted and Rejected e Feature Code Select a feature code for the soundings from the drop down list e User Number Type a number value for layering data in the CARIS map or HOB file Group By Beam Load soundings into user numbers according to sonar beam number For example all soundings from beam 37 are loaded to user number 37 in the CARIS map file or HOB file 3 If you selected Export Tracklines complete any or all of the following fields 512 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data GSF to CARIS Map e Feature Code Select a feature code for the track lines object from the drop down list e User Number Type a number value for layering data in the CARIS map 4 Select the Include Offline Data check box to include data recorded during turns between track lines 5 Click Next CARIS Map Options CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 4 of 6 CARIS Map Options CARIS Map CARIS Source ID First 12 characters of file name Use this dialog box to set the destination of the exported data 1 Click the Browse button to select CARIS map des file for data export or to create a new map file The map file path and name are displayed in the CARIS Map field The CARIS Source ID is a 12 character alphanumeric attribute in CARIS maps The ID can
394. our to each line graphed in the Profile window 1 Highlight a layer in the Height sources list The Name field is automatically populated with the name of the surface and the layer you selected e g SurfaceName LayerName You can edit this name 2 Optional Replace the automatically generated name 3 Select a colour from the colour picker Default colour is black 4 Repeat to assign a different colour for each profile 5 Enter a Title for the profile graph The vertical axis in the graph shows the attribute values from the surfaces The horizontal axis is always distance along the profile 6 Enter a Vertical axis label for the profile graph The Sample step size field controls the frequency with which the surface is sampled HIPS samples the data at the specified interval and uses it to draw the profile line between the digitized points The smaller the step size the more detail in the profile 7 Enter a value for Sample step size CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Profiles Fill The Fill type option allows you to colour the profile according to the elevations in the data You have the option of applying the colours horizontally or vertically This is an example of a profile with vertical fill c N v c Dz a Q a o O Q 150 200 250 Distance m 8 Select an option from the Fill type drop down list Smooth The Smooth option allows you to smooth the profile li
395. ous sounding then the same or modified hypothesis is used If the value does change significantly a new hypothesis is created A node can contain more than one hypothesis In the above graphic two soundings S and S have similar values and therefore are part of the same hypothesis at the estimation node However sounding three Ss has a significantly different value so it forms a new hypothesis Disambiguation The final process in CUBE is disambiguation Disambiguation selects one hypothesis over others There are four disambiguation options Density Select the hypothesis with the greatest number of sounding samples Locale Select the hypothesis that is most consistent with the surrounding nodes that have only one hypothesis Locale and Density Select the hypothesis the contains the greatest number of soundings and is also consistent with neighbouring nodes Initialization Select the hypothesis that is nearest to a node value of a previously created BASE Surface Initialization differs from the other methods because it filters potential outlier soundings just prior to disambiguation 248 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide CUBE Processing Overview When a surface using the density and locale options is generated two layers specific to the CUBE Surface are displayed The Hypothesis Count layer is a visual representation of hypothesis density at a node A Surface with a Hypotheses Count layer is displayed
396. own in the dialog box are the minimum and maximum depth levels for each survey order You can change these to conform with the minimum and maximum depths in your surface 5 Optional Type new depth levels for any of the survey orders You can have overlapping depth levels 6 Click Browse to select a directory path and name for the QC report The path and name is shown in the Output File field 7 Click OK The report is shown in the Output window and in the Output file you designated The Holiday layer is displayed in the Layers tab under the other layers for the surface CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 239 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands QC Report File example Sections of a QC report file 240 BASE Surface QC Report Date and Time 2 4 2010 3 39 49 PM Surface d CARIS HIPS 70 Fieldsheets FundyData PASG1 pagstest1 csar Holiday Search Radius 2 Holiday Minimum Number of Nodes 12 Holiday layer created No Error values from Greater of the two Number of nodes processed 8859 Number of nodes populated 8858 99 99 Number of holidays detected 0 IHO S 44 Special Order Range 0 000 to 100 000 Number of nodes considered 8858 Number of nodes within 2523 28 48 Residual mean 0 743 S 44 Order 1a Range 0 000 to 100 000 Number of nodes considered 8858 Number of nodes within 3995 45 10 Residual mean 0 473 S 44 Order 1b Range 0 000 to 100 000 Number of nodes considered 8858 Number o
397. p in the surface but only those gaps that meet the criteria 1 Type the number of nodes to use as a radius for searching for gaps in the Holiday Search Radius field 2 Type the Minimum number of nodes that must contain data so that a data gap holiday is not formed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands For example if the value is 6 then a node without data must be surrounded by five or less nodes with data to be included with other empty nodes in a holiday 3 Select the Create holiday layer check box to create a layer in the Layers tab displaying the data gaps selected by the search criteria IHO S 44 Settings The lower section compares uncertainty values contained in the surface to the S 44 standard These values are drawn from the Standard Deviation and Uncertainty layers This comparison will show how many nodes in the surface fall within the S 44 categories 4 Select the source of error values from the drop down list e Uncertainty layer which contains the uncertainty model values entered when the surface was created e Standard Deviation the values showing how the data varies from the model e Greater of the two uncertainty or standard deviation whichever is larger value e Lesser of the two For a swath angle surface the error values come from the Standard Deviation layer only The option will be greyed out but it is applied The depth levels sh
398. p or down arrow buttons Select the Headers check box to create print attribute names at the top of the attribute rows 517 Export Data HIPS To ASCII 4 Select either the Space Comma or Tab check boxes to use these characters as delimiters or select the Other check box and type a character to use as a delimiter You can define the boundaries of the ASCII map data from the boundaries of an existing CARIS map If you do not select this option this is defined from the ASCII data 5 Select the Clip to CARIS Map check box to use a CARIS map to define the boundaries of the ASCII map data 6 Click Browse to select an existing CARIS map 7 To use the coordinate system from the selected CARIS map for the ASCII data click the check box If you selected the Use Coordinate System From CARIS Map option the next dialog box prompts you to export the data If you did not select this option the next dialog box prompts you to select a coordinate system 8 Click Next 518 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data HIPS To ASCII Select Export Units This dialog box sets the unit type for recording data The fields that are active in this dialog are determined by the attributes selected in the previous dialog box CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 4 of 5 Select Unis Vertical Length Metres Horizontal Length Metres Vertical Shit 0 Metres Bock Canes Available units are metres
399. p with the Apply switches for Heave Pitch and Roll set to No so these values are not applied twice Roll Roll refers to the rotational motion of the vessel around the Y fore aft axis Although the roll sensor has its own section in the Vessel Editor it is usually part of the same sensor package as pitch and heave in most survey configurations 1 Click Rollin the Sensors list box so the selection is highlighted and the roll data fields are displayed 2 Type data as needed in the following fields Date The year and Julian day of the current roll time stamp Time The hour and minute of the current roll time stamp Time Correction The time correction value Error The applied instantaneous values for the roll sensor are computed by subtracting the appropriate errors from the recorded values Applied Roll Recorded Roll Roll Error Apply Select Yes to apply the roll data in the merge process Manufacturer The maker of the sensor equipment Model The particular make of the sensor equipment Serial Number The serial number of the sensor equipment The location of the roll sensor is indicated in the Vessel Editor by a coloured dot CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 45 Create Vessel File Sensors 46 Note Simrad systems apply dynamic Heave Pitch and Roll values to the swath data during survey Therefore the HVF must be set up with the Apply switches for Heave Pitch and Roll set to No so thes
400. pen If the selected line contains WCI data 3 A the data will be loaded into the Along and Across track z windows z Tools gt Swath Editor the Water Column Editor toolbar will be displayed and the WCI tab will be displayed in the Swath Editor Control page The example below shows WCI data displayed in the across and along track windows and bathymetry in the Display window shown as a BASE surface Water Column Along a ASNAN Ss ret oe 3 Select a profile for example in the Plan View The related WCI data is displayed in the water column windows 1 Image courtesy of John Hughes Clarke Ocean Mapping Group University of New Brunswick CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 463 Process Water Column Data Display water column data Scroll through the Plan view using the arrow keys or scroll buttons to see the water column image in the across and along track views To highlight a WCI profile in the Swath Editor views 4 Click the middle mouse button in the Along track window As each profile is highlighted the display in the Swath Editor windows is automatically refreshed As well there is a slider bar in the Across track window similar to that of the Profile window which you can use to scroll through the data Automatic scrolling As well as viewing WCI data profile by profile you can view the data in sequence using the playback controls on the Water Column toolbar These wo
401. pen a project to which the water column data will be added Open WCI data in Swath Editor Across and Along track and Stacked views Filter based on intensity Overlay Bottom Detection e Assign Colour Map Line editing Query Reject Accept bathymetry Select and data to add to project bathymetry Re evaluate intensity filter range Open data in Subset Editor 2D and 3D views Filter by intensity ranges determined in Swath Editor Query Reject Accept bathymetry data e Designate critical soundings Select and add points to additional bathymetry layers Toggle views between WCI project bathymetry and additional bathymetry layers Compute TPU for additional bathymetry If required undo all processing of Additional Bathymetry with Restart Cleaning command on pop up menu Regenerate additional bathymetry layers if project data has new corrections and new merge applied Add additional bathymetry to BASE surfaces CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 461 Process Water Column Data Water Column Data in Swath Editor Water Column Data in Swath Editor Stacked view Bottom detections In Swath Editor water column imagery is displayed in two windows Across track the water column data as viewed from the stern of the survey vessel There is an across track image for each selected profile ping Also referred to as a profile view polar intensity plot or swath profile Along track displays the water column dat
402. play level Automatic Colour fill tiles MV True Transparency 0 Show tile borders MV True Border colour E ico 100 100 Display tile value False The Active Attribute list contains all attributes included in the tile such as the Profile number When you select an attribute the tile is displayed according to the attribute values 1 Select an attribute from the drop down Active Attribute list MinDepth MinXCoord or MinYCoord By default MinDepth is selected 2 Select a colour map from the drop down list A preview of the colour map is displayed below the list 3 Change how tiles are rendered to the Display Window by selecting a Display Level option e Maximum Draw all tiles e Automatic Draw tiles to fit the current extent of the Display window The Colour fill tiles check box determines how attribute values are drawn in the Display window Ifthe Colour fill tiles check box is cleared these values are drawn according to the selected colour map but the tiles are left blank Ifthe Colour fill tiles check box is selected and set to True the individual tiles are filled according the colour map but the attribute values are shown in black 4 Select a Transparency percentage to make features visible through the tiles the greater the percentage the more transparent the tiles appear The Show tile borders check box determines how the border lines dividing the tile areas are displayed Ifthe Show tile borders chec
403. played Shift Navigation C Ground Geographic Longitude Offset 0 decimal degrees Latitude Offset 0 decimal degrees 3 Select either Ground or Geographic units 4 Type the amount of shift in one or both of the Offset fields Offset value can be positive or negative 5 Click Process 6 Optional Click Cancel to cancel the process and click Yes to confirm the cancel CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Attitude data Tools gt Attitude Editor Menu Tool on Tools gt Sensor Layout Menu Edit gt Query Menu p Tool Query Key Pop up lt Q gt Data QC Attitude data You can examine and clean the motion data of the vessel or towed transducer using the Attitude Editor within the HIPS and SIPS interface See also ATTITUDE EDITOR INTERFACE ON PAGE 10 To open the Attitude Editor 1 Select a track line so it is highlighted 2 Select the Attitude Editor command The Attitude Editor is displayed showing graphs for Gyro Pitch and Roll in degrees and Heave in metres for the selected line Gyro data is displayed as a positive value when a clockwise rotation is experienced Pitch data is displayed as positive when the vessels bow is down e Roll data in is displayed as positive when the vessels starboard side is up e Heave data is displayed as a positive value when the vessel is heaved upwards Other
404. plays the deepest soundings Median creates an attribute layer that displays the median values of soundings contributing to the node Horizontal TPU creates an attribute layer that displays the Horizontal TPU value for the shoalest sounding used for the Depth Attribute layer Vertical TPU creates an attribute layer that displays Depth TPU value for the Shoalest sounding used for the Depth attribute layer 6 Click Finish 202 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide View BASE Surfaces In the HIPS interface when a BASE Surface layer is created it is displayed in the Layers tab of the Control window Attributes such as Depth are displayed as child layers of the BASE Surface Create BASE Surfaces View BASE Surfaces T O K alS HIPS Data Z Ship Track Lines 26 Critical Soundings ae Contacts A4Pri6 al 26Apr Deep Density g amp Hypothesis_Count Hypothesis_Strength Mean Node_Std Dev Shoal Std_Dev Uncertainty User_Nominated d Bounding Polygon 4 1 Click Expand icon beside the Field Sheet file name to expand the directory tree in the Layers tab 2 Display the BASE Surface by selecting the check box beside the layer The following attributes can be displayed in the BASE Surface depending on the weighting method you select
405. pply these changes to attitude data across entire track line s The Attitude filter can be used to Smooth data The Smooth function is used to even out localized variability The parameters for creating the smoothed data are saved to the SmoothedCoefficients file in the HCDS_Data Project Vessel Day Line folder This file can be applied to the track line during any process that supports smoothing Filter data The Filter function is used to reject attitude that falls outside of defined boundaries Soundings with the same time stamp as the rejected data are also flagged as rejected You can choose to use interpolation when rejecting data These filter and smooth functions are also available in the Attitude Editor To set filtering options for attitude 1 Select a track line 2 Select the Set Filters command The Set Filters dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Attitude data Set Filters Load filter file mar22 hff I Ci Critical TPU Swath Sweep Single Beam Attitude Include Filter aI Fi DeltaDraft V Filter _ Smooth GPSHeight Reject with interpolation Moving Average Fast Fourier Heave o Points Box Size H U Seconds sow Threshold 1 sigma 555Cable0ut nE SSSGyro SSSSensorDepth SSSSensorHeight Tide 3 Select a sensor from the list 4 Select the Filter check box By default the filter is set to Reject with
406. project area New Project Step 4 of 4 Project Extent N 90 00 00 E 180 00 00 Project Area 5 85 00 00 w I3 00 00 Current View lt Back Ner Finish Cancel Hep By default the project extent is set to the entire area of the earth If you want to use the geographic coordinates of a currently open project at the zoom level currently displayed in the Display window 1 Click Current View To manually enter the geographic coordinates for the project area 1 Select a project extent box e g W and type the coordinates or select the degree minutes or second field box and use your arrow keys to change the values 2 Click Finish to complete the creation of the new project CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create a New Project Define New Project The new project has been created with Project Vessel Day folders according to the options selected in the wizard CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 63 Create a New Project Open Projects Open Projects Menu File gt Open Project Tool lap Key lt Ctrl O gt 64 1 Select the Open Project command The Open Project dialog box is displayed E Open Project Projects Defaut B AAA Demol TR Calibration Project folders in a D plmourt2004 Default repository 2 Portsmouth2001 v H v V Open ship track lines Open towfish track lines Cancel 2 Select a Project folder so it is highlighted I
407. ption 5 Click Next If you created a new CARIS map in Step 1 a dialog box for selecting a projection is displayed Otherwise you can begin export of the data in the next dialog box 526 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data HIPS to FAU HIPS to FAU Export processed HIPS data with optional heave pitch roll quality amplitude attributes to the FAU format The process will create multiple files with the extension fauTC designating the data as tide corrected The names of the output files will match the HIPS line names After you have selected the track lines to export the next step is to designate an output folder CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 4 Output Folder D HIPS dataa Maintain PYD Hierarchy 1 Type a path and name for the output file or click the Browse button to select a folder and then type the file name 2 Select Maintain PVD Hierarchy to create output directories that correspond to the HIPS data being exported 3 Click Next to set the coordinate system COORDINATE SYSTEM ON PAGE 541 EXPORT ON PAGE 542 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 527 Export Data HIPS To GSF HIPS To GSF The HIPS to GSF function exports processed HIPS data to a GSF format A new GSF file is created for each track line that is exported from HIPS Conversely when HIPS data is created from GSF data a copy of the original GSF file is maintained inside the HIPS dire
408. r aana auaa 30 Motion Sensors 0 00 eee eee eee 32 Configuration Options lt 2i52See4 tend veined eoedadead 32 Sound Velocity Corrections 00 cee eee eee 33 Create Vessel Shape Outline 00 0 eee eee 35 Sensor Configuration 3i eis0sisaueee en pow ee yea weds ces 38 Active SENSOrsS 0 tt ees 38 Time Stamp ere cums 4 5 00 404 menda tE NE EE eked eRe oe ae 39 Time Correction esasen epu e a E a eb a E 40 SeNSOlS sans ra enio eee tate KEA E Eia Pee weet 41 TranSducer 2 eens 41 Navigation e na aeaa n aeea 42 BE a gong eas E E E EEE 43 Heave 5 4 2oS na heres CEG bP a eR es e Ra 43 Pite scare ats repa a ee hrc s a oh e aye Hee eu es ERE 44 Fo ee ee ee ree 45 Dynamic Draft 2 44 50 wise 6 aes ceo bere Sare eee oe 46 SVP ih Rio eae ea ee Ho ON aw ae Aw ar aOR aac 47 Si a eee ee ee eee ER ee eee ee ee 48 TOWOd SGNSOMS iis sk cad renra naa RRR EA eRe WAS 49 Waterline Heignts2 2 cecsievreeedes ebeetseenetess 50 Total Propagated Uncertainty 0 00005 51 Vessel Coordinate System 00 020 cee eee 53 Default Ellipsoid cc 225 42ecet ee ce os nweeeee See KH ERS lt 55 Create a New Project 200 ee eee eee eeeee 57 Define New Project c20csnesceeee oye ew deed e seasons 58 New Project Step 1 2 asses ceas bee ce wedeee soe ea wers 58 New Project Step 2 s2cscecseucuu seeks She eet eaawas 60 New Project Step 3 caceeti ewer eedeence db aaue ade os 61
409. r Layer name Single colour Colour Table Colour Map X Min f m OK Cancel Help Single colour Use this option to display a soundings or contours in a single colour 3 Select the Single Colour option 4 Select a colour from the colour picker or create a custom colour from the standard Windows colour palette 5 Click OK to save and apply settings Colour table To apply different colours to different depth ranges 1 Select the Colour Table option 2 Select a colour from the colour palette or create a custom colour from the standard Windows colour picker 3 Type a minimum range depth in the field beside the palette 4 Type a maximum range depth in the next field 5 Click Insert Range 394 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Colour Options for Soundings and Contours The colour and range values are displayed in the Colour Table dialog box 6 Repeat Steps 2 to 5 to continue adding a colours for each range 7 To remove a single colour range select a range so it is highlighted and click Remove Range 8 To remove all selected ranges click Clear 9 Click OK to save and apply settings The soundings or contours are colour coded according to the range values you selected earlier Standard colour map Use this option to select a standard colour map 1 Select the Colour Map option 2 Select a colour map from the drop down menu 3 Type the minimum and maximum
410. r Column layer iy HIPS Data Sy 2D View 3D View e Reference Surface CUBE Hypothesis Calibration wee Vater Column Tracking Do s m A ee A eee ee ee A The tab is refreshed to display the controls for loading and unloading WCI data filtering by depth slant range and intensity Filters Minimum Depth 9 000 m Maximum Depth 100 000 m C Filter by Minimum Slant Range 64 ee S 0 Properties Aru 2 _ smi oe 4 Optional Set a range of depths to load using the Minimum and Maximum Depth fields Applying a minimum slant range filter will load only the strong echoes and minimize background noise Background noise within the minimum slant range has a backscatter strength of CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 469 Process Water Column Data WCI Data in Subset Editor lower than 50dB Therefore it is logical to load only those data points which have a stronger echo than 50 dB This option is turned off by default To set slant range filtering 5 Select the Filter by Minimum Slant Range check box Water column data can be filtered by intensity values so that only data within the set range is displayed This filter is the same as in Swath Editor Settings are retained so that the same filter range can be applied in both editors To filter the data 6 Use the sliders to set a filter range between 64 dB and zero 7 Click Load
411. ransducer If you selected Multi transducer in the Step 2 dialog box you will now be asked for information on the number and types of transducers and for TPU specific parameters CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Vessel File Create a New HVF CARIS HIPS and SIPS Vessel Wizard Step 3 Maulti transducer Number of Transducers L Fixed lo 6 Yes lonatrack 0 m Depth o m O No Model Simrad EM300 N L TPU Specific Parameters Alignment Navigation to Boom MRU to Boom Gyro 0 deg x0 m Roll 0 deg o a Squat 0 lx z o m Heave 0 1 Enter the Number of Transducers on a boom 2 Select Yes if the transducers are mounted to a fixed boom or to the hull of the vessel or select No if the transducers are on a movable decoupled boom 3 Type the default Alongtrack value of all the transducers relative to the ship s reference point 4 Type the default Depth of all the transducers relative to the ship s Reference Point 5 Select the sonar model from the Model drop down list Parameters for navigation to boom and motion recording unit MRU to boom are necessary to calculate Total Propagated Uncertainty 6 Type the distances from the positioning system to the centre of the boom in the Navigation to Boom X Y Z fields 7 Type the distance from the motion recording unit to the centre of the boom in the MRU to Boom X Y Z fields The Roll and Gyro misalignment values are needed for
412. ravel time times sound speed regardless of the direction of travel Soundings outside of this slant range are not converted 5 Select the Range Filtering check box to implement this option 6 Click the up or down arrow buttons to select a minimum and maximum distance Pre Filtering The Pre Filtering option controls which soundings in each swath are considered for conversion by calculating the mean depth and standard deviation within a swath sector or horizontal bin Any 104 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Sector Angle Data Thinning Convert Data Options for Specific Formats soundings that fall outside the set multiple of the standard deviation are not converted This pre filtering is done in two passes The first removes the most obvious outliers Then a second pass computes a new mean using a better set of soundings Ultimately the soundings are sorted by their residual from the mean and those closest to the mean are converted The actual number of soundings converted from within each sector is determined by the thinning factor if used 1 Select the Pre Filtering check box to implement this option 2 Determine a Threshold multiples of the standard deviation value by clicking the up and down arrow buttons The equivalent confidence value is displayed as a percentage The filtering and thinning methods are executed within a sector angle interval or a horizontal bin size The sector angle option divides the
413. rds and the Attitude source is Raw navigation datagram e Select either Raw Navigation Records or CMG from Navigation from the drop down list When any of the other Ship Navigation source options are selected these Gyro sources options are available Ping Header Ship Ping Header Sensor Attitude Packets e CMG from Navigation e CMG from SSS Navigation Header Gyro Records The XTF format attaches quality flags to soundings For example with Teledyne Reson sonars 0 represents the lowest quality and 3 represents the highest quality You can reject soundings with a specific flag These soundings are flagged as Rejected by Disabled Beam in HIPS 5 Select a quality flag so the soundings with that specific flag value are rejected when converted to HIPS format If you are converting C3D or QPS data you can apply filtering before moving to the next step See MuLTIBEAM FILTERING ON PAGE 128 If you do not want to apply filtering 6 Click Next to continue to the next step CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 127 Convert Data XTF 128 Multibeam Filtering To apply filters for Benthos C3D or QINSy QPS data 7 Select the Multibeam Filtering check box and click Parameters to select filtering options The Filtering options dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Filtering options Angle filter Port Stbd 30 175 30 75 V Range Filtering Om tara cag 10000m e e
414. re weighted and contribute to surface grid nodes based on TPU values and distance from the nodes The CUBE surface allows for multiple depth estimates or hypotheses to exist at a single grid node depending on the variation of the sounding data CUBE then uses Disambiguation to determine which hypothesis at each node is the most correct You can verify and if necessary override a CUBE decision in Subset Editor by nominating an alternative hypothesis as the depth Once these kinds of changes have been made to the CUBE surface the surface is updated A surface filter can then be applied to the data Any sounding data that is not in agreement with the selected hypotheses will be flagged as rejected By applying this surface filtering the number of manual edits required by the hydrographer to produce a clean sounding data set is greatly reduced When following a CUBE workflow this hypothesis editing process is performed instead of other filtering such as Swath or Subset Editor filters To examine an open CUBE Surface in Subset Editor 1 Select the Subset Editor command 2 Define the subset with a bounding box 3 Load the subset Data contained within the bounding box is loaded into the 3D Subset view 4 In the Subset Editor tab select the CUBE Hypothesis layer CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 259 CUBE Processing Hypothesis Editing ay HIPS Data 2D View ty 3D View Reference Surface
415. rea to which the suppression is applied Radius Value The radius defined as metres on the ground or as the number of millimetres between soundings at map scale Radius Map Scale Value to apply to scale 212 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces Bounding Polygon Properties A bounding polygon displays properties similar to those of a parent BASE surface Extents General Creation and Sources See Properties oF BASE Surraces ON PAGE 204 One property specific to bounding polygons is the ability to adjust the boundary so that it more closely delineates the extent of the surface Properties El Extents El General Vertical Coordinate System Unknown CS E Creation Comments Platform Name sample vessel Sources How closely the bounding polygon fits the extents is determined by the level of detail used to create the polygon Settings in the Level field in the Properties window can be used to rebuild the polygon with a different resolution By default polygons are created at a Medium level The polygon can be recreated using a Coarse level less detail or a Fine level more detail To change the Level property 1 Select the Bounding Property layer in the Layers tab CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 213 Create BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces 2 Select the Level field in the Properties window 3 Choose a different s
416. reading from the Gyro data fields e Ping Header Ship e Ping Header Sensor e Attitude Packets e Raw Navigation Records e CMG from Navigation e CMG from SSS Navigation e Header Gyro Records CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data XTF The XTF format flags repeated pings over an area as hidden data 10 Select the Convert Hidden Data check box to include this data type in the SIPS project 11 To enhance the image by scaling the intensity values click the Apply Image Enhancement check box 12 Click Next Step 9 Convert Layback This dialog box contains options for converting horizontal tow fish layback or tow cable length distances in side scan data There are also options for reading the dynamic depth information for a remote operated vehicle ROV 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 9 TF Convert Layback CableOut Data from Lapback field from CableOut Field multiplier 1 00 Calculate sensor depth Ausiliary field 1 sensor height Convert GPS height from Ocean Tide Convert ROY Depth from Auxiliary field o from Sensor Depth field 13 If you want to recompute side scan towfish positions in HIPS with the recorded horizontal layback or tow cable length data make sure the Cable Out Layback box is checked 14 Select one of the following options e from Layback field The distance from the vessel towpoint to the towfish e from Cable Out field Th
417. reate an attribute layer that displays the density of soundings contributing to a node Mean create an attribute layer that displays the mean of all soundings contributing to a node e Standard Deviation create an attribute layer that displays the standard deviation from the mean e Shoal create an attribute layer that displays the shoalest soundings contributing to a node e Deep create an attribute layer that displays the deepest soundings 7 Click Finish The Uncertainty BASE Surface is created 200 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE surface Step 3 Shoalest Depth True Position BASE surface Step 3 Shoalest Depth True Position Add Survey Lines If you selected Shoalest Depth True Position in Step 2 the Step 3 dialog box displays the following options The options specific to this surface type are Median Horizontal Uncertainty and Vertical Uncertainty which enable you to create surface attribute layers from those kinds of data If such data does not exist for the lines selected the surface creation will continue without these attributes If at a later time uncertainty data becomes available a surface recomputation can be invoked and the surface will be updated accordingly BASE Surface Wizard Step 3 of 3 Add survey lines C Use selected lines _ Ignore lines with errors Include additional bathymetry Include status Accepted Examined Outstanding Additional Attri
418. recision IEEE negative values 64 bit 8 byte floating point 1 79769313486231570E 308 to 4 94065645841246544E 324 positive values 4 94065645841246544E 324 to 1 79769313486231570E 308 Process gt BASE Surface gt Difference Surfaces Menu For example Depth layers can be compared but you can t compare a Density layer to a Depth layer since the former contains Integer data and the latter is Float When you select a layer in the Difference Surface dialog box its data type is displayed in the Data Type field To compare two open surfaces 1 Select a surface or attribute layer in the Layers tab 2 Select the Difference Surfaces command The Difference Surface dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 229 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands Difference Surfaces Source surfaces Surface 1 Surface 2 sample_sheet E imSurface imSurface E genJ31 Deep a multi Density Deep Depth Density Mean Depth amp Shoal amp Mean Std_Dev amp Shoal E genJ31 Std_Dev y m a O h Data typ Output surface Name D HIPS dataa Fieldsheets jan31Fundy csar Any open surfaces are listed in the Surface fields 3 Click the expand icon beside a layer in the Surface 1 list to view the available attribute layers 4 Select an attribute layer to use as the data source for the difference calcul
419. red in HIPS as time series data Water Line Set to True to apply the waterline offset in the HVF Water Line from Installation Parameters Set to True to apply the waterline value from the InstallationParameters xml file generated by the converter Height Correction Type an amount as a Static offset to the GPS antenna Time Offset Type a value in seconds to apply as a time offset 7 Click OK to apply CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Correct for Tide GPS Tide The GPS Tide is calculated for the selected line s The settings in the dialog box are saved in a GPS Tide file in the line directory You can open and view the GPS tide data in the Attitude Editor ATTITUDE EDITOR ON PAGE 9 Sounding datum model files in gridded binary bin or ASCII xyz format can be opened in HIPS and SIPS as background data See Open BackGROUND Data on PAGE 46 in the Reference Guide CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 151 Correct for Tide GPS Tide 152 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Compute TPU Total Propagated Uncertainty TPU is used to assign a horizontal error estimate HzTPU and a depth error estimate Dp TPU to each sounding In this chapter TOTAL PROPAGATED UNCERTAINTY cccceceeessseeeeeceeseeees 154 COMPUTE TIPU irii 156 TRU PITERING nganan aa 159 APPLY FILTER escoisen anna 161 LOAD ERROR DATA ccccsssscdscisiuciieecesatatdacctrectadactuanaitenss 163
420. rements Transducer motion offsets for sweep surveys are entered in the Sweep specific parameters fields 5 Type the estimated observed heave offset in the Peak to Peak Heave field 6 Type the roll values for the transducers in the Max Roll field 7 Type the pitch values for the transducers in the Max Pitch field You can use previously loaded RMS data in the TPU computation instead of data from the vessel file 8 Select Vessel Settings to use vessel data If you select Vessel Settings and RMS data has been loaded it will not be used 9 Select Error Data to use RMS data If you select Error Data and no RMS data is available vessel settings will be used If you select Error Data and one or more of the RMS data attributes are not available then a zero value will be used for the missing attribute Note If you choose to use RMS data in computing TPU and true heave RMS has been loaded via the Load True Heave process Compute TPU will override the Down Heave RMS values loaded from the Load Error Data process and use the true heave RMS data loaded with Load True Heave 10 Click Compute The results are displayed in the Output tab of the Worksheet window A log file is also created showing the results 158 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide TPU Filtering 5 Tools gt Set Filters ie w Z Compute TPU TPU Filtering TPU filtering can be applied with one of the HIPS and SIPS automa
421. ribute and the Colour fill tiles is set to True the tiles will be displayed in red if the tiles have not been examined status Incomplete yellow if the tiles are partially complete The tiles were only partially covered by a subset that has been marked as complete green if the cleaning of the tiles is complete As well the numeric value for the attribute status can be displayed using the Display tile value field When this field is set to True the tiles will display the value 0 for Incomplete 1 for Partially complete or 2 for Completed The example below shows tiles with Cleaning status set as the active attribute and both Colour fill tiles and Display tile value set to True CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 345 Process Data in Subsets Track Progress with Subset Tiles Window gt Properties Properties Pop up Menu 346 These cleaning status values can also be viewed in the Selection tab of the Worksheet window when tiles are selected To set properties for the tiles layer 1 Select a tile layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Select the Properties window command The Properties window shows the display options for tiles Properties E Tiles Active attribute Cleaning_Status Colour map SubsetTiles Display level Automatic Colour fill tiles V True Transparency 0 Show tile borders V True Border colour B 100 100 100 Display tile value
422. ribute from the Select Reference Surface list A template file is an XML file that contains output from the Quality Report You can save the output as a template file or open an existing template file If you open an existing template file the settings saved in that file are applied to the options in the other dialog boxes 2 Select the Use template file check box to create or open a template file 3 Click Browse to select a location and name for the file or select an existing file 4 Click Next CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 307 Data QC Quality Control Reports QC Report Step 2 The QC Report Wizard Step 2 dialog box is displayed OC Report Wizard Step 2 of 3 Select statistics s544 s57 Available Active t4 Special Oder Add gt gt Lier Order 2 User Def This dialog box selects the IHO standard for determining what percentage of soundings fall within a selected error limit for depth accuracy You can use the S 44 Ed 4 survey orders or S 57 CATZOC zones of confidence For more information on how error limit for depth accuracy is calculated see TPU FILTERING ON PAGE 159 S44 is selected by default If you select 57 the dialog box is refreshed to show the s 57categories relevant to S 67CATZOC zones of confidence Select statistics O S44 S57 Available Active Al a User Def 1 Select S44 or S57 2 To display a ca
423. ributor Deep Density Depth Mean Shoal Std_Dev Uncertainty O Bounding Polygon i D K The combined BASE Surface reproduces all the attribute layers contained in the source Surfaces 228 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands Difference Surfaces Create a surface showing the differences in attribute values between two BASE Surfaces The Difference Surface function is useful for comparing changes to an area A surveyed area can change considerably over time due to the redistribution of sediment with the currents This redistribution can cause changes in depths A difference surface can be used to find these changes by comparing two surfaces for the same area that were created at different times Note the difference surface is not part of a field sheet and is not saved with the project However it can be opened using the Open Background Data command To use this function the surfaces to be compared must cover part or all of the same area and the data in the attribute layers being compared must be of the same type The data types include Type Size Format Range Short 16 bit 2 byte integer 32 768 to 32 767 no decimal points Integer 32 bit 4 byte integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 no decimal point Float single precision IEEE 754 1E 44 to 3 4E 38 positive or negative 32 bit 4 byte floating point Double double p
424. ries While the original items in the Vertical Reference System database are read only any user created entries can be deleted To delete a user defined entry 1 Select the entry 2 Right click in the pane and select Delete from the pop up menu 3 Click OK in the dialog box to confirm the deletion CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 217 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands BASE Surface Commands File gt Open Field Sheets Menu up 5 Delete Pop Process gt BASE Surface gt Add to Menu Tool i 218 Open To open a BASE surface you first need to open the field sheet in which it was created 1 Select the Open Field Sheets command The Open Field Sheets dialog box is displayed 2 Select one or more field sheet files from the list 3 Click Open The field sheet filename is displayed in the Layers tab of the Control Window and the field sheet outline s is shown in the Display window 4 Click the icon to expand the field sheet file tree 5 Select the BASE Surface check box The BASE Surface is now visible in the Display window Delete Permanently delete a BASE surface from a field sheet 1 Right click on a BASE surface layer in the Control Window and select the Delete command from the pop up menu The BASE Surface layer is permanently deleted from the field sheet Add to BASE Surface The Add to BASE Surface command applies new
425. ries in the database are read only Each entry has a unique name and numerical identifier Used defined entries can also be added to the database using the Editor To open the Vertical Reference System Editor 1 Select the Reference System Editor command The Vertical Reference System Editor is displayed 1 Use of material from OGP Surveying and Positioning Committee s EPSG Geodetic Parameter Registry does not imply endorsement by OGP Surveying and Positioning Committee of CARIS products or services CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 215 Create BASE Surfaces Vertical Reference System Vertical Reference System Editor Fair Isle Fahud Height Datum Fair Isle Fao Ellipsoids j ica iyi Faroe Islands Vertical Reference Flannan Isles Foula Gebrauchshohen ADRIA Genoa Gisborne 1926 Guadeloupe 1951 Guadeloupe 1988 Scope Ha Tien 1960 Areas of applicability for the Datum Helsinki 1960 v The leftmost column lists the types of coordinate system elements for which you can view properties Ref Systems 2 Select the category of data you want to view for example Datums This will activate the listing of all the entries for that category to view the properties of a specific entry 3 Select an item from the list The example above shows the Fair Isle datum selected The properties for the selected datum or ellipsoid or vertical reference system are displayed in the pane on t
426. rix size determines the maximum and minimum values for the neighbours field For example if you select 3 x 3 for the matrix size then the possible maximum number of neighbouring nodes with pixels is 9 and the minimum number is 3 5 Type the number of neighbouring nodes used to interpolate pixels 6 Click OK The interpolated mosaic is created and displayed with an _Interp extension in the data tree in the Layers tab As you continue to re interpolate the mosaic surface the effects accumulate to remove any remaining gaps To interpolate again 1 Select the interpolated mosaic in the Layers tab 2 Select the Interpolate command The second interpolation is applied to the selected mosaic layer It does not create a new layer CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 443 Process Imagery Data Conflict Resolution Conflict Resolution The Resolve Conflict dialog box can appear in any operation where there are multiple GeoBaRs for a line but only one GeoBaR can be used for the operation For example when loading a GeoBar on a line that has more than one GeoBaR created or when creating a mosaic where multiple GeoBaRs have been created for the lines Use the Resolve Conflict dialog box to choose a GeoBaR based on attributes such as resolution or source type as well as the option to select a GeoBaR manually from a list Resolve Conflict 1 of 1 total More than one GeoBaR could be used For this operation number Please cho
427. rk in a similar fashion to the playback controls in the Side Scan Editor To scroll automatically through the data 1 Click on the Plan View window 2 Click First Profile on the Water Column Data toolbar to select the first profile visible in the Plan View 3 Click Start playback to start scrolling the data HIPS will move up the track line profile by profile changing the view of the water column data until it reaches the last profile loaded in the Plan View 4 Click Reverse playback to scroll back down the track line 5 Click Stop playback to pause the scrolling 6 Click Last Profile to reset the view to the last profile loaded in the plan View Playback is not available when data is stacked 464 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Water Column Data Display water column data Water Column Toolbar The Water Column toolbar contains the controls to open and close the Across track and Along track windows to display the bottom detection and to control the play back of the imagery Toggle along track Toggle display of Display Head 1 data view window bottom detections Toggle across Water Column track view Display Head 2 window data Go to first Select water profile column data Reverse Stop Start Go to last playback playback playback profile The Display across track and Display along track tool buttons open and close their respective windows The Bottom Detection button toggles the bottom detection o
428. rmat SWATHPlus 1 Type a value in the Speed of sound field to apply sound velocity to the imported data Teledyne There are no other options specifically for the Teledyne format UNB 1 Select one or two transducers 2 Select the Convert Sonar option if you want to import side scan data Winfrog 1 Select Single or Dual Frequency 2 Select attitude records to be converted CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 3 Specify the speed of sound so that slant range data can be generated from the measured sounding depths 4 Choose the navigation records to be converted CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 125 Convert Data XTF XTF Ship Navigation and Attitude Convert Bathymetry 126 The XTF format converter contains options for converting both bathymetry and side scan 3 CARIS HIPS and SIPS Conversion Wizard Step 7 XTF Ship Navigation Raw Navigation Records v Attitude Attitude datagram Raw navigation datagram Convert Bathymetry Convert Multibeam o Gyro data field Attitude Packets v Reject soundings using quality flags v o0 1 2 03 C Multibeam Filtering C3D QPS For both sonar types you must indicate the field used as the source for navigation and gyro heading data 1 Select from the drop down list one of the following sources of navigation data e Raw Navigation Records e Position Data Records
429. rol window See View BASE Surraces on pace 203 for more information on display options Advanced Options for CUBE surface The Advanced Options dialog box displays the detailed configuration settings applied to the CUBE surface These CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 255 CUBE Processing Generating CUBE Surfaces settings are contained in the CUBEparams xml file found in the installed Template folder You can use the settings in this file or select a custom configuration file If you use a custom file make sure that you use the same syntax and structure as the CUBEparams xml file Advanced Options Configuration Default Comment This is the system default settings for CUBE Surface Creation Estimate Offset Capture Distance Scale Capture Distance Minimum Horizontal Error Scalar Disambiquation Density Strength Limit Locale Strength Maximum Locale Search Radius pixels Null Hypothesis Test Minimum Number of Neighbours Standard Deviation Ratio Neighbour Strengh Maximum 2 50 1 Optional Click Browse to select another configuration file The file path is displayed in the Template File field 2 Select a configuration file from the Configuration drop down list Default Deep or Shallow You can adjust the configuration settings can in these files but you must save changes before they can be applied If you do not want to ove
430. rs tab 3 Select the Tiling command The Tiling Wizard Step 1 dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 397 Create Product Surfaces Tiling a field sheet Tiling Wizard Step 1 21x Select Method Binning Tiling C QTC seabed classification a 4 Select the method of tiling In this example Tiling is selected 5 Click Next The Tiling Wizard Step 2 dialog box is displayed Tiling Wizard Step 2 RIES Tiling Options Minimum Tile Size Same Size for all Tiles Tile by Depth Tolerance fi m Tile by Depth Range File Browse Tile by Depth Range Interval fo m Starting Depth fo m Ending Depth fo m Eee Tiling options This step is to define which of the tiling methods will be used to create tiles tiling by size by depth tolerance or by depth range First a minimum tile size must be set since it is an important criteria in each of these methods 6 Set the minimum tile size by clicking the arrow buttons Next select a tiling option from the following Same Size For All Tiles Set all tiles to the minimum tile size 398 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Tiling a field sheet This method will subdivide the data until all tiles are equal to the selected size No other statistical criteria will be applied The result will be equal sized tiles similar to the result from Binning as illustrated below Til
431. rt 500 Unmask contours 366 update backscatter imagery after swath cleaning 332 Update Coverage 205 Update existing survey lines 83 UTC no distinction made for 39 39 39 V VCF Vessel Configuration File see HVF 26 vertical axis in profile 370 Vertical Reference System Editor 215 vertical uncertainty 224 Vessel Configuration file 26 Vessel Editor coordinate system 53 dynamic draft 46 ellipsoid 55 gyro 43 heave 43 navigation 42 pitch 44 feference position 53 roll 45 swath transducer location 41 sweep transducers location 48 time error 40 time stamp 39 towed sensors location 49 TPU 51 vessel outline 35 waterline data 50 vessel file create new 27 location 28 motion sensors 32 multibeam settings 29 Multi transducer settings 30 vessel measurements 35 Vessel Properties 70 vessel shape 35 View sediment analysis overlay 455 view critical soundings in an Editor 301 in Display window 302 view data 272 View Sediment Patches 454 view WCI data 463 WwW Water Column Data in HIPS 460 water column data in Swath Editor 462 Water Column Data toolbar 465 water column imagery 459 water column imagery in stacked view 462 waterfall view in Mosaic Editor 416 waterline data in vessel file 50 WCI apply slant range filter 469 bottom detection 471 colour attributes 471 display options 471 8ize of points 471
432. rwrite the CUBEparams xml file select New and create a new template file e Deep This configuration is intended to be used in areas where small features are not likely shifting sand shoals not important steep grades and deep water or separately located with sidescan 256 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 3 CUBE Processing Generating CUBE Surfaces This parameter set corresponds with NOAA s 2006 Complete gridding standard e Shallow This file defines the parameters for the CUBE algorithm and are intended to be used in areas of critical underkeel clearance in areas with numerous small features and multibeam that can stand on its own without feature by feature sidescan correlation This parameter set corresponds to NOAA s 2006 Object Detection gridding requirements New select New to save any changes to the default settings or to create a new configuration Otherwise the changes will be saved to the CUBEparams xml file If you select New the New CUBE Configuration dialog box is displayed New CUBE Configuration Enter value for the configuration name 4 Optional Type the name for the new configuration setting and click OK 5 Optional Type any additional information in the Comments field 6 The default values in the following fields can be adjusted as needed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide You will be prompted to save your changes before the configuration can be applied Estimate
433. ry window 3 Scroll through the table to the SBET Nav Att File column If the navigation data has been modified by the Load Nav Attitude command the name of the loaded SBET is listed in the SBET Nav Att File column If navigation data has not been altered the field will display Not Loaded The SBET RMS File column will list the SBET file used when user performs the Process gt Load Error Data function See SBET FILES LOADED ON PAGE 165 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Classify Lines 5 Edit gt Classify Lines Use this command to set or change a classification flag for a track line to help distinguish between line types Data QC Classify Lines 1 Make sure the Ship Track Lines layer is selected in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Select a track line in the Display window or Control window 3 Select the Classify Lines command The Classify Lines dialog box is displayed Classify Lines Check line Shoal Examination Line Patch test line Track line 4 Select from four options for setting the line classification flag e Check Line A line that is run perpendicular to the survey and is used to check the validity of survey data e Patch Test Line A line that is run over a surveyed area to calibrate sensor and sonar offsets e Shoal Examination Line A line that is run over a surveyed area to re check possible shoals on the sea floor Track
434. s e The X Y Z offsets are zero because the Simrad data acquisition has already applied static draft and shifted the swath profile to the vessel reference point e The Roll Pitch Yaw transducer mounting rotations are typically zero because the Simrad data acquisition has already applied patch test calibration results Navigation The navigation section of the HVF describes the location of the navigation source for example antenna or motion sensor This section is used as a link between the fixed positioning coordinate system and the instantaneous vessel coordinate system 1 Click Navigation in the Sensors list box so the selection is highlighted and the navigation data fields are visible 2 Type data as needed in the following fields e Date The year and Julian day of the current navigation time stamp Time The hour and minute of the current navigation time stamp e Time Correction The time correction value The X Y Z fields set the location of the navigation source from the Reference Point 0 e X The athwart ship distance of the source positive to starboard e Y The along ship distance of the source positive towards the bow e Z The vertical distance of the source positive into the water e Ellipsoid From the drop down list select the ellipsoid on which the navigation is based The ellipsoid should be the same as the one used in the survey If you will be applying GPS tide data it must use the same ellips
435. s on pace 20 of the Reference guide for details on selecting and adjusting the columns displayed To view records for entire lines in a HIPS and SIPS Editor use the Query Line command 1 Select data in any editor window 2 Select a Query Line Command The records for the entire line are displayed in the Selection tab in the same tabular format as the Query function provides This data can be rejected or accepted from the pop up menu in the Selection tab Line Report Use the Line Report command to save line profiles directly to a text file The saved report will contain a table of values under the same column headings that can be viewed in the Detailed Line Query window As well as the detailed line data the report also shows the totals of the values for these specific columns Total Time e Length e Total Nav e Accept Nav e Reject Nav e Total Depth e Accept Depth Reject Depth The text file can be opened in a text editor but column data can be best viewed in a spreadsheet To create a line report 1 Select a line in the Display window 2 Select the Line Report command The Choose Details dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 275 Data QC Query Data Choose Details Delimiter Tab Include headers C Include column totals Details Day y Project ne Min Time Mair C Total Time Merged Outdated SR Corrected C Line Class Line Reject Heading Leng
436. s Density Mean Standard Deviation Shoal Deep Maximum File Size 675 6 KB 1 Select an IHO S 44 Order from the drop down list The a constant depth error and b factor of depth dependent errors fields are automatically filled when a survey order is selected The values are read from HIPS System THO_Standards xml 2 If one or more track lines were selected before the BASE Surface process was started the Use Selected Lines check box is enabled Select this check box if you want to create the BASE Surface for the selected line or lines Use the Ignore Lines with errors option so that the surface creation is not interrupted if it encounters bad data The process will skip the part of the line containing bad data and continue creating the surface with the next line Once the surface is complete you can decide whether to remove the partial line 3 Check Ignore Lines with errors to have bad line data omitted from the surface 4 Check Include Additional Bathymetry to include water column bathymetery added to project 5 Select either the Examined or Outstanding check boxes to include data with these status flags in the BASE Surface process The Accepted check box is selected by default CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 199 Create BASE Surfaces BASE surface Step 3 Uncertainty Weighting 6 Select one or all Additional Attributes to create an attribute layer of the BASE Surface that displays that attribute Density c
437. s gt Selected Lines All Lines Tool 162 3 Type depth levels in the Minimum and Maximum fields to set a range for the filters 4 Select a survey order or zone of confidence option All fields in the User defined option are activated when this option is selected 5 Type Depth and Horizontal values 6 Run one of the Filtering commands For other automated filters see AttituDE FILTER ON PAGE 286 AUTOMATIC FILTERING ON PAGE 325 SINGLE BEAM FILTERING ON PAGE 105 and Protect CRITICAL SOUNDINGS ON PAGE 304 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 3 o Process gt Load Error Data Compute TPU TPU Filtering Load Error Data Use this process to override error values in the HIPS Vessel File with real time error values The Load Error Data process generates a HIPS RMS root mean square file which can be used in TPU computations Applanix POS MV files and Applanix POSProc files contain real time attitude navigation and RMS error values recorded during survey This means that different error values are recorded for different conditions resulting in more precise error estimates than the static error values recorded in the HIPS Vessel File The files must be timestamped with valid GPS entries to fix the time of the data and must contain the Julian date of the day the data was acquired in the form YYYY JJJ filename or filename YYYY JJJ 1 Select a track line in the Displ
438. s at the top right of the of dialog box SA Category Alphabetical Field Function General define the input and output settings fro the export Band Name Select the surface layer to be exported Compression Output Type Export the selected BASE surface to a single Output File or as a tile set to multiple files in an Output Folder Output File Click Browse to save the name and location for the single file exported file Name appears in the field Output Folder Click Browse to locate the destination folder for the multiple files exported tile set Tile Width Define width of the multiple tiled files The units are those set in Tools gt Options gt Display gt Units Tile Height Define height of the multiple tiled files The units are those set in Tools gt Options gt Display gt Units Tile Prefix Type a prefix for exported tile files The files will have a tile number appended to the file name based on the location of the tile in the surface The tile number is in the format RxC where R and C are the row and column index for the current tile With a prefix such as RTFM tiles would be numbered RTFM_1x1 RTFM_2x2 etc NOTE Attempting to export a large surface to a single file may cause an out of memory error if there is limited memory allotted to the application For larger surfaces it s recommend that you export a tile set Metadata provide metadata for the
439. s be included in the SVP file CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Sound Velocity Correction Sound Velocity Processing Nearest Distance Within Time Select the profile with a position nearest to the swath and has a timestamp nearest the time of the swath within a selected range The following diagram demonstrates the relationship of the profile options to the time location of the swath P1 A Line 1 ZS P3 P1 Previous in Time P3 Nearest Distance Within Time P2 Nearest in Time P4 Nearest in Distance P1 P2 and P3 all are calculated within a time period P4 is calculated independently of the time period CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 135 Sound Velocity Correction Sound Velocity Correction Sound Velocity Correction Menu Tool Process gt Sound Velocity Correction 136 The sound velocity correction process uses a ray tracing algorithm to apply the sound velocity profiles You can use either regular attitude data or smoothed data for applying vessel motion data to the ray tracing algorithm see AttituDE FILTER ON PAGE 286 The SVC process will select the profile to apply based on the method you select You can also choose to apply the last method used It is recommended that sound velocity correction be applied to bathymetry before cleaning the data Whenever SVC is applied the Merge command should also be applied to the data To apply Sound Velocity Correction 1 Select a trac
440. s reflect the sun elevation and azimuth values Properties for display of digits include the option to display data in engineering format instead of hydrographic format For example hydrographic format would show a depth as 12 Engineering format would display the same value as 12 7 to as many decimal places as set When using engineering digits for depth values sounding rounding rules are applied However only the last digit in the sounding will be rounded to ensure that the desired precision is not lost CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces Properties of BASE Surfaces Property Function Display Draw Cells Set to True to display a grid representing the nodes of the surface Image Draw Image Set to True to display the selected layer or grid Default setting is True Transparency Type a Transparency percentage for the selected layer the higher the percentage value the more transparent the layer will appear Shading Shading Enabled Set to True to turn on shading to heighten the ridge detail for fine scaled features Colour Enabled Set to display the attribute layer using the full colour map or file If set to False the layer will be displayed as grey only Sun Position 5 Click in the field to display the sun compass 6 Move the symbol to shift the light direction 7 Click in the display to see the change in shad ing When the sun symbol is in the
441. s that were not selected during disambiguation You can view alternative hypotheses and compare them against the selected ones If needed the alternative hypotheses can be nominated to replace the established hypotheses SHOW ALTERNATIVE HYPOTHESES ON PAGE 263 SHOW ONLY SELECTED ALTERNATIVES ON PAGE 264 SHow OnLy HYPOTHESES WITH ALTERNATIVES ON PAGE 264 1 Select the Show Alternative Hypotheses check box and click Apply The 3 D and 2 D Views are refreshed to highlight the alternative hypotheses The following image shows a 3 D View with the alternative hypotheses displayed in red The red squares represent hypotheses that were not selected during disambiguation The vertical lines that run between the nodes are viewing aids to match these alternative hypotheses to the ones selected by CUBE 1 To replace an hypothesis select an alternative hypothesis in the 2D or 3D window The Nominate and Clear commands are now active 2 Select the Nominate command The alternative hypothesis is now highlighted in blue This means that the nominated hypothesis has replaced the established one CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 263 CUBE Processing Hypothesis Editing Show only Selected Alternatives Show Only Hypotheses with Alternatives 264 All nominated hypotheses are given the highest confidence value of 0 0 To compare nominated nodes against the existing nodes 3 Clear the Show Alternative Hypotheses che
442. s un selected designated soundings are proc essed no differently from other soundings Using Depth Threshold values allows the finalized surface to contain only a specified range of depth nodes The finalized CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 225 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands surface will be clipped so that the surface will only contain depths where the surface resolution is optimal 5 Select the Depth Threshold check box to create a finalized Surface that displays only node depths between the minimum and maximum depth values 6 Type the minimum and maximum depth values in their respective fields 7 Click OK A finalized BASE Surface is generated and visible in the Display window The finalized BASE Surface is listed in the Layers tab of the Control window Combine The Combine options stitches two or more BASE Surfaces together to form one surface This option is used when you have created finalized BASE Surfaces with different depth thresholds see Finauize BASE Surrace on PAGE 224 or when you have two adjacent Surfaces with different resolutions The geographical extent of the combined BASE Surface is determined by the geographical extent of the field sheet Surface A Surface A displays depths between 0 and 16 m Surface B displays depths greater than 16 m The Combine function joins these two Surfaces into one Surface TO Surface B 226 CARIS HIPS a
443. saic Editor gt Sediment Analysis Graph A Menu Tool CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Sediment Analysis Sediment Analysis Graph You can view the results of sediment analysis graphically in the Sediment Analysis Graph window This graphs the Interface Volume and Kirchhoff backscatter intensity values to angle of nadir in degrees To open this window 1 2 3 4 Click open the Analysis tab and select Advanced mode from the Display drop down list Select Sediment Data from the Source drop down list Select a survey line Select the Open Sediment Analysis graph command The graph is displayed Sediment Analysis Window _ co A gt 2 a c fet _ fet E fim O lez x O ia aa Angle from Nadir degrees 10 0 10 The graph can display three kinds of backscatter or the total backscatter or all four colour coded as follows Light green line is Interface Backscatter occurring at the sea floor water interface this is the main component of the initially returned acoustic energy Light red line is Volume Backscatter secondary in time this is sound energy returned or scattered from within the sediment The less homogeneous the sediment the more the sound wave is disturbed 453 Process Imagery Data Sediment Analysis Graph options Close graph 454 Yellow line is Kirchhoff Backscatter This model accounts for the roughness of the
444. sea floor particularly for grazing angles close to 90 degrees Blue line is Total Backscatter the combined backscatter from the three backscatter sources This is analyzed to determine approximate grain size The line colours can be changed from these defaults in Tools gt Options gt Display gt Mosaic Editor dialog box Also shown are port and starboard lines in their traditional colours To set which backscatter forms will be displayed in the graph window 5 Select Advanced from the Display field on the Analysis tab 6 Click the Graph Options button at the bottom of the Analysis tab The Sediment Analysis Graph Options dialog box is displayed Sediment Analysis Graph Opti Backscatter Traces V Total Interface F volume l Kirchhoff cancel 7 Select the check boxes for the types you wish to display Click OK To close the graph window 8 Toggle the Open Sediment Analysis graph command off or click the toolbar button again View Sediment Patches This option displays the patches as a vector overlay on the main display To locate a specific patch along a line 1 Select the GeoBaR layer 2 Inthe Properties window set Show All Sediment Analysis Patches to True 3 Click open the Sediment Analysis tab 4 Click on the line in the Display window at the point at which you want to see the sediment values The patch for that part of the line will be highlighted CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide
445. sensors can be added by selecting them from the Available Sensors list on the Sensor Layout dialog box 1 Select the Sensor Layout command Use the space bar to move forward along a track line and lt CTRL gt lt spacesar gt to move back Query data Use the Query command to display information about selected data 1 Select the data to be queried 2 Select the Query command The following data is displayed in the Selection tab time stamp d time difference in seconds from last time stamp sensor value in either degrees or metres feet d value difference from last value e status You can change the data status flag to rejected or accepted CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 285 Data QC Attitude data Menu Tools gt Attitude Editor Tool a Menu Tools gt Set Filters Tool Y ZE fia 286 1 Select the data in the Selection tab so it is highlighted 2 Select a Reject or Accept command The data is marked as accepted or rejected depending to the option you selected Filter Attitude Data Attitude Editor is displayed within the HIPS and SIPS interface To open the Editor 1 Select a track line so it is highlighted 2 Select the Attitude Editor command The Attitude Editor is displayed See Attitupe EDITOR INTERFACE ON PAGE 10 Attitude Filter You can reject data with residual values that fall outside user defined threshold limits and a
446. sition fix at that time For each depth record the position of the sounding is calculated based on the profile centre position and any gyro heave pitch roll corrections that are appropriate this is echo sounder system dependent Tide is interpolated and applied to each depth record Draft is applied A processed depths file is created for each line This file contains the final computed geographic position for each depth record If any of these offsets or parameters is changed the data must be Merged again 169 Merge Merge Process Apply Merge Lines must have tide loaded before they can be merged To apply Merge 1 Select a line or group of lines 2 Process gt Merge 2 Select the Merge command from the Process menu or toolbar The Merge dialog box is displayed 3 Options C Apply Refraction Coefficients C Apply GPS Tide C Apply Delayed Heave Select smoothed sensors to be applied Cl Gyro sow C Heave C Delta Draft Pitch _ GPS Tide Roll _ Tide 3 Select the Apply refraction coefficients check box to apply any data created in Refraction Editor See CoRRECTION FOR REFRACTION ARTIFACTS ON PAGE 334 4 Select the Apply GPS tide check box to use GPS tide data instead of tidal observation data 5 Select the Apply Delayed Heave check box to apply delayed heave values instead of regular heave If you choose this option and no delayed heave data is available
447. sliders to set a filter range between 64 dB and zero These intensity settings are retained so that the same filter range can be applied when the data is loaded into Subset Editor Stacked view Use the Enable Stacked View option to see all the across track views layered on top of each other in the Across track window 1 Make a selection of profiles in the Plan view window 2 Select the Enable Stacked View check box The Across track view will display the stacked images 466 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Water Column Data WCI Controls in Swath Editor 3 Use the scroll bar on the Plan View or your middle mouse button to move the selection to other profiles The stacked view will be refreshed with the new data You cannot use playback when the data is in Stacked mode CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 467 Process Water Column Data Add WC Bathymetry to Project Add WC Bathymetry to Project Tool S Add selection to Q e ao 468 Additional Bathymetry Viewing WCI data in Swath Editor enables you to determine critical data that can then be selected and added as bathymetry in the project As well you can then use the editing tools to Reject Accept and Designate the new additional bathymetry data To select data in the Across or Along track windows 1 Click the Select button on the Water Column toolbar 2 Use Select by Range or Select By Lasso to select data 3 Right click on the
448. soundings track lines and swaths HIPS To HOB on PAGE 529 HIPS to HTF Export data to a Hydrographic Transfer Format HTF file The HTF is a text file that contains a header section and a sounding record The Export wizard can save a header section so it can be loaded into multiple HTF files HIPS To HTF on pace 531 Mosaic to ASCII Export mosaic layers to an ASCII file Mosaic To ASCII on PAGE 535 Mosaic to Image Export a mosaic as a TIFF image for further processing in a CARIS product or other application SURFACE To IMAGE ON PAGE 501 Sediment Analysis to ASCII Export the results of Sediment Analysis done in Mosaic Editor SEDIMENT ANALYSIS TO ASCII on PAGE 539 SIPS to UNISIPS Export SIPS data to a Unified Sonar Imaging Processing System UNISIPS format SIPS To UNISIPS on Pace 540 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 493 Export Data Export Wizard Export Wizard The first step to exporting data with the Export Wizard is to select the file format to be exported The number of dialog boxes displayed in the subsequent steps depends on the export format selected in the Step 1 dialog box To use the HIPS Export Wizard 1 Select the Export command The Export Wizard is displayed File gt Export a Menu Tool Step 1 Select Format The Select Format dialog box lists all the formats available for exportin
449. splayed on the Process tab and then view and correct the GeoBaR imagery by adjusting these values Then you can apply these settings from the created GeoBaR to other track lines GeoBaRs are displayed in the Display window and are listed by name in the Layers tab A GeoBaR has three child layers Intensity displays the current intensity including edits Original Intensity displays the intensity when the GeoBaR was created before edits to GeoBaR e Weights displays the computed weights based on sonar geometry These values are used when compiling a mosaic based on the Auto Seam or Full Blend methods GeoBaRs remain open when Mosaic Editor is closed Mosaic Editor will recognize GeoBaRs that are already open and will not try to load an open GeoBaR CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 417 Process Imagery Data Create GeoBars 418 Naming GeoBaRs Each GeoBaR should be given a unique filename particularly when there will be many created in a project A convenient way to standardize naming and at the same time ensure unique file names for all GeoBaRs is to use formatting tags combined with text If you try to create a GeoBaR with the same name as an existing one you will be warned that the new GeoBaR will overwrite the older one and be given the option to proceed Formatting tags available for GeoBaR naming are Formatting Tag Adds to GeoBaR name SY Current year Y
450. surface 1 Select a BASE Surface parent layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Select the Add Layer command from the right click menu The Compute Layer dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 219 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands 220 Compute Layer Layer name Shifted Depth Layer Z axis convention Available attributes a Density F Depth E Hypothesis _Count Hypothesis _Strength v Corrected Depth 3 opg 3 Type a name for the new surface layer in the Layer Name field The Layer Z axis convention field defines the Z axis convention for the data in the new layer The options are Depth with Z axis positive down to be used if the data in the new layer will contain depth values that are positive down e Height with Z axis positive up to be used if the data in the new layer will contain elevation values that are positive up Not applicable to be used if the data in the new layer will represent generic non Z values e g Std_Dev 4 Select a Layer Z axis convention from the drop down list The Available Attributes list displays the attribute layers currently present in the selected surface 5 Double click an attribute in the Available Attributes list to insert it into the conditions field below If there are spaces in the name of the selected attribute place quotation marks around the attribute in the conditions fiel
451. t oO lt D gt Find and Designate Menu Edit gt Status Flag gt Find and Designate Tool wa 342 Shoal soundings over significant seabed features can be flagged as Designated to ensure that these depths are maintained in charts and other standard hydrographic products Use the Designate commandes to flag for example the top of a mast in a wreck or the shoalest sounding in a cluster of soundings identifying an outcrop of rocks For more information see CRITICAL SOUNDINGS ON PAGE 297 1 Select the shoalest sounding from a cluster of soundings around a feature in Subset Editor 2 Select the Designated Soundings command The sounding is flagged as Designated Shoalest soundings can also be designated in Swath Editor The Find and Designate command automatically selects the shallowest sounding in cluster of highlighted soundings This feature reduces the time needed to designate shallowest soundings 1 Use the cursor to highlight soundings in Swath or Subset Editor 2 Optional Use the Query command to view the soundings in the Selection tab 3 Select the Find and Designate command The shoalest sounding among the cluster of highlighted soundings is now flagged as Designated in the Selection tab and displays the Designated symbol when viewed in Swath or Subset Editor CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Data in Subsets Track Progress with Subset Tiles
452. t Editor hypotheses can be given a rejected flag When a hypothesis is rejected it is retained in the Surface but is excluded from processing when disambiguation is run again or when filtering is applied 1 Select a hypothesis 2 Select the Reject command The hypothesis is now flagged as rejected To change rejected back to the accepted status and therefore available for further processing 1 Select a hypothesis 2 Select the Accept command The hypothesis is now flagged as accepted and is available for further processing To reject all hypotheses at a node 1 Select a hypothesis 2 Select the Reject Node command All hypotheses associated with the node are rejected To return hypotheses associated with a node to their normal status 1 Select a hypothesis 2 Select the Accept command All hypotheses associated with the node are flagged as accepted CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide CUBE Processing Hypotheses Cleaning Updating a CUBE Surface If changes are made to the data contributing to the surface the CUBE Surface can be rebuilt to show these changes using the following methods Select the Recompute BASE Surface command See Menu Process gt BASE RECOMPUTE SURFACE ON PAGE 221 Surface gt Recompute Tool z2 When recomputing a CUBE BASE Surface all CUBE BASE Surface editing including nominations hypothesis and node rejections are considered no longer v
453. t is applied to all data 8 Determine if the Box Size is in data points or time by selecting the Points or Seconds option 9 Click the Box Size up or down arrow buttons to select the number of adjacent data points 10 Click the Threshold up or down arrow keys until you reach a desired value Threshold is a multiple of the standard deviation sigma 11 Click Save As to save the filter settings to a HIPS filter file To use the filter 12 Select an Apply Filter command from the Tools menu The corresponding attitude data is rejected For other automated filters see AUTOMATIC FILTERING ON PAGE 325 TPU FILTERING ON PAGE 159 SINGLE BEAM FILTERING ON PAGE 105 and PROTECT CRITICAL SOUNDINGS ON PAGE 304 See also FILTER AND SMOOTH ON PAGE 16 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Delayed Heave Process gt Load Delayed Heave Menu AA Tool Options Data QC Delayed Heave Real time heave values are stored in HIPS during the conversion process Some systems also provide post processed heave data which must be separately loaded to the track line using the Load Delayed Heave function If the data is not stored in a supported format the Generic Data Parser may be used to import post processed heave data stored in an ASCII format HIPS currently supports these delayed heave formats TrueHeave and PFreeHeave To load delayed heave data 1 Select a track line 2 Selec
454. t the Amplitude Filtering check box to implement this option 5 Click the up or down arrow buttons to select a percentage value for rejecting soundings The Statistical Filtering option controls which soundings in each swath are considered for conversion This option calculates the mean depth and standard deviation within a swath sector or horizontal bin It then prevents any soundings that fall outside a multiple of the standard deviation from being converted If Statistical Filtering is used then the mean within the sector is re computed Ultimately soundings are sorted by their residual from the mean and those closest to the mean are converted The actual number of soundings converted from within each sector is determined by the thinning factor if used 6 Select the Statistical Filtering check box to implement this option 7 Determine a Threshold multiples of the standard deviation value by clicking the up and down arrow buttons The equivalent confidence value is displayed as a percentage The filtering and thinning methods are executed within a sector angle interval or a horizontal bin size The sector angle option divides the swath into sectors according to degree angles while the horizontal bin size divides the swath into horizontal sectors based on a specified across track distance Vessel motion and transducer mounting angles are considered when sector angle and horizontal bin locations are determined 1 Select the
455. t the Load Delayed Heave command The Load Delayed Heave dialog box is displayed Load Delayed Heave Delayed Heave Files Options J pply Time Offset seconde Reference Week Default 3 Click Add and select the Delayed Heave file The location of delayed Heave files can be set from the Directories tab of the Tools gt Options dialog box The file name is displayed in the dialog box 4 To remove a file select it and click Remove 5 Select the Apply Time Offset if the time stamps in the delayed heave files do not match the time stamps for the rest of the project CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 289 Data QC Delayed Heave 290 6 Type the offset value in seconds that will synchronize the time stamps in the delayed heave files with the project time stamps 7 Clear the Default check box and click Select Day to override the year Julian date with a calendar date If Default is checked the function will proceed as if the delayed heave file originates in the same GPS reference week as each of the HIPS data lines 8 To apply the delayed heave data to the track line click Load NOTE if True Heave RMS data has been loaded for a line it will override Down Heave RMS data loaded by the Load Error Data process when Compute TPU is run See also Loan Error Data ON PAGE 163 See also Compute TPU on pace 156 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Load Attitude Navigation Data
456. t to the profile line 1 Select the profile line 2 Press and hold the lt Ctrl gt key lt gt 3 Move the cursor to the place on the where you want to add a point Reposition aa point on the line 4 Click once 1 Select the profile line 2 Click on the point you want to move The RA cursor changes shape and the selected point Kou square turns red 3 Drag the point to its new location Move an entire profile line 1 Select the profile line 2 Move the cursor over the line until the cursor kia changes shape 3 Drag the line to a new location Rotate a profile line around a selected point 1 Select the line 2 Select a point on one of the lines The point turns red o 3 Hold down the lt Shift gt key 4 Move the cursor over the line until the cursor changes shape 5 Click then drag to rotate the line around the selected point Delete a point 1 Select the profile line 2 Select a point Selected point square will turn red Koy 3 Optional Press lt Ctrl gt and click on other points to select them 4 Press lt Delete gt or right click and select Delete from the pop up menu Redigitize parts of the profile line 1 Select the line 2 Select a point at either end of the line or on a specific point within the line Vv 3 Right click on the line and select Redigitize from the Edit Line pop up menu The cursor changes to the line digitizing shape 4 Click
457. ta command A standard Windows Open dialog box is displayed 2 Navigate to the desired tide zone file zdf 3 Click Open The outlines of the tide zones and their labels are drawn in the Display window The tide zones file is listed in the Layers tab of the Control window CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 147 Correct for Tide Tide Files Tide stations and weighted average 148 When an average tide is calculated from multiple tide stations the weight given to a tide station s data is inversely proportional to its distance from the vessel at that time In other words the further a station is from the survey line the less weight is accorded to the data from that station Tide Editor Tide Editor presents tide file information in both graphical and tabular formats You can use the editor to edit an existing file or to create a new tide file to apply to survey lines before the Merge process Tide Editor is a separate application that launched from the HIPS and SIPS interface CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide GPS Tide Process gt Compute GPS Tide Correct for Tide GPS Tide The Compute GPS Global Positioning System Tide function provides an alternative to normal tidal observation for reducing soundings to the sounding datum A single sounding datum height or a datum model file with a grid of datum heights can be applied with the GPS height during the computation As of HIPS and SIPS 8 0 3
458. te SoundingS 00 cece eee eee 342 Track Progress with Subset Tiles 2 00 343 Subset tile properties 0 002 e eee eee 345 Tracking Layer Options lt i 225a ccedudeabea Mevdaids 347 Tracking Cleaning StatuS 0000 eee eee eee 349 16 Subsets and BASE Surfaces 0000 ee eee 350 Open BASE surface in Subset Editor 350 Surface filter 5 6 cae Gtauseee bea Rid dewa ees bidiee onan 352 Create Product Surfaces 2000seeeeeee 355 Product Surfaces 2 cys wed een ce O Chee eRe eke ee Eh eSt 356 PrOCESS 2cccctgax eanna safe GaSnehes tixadeouns a 356 DGMCUSING 220020 beds eved eee hee ieewersiaees 356 Create a Product Surface 00s eee eee eee 358 CONUS eaa rar Gee ateeiSeate weu setae teaweseeee 361 Create Contours 2 000 cee ee 361 Contour Labelling 24 c08246sGe4 ccd eeveeds t4ieSSas 365 Masking Lines Behind Contour Labels 366 PICS occa Pine vee wee SSR awe eevee eee wee eke 367 Digitize a Profile vo ciwk bed ee ek BRS Ebee 6S Raw EA HOS 367 Create Profile by Superselection 0 05 369 Setting Profile Options 2 ce ecrseveeeeeeeebouneges 370 Import PROM 34 6 sha ee hee eee eS BOE ea eee g 373 Edit the Profile line nnna teen i eeh eee eeeae eee ed 375 Line Editing Options lt 0s lt citeeeeisekeceendue 376 Remove Profiles oo cexdeeeaee thse be woke yoeew ees 377 Export Profiles ci crced
459. tegory in the QC report select it in the Available list and click Add to move to the Active list 308 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Quality Control Reports If you are using the user defined User Def category the a constant depth error and b factor of the depth dependent error fields become active once it is moved to the Active list 3 Optional Type the values for the user defined category in the a and b fields 4 To remove a category select it in the Active list and click Remove to move it back to the Available list 5 Select a category and click the up or down arrow buttons at the top of the Active list to determine its order in the Active list This will determine the order that data is displayed in the Worksheet window when the QC Report is generated 6 Click Next QC Report Step 3 The QC Report Wizard Step 3 dialog box is displayed OC Report Wizard Step 3 of 3 Data grouping Select grouping method By beam number Define ranges E Defined Ranges ee 1 21 a1 21 41 20 Minimum 41 61 61 81 Maximum In steps of Add C Include Rejected This dialog box defines how soundings are grouped in the QC Report There are three options available Beam number Soundings are grouped according to across track beam number Angle Soundings are grouped according to beam angle from nadir Distance Soundings are grouped according to across track
460. termines the number of nodes closest to the node that can be used to interpolate a pixel value 4 Select either the 3 x 3or the 5 x 5 option The Number of Neighbours field is a threshold level used to determine the minimum pixels in the matrix area that must be present to interpolate a new pixel value The matrix size determines the maximum and minimum values for the neighbours field For example if you select 3 x 3 for the matrix size then the possible maximum number of neighbouring nodes with pixels is 9 and the minimum number is 3 5 Type the number of neighbouring nodes used to interpolate pixels 6 Click OK The interpolated Surface is created and displayed with an _Interp extension in the field sheet data tree in the Layers tab As you continue to re interpolate the Surface the effects accumulate to remove any remaining gaps To interpolate again 1 Select the interpolated Surface in the Layers tab 2 Select the Interpolate Surface command The second interpolation is applied to the selected Surface layer It does not create a new surface layer CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 223 Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands Process gt BASE Surface gt Finalize Menu 224 Every time an interpolated Surface is re interpolated the parameters are stored Thus when the Recompute command see RECOMPUTE SURFACE ON PAGE 221 is used on an interpolated BASE Surface all interpolations are per
461. th C Speed C Nav Examined C Tide Loaded 3 Select a Delimiter to use to indicate the separate columns The default is Tab 4 Select Include column totals to have this information included in the text file 5 From the Details list select the column headings to include in the text file 6 Click Move Up and Move Down to change the order of the columns 7 Click OK 8 Inthe Save As dialog box set a name and destination folder for the text file 9 Click Save Your selection of Details and the order of the columns are retained for the next time you use Line Report 276 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Data QC Rejecting and Accepting Data Rejecting and Accepting Data Reject Data Reject With Interpolation Reject Break Interpolation Menu Edit gt Status Flag gt x X ms Tool Reject gt Reject With Interpolation Reject Break Interpolation Pop up Accept Data Edit gt Status Flag gt Accept Menu Tool Accept lt A gt Key Pop up Data can be rejected or accepted in HIPS and SIPS Editors All data is marked as Accepted until flagged otherwise 1 Select and highlight the data in the View window of the editor 2 Select a Reject command Reject with Interpolation or Reject_ Break Interpolation The selected data is now flagged as rejected Use this command to revert the status of rejected data back to
462. the area If there are severe shifts in data distribution then the area may have to re tiled using a higher degree of polynomial You can also use the histogram to change the threshold values and reject soundings 1 Select the tiles you want to examine using the tile selection command Tools gt Surface f Cleaning gt Tile 2 Select the Tile Histogram command Histogram The Histogram dialog box is displayed 5 Han Information about the tile is displayed on the right hand side of ec the dialog box zix T Tie fi Ties selected Cort 497 Agected 34 Mean r o oco Signa 0 606 Deep Threshold Miri PEO EEN Shak Thieshold aa e7 m 948 Residual T Auto 12m 942 1 00 m Masana m Close 21 1 00 lt Previous Newt gt 1 00 211 H ddi 3 To view data for another tile click Next Tile or Previous Tile 4 Use the Shallow Threshold or Positive Threshold sliders to adjust these values The corresponding confidence intervals and Maximum Residual Distance values change as the bars are moved 5 Click Apply The rejected residuals are displayed in red CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 319 Statistical Surface Cleaning Query data in tiles Query data in tiles Tools gt Surface Cleaning gt Query Tile Soundings Aa Menu Tool 320 There are three ways to examine data in tiles e SELECT AND View TILE DATA ON PAGE 320 QUERY SOUNDINGS IN TIL
463. tic filters Flittering parameters are set in the Set Filters dialog box and applied using the Apply Filters command The filter compares the HzTPU and DpTPU values for each sounding against the depth and horizontal error limits for a specific S 44 survey order or S 57 zone of confidence CATZOC attribute All soundings with HzTPU and DpTPU values outside those limits set by International Hydrographic Organization IHO standards are rejected or accepted To set TPU filters 1 Open a project 2 Select the Set Filters command The Set Filters dialog box is displayed Set Filters Load filter file Browse Critical TPU Swath Sweep Single Beam Attitude r Logic Reject Accept M IHO Standard gt p Fe Depth lin HO S 44 3 Select the TPU tab The TPU filter fields will display any values previously entered Parameters set in these fields are retained until you change them or load a saved filter file 4 Optional Select an existing HIPS Filter File from the list or click Browse to select a file CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 159 Compute TPU TPU Filtering 160 If you load a filter file all the values used in that file are shown in the fields You can change any of the values 5 Select either a Reject or Accept logic command to apply to the filtered data 6 Select the IHO check box This will enable the TPU filter so the values will be applied to data when the Apply
464. tion l Heave Gyro Pitch or Roll navigation f ms data time Sample soundings I I time These soundings can be These soundings can not be processed further processed further They are flagged as Rejected Line Interpolation Position observations do not usually occur at exactly the same instant as a depth observation ping Thus it is unlikely that there is position data for every ping For example positions observations may be taken every second 1 Hz frequency while pings may be observed 10 times a second 10 Hz frequency So in most cases it will be necessary to interpolate positions to match the time for each ping CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 281 Data QC Rejecting Navigation Data 282 You use either linear or Bezier method of interpolation Linear Calculate new positions by connecting consecutive positions using straight lines This is the default method Bezier Calculate new positions by connecting points using a Bezier curve that does not necessarily connect all navigation positions Bezier curves are available in three types tight medium and loose Linear interpolation is suitable if the original navigation positions are clean and do not significantly deviate from neighbouring positions Bezier interpolation is suitable if the original data is noisy Linear Interpolation Bezier Interpolation Loose Bezier Interpolation Medium Bezier Interpolatio
465. tions from the Mosaic Creation warning dialog box keep the resolution you have set for the mosaic and re sample the GeoBaRs with the lower resolution or keep the resolution you have set for the mosaic and use all GeoBaRs regardless of resolution or keep the resolution you have set for the mosaic but don t include the GeoBaRs with lower resolution or set the resolution for the mosaic to that of the lowest resolution GeoBaR 7 Enter a resolution value in metres Smaller values will result in finer resolution than larger values but involve a longer creation time and larger file size GeoBaRs often overlap You can set how you want any overlapping data to be handled in the mosaic There are five methods to choose from Auto Seam This method determines which pixels have higher significance when there is overlap A weighting function assigns lower significance to pixels at the edge of the swath than to pixels near the centre The first few pixels near the nadir are assigned low significance due to the low resolution in that region Full Blend This method uses Geocoder s blend operation to smooth pixel values It also relies on a weighting scheme Auto Seam and Full Blend use the Weights layer generated for each GeoBaR Auto Seam picks one pixel or the other when there is overlap Full Blend takes a weighted average of the two Overwrite Uses the draw order to decide which pixel will be used in an overlappe
466. to a point then continue to digitize Shorten or extend a line 1 Select the line 2 Right click on the line and select Trim Extend from the pop up menu wf R To trim a line do one of the following Click on the line at the point you want to shorten it to OR e Click on the end point and drag it back along the line to the desired length To extend a line drag an end point out to a new location CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Menu Process gt Products gt Profile gt Remove Create Product Surfaces Profiles Remove Profiles Profile lines in the Profiles layer can be removed from the layer if necessary To remove a profile line 1 Select the Profiles layer in the Layers window 2 Select the profile line you want to remove in the Display window 3 Select the Remove Profile command The profile line is removed from the display and the profile graph is removed from the Profile window Export Profiles To save profile information to use in another project you can export the profile to an ASCII file or as an image to various formats See Export Prorite To ASCII on pace 377 and Export PROFILE TO IMAGE ON PAGE 380 for more information Export Profile to ASCII Use the ASCII Export option in the Profile window pop up menu to export profile lines to ASCII files To export to ASCII 1 Right click the Profile graph in the Profile window 2 Select the AS
467. to import In deep water the Seafalcon sonar produces five swaths with each firing of the transducer These five swaths are in an along track position to the ship with swath 1 forward of the sonar and swath 5 aft of the vessel In shallow water only one swath per ping is generated By default all five swaths are selected for import but you can decide which swaths to import 4 Select the swath number s for import SEGY There are no options for the SEGY format CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 121 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats 122 SHOALS All soundings in the SHOALS format are given a confidence value during acquisition These confidence values are used to flag soundings during conversion so that soundings with certain confidence values are rejected The following status flags are assigned to soundings These can be changed in HIPS Rejected by disabled beam This flag rejects soundings with a negative confidence value Rejected by depth gate This flag is for soundings with confidence values that range from 0 to 70 The 0 to 50 range represents soundings where no bottom was found and the 51 to 70 represents soundings of questionable confidence Accepted This flag is for soundings with confidence values from 71 to 99 When converting to HIPS all soundings with a confidence value less than the Confidence Cutoff Value will be automatically rejected The default cutoff value is 70 1 Use the mouse t
468. tours to a new or existing HOB file 1 Select either the Contour to Field Sheet option or the Contour to HOB File option See Contour To HOB FILE ON PAGE 364 Contour to field sheet The next step is to describe the various CARIS attributes for the new contours 2 Enter the following information for standard and index contours Name e Theme Number e Feature Code 3 Click Finish Contours are created for the selected field sheet and shown in the Display window The standard and index contours are listed in the Control window Contour to HOB file If you selected the Contour to HOB option the dialog box is refreshed to display the Contour Wizard Step 3 HOB dialog box Contour Wizard C Contour To FieldSheet Contour To Hob File Data Set Name lt Back Cancel Help 1 Click Browse and select an existing HOB file or type the path and name for the file You can also enter the name of a new file 2 Click Finish The contours layer has now been added to the existing HOB file or a new file with contours has been created The contours can be 364 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process gt Products Contours gt Add Labels Layers tab Add Labels Pop up Menu Create Product Surfaces Contours viewed in the Display window by choosing the File Open command and selecting the HOB file Contour Labelling You can label contour lines with their associated depth values Yo
469. track lines to an existing surface without the need to regenerate the surface You can add specific lines to the Surface or you can let the program select the lines to be added automatically 1 Select the track line layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Select the track line s you want to add to the BASE Surface so it is highlighted 3 Select the Add to BASE Surface command The Select Surface dialog box is displayed 4 Select the surface to which the line is to be added 5 Click OK CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Menu Process gt BASE Surface gt Remove From Tool it Pop up Add Layer Control window only Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Commands The BASE Surface is updated to include new track lines Remove From BASE Surface Remove a survey line from a Swath Angle or Uncertainty BASE Surface 1 Select the survey line in the Project tab of the Control window 2 Select a BASE Surface layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 3 Select the Remove from BASE Surface command The BASE Surface is regenerated without the data from the selected survey line Add Layer Use the Add Layer command to create a new sub layer for an existing BASE Surface The new attribute layer can be created from one or more existing attribute layers numerical operators and numeric values in an equation You cannot create a layer for an attribute that is not present in the
470. transducer 2 The offset is positive when rotating the transducer away from starboard starboard down Uncertainty values used Type data as needed in the Standard Deviation section Motion Gyro The measurement standard deviation of the heading data in degrees Heave Amplitude An additional heave standard deviation component that is the percentage of the instantaneous heave Heave m The measurement for standard deviation of the heave data Most heave manufacturers quote heave error as being determined from StaticHeave or PercentageOfHeave depending on which value is larger Roll The measurement standard deviation of the roll data in degrees Pitch The measurement standard deviation of the pitch data in degrees Position Nav The standard deviation associated with the measurement of positions for the vessel This is usually the error of the GPS sensor being used Timing Trans Standard deviation in transducer time stamp measurement Nav Timing Standard deviation in navigation time stamp measurement Gyro Timing Standard deviation in gyro time stamp measurement Heave Timing Standard deviation in heave time stamp measurement Pitch Timing Standard deviation in pitch time stamp measurement Roll Timing Standard deviation in roll time stamp measurement Offset X Standard deviation for the X measured offset on the vessel Offset Y Standard deviation for the Y measured offset on the vessel Offset Z Stand
471. trast visibility options and the draw order of GeoBaRs These corrections are done with the tools on the Edit tab The Edit tab is activated when you load a GeoBaR for a selected line If there is more than one GeoBaR on a line the Edit tab is activated when you select a specific GeoBaR on that line using the Resolve Conflict dialog box Editing is done one GeoBaR at a time To open a GeoBaR for editing 1 Select the survey line for the GeoBaR you want to edit 2 Use a Load GeoBaR command to load a GeoBak for the line 3 If there is more than one GeoBak for the selected line use the Resolve Conflict dialog box to chose the GeoBaR to be edited See Conrtict RESOLUTION ON PAGE 444 Resolve Conflict 1 of 1 More than one GeoBaR could be used for this operation Please choose a method to resolve this conflict Line em2000 0084 100 20081107 081843 Method Es v GeoBaR backS1 i Apply This will activate the functions on the Edit tab You can also edit GeoBaRs that are already loaded and visible in the Display window 1 Select the survey line for the GeoBaR you want to edit View the Properties for the GeoBaR to determine the source line This will activate the functions on the Edit tab If there is more than one GeoBaR loaded for the selected line the Resolve Conflict dialog box will open so you can select the one to edit CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 429 Process Imagery Data Edit Geo
472. u select Tile by Depth Tolerance type the value to be applied If you choose Depth Range File click Browse to select the file The tiles are created using the depths listed in the file See DEPTH RANGE FILES ON PAGE 409 If you select Tile By Depth Range Interval type a value for the depth interval and for the starting and ending depths 8 Click Next The Tiling Wizard Step 3 dialog box is displayed 21x Tile File Name Tile Attributes Primary Sounding Minimum True Position Additional Attributes Available Active Minimum Tiling Wizard Step 3 Maximum Average Add gt gt Median StandardDeviation lt lt Remove Count 9 Type a name for the tile file 400 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Primary sounding Process gt Products gt Tiles New gt Tiles Pop up Menu Create Product Surfaces Tiling a field sheet 10 Select a primary sounding as the starting point for the tiling process Choose from five options Minimum True Position Use the shoalest sounding at its actual position Maximum True Position Use the deepest sounding at its actual position e Average Tile Centre Use the mean value of the soundings as the centre of the tile Minimum Tile Centre Use the shoalest sounding as the centre of the tile Maximum Tile Centre Use the deepest sounding as the centre of the tile You can also add other attributes to t
473. u set the path for the labels by drawing a line across the contours where you want the depth values to appear Labels are added at the point where the line intersects the contours 1 Select the Contours layer in the Layers tab of the Control window 2 Select the Add Labels command Your cursor changes to a digitizing tool so that you can set the path for the labels 3 Inthe Display window click on the part of the field sheet where you want to start the line and drag the cursor to the part of field sheet where you want the line to end labels to appear i Release the mouse button and the labels are added along the path of the line Labels are now added to the contours You can change the size and colour of contour labels To set the size of the labels in mm 1 Select the contour layer 2 Select Set Label Size from the pop up menu CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 365 Create Product Surfaces Contours Process gt Product Contours gt Remove Labels Menu Control window Remove Labels Pop up Process gt Product Contours gt Mask Contours Menu Control window Mask Contours Pop up 366 3 Type the new value in mm 4 Click OK The colour of the labels can be changed from the default black by checking the Override Colour option in the Properties window and selecting a colour from the drop down menu Labels can also be removed from the display 1 Se
474. uction across track distance filters and nadir angle filters Sonar quality Quality values set by the sonar and missing neighbours The parameters for filtering are set through the Set Filters dialog box These parameters can be saved in a HIPS Filter File hff that can be reopened in the Set Filters dialog box for use in another track line 1 Select the Set Filters command The Swath Sweep tab of the Set Filters dialog box is displayed Set Filters Load filter file Browse Ciitical TPU Swath Sweep Single Beam Attitude Logic Reject C Accept V Include Filter Depth Beam numbers Minimum m Maximum m Beam to beam slopes Actoss track angle deg I Include Rejected Across tack distance x Nadir Depth Port m Staboard m Oooo Angle from nadir Port deg Starboard deg Qualy flags BO id Wile ims m Missing neighbours I Port and Staiboard I Forward and Aft l Any 2 of 4 Clear Save Save s Close Help 1 Optional Select an existing HIPS Filter File from the list or click Browse to select a file 325 Cleaning Swath Data Automatic Filtering 326 If you chose to load a filter file all the values used in that file are shown in the fields You can filter data or change any of the values in the fields 2 Set the logic to Accept or Reject 3 Select the Include Filter check box to activate the filtering opti
475. um sounding position as the starting point for the binning process 10 Click Finish A progress indicator on the status bar shows how much of the process has been completed Once the binning is completed a bin file is created and displayed in the Display window A bin layer is also added to the Layers tab Create QTC Tiles 1 Select the field sheet 2 Select the field sheet layer in the Layers tab 3 Select the Tiles command The Tiling Wizard Step 1 dialog box is displayed 4 Select the QTC Seabed Classification option 5 Click Next The Tiling Wizard Step 2 QTC dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Tiling a field sheet Tiling Wizard Step 2 6 Type a name for the QTC tile layer 7 Set the minimum tile size by clicking the up or down arrow buttons As you increment upwards the tile size is doubled The Percent Value Used to Split option continuously splits the tiles until the total amount of a specific class value in a tile meets or exceeds the entered percentage For example if the percentage is set at 50 then a tile is continuously sub divided into smaller tiles until one of the tiles contains at least 50 per cent of a class value 8 Type the percent value 9 Click Next The Tiling Wizard Step 3 QTC dialog box is displayed CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 403 Create Product Surfaces Tiling a field sheet Tiling Wizard Step 3 Select
476. umber Type a number value for layering data in the CARIS map 4 Select the Include Offline Data check box to include data recorded during turns between track lines 5 Click Next GSF to HOB Step 4 Use this dialog box to set the location of HOB file to contain the exported GSF data 1 Click the Browse button to select the HOB file for data export or to create a new file The file path and name are displayed in the HOB file field 2 Click Next EXPORT ON PAGE 542 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 515 Export Data HIPS Tide to ASCII HIPS Tide to ASCII Export HIPS tide data from selected track lines to a TID file You can create TID files from single or multiple track lines in a project TID files can be viewed in a text editor HIPS Tide to ASCII Step 3 The Output Options dialog box creates the output tide file CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 3 of 4 Output Options Output file name C Include rejected records _ GPS Tide C Smooth data if applicable 1 Click Browse and use the standard Windows Open dialog box to select a path and name for the output TID file The path and name of the tide file is displayed in the Output File Name field 2 Select the Include Rejected Records check box to include tide records that have been rejected 3 Select GPS Tide to use tides calculated from a GPS ellipsoid height 4 Select Smooth data to use tide data that has been s
477. ur options for selecting an SVP 6 Select a method from the drop down list e Previous in time Apply the SV profile that was taken just prior to the recording of the survey data e Nearest in time Apply the SV profile that was taken closest in time to the recording of the survey data e Nearest in distance Apply the SV profile that was taken closest to the area where the survey data was recorded e Nearest distance within time Apply the SV profile with a position that is nearest to the swath and has a timestamp that is nearest to the time of the swath within a selected range You also have the option of applying the last correction method last used on each line to the currently selected data 7 Select Last used method to apply the last selected profile method to the current SVC If a line has not had SVC applied previously attempting to use Last used method for correction will cause the process to fail In this case choose another SVC method Use Surface Sound For systems which employ a flat transducer design it is critical Speed for the beam forming electronics to know the exact sound speed at the location of the transducer Therefore a sound speed probe is installed at the transducer When this surface sound speed data is available HIPS converts it and stores the time series data in the SSP file in the line directory This data can be displayed in the Attitude Editor When HIPS performs sound velocity correction
478. urs 2 Contours L n Min True port cont Block Ref Hatch Leaders 4 DXF layers Lines Points Gi Polygons A Text Zea ayer m K K K lt K K K KiS K K K QS LJ aad 488 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Export Selection to Formatted ASCII Export Selection to Formatted ASCII Export selected soundings and lines to formatted ASCII The exported files will have the extension WKT well known text File gt Export gt Selection to Formatted ASCII Menu CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide To export a selection for example of lines to a formatted ASCII file 1 2 3 4 Select the lines Select Export gt Selection to Formatted ASCII command In the Save As dialog box select the folder to export to and type a file name Click Save The selected data is exported to the named WKT file 489 Export Data Export Selection to GML Export Selection to GML Export information about selected features lines soundings contacts to a GML Geography Markup Language file To export to a GML 2 File gt Export gt 2 Selection to GML Feature mapping 490 1 5 Select the features to be converted 2 Select the Export Selection to GML command 3 4 Optional Select the Run System command after export check box and In the Save As dialog box type a name and select a location for the file enter command paramet
479. ve Name e Click Browse to open the Save As dialog box 2 Type a name and set a destination directory for the archive file and click OK Project Click Browse to open the Select Project dialog box Double click on Default to open the project tree 3 Select the project and click OK N Fieldsheets Fieldsheet Directory Click Browse to select the field sheet directory from the Browse for Folder dialog box Optional Make a new folder 3 Click OK to enter the path in the field N Edit Selection Click Browse to view the Open Field Sheets dialog box 2 Click on the project name to expand the list of availa ble field sheets for the project 3 Select the field sheets to be included in the archived file e Select a single fieldsheet by clicking on it e Use lt Ctrl gt to select more than one field sheet from the list 4 Click Open to list the selected field sheets Auxiliary Files Related files necessary for the successful processing of data for example tide sound velocity delta draft delayed heave files etc Edit Selection 1 Click Browse to open the Select Files dialog box 2 Click Add to open the standard Select Files dialog box and locate the auxiliary files to be included 3 Repeat until list of files is complete 4 Click OK Use Remove and Clear to adjust your selection Additional Files Data that is associated with the project
480. ved either to a single folder or to folders which follow the PVDL Project Vessel Day Line structure CARIS HIPS and SIPS Export Wizard Step 4 of 5 Output Single File Browse Tile Set Output Image Output 1 Click Browse and set the Output file path 2 Type aname for the file name and click Save If you are exporting multiple GeoBaRs 3 Click Browse to select the folder where the exported files will be saved The TIFF files in the output folder will have the same names as the GeoBaRs they were created from Select Maintain PVDL Hierarchy to save each TIFF file within its Project Vessel Day Line structure in the folder you designate 502 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Surface To Image Tiled image output Some attribute layers may be too large to view effectively as one image In this case you can export the layer divided into a set of tiled images with set dimensions These files are given a prefix to which a tile number is appended The tile number is in the format RxC where R and C are the row and column index for the current tile For example with prefix RTFM the first row of tiles would be numbered RTFM_1x1 the second RTFM_1x2 etc as illustrated below RTFM __3x1 tif RTFM __3x2 tif RTFM__3x3 tif RTFM__3x tif RTFM__3x5 tif RTFM__2x1 tif RTFM__2x2 tif RTFM__2x3 tif RTFM__2x tif RTFM__2xS tif aa am hng Ai RTFM__1x1 tif RTFM__1x2 tif RTFM__1x3 tif RTFM
481. verting Bathymetry ensure that the vessel file for the data contains a Depths section or conversion will fail 1 Select a Bathymeiry sounding data type from the drop down list Single Frequency CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 109 Convert Data Options for Specific Formats Device Numbers 110 e Dual Frequency Primary Secondary e Dual Frequency Secondary Primary e Multibeam e Multiple transducers for sweep data Hysweep format HSX does not store Geographic Coordinates and GPS Height information If recorded this data is stored in RAW files When both the Geographic option and Multibeam options are set during conversion the converter will search for raw files in the same directory with the same line name to get this information If you are converting multibeam data and you set Geographic at Step 5 as the Navigation Coordinate Type the converter will search the directory where the HSX files are located for raw files with the same name as the hsx files The RAW files contain the RAW record which contains the Geographic coordinates and GPS height information 2 Select Side Scan data type from the drop down list e Low Frequency High Frequency or None Ifthe data file contains only single frequency data then this setting is ignored and all data is converted 3 Select Apply static draft to apply the static draft during conversion To ensure data collected in feet is converted correctly convert data i
482. w n wto frequented the prersiven His now CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 477 Create Publications Plot Composer 478 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Export Data Sounding and contour layers can be exported to S 57 format or to DXF Surface metatdata can be exported to an XML file Surface data can also be exported to BAG As well data products can be exported in various formats with the Export Wizard In this chapter EXPORT TOO Dl oiana oi daa 480 EXPORT SURFACE METADATA scscseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 481 EXPORT SURFACE TO BAG 482 Export Surface TO ESRI ASCII GRD nosicie 486 EXPORT SELECTION TO DXF cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 487 EXPORT SELECTION TO FORMATTED ASCII 0008 489 EXPORT SELECTION TO GML cceeeceeeeeeeseseseeeeeneeues 490 List Of FORMATS EXPORTED ccccccecesseeeceeeeeseeeeeeeanees 492 EXPORT WIZARD s czdcsssanncydessssvcedscerasansniessaenentenraveedveant 494 COORDINATE SYSTEM seis Ssceceseteccslcwechinosicedsadeaccecdesaasxe 541 Export Data Export to S 57 Export to S 57 File gt Export Menu 480 You can export contour and sounding features to an S 57 file To export to S 57 1 2 3 Open a project and field sheet containing a contour layer and or a sounding layer Select the field sheet layer in the Layers tab Select Export to S 57 from the File menu The Export to S 57 dialog box opens Export to 57
483. w gt Detailed Line Query Menu 292 5 Clear the Default check box and click Select Day to override the year Julian date with a calendar date 6 Click the appropriate check boxes to choose which records you want to import into the track line s from the attitude navigation files 7 To reduce the volume of large attitude records to a manageable level enter an output interval in seconds 8 The Load data for lines that are partially covered option will load the navigation data even if the data does not cover the entire line 9 Select the Allow gap between data records check box to limit the interval allowed between consecutive data records in the file If an interval exceeds the amount specified in the Maximum field the data will not be loaded and the process will stop 10 If the time stamp in the file does not match the time stamps in the project you can select the Apply Time Offset option and type a time value in seconds 11 To set a time buffer to extend the loading of navigation attitude beyond the time extent of the line s observed depths data select the Apply Time Buffer check box and type the value of the buffer in seconds 12 Click Load Use the Detailed Line Query function to confirm that the files have been loaded 1 Open the Detailed Line Query window 2 Select a line or lines in the Display window The records for the selected line s are displayed in a table in the Detailed Line Que
484. y not have been corrected for factors such as heave pitch roll or sound velocity Such correction can be applied during the Merge process and SVP Correction All HIPS and SIPS data is organized in a Project Vessel Day Line directory structure If you organize the raw data files according to this structure then you can convert line data from entire Project or from multiple Vessel and Day folders contained in acommon Project folder Use the File Selection Type option in Step 2 of the wizard to do this see SELEcT FILES FOR CONVERSION ON PAGE 82 When entire project data has been converted a Project Vessel Day Line directory is created for the converted data If there is already a Project folder that is identical to the preprocess folder then the line data in the existing folder is over written with the new data You must organize your raw data files in a HIPS SIPS Project Vessel Day structure to convert complete Project Vessel and or Day data files CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Convert Data Formats that can be converted to HIPS and SIPS Formats that can be converted to HIPS and SIPS File Format File extensions Pee See a aes e Atlas sda asd acf Surf multibeam single beam No Chirpscan3D brf multibeam No CMAX cmx cm2 multibeam single beam No Coda Da side scan No Edgetech wi side scan No EIVA sod generic
485. y profile Only certain systems support the recomputation of the steered beam angles These include Simrad EM 12 120 2040 3000 3008 3020 300 710 122 302 except when using SimradSVC Licenced dll Atlas SURF Geoacoustics RDF Teledyne Reson 7K when using the 7004 7006 depth records Benthos C3D and SWATHplus In previous versions of HIPS SVC used TrueHeave data in place of regular heave data when TrueHeave was available Do not select this option if you want the original heave data to be applied 10 Select Apply Delayed Heave to apply delayed heave values instead of regular heave If you choose this option and no delayed heave data is available there will be a warning message in the Output window and regular heave data will be used instead 11 Select which smoothed sensor data is to be applied during sound velocity correction Heave Pitch Roll Delta Draft Sensor data can be smoothed in the Attitude Editor See FitteR AND SMOOTH ON PAGE 16 Note Waterline values are not interpolated during SVC CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Sound Velocity Correction Sound Velocity Correction 12 Click Process to apply the SVP file to the selected lines Lines which have been SV Corrected will be displayed in the Display window in the Not Merged colour as set in the Properties for the Ship Track Lines layer As well the SVP Corrected field in the Selection tab will show Yes for any selected line to which SVC has
486. y when creating other new BASE surfaces 3 Click Load to use a saved file OR hiss resolution in metres and type the depth and resolution values e Click x lt to delete contents of the field 5 Click Save to save the settings as a template Values are entered in the following format minimum depth maximum depth resolution allin CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 195 Create BASE Surfaces Create a BASE Surface 196 metres For example 0 0 10 0 5 0 which associates depths between zero and 10 metres with a resolution of 5 metres 6 Select a Surface Type Swath angle Shoalest Depth True Position Uncertainty or CUBE from the drop down list 7 Select the Vertical Datum if known from the list The Vertical Datum set for the BASE surface will be maintained in products created from it such as finalized or interpolated surfaces The Vertical Datum setting for a selected BASE surface can be seen and changed in the Properties window 8 Click Next The content of the next dialog box is determined by the choice of surface type made in step 5 BASE Surrace Step 3 CUBE on pace 253 BASE Surrace STeP 3 SWATH ANGLE WEIGHTING ON PAGE 197 BASE surFace STEP 3 UNCERTAINTY WEIGHTING ON PAGE 199 BASE surface STEP 3 SHOALEST DEPTH TRUE POSITION ON PAGE 201 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create BASE Surfaces BASE Surface Step 3 Swath Angle Weighting BASE Surface Step 3 Swath
487. ying information about the project in the Description field 2 Type the name of the person working with the project data in the Owner field The default name that is displayed is taken from the current Windows NT logon name 3 Click Next CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create a New Project Define New Project New Project Step 2 of 4 Description sphillips Finish Cancel Help New Project Step 3 By default HIPS and SIPS sets the Select UTM Zone Automatically check box to select the UTM zone automatically The country and zone options are dimmed New Project Step 3 of 4 5 V Select UTM zone automatically Argentina Australia Austria Bahrain Belgium Bintulu Britain Brunei CHS Charts use Projection key Colombia v Finish e To set a different projection for your project 1 Clear the Select UTM Zone Automatically check box 2 Select a country or area from the Group Name list box CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 61 Create a New Project Define New Project 62 3 Select a zone from the Zone list box The Projection key name is automatically displayed once the country and zone have been selected NOTE The world wide map projection coordinate systems are defined in the file Hips System mapdef dat 4 Click Next New Project Step 4 Use this dialog box to set the geographic coordinates degrees minutes seconds for the
488. you save your session the query will be saved and restored when that session is loaded again To clear the Tile Display Query field 10 Select the tile layer 11 Click the Browse button in the Tile Display Query field 12 In the Tile Display Query dialog box click Clear This will remove the criteria and display all the tiles for the selected tile layer 408 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Create Product Surfaces Depth Range Files Depth Range Files Depth range files are text files that set a range of depths for tiling and contouring data These files are automatically generated during the contouring process see CREATE CONTOURS ON PAGE 361 The convention for setting depth values is similar to that of other CARIS files Drying heights above the datum are represented as negative values e Depths below the datum are represented with positive values Below is an example of a range depth file 50 30 20 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 30 50 In the above file the negative values 30 to 5 are above the datum and the positive values 5 to 50 are below the datum CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide 409 Create Product Surfaces Depth Range Files 410 CARIS HIPS and SIPS User Guide Process Imagery Data Side scan and multibeam backscatter imagery data can be processed directly into mosaics which can then be examined for anomalies and corrected In this chapter OVERVIEW seseee

HIPS and SIPS User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents